Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/firstbookinlatinOOmcclrich EIEST BOOK II LATH; CONTAINING GRAMMAR, EXERCISES, AND VOCABULARIES, ON THE METHOD OF CONSTANT IMITATION AND REPETITION. JOHN MvC>L I N^'% C K, A.M., PROFESSOR OF LANQUA.GES, GEORGE R. CROOKS, A.M., ADJUNCT PROFESSOR OF LANGUAGES IN DICKINSON COLLEGE. HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, 82 CLIFF STREET, NEW YORK. 1848. Entered, according to Act of Cingress, in the year 1846, By Harper & Brothers, In the Clerk's Office of the Southern District of New York. PREFACE. This book is designed, as the title-page states, to contain within itself Grammar, Exercises, Reading- book, and Dictionary; in short, all that the pupil will need before commencing the regular reading of Cae- sar or any other easy Latin author. It has been pre- pared, as far as possible, on the following principles : 1. The object of studying languages is twofold : (1), the acquisition of the languages themselves ; and (2), the mental discipline gained in acquiring them. 2. No language can he thoroughly acquired with- out the outlay of much la^pour and time. All schemes which promise to dispense with such outlay must be •pronounced visionary and chimerical. 3. But labour without fruit does not contribute to mental cultivation. Labour and pain are not neces- sary companions : learning should not be " wrung from poor striplings like blood from the nose, or the plucking of untimely fruit."* 4. The grammar of a language cannot be understood until the language itself is at least partially acquired. 5. The vernacular may be learned, so far as its use is concerned, without grammar : a foreign living lan- guage may be so learned, but never so thoroughly, nor even so rapidly, as with grammatical aids. In the study of a dead language grammar is indispensable. 6. "A grammar intended for beginners should be formed altogether differently from one intended for * Milton. IV PREFACE. the higher classes, both in the distribution of the mat- ter and in the mode of presenting it. Those who think that the pupil should use the same grammar from the beginning of his course to the end, are quite in error/'* 7. In elementary books, or in teaching, no etymo- logical form nor grammatical principle should be pre- sented to the pupil without an immediate application thereof to practice, which should be kept up, both orally and in writing, from the very first lesson. 8. The all-important rule of practice, in the acqui- sition of language, is imitation and repetition. This is no new invention ; all good teachers have known and used it ; but yet it has been but slightly employ- ed in elementary books heretofore. 9. Models for imitation should be simple at first, and gradually made more complicated ; but they should always be selected from pure authors, say, in Latin, from Cicero and Caesar. 10. The pupil's ear should be trained to correct- ness from the beginning, and the simplest rules of prosody learned and applied as soon as possible. For this purpose, the quantity of all syllables should be marked in elementary books, and attention to it should be strictly enforced by the teacher. 11. The foreign idiom, both as to the use and ar- rangement of words, should be made famihar to the pupil by constant practice. Nothing can be more hurtful than exercises in which foreign words are used in the idiom, and according to the arrangement of the vernacular. How far we have been successful in carrying out these principles, the book itself must show. * Kuhner. PREFACE. V We have aimed to combine the advantages of con- stant repetition and imitation of Latin sentences from the beginning, with a more thorough drilling in ety- mological forms than is common. In order to effect this combination, we have necessarily deviated from the ordinary grammatical com'se to some extent ; but we trust that experienced teachers will find, from an examination of the table of contents alone, that our arrangement is not devoid of systematic and even logical order. While we have not gone out of our way to bring in novelties, we have yet adopted every new method which we have deemed to be an improvement. None of the class-books of any repute in England or Ger- many have escaped our notice in the preparation of this work ; and we have made free use of them all, without slavish adherence to any. Perhaps the most marked peculiarity of the etymological part of the book will be found to be the doctrine of the genders of nouns of the third declension, which we have reduced, for the first time, to a form at once philosophical, we hope, and practical.^' Some steps toward the meth- od here presented have been taken by Madvig, Weis- SENBORN, and others in Germany ; but none of these writers has brought out a clear exposition of the doc- trine, adapted to the actual purposes of instruction. The arrangement, also, of the verbs,t according to the formation of the perfect-stem, founded mainly upon the classification of Grotefend (better set forth by Allen), will be found, we trust, to be an improve- ment upon any yet offered. * The summary of rules, with all the exceptions, will be found to occu- py two pages only, viz., p. 132, 133. t Lessons Ixii.-lxix., and p. 268-279. 1* VI PREFACE. The Syntax, in its details, generally follows Zumpt ; but in the arrangement, especially of Part II., we have approached nearer to the plan of Billroth. The admirable syntax of Becker, adopted by Kuhner in his Greek and Latin Grammars, we deem too dif- ficult for beginners. The Exercises are selected, as far as possible, from Csesar's Gallic War. Although we have laboured hard to keep out bad Latin, we do not hope that all our sentences will escape criticism. We have found, from actual experiment in our classes, that the exer- cises to be rendered from English into Latin are within the capacity of any student of ordinary indus- try who studies the book in order ; and we do not know that this can be said of any book of the kind, of equal extent, in use among us. A few words as to the use of the book may not be out of place. Our own method has been to employ the lessons, for a considerable time at least, entirely in oral instruction, the teacher pronouncing first the Latin sentences distinctly, and requiring the pupil to give the corresponding English without book ; and then pronouncing the English sentences, and requi- ring the pupil to give the corresponding Latin. As the quantities are marked (in Part I.) in all syllables except those to which the general rules apply, we require the pupil to observe quantity in his pronun- ciation from the very beginning, so that he learns prosody by practice before the rules are given. For the purpose of review, the summary of Etymology (Part III.), which contains, in short compass, all that is necessary to be learned by heart, will be found very convenient. After the student has passed PREFACE. Vll through Parts I. and II., he will find little difRculty in committing accurately the Rules of Syntax (Part IV.), with most of which he will be already familiar. The Reading Lessons at the end will give him easy practice in the syntax* and in word-building. For the convenience of those who may need it, we have condensed into a few pages, in Appendix I., all of Prosody that is essential for the understanding of hexameter verse. The preparation of this book was originally sug- gested by our sense of the inadequacy of the ordina- ry modes of instruction, and especially by the ad- vantage which we ourselves had derived from the use of Ollendorff's method in the study of the Ger- man language. Finding that Rev. T. K. Arnold had prepared a series of books on the same principle, we used them in our own classes for some time, with a view to revising them for republication. They were found unsuited to our purpose in many respects, and we therefore formed the design of preparing an entirely new series, adapted to the use of American schools. The first of these is now presented to the public. Dickinson College, April 7, 1846. ^- *^* In Part I. the quantity is marked on all syllables except those to which the general rules apply. At the beginning of Pg-rt II. additional rules of quantity are given, and the marks are subsequently omitted on many syllables, in order to afford the pupil exercise upon the rules. In the Syntax and Reading Lessons they are omitted almost entirely. Great pains have been taken to ensure accuracy in tlie marks of quantity, but we can- not hope to have avoided error entirely. * Our Second Book in Latin will contain a fuller development of Syntax, in a series of progressive exercises in writing Latin. PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION. In this edition, a number of errors in the marks of quantity, which had crept into the first, are corrected. We have also placed a series of Examination Ques- tions at the end of the book, which will add, we hope, to its practical value. Carlisle, November, 1846. TABLE OF CONTENTS. INTRODUCTION. Page J 1. Division of the Letters I $ 2. Syllables, duantity, Accent 1 $ 3. Pronunciation 3 § 4. Division of Words • 4 PART I. PARTIAL EXHIBITION OF THE FORMS OF WORDS. Summary of Essential Points 8 $5. First Declension of Nouns. — First Conjugation of Verbs. (I. — V.) 10 First Declension of Nouns, Nominative, Vocative, and Genitive Cases 10 First Conjugation of Verbs, /7i^ra?is2Y22;e 14 First Declension of Nouns, Accusative Case. — ^First Conjuga- tion of Verbs, Transitive 17 First Declension of Nouns, Dative and Ablative Cases . , 19 § 6. Second Declension of Nouns. — Second Conjugation of Verbs. (VI.-VIII.) 22 Second Declension, Masculine 22 Second Declension, iVew^er. — Second Conjugation of Verbs . 26 ^ 7. Adjectives of First Class, Three Endings. (IX. — X.) . . .28 Forms of Adjectives in us, a, um 28 Some forms of E s s e, ^o &e ,30 $ 8. Third and Fourth Conjugations of Verbs. (XI.) . . .33 $ 9. Passive Verbs. (XII.— XIII.) 36 $10. Third Declension of Nouns, Partial Treatment. (XTV. — ^XV.) . 40 $ 11. Adjectives of Second Class, Two Endings. (XVI.) . . .44 $ 12. Adjectives of Third Class, One Ending. (XVII.) . . .46 $ 13. Fourth Declension of Nouns. (XVIII.) 48 ^lA. Fifth Declension of Nouns. (XIX.) 51 $15. Pronouns. (XX.— XXXI.) 53 Pronoun, Personal, 1st Person. Verb, 1st Person . . .53 Pronoun, Personal, 2d Person. Verb, 2d Person . . .57 Pronoun, Personal, 3d Person . 61 Pronouns, Demonstrative 63 Pronoun, Relative 68 Pronoun, Interrogative 7* X TABLE OP CONTENTS. Pago Pronoims, iTideJinite 72 Pronouns, Correlative 74 $ 16. Numerals. (XXXIL— XXXIII.) 77 $ 17. Ve7'bs of Third Conjugation in io. (XXXIV.) ... 81 $18. Verbs, Deponent. (XXXV.) 83 $ 19. Adverbs. (XXXVI.) 85 $ 20. Prepositions. (XXXVII.— XXXVIII.) 88 $ 21. Analysis of Tense formations. (XXXIX.— XLI.) ... 92 PAUT II. FULLER EXHIBITION OF THE FORMS OF WORDS. $ 1. Additional Rules of Quantity 99 $ 2. Tenses of Verbs for Completed Action, Partial Treatment. (XLIII.— XLVI.) 102 Perfect Tenses of E s s e 102 Perfect Tenses of 1st, 2d, and 4th Conjugations .... 104 Perfect Tenses of 3d Conjugation 106 $3. Third Declension of Nouns, Fuller Treatment. (XL VII. — LVIL) 110 Irregular Nouns 129 Summary of Rules of Gender, Third Declension .... 132 $4. Comparison of Adjectives. (LVIII. — LX.) . . . .134 § 5. Comparison of Adverbs 140 $6. Supine. (LXL) 141 $ 7. Tenses of Verbs for Completed Action, Active Voice. Fuller Treatment. (L XII.— L XIX.) 144 Forms of Perfect Stem, 1st Conjugation 144 Forms of Perfect Stem, 2d Conjugation 146 Forms of Perfect Stem, 3d Conjugation 149 Forms of Perfect Stem, 4th Conjugation 159 $8. Tenses for Completed Action, Passive Voice. (LXX.) . .162 $ 9. Participles. (LXXI.— LXXV.) 165 Present Participle Active 165 Future Participle Active 168 Perfect Participle Passive 170 Ablative Absolute 172 $ 10. Infinitive. (L XX VI.— L XXIX.) 176 Forms of Infinitive 176 Accusative with Infinitive 178 $ 11. Gerund. (LXXX.) 184 $ 12. Gerundive. (LXXXI.— LXXXH.) 187 Gerundive used for Gerund 187 Gerundive used to express Duty or Necessity . . . .189 $ 13. Imperative Mood. (L XXXIII.) 192 $ 14. Sentences 194 $ 15. Conjunctions. (LXXXIV.--LXXXV.) . . . . . 195 TABLE OF CONTENTS. XI Page }16. Subjunctive Mood. (LXXXVI.— XCIII.) 199 Subjunctive Present . . • ^ 199 Subjunctive Perfect 202 Subjunctive Imperfect and Pluperfect. Conditional Sen- tences 205 Subjunctive with ut, ne (P'wrpose) 209 Suh^xmctive with nt (Consequence). Succession of T^ises .213 Subjunctive with quin, quo, quo minus. Periphrastic Forms 214 Subjunctive with quum 217 Subjunctive in Relative Sentences 220 $ 17. Oratio Ohliqua. (XCIV.) 223 $ 18. Impersonal Verbs. (XCV.— XCVI.) 226 $ 19. Irregular Verbs. (XCVn.— CI.) 230 Posse • ... 230 Velle, Nolle, Malle 232 Ferre 234 Fieri, Edere 236 Ire, duire, Nequire ••••••. .238 $ 20. Defective Verbs, (CH.) 241 PAUT m. SUMMARY OF ETYMOLOGY. \ $ 1. LetterSy Quantity, 4rc. . . 247 $ 2. Noun 248 $ 3. Adjective 251 $ 4. Numerals 254 $ 5. Pronoun 255 $ 6. Verb . 258 1. Classes of Verbs 258 2. Parts of the Verb 258 3. Conjugation 259 4. The Auxiliary Esse, foJe . . . . • . . .260 5. Paradigms of Regular Verbs 261 6. Verbs in io of the 3d Conjugation . • • . • .266 7. Deponent Verbs 266 8. Periphrastic Conjugation 266 9. Formation of Perfect Stem . . . . ' . . . .267 10. Lists of Verbs, with various Perfects and Supines . . . 268 First Conjugation 268 Second Conjugation 269 Third Conjugation 271 Fourth Conjugation 276 Deponent Verbs 277 Inchoative Verbs 279 11. Irregular Verbs, Paradigms 279 12. Defective Verbs 282 XU TABLE OF CONTENTS. M -^^ Page 13. Impersonal Verbs •^^. . . 283 $7. Adverb . .285 $ 8. Preposition • , 288 $ 9. Conjunction • 289 $ 10. Interjection 290 PART IV. SUMMARY OF SYNTAX. PAKT I. SIMPLE SENTENCES. I. Subject and Predicate 293 n. Use of Cases 295 Nominative , , .295 Genitive 295 Dative 298 Accusative 300 Ablative 302 HI. Use of the Indefinite Verb 306 Infinitive 306 participle 307 Gerund 308 Gerundive . 308 Supine 309 PART II. COMPOUND SENTENCES. J. Co-ordinate Sentences " • " . 310 H. Subordinate Sentences 310 A. Participial Sentences 311 B. Accusative with Infinitive 312 C. Conjunctive Sentences . 313 D. Relative Sentences 316 E. Interrogative Sentences . • . , • . . .318 Oratio Obliqua 319 Ajpendix I. Prosody 323 Appendix II. Greek Nouns 326 Appendix III. The Calendar 327 Appendix IV. Abbreviations 329 Word -BUILDING 333 Reading Lessons • • • . 340 Latin-English Vocabulary • • • 355 English-Latin Vocabulabt •••••••• 383 rUUIVEESITYl INTRODUCTION.* ^ 1. DIVISION OF THE LETTERS. (1.) The letters are the same as in English, with the omission of w ; k is used in but few words, and y and z only in words borrowed from the Greek. (2.) Six are vowels,^ viz., a, e, i, o, u, y : the remaining nineteen are consonants,^ 1 Sounds formed by an uninterrupted emission of the air from the throat. Called vowels (vo c ale s = sounding letters), because capable of being sounded by themselves. 2 Sounds formed by interrupting the emission of air from the throat. Called consonants (con-sonare =to sound together), because incapable of being sounded by themselves. (3.) The consonants are divided into (a) Liquids,^ Z, m, w, r; (&) Spirants,^ h^ 5, j ; (c) Mut&s,^ 6, c, d,f, g, Jc, p, g, t, V ; 3 The Liquids are formed by a partial interruption of the voice ; the Spi- rants chiefly by the breath ; and the Mutes by a more complete interrup- tion of the passage of the air from the throat, ^is regarded, indeed, sim- ply as an aspiration, though in many words it fills the place of a conso- nant. (d) Double consonants,* a:, z. * JCis compounded of c s, gs, and z (occurring only in Greek vrords) of d s. (4.) The union of two vowels into one syllable forms a diphthong. These are, in Latin, a u, e u, a e, o e (gen- erally written cb, «), and, in a few words, ei, oi, ui. § 2. SYLLABLES, QUANTITY, ACCENT. (5.) Every word contains as many syllables as vow- els ; e. ^., m i 1 e s, a soldier, is not pronounced in one syl- lable, as the Enghsh word miles, hut in two, mi-les. (6.) The quantity of syllables (that is, their length * This Introduction may be omitted by very young pupils in their first study of the work; but the references to it in the subsequent lessons jBhouid be carefullv attended to. ^ a aUANTITY. ACCENT. or shortness) depends upon that of the vowels which they contain. The dash ("") placed over a vowel de- notes that it is long ; the semicircle C^), that it is short, A vowel that may be used either as long or short is marked (^), and is said to be common. (7.) The following rules for the quantity of sylla- bles must be carefully observed : {a) All diphthongs are long ; e. g,, mens-ie, tables; au-rum, gold. (b) A vowel followed by another vowel is short / e. g., Deus, God. j^ This rule applies, even though h intervene between the two vowels, as h is not regarded as a consonant (3, b, n. 3) ; e. g., traho, veho. (c) A vowel followed by two consonants, or a doub- le one (3, d), is long by position ; e. g., in am ant, the a before nt is long by position. ^^^ [Every syllable to which none of these three rules is applicable will he marked with its proper quantity in the following pages, until other rules are given.] (8.) A word of but one syllable is called a Monosyl- lable ; of two, a Dissyllable ; of more than two, a Pol- ysyllable. Thus, lex is a monosyllable ; leg is, a dis- syllable ; in col as, a polysyllable. (9.) The last syllable of a word is called the ulti- mate ; the next to the last, the penult ; the second from the last, the antepenult. Thus, in the word incolas, the syllable las is the ultimate, co, the penult, and in the antepenult. j (10.) The accent of a syllable is a stress or eleva- tion of the voice in pronouncing it. Observe the fol- lowing rules : (a) Every dissyllable is accented on the penult ; e. ^., bonus, pono. {b) Every polysyllable is accented, 1. On the penult, when the penult is long; e. g., amare. PRONUNCIATION. 3 2. On the antepenulU when the penult is short ; e.g., animus. ^ ^ 3. PRONUNCIATION. (11.) [Almost every modem nation has its own way of pronoimcing Lat- in. But as the vowels have nearly the same sounds in all the different countries of Continental Europe, there is something approaching to uni- formity in their pronunciation; the English, however, give peculiar sounds to some of the vowels, and they pronounce Latin, therefore, unlike all the rest of the world. In this country two methods prevail, which, for convenience' sake, may be called the Continental and the English. We give them both, stating, at the same time, our decided preference for the first, both on the score of consistency and convenience. Li both methods the consonants are pronounced nearly as in English.] (a) The Continental Method. Table of Vowel Sounds. Short a, as in hat. Long i, as in machine. Long a, as in father. Short 5, as in not. Short e, as in net. Long o, as in no. Long e, as in there. Short u, as in tub. Short i, as in sit. Long u, as in full. Diphthongs. SB or oe, as e in there. au, as ou in our. eu, as eu in feud. ei (rarely occurring), as i in nice. (b) The English Method. The vowels have the EngHsh long or short sounds. Exc. A final, in words of more than one syllable, has a broad sound ; as, fama (fame-ah). Monosyllables* In monosyllables, if the vowel be the last letter, it has the long sound ; as me, do ; if any other letter, the short sound ; rs et,db. 4 DIVISION OF WORDS. Dissyllables and Polysyllables. (1.) The vowel of an accented penult has the long sound, (a) Before another vowel ; as, D e us. (b) Before a single consonant; as, J 6 vis. It has the short sound, (a) Before two consonants, or a double consonant ; as, mundus, rexit. (2.) The vowel of an accented antepenult has the short sound; as, regibus. (3.) An accented vowel before a mute and liquid has usually the long sound ; as, sacra. § 4. DIVISION OF WORDS. (12.) I. Words are divided, according to their sig- nijication, into eight classes, called Parts of Speech, viz.. Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Prep- osition, Conjunction, Interjection. (13.) The Noun is the name of an object (person, or thing) ; e. g., John, man, house. Nouns are divided into, (a) Proper, denoting individual objects ; e. g,, John, Ccesar, Rome. (b) Common, denoting one or more of a class of objects ; e. g.y man, house, horses. (c) Abstract, denoting a quality ; e. g., goodness, haste, virtue. (14.) The Adjective expresses a quality or property belonging to an object ; e. g., good, small; as, a good boy, a small house. (15.) The Pronoun is a substitute for the noun; e. g., he, she, it, are substitutes for man, woman, book. (16.) The Verb declares something of a person or thing. DIVISION OF WORDS. O E. g., the boy dances ; the boy sleeps ; the boy is good. (In this last case the quality " good" is affirmed of " boy," by means of the verb is.) ^^ Participles, Gerunds, and Supines are words partaking in the meaning- of the verb, and in the form of the noun. (17.) The Adverb qualifies the meaning of a verb, adjective, or other adverb ; e, g., the boy learns rapid- ly ; the boy is remarkably faithful ; the boy learns very rapidly. (18.) Prepositions express the relations of objects simply ; e, g.,from me ; in the house. (19.) Conjunctions connect words and sentences ; e. ^., Thomas and John went to town ; Thomas went, but John remained. (20.) Interjections are merely signs of emotion ; e. g,, alas! (21.) II. Words are divided, according to their form, into, (1) Four inflected, viz.. Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb. (2) Four uninflected, viz., Adverb, Preposition, Con- junction, Interjection. Hem. Inflection is the variation of a word to express different rela- tions ; e. g., boy, boys, the boy's hat ; I love, I am loved, &c. The in- flection of Nouns is called DecZeTisi^w ; oiYerbs, Conjugation. The Latin language makes much more use of inflection than the English. (22.) III. Words are divided, according to their /or- mation, into, (1) Derivative, i. e., derived from other words. (2) Primitive, i, e., not derived from other words. E. g., manly, manhood, are derivatives from the primitive man. (3) Compound, i. e,, made up by the union of two or more words. (4.) Simple, i. e., not so made up. E. g., man-kind is a compound, made up of the two simple words man and kind. A 2 PART L PARTIAL EXHIBITION OF THE FORMS OF WORDS, INCLUDING TENSES OF VERBS FOR INCOMPLETE ACTION. *^ SUMMARY. [The rales and statements on this page and the following are to be thoroughly learned;, as they must be applied constantly.] (23.) Of the Letters* (1) Six are vowels^ a, e, z, o, w, y; (2) Four liquids., Z, m, n, r ; (3) Three c-sounds, c, ^, q ; (4) Twoj9-sounds, 6,^ ; (5) Two ^sounds, d, t ; (6) Two double consonants, x, z. (7) The diphthongs are au, eUfae^oc (and rarely eiy oi, ui)* (24.) General Rules of Quantity* (1) A vowel before another is short ; e. g., vi a» (2) A vowel before two consonants, or a double one, is long hy position ; e, g., am a nt. [As a mute followed by a liquid causes some excepticHis to this rule, we shaU mark the quantity, in that case, doubtful ; thus, Igri.] (3) All diphthongs are long ; e. g,, mens si, au-rum. [In the following pages of Part I., the quantity of all syllables is marked, except those which are covered by the above rales.} (25.) General Rules of Gender. [In English, gender is determined by &ex alone ; e. g., man is mas- culine, woman feminine. But in Latin, gender is determined partly by the meaning of nouns, and partly by their endings. The general rules here given from the meanings apply to nouns of all the declensions.] SUMMARY. 9 I. Masculines : Names of male beings ; of most rivers, winds, mountains, months, and nations. II. Feminines : Names of female beings, cities, countries, trees, plants, and islands, III. Neuters : All indeclinable words. IV. Common : Such as have but one form for masculine and feminine ; e. ^., e x u 1, an exile (male or female). [These four rules are contaiaed in the following verses.] (25. a.) Males, rivers, winds, and mountains most we find With months and nations Masculine declined ; Hut females, cities, countries, trees we name, As Feminine ; most islands, too, the same. Common are such as both the genders take. And Neuter all words undeclined we make. [There are many exceptions from these rules, which must be learned by observation.] Explanation of Marks and Abbreviations. The mark ^ indicates a short vowel. tt u — indicates a long vowel. " " = indicates that two words or phrases are equiV" alent to each other. " " + between two words shows that they are com- pounded together. e. g. means, ybr example (exempli gratia). Passages in brackets [ ] are not meant to be committed to memory. In the Exercises, words in parentheses ( ) are not meant to be translated. The References are made to paragraphs, not to pages. In a reference, R. means Remark ; N. jneans foot-note. § 5. FIRST DECLENSION OF NOUNS.— FIRST CON- JUGATION OF VERBS. (I.— V.) LESSON L First Declension of Nouns, — Nominative, Vocative, and Genitive Cases. (26.) Examples. (a) Shade or shadow, (fe) Of the shade, (c) The wood, (d) Of the wood, Umbra. Umbrae. Sylva. Sylvae. (27.) The Latin has no article. Umbra may be a shade, or the shade, according to its connection with other words. (28.) The words umbra and sylva are names of things belonging to certain classes, and are, therefore, common nouns (13, h). (29.) In English, certain words (of, with, by, &c.) are generally placed before nouns, to express their re- lations to other words ; e. g., of the wood, &c. ; but in Latin these relations are commonly indicated by dif- ferent endings of the noun (21, (2),R.) ; 6. ^., sylv-a, the wood; sj\Y'Sd,ofthe wood. (30.) That part of the noun to which the ending is added is called the stem; e. ^., sylv- is the stem of sylv-a; terr- is the stem of terr-a, the earth. (31.) There are in Latin six endings, which, added to the stem, form six cases, the Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, Vocative, Ablative. (32.) And as we may speak of objects as one or more, there are two numbers, the singular and plurdi^ V ■ or fTTT"Tir ^ FIRST DECLENSION. f^r n It distinguished by their endings ; e, g., umbra, the shad- ow ; umbr se, the shadows. (33.) In this lesson we shall use but three cases, the nominative, vocative, and genitive. {a) The nominative answers to the question who ? or what ? and gives the simple name of the thing spok- en of. In the example (26, a), umbra, shade, is in the nominative. {h) The same form of the noun, when spoken to, is called the vocative ; e, g,, umbra, shade; O shade I (c) The genitive expresses, in general, those rela- tions which are expressed in English by the possessive case, or by the preposition of, and answers to the ques- tion whose? of whom? of v)hat ? e, g., umbra, the shade (of what .?) , s y 1 v ae (of the wood). Here s y 1 v ae is in the genitive. (34.) There are five declensions of nouns, distin- guished from each other by the endings of the geni- tive singular. In this lesson we shall use only nouns of the FIRST DECLENSION. Case-Endings and Paradigm. — Nominative and Gen." itive. (35.) (a) ENDINGS. Nom. aiid Voc. Gen. Sing. a OB Plur. ae arum. (b) By adding these endings to the stem sylv-, we get the following PARTIAL PARADIGM. Nom. and Voc. Gen. Sing. sylv-a, the wood ; O toood J sylv-ae, of the irood. sylv-ae, the woods ; O woods ! sylv-arum, of the woods. (36.) (a) Thus, nouns of the first declension have the nom. and voc. ending a (short)^ and the gen. ending » (long, 24, 3) 12 FIRST DECLENSION. (h) The penult a of the gen. pi. is long, (c) They are of the feminine gender, except the names of men or male beings, or rivers: thus, sylv-a is fern.; but naut-a, a sailor, poet-a, a poet, and the like, are masc. [A few Greek nouns of this declension end in e fern., and as, es, masc. See Appendix.] (37.) EXERCISE. [In the Vocabularies, the nom. case is always given, with the genitive ending subjoined.] I. Vocabulary. Galba, Galba, ae. (m.) Flight, fuga, 88. Province, provincia, ae. Memory, recollection, mSmoria, s. Gaul, Gallia, se. Eagle, aquila, se. A Belgian, Belga, ae. Injury, injuria, se. Language, lingna, se. Queen, reglna, as. Crown, corona, 88. Wing, ala, se. Dove, columba, 88. Feather, pluma, 88. Daughter, f Ilia, se. A Celt, Celta, ae. Farmer, agricola, 88. (w.) Rose, rosa, 08. Maid-servant, anciUa, ae. II. Translate into Latin, Of a crown. — Of a queen. — O Galba ! — Of crowns. — Of a feather. — Of eagles. — Of the Celt. — Wings. — Roses.^Of doves. — Of injuries. — Of a daughter. — O daughter! — Of the province. — Languages. — Provinces. — Belgians. — Of the prov- inces. — Of the maid-servant. — O maid-servant ! — The farmers. — O farmer! — Of memory. — O Belgian! — Of Gaul. — The eagles. III. Answer the questions in the foot-note.^ [A few questions are subjoined in the foot-notes, merely as specimens to the first lessons.] LESSON II. First Declension of Nouns, — Nominative^ Vocative^ and Genitive Cases, (38.) Examples, {a) The queen's crown. \ Coron^reginae. * "What is the quantity of u in umbra ? (24, 2.) Of ae in sylv-ae ? (24, 3.) Of u in columba? (24, 2.) Of the penult (9) in flUa ? (24, 1.) Of i m lingua? Ofiinancilla? (24, 2.) FIRST DECLENSION. 13 {a) Rule of Position. — The genitive (when unemphatic) stands after the noun on which it depends; e. g., re- gin ae in (a) stands after corona. (5) The queen's crown (i.6., i Reginse corona. not the king^s). \ (&) Rule of Position. — The genitive (when emphatic) stands hefore the noun on which it depends ; e. g.^ in (6) r e g i n 8B stands hefore corona. [Words in the exercises considered emphatic are in italics.^ (39.) EXERCISE. I. Translate into English. Ala columbae. Rosa ancillae. Pluma aquilae. Galhce f iiga. O regina (voc). Provincia Galliae. Filia agricolae. Memoria fugae. Regince filia. O filia ! Columhte pluma. Aquildrum f uga. II. Answer the questions in the foot-note.^ III. Translate into Latin. Fuga Belgariim. Plumae aquilariim. Injuridrum memoria. Lingua Celtarum. Filiae reginarura. Lingua Belgarum. The queen's dove. The farmer's eagle. The flight of doves. The girVs rose. The queen's rose. The flight of the Celts. The wings of the doves. The recollection of an injury. O Celts! The wings of eagles. O eagle. Galba's daughter. The shades of the woods. The memory of the queen. The girl's dove. The language of the province. O Belgians ! The flight of the queen. * 1. What is the quantity of the ultimate (9) of a n c i 1 1 ge ? Why ? (24, 3.) Of its penult? (9.) Why? (24,2.) Of the penult of Galliae ? 'Why? (24, 1.) 2. What is the quantity of a in injuri arum ? (36,3.) in memoria? (36, a.) 3. What is the stem ofcolumba, ala, rosa? &c. (30.) 4. What is the gender of r o s a, a 1 a, f u g a ? &c. (36, c.) What is the gender of Galba, agricola? (25, a.) 5. What is the case of rosa, provincise, injuriarum, memo- ria? What their number ? «. How many cases have Latin nouns ? (31.) What are they? (31.) B 14 FIRST DECLENSION. LESSON III. First Declension of Nouns, — Nominative and Genitive Cases. — First Conjugation of Verbs. — Intransitives, (40.) Examples. To fly, To dance, (a) The eagle flies, {b) The girl dances. volare. saltare. aquild volat. puella saltat. (41.) SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. (a.) Every sentence (e. g., the eagle flies) consists of two parts : 1. The subject, i. e., that of which something is de- clared (a noun, or some word used instead of a noun) ; e, g., eagle. 2. The predicate, i. e., that which is declared of the subject (generally a verb) ; e. g,, flies. Rem. The predicate is frequently an adjective or participle connected with the subject by the verb is ; e. g., the rose is sweeL (b.) The verb in the predicate agrees with the sub- ject in number and person; e. g.,the eagle flies: here flies is in the third person singular, to agree with eagle. (42.) Active Verbs are those which express activi ty ; e.g., the edi^e flies, the boy dances. Active verbs are either (a) Transitive, i. e., such as require an object to complete their meaning ; e. g,, the boy killed (whom ? or what ?) the squirrel. Here killed is a transitive verb. (p) Intransitive, i. e., such as do not require an ob- ject; e. g., the birds ^z/; the boy dances. [All the verbs used in this lesson are intransitives.] (43.) (a) The infinitive form of a verb expresses its action indefinitely, without reference to person or time : e, g., to dance, to plough. FIRST CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 15 (6) The indicative mood of a verb expresses its action definitely, as a fact or question ; e, g,, he ploughs. Does he dance? [The imperative and subjunctive moods are treated of here- after.] (44.) Tenses. (a) The present tense expresses incomplete action inpixsent time ; e. g.j I am ploughing, I plough. (p) The imperfect tense expresses incomplete ac- tion in past time ; e. g,, I was ploughing, I ploughed, (c) The future tense expresses incomplete action in future time ; e. g., I shall be ploughing, I shall plough, [Rem. As these three forms all express imperfect or incomplete action, they should be called Present Imperfect, Past Imperfect, Future Im- perfect. But as the present names are fixed by almost universal usage, we retain them ; advismg the student to fix distinctly in his mind the principle that these forms properly express action as con- tinuing or incomplete. The tense-forms for completed action will be given hereafter.] (45.) Conjugations. (a) In Latin, the different moods, tenses, numbers, and persons of verbs are expressed by various end- ings ; and the affixing of these to the proper stem of the verb is called conjugation. (21, Rem.) (6) There are four conjugations of verbs, distin- guished by their infinitive-endings, (c) The infinitive-ending of the first conjugation is Jlre {a. long) ; e.g., v5l-are, tofiy; ar-are, to plough, {d) To find the stem of any verb, strike oflF the in- finitive-ending; e, g., vol-are, stem vol-; ar-are, stem ar-. To form any mood, tense, &c., of a verb, affix the proper ending to the stem thus found. 16 FIRST CONJUGATION. INTRANSITIVES. (46.) SOME ENDINGS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. INFINITIVE, Srfe. INDICATIVE. 3d Sing. 3d Plural. Present. at. ant. Imperfect. abat. abant. Future. abit. abunt. (47.) By affixing these endings to the stem v 5 1-, we get the following PARTIAL PARADIGM. INFINITIVE, vol-are, to fiy. INDICATIVE. 3d Sing. 3d Plur. Present. v61-at, he, she, itjiies. vol-ant, they Imperfect. vol-abat, he, she, it was flying. vol-abant, they were flying. Future. vol-abit, he, she, it will fly. vol-abunt, they will Rem. In Latin we need not use the personal pronouns he, she, it, or they, with the verb, as in English, because the person-endings t and n t indicate the person sufficiently.* (48.) EXERCISE. I. Vocabulary, Girl, puella, ae. Forces, c6piae,t arum (pi.). Sailor, nauta, ob (m.). A Belgian, Belga, ae. To hasten, festln-are. To watch, vigil-are. Galba, Galba, ae. To fly, vol-are. To dance, salt-are. To cry out, exclam-are. To sup, coen-are. To walk, ambul-are. II. Example. The eagle flies. \ A qui la volat. Rule of Position. — The subject nominative generally pre- cedes the verb; e. g,, in the above example, ftqulla precedes volat. [In the above example, which word is the subject ? Why ? (41, a, 1.) Which the predicate? Why? (41, a, 2.) How does volat agree with aquila? Why? (41, b.)] III. Translate into English, Columbse volant. — Ancilla saMt. — Puellae exclamant. — Re- gina coenabat. — Puella ambiilabat. — Copise festinant. — Aqm- lae volabant. — Galba festinabit. — Regina saltat. — Naut«e vigi- labant. — Fili^ reginge saltabit. — Belgae festinant. — Filia Gal- * But when a new subject is introduced, or emphasis is required, the personal pronoun must be used in Latin. t C dpi a, in the singular, means abundance; in the plural, / ^^^^^^^ or, to seize, 5 Island, insula, 83. To call, vocare. To (prep.), ad. (with accus.). Poet, poeta, ae. To praise, laudare. To love, amare. Earth, terra, sb. To prepare, parare. Shade or 1^^.^^ Shadow, ' To obscure, obscurare. To arm, armare. Through (prep.), per (with ace). II. Example. The poet praises the queen. | Poeta reginamlaud^t. Rule of Position. — The object accusative stands before the ti'ansitive verb ; e. g., in the above example, the object reginam stands before the transitive verb laud at. III. Translate into English, LunS. nautas dslectat. — Agricola f ilias amat. — Ancillae mSdi- cinam parant. — Umbra terrae (33, c) lunS,m obscurat. — Nautas reginam laudant. — Galba copias armabat. — Umbra sylvarum agricolas delectat. — Galba sylvas occupat. — Copiae Belgarum sylvas occupabant. — Columbae p6r sylvas volabant. — Regina ancillas vocat. — Ancillae reginam ^mant. — Agricola filiam voca- FIRST DECLENSION. DATIVE AND ABLATIVE. 19 bat. — Regina poetam laudabit.— Rosae ancillas delectant. — Co- pias armabunt (47, Rem.). — Sylvas occupabunt (47 Rem.). IV. Answer the questions in the foot-note * V. Ti^anslate into Latin. The moon delights the fai-mer. — The farmer^ s daughter (38, 5) prepares the medicine. — The eagle's feathers delight the queen. - — The Belgians arm (their) forces. — The shade of the wood de- lights the poet. — Galba will take possession of the wood. — (They) walk through the woods. — (They) take possession of the island. — The farmer loves (his) daughter. — The farmer's daugh- ter praises the poet. — The queen will call the maid-servants. — The queen loves (her) maid-servants. — The shadow of the earth will obscure the moon. — The poet will praise the sailors. LESSON V. First Declension, — Dative and Ablative Cases. (54.) The dative case of nouns expresses the object to or for which any thing is done ; e, g., the man gives {to) the boy a book. Here boy is in the dative case. Rem. The accusative case, book, is the direct object of the verb gives ; the dative, bo;?/, the remote object. (55.) (a) The ablative case of nouns expresses the person or thing with, from, in, or by which any thing is done ; e. g., he filled the cup with wine: Here, with wine would be expressed in Latin by one word, in the ablative. (b) The ablative is also governed by prepositions expressing the relations with, from, by, &c. (56.) The Dative endings are. Sing, se : Plur, is {long). * (1.) What pronouns are not expressed in Latin ? (47, R., 49, R.) For what gurpose are they sometimes used ? (2.) By what is the transitive verb mited ? (By a direct object.) What is the case of the direct object in Latin ? (51, a.) What is the direct object ofamat, laudat? &c. 20 DATIVE AND ABLATIVE. The Ablative endings are, Sing, a (long) : Plur, (long). (57.) FIRST DECLENSION. CASE-ENDINGS AND PARADIGM COMPLETE. Singular. Plural. Nom. a. 8B. Gen. SB. arQm. Dat. 86. IS. Ace. am. as. Voc. a. Be. Abl. a. Is. Singular. Plural. Nom. sylv-a, a wood. sylv-ae, woods. Gen. sylv-ae, of a wood. sylv-arum, oj woods. Dat. sylv-ae, to a wood. sylv-is, to woods. Ace. sylv-am, a wood. sylv-as, woods. Voe. sylv-a, O wood I sylv-ae, O woods ! Abl. sylv-a, with. Sec, a wood. sylv-is, with, &c., woods. Rem. Some nomis of this declension are used only in the plural; viz., d 1 V i t i ae, riches ; n u p t i ae, a marriage ; i n s i d i ae, an ambush. (58.) EXERCISE. I. Vocabulary. en, ) confirmare. Wa^/, via, ae. To show, monstrare. Ambush, or snares, insidioe, arum (used only in the pi.). Wild beast, fera, ae. To give, dare.* To beseech, obsecrare. Letter, litterae, ariim.t Friendship, amicitia. II. Examples. (a) The farmer shows the way to the girls. Rule of Position. — The remote object usually precedes the direct ; e. g., in example (a), puellls precedes vidm. To establish, To strengtiien With (prep.), cum (governing the ab- lative case). To abound, abundare, (with abl.). Deserter, perfuga, ae. Tear, lacryma, ae. Inhabitant, incola, ae (25, IV.). Agricola puellisvi^m mon- strat. (ft) The queen walks with the maid-servants. Regina cum ancillis ambu- lat. Rule of Position. — The preposition and its noun precede the verb ; €. ^., in example (6), the words cum ancillis precede amhitldt. * D are has a short before re. t LittSra, sing., means a letter (as of the alphabet) ; HttSroe, plur., a letter = an epistle. FIRST DECLENSION. 21 III. Translate into English. Galba insidias parat. — Galba Belgis (54) insidias parat. — Bel- gae amicitiam confirmant. — Belgae cum regina amicitiam confir- mant. — Insula feris* abundat. — Poeta reginse (dat., 54) rosam dabat. — Copise per insulam festinant. — Perfiigse reginam obse- crabant. — Perfiigae cum lacrymis reginam obs^crabant. — Per- fuga reginae (dat., 54) litteras dabat. — Incolae reginam obse- crabant. IV. Translate into Latin. The poet praises the queen. — Galba establishes friendship. — Galba establishes friendship with the Belgians. — The Belgians will prepare snares. — The Belgians will prepare snares for the inhabitants (54). — The islands abound (in) herbs (58, III., note). — Poets give roses to queens (54). — The Belgians are beseech- ing Galba. — The Belgians are beseeching Galba with tears. — The queen will establish friendship. — The queen will establish friendship with the Belgians. — The deserters will beseech the queen. — The deserters will beseech the queen with tears. — The Belgians were preparing snares. — The Belgians were preparing snares for the deserters (54). * Feris is the abl. Rule of Syntax. — ^The abl. case is used with all verbs and adjectives of abounding and wanting. § 6. SECOND DECLENSION OF NOUNS.— SECOND CONJUGATION OF VERBS. (VI.— VIII). LESSON VL Nouns, — Second Declension^ Masculine, (59.) Examples, CrassuSy Crass -iis. Messenger, nunti-iis. To hasten, festinare. The messenger of Crassus hastens. The messengers hasten Of Crassus, messengers, Crass-i. nunti-i. Nunti-us Crass-i festinS,t. Nunti-i festinant. (60.) The Second Declension comprises all nouns whose gen. sing, ending is i {long). The nom. has two endings, us for masc. gender, and um for the neut. (6L) The case-endings for the masculine gender are as follows : Sing. Plur. Nom. Qs. Nom. 1. Gen. 1. Gen. orum. Dat. o. Dat. IS. Ace. tim. Ace. OS. Voc. e. Voc. i. Abl. 0. Abl. IS. Rem. The nouns in Us of this declension are the only Latin nouns in which the vocative-ending difters from the nominative. (62.) By adding these endings to the stem serv- of the noun serv-us (a slave), we get the PARADIGM. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. Sing. serv-us, a slave. serv-I, of a slave. serv-o, to or for a slave. serv-um, a sfave. serv-e, O slave ! serv-5, with, by, &c., a slave. Plur. serv-1, slaves. serv-orum, of slaves. serv-is, to or for slaves. serv-6s, slaves. serv-i, O slaves ! serv-Ts, with, by, &c., slaves. SECOND DECLENSION. 23 [Rem, 1. Nearly all nouns in us are masc. ; but the names oi trees, plants, &c., are /em. by the general rule (25, a). The four nouns, alvus, belly; coliis, distaff; humus, ground; vannus,/a7i, are also fern. Yirus, juice ; pelagus, the sea; vulgus, the common people, are neuter. Rem. 2. rilius, son, and proper names in ius, take i for the voc- ative-ending; e. g.,i\\i, O son! Tulli, O Tully ! Rem. 3. D e u s , God, has d e u s for voc. sing. ; and in the plural N. and V. dil, G. dedrum, D. and Abl. diis, Ace. deos.] [For Greek nouns of this declension, see Appendix.] (63.) EXERCISE. I. Vocabulary, Master (of a family or of slaves), do- min-iis, i. Slave, serv-us, L Village, vTc-iis, i. Ambassador, or Ztewfenan/.legat-us, I. Garden, hort-us, I. To, ad (prep, with ace). In, in (prep, with abl.). Captive, captiv-iis, i. A German, German-tis, i. To call, vocare. To recall, revocare.* To call together, conv6car6.* An yEduan, ^du-us, I. Tojlog, verberare. To ride (on horseback), SquitarS. f^^ He rides to the village, ad vicum equitat. When to implies motion, it must be translated by ad with the accusative. II. Translate into English. Dominiis servum vocat. — Serviis domino (54) medicinam pS,r- at. — Crassiis vicum occiipat. — Nuntiiis Crassi vigilat. — Servi ad viciim festinant. — Nuntius legato (54) viam monstrat. — Servi dominos laudant, — Agricola ad viciim equitat. — Captivi festina- bunt. — Galba copias (48, I.) Germanoriim convocat.* — Nun- tiiis captivos re vocat. — Servi in horto ambulabunt. — JEdui Crasso (54) insidias parabant. — Nuntiiis copias iEduoriim revo- cabat. — Dominiis servos verberat. III. Translate into Latin. [Recollect that words in parentheses ( ) are not to be translated.] The messengers call-together the iEduans. — The slaves pre- pare medicines for (their) master (dat., 54). — The iEduans take- possession-of the woods. — The master praises (his) slaves. — The slave is hastening to (ad, tvith ace.) the woods. — The ambassa- dors ride to the village. — Crassus will prepare an ambush for the ** The prefix con gives the verb the additional meaning of together ; the prefix re of back, as in revocare and convocdre. 24 SECOND DECLENSION. iEduans. — The lieutenant calls together the Germans. — The messenger will show the way to the captives (54). — The slaves are watching. — The master flogs (his) slave. — Galba will r0call the lieutenant. — The Germans were preparing an ambush for Galba (54). — The slave was showing the way to the mes- senger (54). — The messenger was hastening to the village. — The slaves are watching in the garden. LESSON VII. Nouns, — Second Declension, Masculines continued, (64.) All nouns of the second declension whose stem ends in r reject the ending us in the nom. and e in the voc. ; e, g,, N. and V. aiger, field, instead of ager-u s, ager-e. Moreover, most of those which have e in the nominative drop it in the obhque* cases ; e. g,, N. ager, G. agri instead of ager-i. (65.) Learn the following PARADIGM. SINGULAR. 1 Nom. ^ger, field (m). agT-i, of the f eld. pu6r (m.), boy. vir, man. Gen. puer-i, of the boy. vir-i, of the man. Dat. a^-5, to or f 07' field. puer-o, to or for. vir-o, to or for. Ace. Sigr-\im,feld. puer-um, boy. vir-um, man. Voc. ager, Of eld ! puer, O boy ! pu6r-5, with, by, Sf-c, vir, O man ! Abl agr-5, with, by, 8^ c, field. vir-o, with, by, Spc. PLURAL. 1 Nom. ^gr-i,fields. puer-i, boys. vir-i, 7nen. Gen. agr-orum, of fields. puer-orum, of boys. vir-orum, of 'men. Dat. 5gi--is, to or jor fields. puer-is, to or for. vir-Is, to or for. Ace. Sigr-ds, fields. agT-I, O fields I pu6r-5s, boys. puer-i, O boys ! vir-os, men. Voc. vir-i, O men ! Abl. agr-is, with fields. puer-is, with, by, SfC. \'\r-\s,with,by,Ss'C. Rem. Only the following nouns keep the e in all the cases, viz., didxxX' t^r, adulterer; puer, boy; Bocer, father-in-law ; gener, son-in-law; ves- per, evening ; liberl (used only in plural), children ; with the com- pounds of /cr and ger; e. g., Lucifer, Lucifer ; comiger, horned. * The oblique cases include all the cases except the nominative and vocative. SECOND DECLENSION. S5 (66.) I. Vocabulary, EXERCISE, Boy, puer, i Master (of a school), magister, tri (64). Father-in-law f socer, i (65, R.). Herb, herba, oe. Scholar, discipul-us, i. Son, fili-us, I (62, II. 2). II. Example, (a) The wood abounds in wild beasts. Man, vir, I. Game, lud-us, i. Son-in-law, gener, I (65, R.). Children, llberi, orum (rarely used in singular). Field, ager, Sgrl (64). SylvS, feris abundat. The wood in - loild - beasts abounds. (a) Rule of Syntax. — The ablative case is used with ad- jectives and verbs of abounding and wanting. III. Translate into English. Puer magistrum amat. — Regina soceriim amabit. — Pu^ri in agro ambulabunt. — Agri herbis (abl., 66, II., a) abundant. — Ag- ricola per agros (58, II., b) equitat. — Agricola socerum vocat. — Piiellae magistriim laudant. — Viri in agrls ambulabant. — Lu^ pueros delectant. — Regina generos amabit. — Viri ad vicum festinabant. — Agricola liberos amat. — Magister discipiilos con- vocat. IV. Translate into Latin, The girls walK in the fields. — The field abounds in herbs {66, II., a). — The sailor calls back the boys. — The queen loves (her) son-in-law.- — The queen gives (her) son-in-law (dat., 54) arose. — The scholars love (their) master. — The fields abound in herbs (66, II., «).— The farmers were walking through the fields. — The son of the master calls the boys. — The master walks in the garden with (his) sons. — The herbs of the field delight the poet. — Games delight girls. — The farmer shows the way to the boy. — The master will praise (his) scholars. — The master will flog (his) scholars. c 26 SECOND CONJUGATION OF VERBS. LESSON VIII. •. Nouns. — Second Declension, Neuter. — Verbs, Second Conjugation. (67.) Slave. Cujp. To fill. The slave fills his master'' s cup. servus (masc). poculum (neut.). implere. Servus poculum implet. The-slave ihe-cup of-his' domim 'master fills. (68.) The case-endings of the second declension for le neuter gender are, Nom. Ace, Voc. Gen. Dat., Abl. Smg. um. 1. 6. PhXT. a. orum. IS. Rem. The endings of the nom., ace, and voc. are always the same in neuter nouns. In this declension, those of dat. and abl. are alike also. (69.) By adding these endings to the stem p 6c ill-, we get the PARADIGM. Sing. FJur. j Nom. pocul-um, a cup. p6cul-a, cups. Gen. pocul-i, of a cup. pocul-orum, of ciips. Dat. pocul-6, to or for a cup. p6cul-is, to or for cups. Ace. p6cul-um, a cup. pocul-a, cups. Voc. pocul-um, O cup ! p6cul-a, O cups / Abl. pocul-5, with, by, &c., a cup. pocul-is, with, from, &c., cups. THE SECOND CONJUGATION OF VERBS. (70.) The second conjugation comprises all verbs whose infinitive-ending is ere (e long before r e) ; e. g., mon-ere, to advise; doc- ere, to teach. (71.) SOME ENDINGS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION OF VERBS. INFINITIVE, 6r6. INDICATIVE. 3d Sing. 3d Plural. Present. gt. ent. Imperfect. ebat. ebant. Future. ebit. ebunt. SECOND CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 2*^ (72.) By affixing these endings to the stem m 5n-, we get the following PARTIAL PARADIGM. INFINITIVE, mon-ere, to advise. INDICATIVE. 3d Sing. :3d Plur. Present. I Imperfect. mon-et, he, she, &c., mon-ebat, Ae, s/ic, &c., advises. was advising. mon-ent, the^ advise.\mbn-eha.nt, they were advising. ^ Future. mon^Bit, he, «J^ &c., will advise. mon-ebunt, they will advise. To Jill, implere (70). Danger, perlciilum, L To fear, timerS (70). Foi^m, forum, i. Town, oppidum, i. (73.) EXERCISE. I. Vocabulary, Assistance, auxiliiim, i (68). To ask, entreat, rogarg. Camp, castra, or urn (pi.) To move, movere (70). Cup, poculum, 1. Wine, vinum, i. f?'^' II. Translate into English, Legatiis auxiliiim rogat. — Galba copias ad (63, 1., l^) castr& revocat. — Serviis poculum vino (55, a) implet. — Crassiis castr& movet. — Copiae ad oppidum festinabant. — Agricola oppidiira laudat. — CopisB Germanorum ad castra festinabunt. — Nuntius periciilum timet. — Pueri p^r forum ambulant. — German! peri- cula non timent. — LSgati per oppidum ambiilabunt. — AgricolS. oppida -^diiorum laudabat. — Crassiis oppidiim occiipabat. — • Servi pociila implebant. III. Translate into Latin, The iEduans were asking assistance. — The Germans will move (their) camp. — The Germans were praising the town.-^ The ambassadors of the ^duans hasten to (63, I., ^^) the camp. — The forces of the Belgians fear the danger. — The mes- senger will recall the ambassadors to the camp. — Galba's mes- senger will recall the Germans to the town. — The ambassadors praise the towns of the Germans. — The farmers were walking through the forum. — The boy walks through the town. — The sailors will not fear the danger. — Crassus will not move (his) camp. — The Germans were-taking-possession-of the town. — The servant was filling the cup. § 7. ADJECTIVES OF FIRST CLASS. (IX.— X.) LESSON IX. Adjectives. — Class /, its, a, u m. (74.) The Adjective (14), in Latin, agrees with the noun in gender, number, and case, and therefore has endings to distinguish these; e, g,, puer bon-us, a good boy ; puelld bon-a, a good girl; donum b5n- u m, a good gift. (75.) We divide adjectives into three classes, ac- cording to their endings. Those of X\iq first class have the fern, ending of the first decl. of nouns, and the masc. and neut. endings of the second. Thus, (76.) ENDINGS. PARADIGM SINGULAR. II M. F. N. M. F. N. N. US. a. um. bon-us. bon-a. bon-um. G. 1. SB. 1. bon-i. bon-aa. bon-I. D. 6. 89. 6. b6n-5. bon-ce. bon-o. A. una. am. um. bon-um. bon-am. bon-um. V. e. 5. um. b6n-6. bon-a. bon-um. A. 0. a. 0. bono. bon-a. bon-6. PLUBAL. il N. 1. 8S. a. bon-I. bdn-8B. bon-a. G. oroin. arum. orum. bon-orom. bon-arum. b6n-5rum. D. Is. IS. is. bon-is. bon-Is. bon-is. A. OS. as. a. b6n-5s. bon-as. bon-a. V. 1. tB. a. bon-i. b6n-8D. bon-a. A. IS. IS. IS. bon-is. bon-Ts. bon-Is. (77.) Adjectives Vfho§e stem ends in er do not take the endings u s of the nominative and e of the vocative. (a) Most of them drop the e in inflection ; e. g., pulch^r, pulchr-a, pulchr-um, beautiful; pulchr-i, pulchr-ae, pulchr-i, 6cc, ADJECTIVES OF FIRST CLASS. 29 - (b) But a s p e r, rough ; 1 a c e r, torn ; liber, free ; m i s 6 r, miserable ; prosper, fortunate ; t e n e r, tender (and the com- pounds of ger and f er; e, ^., cornig^r, f lammif er), re- tain it ; e. g,t miser, miser-a, miser-iim, miser-i, miser-ae, miser-i, &c. (78.) I. Vocabulary, Good, bon-us, a, um. Great, magn-iis, a, um. Many, molt-us, a, um. Thick, dens-US, a, um. Broad, wide, lat-us, a, um. JWy, me-us, a, um. Thy, tu-us, a, iim. EXERCISE. His, hers, its (own), su-us, a To see, videre. Master (of slaves), herus, I. To have, habere. Example, exemplum« L River, fluviiis, i. To frighten, terrerS. II. Examples. (a) The slave fills the large I Serviis pociilummagnum : cup, I implet. Rule of Position, — (a) The adjective, unless emphatic, fol- lows the noun ; c. g,<, in the above example, magnum follows pociilum. (b) The slave fills the queen^s large cup. Serviis magnum rSginae poc- iilum implet. Rule of Position, — (6) When the noun governs another in the genitive, the adjective stands first, and the genitive between it and its noun ; e, g,, in example (6), magnum reginse pociilum. III. Translate into English. Reginaf iliam suam amat. — Servus poculum meum implet. — Servi pocul^ magna implent. — Pueri magistrum boniim ^mant. — Belgae vicos multos habent. — Agricola bonus viam monstrat. — Magister pueros bonos docebit. — Magistii boni exempli bona pueris (54) dant. — Legatus magnam reginae (78, II., b) c5ronam videt. — Perfugae ad fluviiim latiim festinant. — Servus magnum pueri (78, II., b) poculum implebat. — Sylvae densse nuntios ter- rent. — Pueri sylvam densam timebunt. — Servus bonus herum amat. rV. Translate into Latin, The ^duans have many villages. — The queen loves (her) C2 30 SOME FORMS OF ESSE. good son. — The farmer shows the thick wood. — Good slaves love (thek) masters. — Good masters love (their) slaves. — The Belgians have many towns. — The broad rivers frighten the de- serters. — The boy sees the large town. — Crassus recalls the good lieutenant. — The son praises the gi-eat queen. — The Germans have large villages. — He praises thy slave. — He loves thy daugh- ter. — He will praise his own daughter. — The deserters were hastening to the broad river. — The slave will fill the large cup of his master (78, II., b), — The lieutenant will see many villages of the Belgians (78, II., h). — The thick wood will frighten the boys. Li;SSON X. Some Forms ofMlss e. — Adjectives continued. (79.) Learn ^the following forms of the irregular verb Esse, to be : INFINITIVE, esse, to he. INDICATIVE. 3d Sing. 3d Plur. Pregent est, 15* sunt, are. Imperfect. erat, was. erant, were. erit, he, she, it will be. erunt, they will be. (80.) (a) Indolence is a vice. \\^ff'^ ^'«»°» ««*• I Indolence a vice is. Here inertia is the subject of the sentence ; v i- t i u m is the predicate ; both in the nominative. Rule of Syntax. — {a) The noun in the predicate must be in the same case as the subject, when it denotes the same person or thing. (81.) (&) The rose is feeati^i- [ Rosa pulchra est. ful. I The rose beautiful is. Here r 5 s a is the subject, and pulchra the py-ed- icate ; both in nom. sing. fem. Rule of Syntax. — (6) The adjective in the predicate agrees with the subject in gender, number, and case. [As a general niJe, a sentence should not end with a monosyllahle ; but in short passages, such as the above, especially when the word before est ends in a vowel, Gt m, it is admissible.] ADJECTIVES, CLASS FIRST. 31 (82.) EXERCISE. [Refer to Rules of Position (78, II.) and to Rem. on adjectives ending in &• (77).] I. Vocabulary, Happy, beatus, a, um. True, verus, a, um. Friendship, amicitia, ae. Everlasting, sempitemus, a, um. Labicnus, Labienus, i. Foolish, stultus, a, um. Tender, tener, a, um (77, b). Flame, flamma, as. Red, ruddy, ruber, a, um (77, a). A leaf, folium, L Bull, taurus, I. Horned, corniger, a, um (77, b). Lamb, agnus, i. Europe^ Europa, ob. Peninsula, peninsula, ob. Anger, Ira, ae. Illust7'ious, clarus, a, um. Croic, corvus, i. Black, niger, a, um (77, a). Hot, non (always placed before the word which it qualifies) Always, semper (adv.). Cow, vacca, ob. Attica, Attica, as. Britain, Britannia, sb. Ireland, Hibemia, ob. Miserable, miser, a, um (77, b). Rem. In such phrases as the good, the wise. Sec, the noun (men) is omitted in Latin, as in English ; e. g., good men = b 6 n i ; fools = stultl ; the happy = beat!. Also, many things =multa (neut.); all things = omnia. II. Examples, The good are always happy. True friendships are everlast- ing, Lahiemts was a lieutenant. The foolish are not happy. Boni semper beat! sunt. Verae amicitiae sempitemae sunt. Labieniis legatiis Srat. Stulti non sunt beati. III. Translate into English, Puellapulchra est (81, h). — Herbge agrorumt^n^rae sunt(81, h). — Alae aquilariim magnae sunt. — Flamma rubra est. — Folia rosariim pulchra sunt. — Tauri cornigeri sunt. — Agni teneri in agris sunt. — Regina pulchra in horto ambiilabat.-^Puer agnos pulchros videt. — Vera amicitia sempiterna est. — Stulti miseri sunt. — Europa peninsula (80, a) est. — Attica peninsula est. — Ira vitium est magnum. — Crassus legatiis erat. — Labienus legatiis clarus erat. — Corviis plumas nigras habet. — Stulti non sunt beati. — Boniis semper beatiis est. IV. Translate into Latin, The queen was beautiful. — The queen's daughter was beau- 32 APJECTIVES OF FIRST CLASS. tiful. — The beautiful daughter walks in the garden. — The fields abound in tender herbs (66, II., a). — The feMhers of doves are beautiful. — The feathers of crows are black. — The flames were ruddy. — The leaves of roses are tender. — Cows are horned. — The queen walks in the garden with (cum) her beautiful daugh- ters (f iliabiis*). — The girl will see the tender lambs in the fields. — The good are not always happy. — Fools are not always mis- erable. — Crassus was a great lieutenant. — Britain is an island. — Ireland is an island. — Geneva is a large town. — ^Anger is always a vice. — Everlasting friendships are true. — Friendships are not always everlasting. * Fill a, daughter, anddea^ goddess, have abl pL in a bus, instead of Is, to distinguish thenx from fill is, sons„ diis^ gods. § 8. THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS. LESSON XI. Verbs. — Third and Fourth Conjugations, (83.) The Third Conjugation comprises all verbs whose infinitive ending is ere (e short before re); e, g., s c r i b-e r e, to write. (84.) SOME ENDINGS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. INFINITIVE, 6re. INDICATIVE. Singular. Plural. Present. it. unt. Imperfect. ebat. ebant. Future. ent. (85.) By affixing these endings to the stem scrib-, we get the following PARTIAL PARADIGM. INFINITIVE, scrib-ere, to vnite. INDICATIVE. 3d Sing. 3d Plur. Present. scrib-it, he, she, &c., writes. scrib-mit, thei/ write. Imperfect. scrib-ebat, h£, she, &c., was writing. scrib- ebant, they were writing. Future. scrib-et, he, she, &c., will write. scrib-ent, they toill write. THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. (86.) The Fourth Conjugation comprises all verbs whose infinitive-ending is ire (i long before re) ; e. g,, aud-ire, to hear. (87.) SOME ENDINGS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. INFINITIVE, ire. INDICATIVE. 3d Sing. 3d Plnr. Present. mnt. Imperfect iebat. iebant. Future. i6t. ient. (88.) By affixing these endings to the stem aud-, we have the following 34 THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS. PARTIAL PARADIGM. INFINITIVE, aud-ire, to hear. INDICATIVE. 3d Sing. 3dPlur. Present aud-it, he, she, &c., hears. aud-iunt, they hear. Imperfect. and-iebat,^,s^, &c., was hearing. aud-iebant, they were hearing. Future. aud-iet, he, she, &c., will hear. aud-ient, they will hear. (89.) EXERCISE. I. Vocabulary. To send, mittere (83). SmaU, parvus, a, um. In (prep.), in.* To come, vgnire (86). To sleep, dormire (86). A Roman, Romanus, a, tim. Bed-chamber, cubiciilum, i. To lead, ducere (83). To run, currSrS (83). World, mundus, i. To rule, regere (83). To conquer, vincerg (83). A Gmil, Gallus, i. To fortify, munire (86). Tower, a istellum, i. Divitiacus, Divitiacus, i. II. Example, Crassus comes to the Zar^e I Crassiis magntlm ad oppl- town. j dum venit. Rule of Position. — The adjective belonging to a noun gov- erned by a preposition is frequently placed he/ore the preposition, 6. ^., magnum in the example. III. Translate into English. Belgae legates mittunt. — Belgse legates ad Crassiim mittunt. — Pueri in ciibiculo dormiunt. — Puellae parvo (89,11.) in cubiciilo dormiebant. — Regina magnum ad oppidum veniet. — Galba c6- pias Romanoriim ducit. — Dii (62, R., 3) mundum regunt. — Deus mundum semper regit. — Roman! Gallos vincebant. — Le- gatiis castella muniebat. — ^Edui nuntium ad Labienum mittunt. — Copiae Belgarum ad oppidum venient. — Divitiacus copias ^duoriim ducebat. IV. Translate into Latin. The horse runs. — The boy sleeps. — The boy was running. — The slave comes. — Crassus fortifies many towers. — The slave was coming to (63,1., i^') his master. — The beautiful boy will sleep in a little bed-chamber (89, II.). — The gods always govern * In, signifying into or unto, governs the accusative; signifying in governs the ablative. THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS OP VERBS. 35 the world. — The Romans are coining to the large town. — The filmier was sleeping in the field. — Divitiacus was leading the forces of the ^Eduans. — The Belgians send messengers to Cras- sus. — Crassus sends a messenger to tlie Belgians. — The girls will sleep in a little bed-chamber. — Crassus will fortify the towers. — The Romans take-possession-of the towers of Gaul. § 9. PASSIVE VERBS. (XII.— XIII.) - ^ LESSON XII. Verbs. — Passive Voice, — First and Second Conjuga- tions, (90.) The endings of the third persons of verbs, in the tenses for incomplete or continued action (44), are the same in the passive as in the active voice, with the addition of the syllable ur . Thus, we have in the (91.) FIRST CONJUGATION. 3d Sing. 3d Plur. Active. sim-at, he, she, it, loves, am-ant, they love. Passive. am-at-Mr, he, she, it is loved.* am-ant-itr, they are loved. IMPEKFECT. 3d Sing, am-dbat, he was loving. am-abat-wr, he was loved. 3d Ploi*. Km.-abant,they were loving, am-abant-iir, they were loved. 3d Sing. 3d Plur. am-ait^, he shall or will love, dim-abunt, they shall or will love. am-abJt-ur, he shall or will be loved. am-abunt-wr, they shall or will be loved. (92.) SECOND CONJUGATION. 3d Sing. 3d Plur. Active. mon-c^, he ad/vises, mbn-ent, they advise. Passive. mon-et-wr, he is advised. mon-ent-wr, they are advised. IMPEKFECT. 3d Sing. 3d Plur. m.6n-ebdt, he was advising, labn-ebant, they were advi- sing. mon-ebat-itr, he was advised. mon-ebant-wr, they were advised. 3d Smg.\Tabn-ebU, he will advise. 3d Plur. vmon-ebunt, they will ad- m5n-ebTt-Mr, he will be advised. mon-ebunt-wr, they will be advised. * The English language has no forms for incomplete action in the pass- ive voice. He is loved, ne was loved, dec, the house is buiU, &,c., properly express action complete. An awkw^ard periphrasis — he is being lovea^ Crassiis legatum y5c&t. Legatiis a Crasso vocatur* PASSIVES OF FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS. 37 (93.) EXERCISE. I. Vocabulary, Game, sport, ludus, i. »\ To teachy ddcdre. To delight, delectarg. | Seize, occap&r6> II. Examples. (a) Crassus calls the lieuten- ant. (b) The lieutenant is called /" '^ by Crassus. ~ Jn these examples, the same action is expressed (viz., the calling- of the lieutenant) in {a) by the active form, in (b) by the passive. Ev- ery sentence in which a transitive verb occurs may thus be changed into the passive form. The agent (Crassus) is the subject n/ymina- tive in (a) ; and in (Jj) is expressed by the ablative f Crasso J with the preposition a, by. Rem. K the subject be a thing, not a person, nor considered as a per- son, the preposition is omitted ; e. g., Pociilum vItio impletur, the cup is filled with wine. (This is the abl. of cause or meajis.) III. Translate into English. AuxiKum a legato rogatur. — Auxilium a legat5 rogabatiir. — Auxilium a legato rogabitur. — Copiae a Galba revocantur. — Pocu- liim a servo implebatur. — Oppida a Crasso occupabantiir. — Me- (Kcina ab ancillis parabitiir. — Puerl boni a magistro laudantiir. — Copiae Germanoriim a Labieno revocabuntur. — Pocula vin5 (93, II., R.) implentur.— PuSri ludis (93, II., R.) delectantur. IV. Translate into Latin. The master is loved by (his) scholars. — The master will be loved by (his) good scholars. — The cups will be filled (with) wine (93, II., R.). — The Germans were caDed together by Crassus. — The villages were seized by the Romans. — The towns will be seized by the ^duans. — Medicines are prepared by the slaves. — Good boys will be praised by their masters. — The good boys will be advised by their masters. — The scholars are taught by their master. — The scholar was taught by his the house is bein^ built — ^is sometimes employed, but is not to be approved. The house is building is a form sanctioned by usage, but in many verbs it would be ambiguous. The pupil must remember, then, that in the exer- cises in the First Part, the forms is loved, is advised, was advised, &c., are used to express incomplete action. D 38 PASSIVES OF THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS. master. — The girls are delighted with games (93, II., R.). — The slaves will be delighted with games. — The queen is praised by (her) maid-servant. — The queen was praised by (her) maid- servant. — The queen will be praised by (her) maid-servant. LESSON XIII. Verbs. — Passive Voice. — Third and Fourth Conjuga- (94.) tions, THIRD CONJUGATION. 3d Sing. 3d Plur. Active. reg-it, he, she, it rules, reg-wht, they rule. Passive. regit-wr, he, she, it is ruled. regunt-ur, they are ruled. IMPERFKCT. 3d Sing, reg-ebat, he was ruling: ||regebat-Mr, he was ruled. 3d Plur. reg-ebant, they were ruling. \\regehB.iit-ur, they were ruled. 3d Sing. 3d Plur. reg-e^, he shall or will rule, reg-ent, they shall or will rule. r6get-Mr, he shall or will be ruled. regent-wr, they shall or will be ruled. (95.) FOURTH CONJUGATION. 3d Sing. 3d Plur. Active. aud-it, he hears. aud-iunt, they hear. Passive. audit-wr, he is heard. audiunt-wr, they are IMPERFECT. 3d Sing. 3d Plur. aud-iebat, he was hearing. aud-iebant, they were hear- ing. audiebat-wr, he was heard. audiebant-wr, they were heard. 3d Sing. 3d Plur. aud-iet, he shall or will hear. aud-ient, they shall or will hear. aud-iet-Mr, he shall or will be heard, audient-wr, they shall or will be heard. (96.) I. Vocabulary. A Roman, Rdmanus, I. To lay aside, depongrS. Garrison, praesidium, i. EXERCISE. A Gaul, GaHus, L To distribute, ? ,. - ^ ^ X dispon6r8. arrange, ) ^ XL Translate into English. Lggati a Belgis mittuntur. — Mundtis a Deo rSglttir. — C6pi© PASSIVES OF THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS. 39 Komanoriim a Galba ducuntiir. — Galli a Romanis vincuntiir. — Ira a regina deponitur. — Castelliim a Labieno munitiir. — Praesi- dia a legato disponuntur. — Legati ad .^duos mittebantiir. — Co- piae iEduoriim ad vicum ducentur. — EpistolS, a regina scribitiir. — Oppida Belgarum muniebantur. — Nuntii ad Crassum mittentur. III. Translate into Latin. Galba is conquered by the Belgians. — The camp is fortified by Crassus. — The forces of Crassus are led to the camp. — The forces of the JEdui are sent to the village. — Anger will be laid- aside by the queen. — Galba was conquered by the Gauls. — Let- ters will be written by the queen. — Letters are written to (ad) Crassus. — The gan-isons are not distributed by Crassus. — The towers are not fortified by the Belgians. — The world is always governed by God. — The Germans are ruled by a lieutenant. — A letter will be written by the queen. § 10. THIRD DECLENSION OF NOUNS.— PARTIAL TREATMENT. (XIV.— XV.) LESSON XIV. Nouns, — Third Declension. (97.) The Third Declension comprises all nouns * whose gen, sing, ends in i s. Rem. To find the stem of any noun of tliis declension, strike off la from the gen. sing.; e. g., gen. hominis {of a man), stem horn in. (98.) The case-endings are as follows : ^ Singular. Plural. ^ M. & F. Nent. M. &r. Neut. N. N. es. a (ia). G. is. IS. G. um (ium). um (ium). D. 1. i D. ibus. ibus. A. em (im). like N. A. es. a (ia). V. like N. like N. V. es. a (ia). A. e(I). Mil- A. ibus. ibus. jRem. 1. The nom. ending is not given, because of the many forms in which that case occurs. Of the changes to which the stem is sub- ject, see hereafter (Part II.). 2. Of the endings i m, i (in ace. and abl. sing.), and i a, i u m (plur.), see hereafter (Part II.). 3. The genders of all nouns of this declension are marked in the vo- cabularies. The general rules of gender (25, a) of cour^i? apply to this declension : special rules are given (355). We give here only (99.) Partial Rule of Gender, — Most nouns which add s to the stem to form the nominative are feminine. (100.) PARADIGMS MASCULINE AND FEMININE FORMS. Sing. Speech (m.). Honour (m.). City (f.). Nation (race), f. Law (f.). N. and V. serm6. honor. urb-s. gens (gents). lex (legs). ■ Gen. sermon-is. honor-is. urb-is. gent-is. leg-is. Dat. sermon-i. honor-L urb-I. gent-i. leg-i. Ace. sermon-6m. honor-em. urb-em. gent-em. leg-em. Abl. sermon-e. honor-e. urb-e. gent-g. leg-e. Plur. Speeches. Honours. Cities. Races. Laws. 1 N., A., V. sermon-es. honor-es. urb-es. gent-es. leg-es. Gen. sermon-um. honor-um. urb-iiim. gent-mm. leg-um. D. and A. sermon-ibiis. houor-ibiis. urb-ibtis. gent-ibiis. leg-ibus. I THIRD DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 41 Rem. 1. Observe that dor tin the stem is dropped in the nom. before «; and c or s combined with s to form x ; e. ^., laus = laud-s ; arx = arc-s; lex = leg-s; gens = gent-s. 2. All the endings are short but i (dat. sing.) and es (N., A., V. plnr.). (101.) EXERCISE. I. Vocabulary, [In the following vocabularies, the stem of every noun of the third de- clension is placed immediately after the nominative form, and before the genitive ending.] Rock, pgtra, as. Tree, arbor, (arbor) is, f. To build a nest, nidificarg. - CcBsar, Caesar, (Caesar) is. And, 6t (conj.). Consul, consul, (consul) is, m. General, impgrator, (impSrator) is, m. A Helvetian, Helvetius, I. K^.ng, rex, (reg) is, m. Law, lex, (leg) is, f. To abrogate, abrogare. Just, Justus, a, um. Worthy, digniis, a, um. Part, pars, (part) is, f. Common-^people, plebs, (pleb) is, f To leave, relinquere. II. Translate into English. Rex leg-es abrogat. — Copiae ad urb-em festinant. — Leg-es justge sunt. — Pars pleb-is urb-em relinquit. — Magna pars pleb- is urb-em relinquit. — ^Aquilae in p^tris et arbor-ibus tfidificant. — Leg-es a. reg-e abrogantur. — Copiae ad urb-6m revocantiir. — Helvgtii ad Caesar-em legates mittunt. — Nuntius sermon-em consul-is laudat. — Imperator nuntios revocat. — Rex dignis (64, and 82, 1., R.) honor-es dabit. — Copiae Belgarum urb-em relin- quebant. — Caesar ad vicos festinabat. — Legati ad imperq,t6r-em mittuntiir. — Imperator nuntios ad urb-em mittet. — Legatus part-6m copiarum revocabit. III. Translate into Latin. The laws were just. — The king will revoke the laws. — The general will leave the village. — The consuls send ambassadors. — The consuls recall the ambassadors. — Doves build their nests in gardens and trees. — The consuls are praised. — The city is for- tified. — Honours will be given. — Honours are given to the wor- thy (82, I., R.). — Ambassadors will be sent to the consuls. — Honours are given to Caesar (54). — The speech of the consul is praised. — Honours are given to the general. — A great part of the common-people wiU leave the city. — The consuls will recall the common-people. — The ambassadors will leave the city. — The general will be sent. — Caesar will be recalled.^ — The laws were unjust. D2 43 THIRD DECLENSION. LESSON XV. Nouns, — Third Declension^ continued. (102.) PARADIGMS. NEUTER FORMS. Sing. Sea (n.). Song (n.). Work (n.). Animal (n.). N., A., V. G, D. Abl. mar-e. mar-Ts. mar-i. mar-i. carmen, carmin-is. carmin-i. carmine. opiis. oper-is. 6per-i. 6per-e. animal, animal-is. animal-i. animal-i. Plur. Seas. Soa-js. Works. Animals. N., A., V. G. D., Abl. mar-ia. mar-iiim. mar-ibus. carmin-a. carmin-um. carmin-ibus. 6per-a. 6per-um. oper-ibiis. animal-Ta. animal-ium. animal-ibus. Rem. 1. Neuters whose nom. ends in al, ar, or e, take i for abl. sinsp. ending; la, nom. plur., and ium, gen. plur. 2. Partial Rule of Gender. — Noims whose stems end in a 1 or ar are neuter. (103.) I. Vocabulary. EXERCISE. To cure, heal, sanarS. To mitigate, mitigare. River, flumen, (flumin) is (n.). To swim across, transnare (gov. acc). Work, opus, (oper) is (n.). Fish, piscis, (pise) is (m.). Tim£, tempus, (tempor) is (n.). To change, mutar6. Man, homS, (homin) is (m.). Stormy, turbid, turbidiis, ft, um. Name, nomen, (nomin) is (n.). To enrol, conscrlbere. Treaty, foediis, (foedSr) is (n.). To violate, violare. Spoil or booty, praeda, as. Ady, Bociiis, i. Summer, aestas, (aestat) is (f.). Cold, frigus, (frigor) is (n.). Burden, onus, (oner) is (n.). To carry, portarg. Wmind, vulnus, (vulner) is (n.). II. Translate into English. Consul nomina conscribit. — Caesar fcedus (acc.) vi61ab2,t, 6t praedam sociis (54) dabat. — ^stas frigus (acc.) mitigS,t. — Per- fugae fliimen (acc.) transnabant. — Magnum opiis est. — Flumen piscibiis abundat (66, L, a). — Tempus homines mutat. — Tem- pora mutantur. — Frigus aestate (93, II., R.) mitigabitur. — Copiae Belgariim flumina transnabant. — Servus onus (acc.) magnum poitat. — Caesar npmina non conscribet. — Onus mag- num est. — Medicina vulnus sanat. — Carmiua puellas delectant. — NominS, hominum mutabuntiir. — Mari3, turbid^, sunt. — FIu- m6n magnum erat turbidiim. — Magn& sunt onSrS, captivorum. THIRD DECLENSION. 43 III. Translate into Latin, The Germans violate treaties. — The consuls will not enrol the names. — The slaves were carrying great burdens. — The messenger was-swimming-across the river. — The boy swims- across the river. — Great burdens ai*e carried. — The bm-den will be carried by the slave. — The rivers abound in fish {QQ, II., a). — The wounds are healed. — The burdens are great. — The lieu- tenant will not violate the ti'eaty. — The names are enrolled by the consuls (93, II.). — The treaty is violated. — The treaty is violated by Caesar. — The treaty will be violated, and the spoil will be given to the allies (dat.). — The consul enrols the names of the deserters. — The names of the deserters will be enrolled. The woimds of the prisoners will be healed. § 11. ADJECTIVES OF THE SECOND CLASS. LESSON XVL Adjectives, — Second Class, — Two Endings, (104.) Adjectives of the Second Class have is in the nom. sing, for masc, and fern, endings, and e for the neuter. They are decUned throughout hke the third declension of nouns ; e. ^., brevis, short. (105.) PARADIGM. SINGULAK. PLUKAL. 1 Masc. Fem. Neut Masc. Fem. Neut. N.V. brev-is. brev-is. brev-e. brev-es. brev-es. brev-ia. G. brev-is. brev-is. brev-is. brev-ium. brev-ium. brev-ium. D. brev-L brev-i. brev-i. brev-ibus. brev-ibus. brev-ibiis. Ace. brev-em. brev-ein. brev-e. brev-es. brev-es. brev-ia. Abl. brev-L brev-i. brev-L brev-ibiis. brev-ibiis. brev-ibus. Rem. 1. Twelve adjectives* of this class take gr for the ending of the nom. sing. masc. instead of is; e. g'., acer, acris, acre ; cele- ber, Celebris, celebre. Rem. 2. The abl. has e instead of i in juvenis, a youth; aedilis, (Bdile. The gen. pL has iim instead ofiiimincgler, swifL (106.) EXERCISE. L Vocabulary, Uticertain, incertus, a, iim. Useful, utilis, 6. Iron, ferrum, L Gold, aurum, L » Severe, heavy, gravis, 8. Life, vita, se (f.). Brave, fortis, e. Patiently, p&tientSr (adv.). Wolf, lupus, i (m.). Like, similis, 6. A chief, princeps, (princip) is (c, 25, IV.). Father, pater, (patr) is. Noble, nobilis, e. -^^«^^' ?onmis,g. All, the whole, 5 Sweet, dulcis, e. To demand, poscere. Soldier, miles, (milit) is (m.). Study, zeal, studium, i. Kind,hem^\\s, a, um. Dog, canis, (c&n) is (c, 25, IV.). To endure, t6l6rar6. Hostage, obses, (obsid)is (c, 25, IV.). Acer, sharp. Alacer, cheerful. CampestSr, oftheplain. CSlSbSr, famous. C6l6r, swift. Equester, equestrian. Paluster, marshy. P6dest6r, pedestrian. Saluber, salubrious. Sylvester, woody. Terrester, terrestrial. Volucer, swift. ADJECTIVES, SECOND CLASS. 45 Pater fill 5 benignus est. Cams lup5 siimlis est. II. Examples. {a) The father is kind to his son, {b) The dog is like {to) the wolf, (c) Rule of Syntax. — The dative case is used with sll adjec- tives that are followed by the words to or for in Eng- lish : hence with adjectives expressing (a) advantage or disadvantage, (b) likeness or unlikeness, [Adjectives of likeness or ujilikeness also take the gen.] ^III. Translate into English. Milites omnes periciilum timent. — Imperator fortis milites omnes convocat. — Vita brevis est. — Vita est brevis et incerta. — Viniim est dulce. — Principes fortes oppida omnia muniebant. — Caesar obsides nobiles poscit. — Tempiis breve est. — Non omnes milites sunt fortes. — Ferriim utile est. — Auriim et ferriim sunt utiEa hominibus (106, II., c). — Miles vulnus gr§,ve patienter tolerat. — Consul fortis perictila n5n timebit. — Ferriim utile hominibus (106, II., c) est. — Milites fortes vulnera gravia pa- tienter tolerabunt. — Studiiim est pueris (106, II., c) utile. — Imperator militibus (106, II., c) benignus erat. — Canis lupo similis est. IV. Translate into Latin. The noble queen comes to the city. — The brave lieutenant en- dures patiently (his) severe wound. — All the soldiers hasten to the camp. — The brave chiefs will fortify many towns — The noble hostages come to Caesar (63, I., i^'). — The time is un- <;ertain. — Soldiers are not always useful. — Towns are useful for men (106, II., c). — Noble ambassadors are sent. — Many hostages are demanded by the consuls (93, II.). — All the soldiers will be called together. — Not all chiefs are noble. — Wine is sweet and iron is useful. — The dangers are not fear- ed by the brave soldiers (93, II.). — The brave lieutenant praises the noble chief. — Dogs are like wolves (106, II.). — The study of letters (litterariim) is useful for all (106, II.). — The soldiers are kind to the prisoners (106, II.). — Gold is heavy. — Iron is not like gold (106, II.). Even in these, the ending is is sometimes found in nom. sing. masc. ; e. g., tumuUus eqvsstris, Liv., xsix., 35. § 12. ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD CLASS. LESSON XVII. Adjectives, — Third Class. — One Ending. (107.) Adjectives of the Third Class have but one ending in the nominative for all three genders ; e,g,, felix (m., f., n.), happy ; audax (m., f., n.), hold: pauper (m., f., n.), poor. -Felix, happy. (108.) PARADIGM.- SINGULAR. PLURAL. 1 Masc. Fern. Neut Masc. Fern. Neut. N.V. fellx. feHx. fellx. fellc-es. fellc-es. felic-ia. a. fellc-is. fellc-is. fellc-is. felic-ium. fellc-ium. felic-ium. J). felTc-1. felTc-i. fellc-i. fellc-ibus. felic-ibus. felic-ibus. Ace. fellc-6m. felic-em. fellx. felloes. felic-es. felic-ia. Abl. fellc-i. felic-i. felic-T. felic-ibiis. felic-ibus. felic-ibus. [Rem, 1. The abl. has e instead of i (a) in pauper, poor; sen ex, old (gen. senis) ; princeps. chief; compos, possessed of, and most end- ing in es; e. g:, hospes, guest; pub 6s, grown up, &c. Also in the compounds of corpiis, color, and pes. {b) Participles in ns have, as participles, e, but as adjectives i; e. g., florente r6sa, the rose blooming; florenti rosa, m « blooming rose. (c) Adjectives used as nouns take e ; e. g., sapiens, a wise man, abl. sapiente. Rem. 2. The gen. pi. takes u m instead of i ii m in v e t u s, old (veteriim) ; censors, partaking of ; d e g e n 6 r, dege nerate ; dives, rich ; Ino^ 8, helpless ; m.^ m or, mindful ; im.TaeraoT, unmindful ; sjap- pi ex, suppliant; uber, rich; vigil, watching. Also in all which take 6 in the abl. ; e. g.t princeps, principg, principiim.] OF THE ADJECTIVES. THIRD ClMJB. . 47 Stag, cervus, i. Powerful, potens, (potent) Is (107). Scout, explorator, is (m.). To kill, occidere. Battle, praelitim, i. And, et (conj.). Swift, velox, (veloc) is. Horse, 6quus, i. Citizen, cms, (civ) is (c, 25, TV.). (109.) EXERCISE. I. Vocabulary. War, belluin, i. Fierce, Strox, (Stroc) is (107). To wage, carry on, gerere. Horse-soldier, equ6s, (equit) is (m.). Tenacious, tenax, (tenac) is (107). Wise, sapiens, (sapient) is (107). Death, mors, (mort) is (f.). To renew, redint^grare. Rich, dives, (divit) is (107). To terrify, terrere. II. Example. The inhabitants carry on a I Incolae bellum §,trox gerunt. fierce war. j [Refer to 78, II., a.] III. Translate into English. Incolae bella magna et atrocia gerunt. — Nuntiiis velox ad castr^ v^nit. — Equites veloces ad sylvam festinant. — Vir sapiens mor- tem non timet. — Discipuliis memoriam tenacem hab^t. — Me- moria in pueris est tenax. — Imperator nuntiiim velocem mittdt. — Principes fortes prgelium atrox redintegrabunt. — Cervus ve- lox est. — Equus velox currit. — Canes sunt veloces. — Sapiens (82, I., R.) non semper dives est. — Divites non semper beat! sunt.' — Princeps potens legates mittit. — Principes potentes captives occidunt. — Imperator principes omnes convocat. ly. Translate into Latin. The thick woods terrify the swift messenger. — The fierce battle terrifies all the inhabitants. — The noble general was prais- ing the swift messenger. — The illustrious consul sends ambas- sadors to (63, I., E^^) the powerful chief. — The powerful chief will kill aU the prisoners. — Rich (men) are not always wise. — The wise (man) does not fear the fierce battle. — The soldiers praise the rich citizen. — The memoiy in boys is al- ways tenacious. — Dogs and horses are swift. — The consul will not renew the fierce battle. — The illustrious general will recall the swift horse-soldiers. — Rich citizens fear fierce wars. — The fierce battles were ten-ifying all the hostages. — The wise general calls-together all the ambassadors. — The fierce batde will be renewed. — All the prisoners will be killed by the powerful chiefs (93, II.). — The swift messengers are frighten- ed. — Great wars are carried on. — Rich citizens are killed. § 13. FOURTH DECLENSION OF NOUNS. LESSON xvm. Nouns. — Fourth Declension. (110.) The Fourth Declension comprises all nouns whose gen. sing, ends in us (long). The nom. ending for masculines is u s, and for neuters u ; e. g., f r u c t- u s, fruity masc. ; c o r n - u, horn, neut. (111.) The case-endings are as follows: Sing. Masc. Neut. Plur. Masc. Neut. N. and V. US. U. N. and V. US. ua. Gen. US. US or u. Gen. tium. uum. Dat. Ul. u. Dat. ibus. ibus. Ace. um. u. Ace. us. ua. Abl. u. u. Abl. ibus. ibus. (112.) By adding these endings to the stems fruct- and corn-, we get the PARADIGM.* Sing., fruit (m.). Plur., fruit Sing., horn ( n. ). Plur.,homB. N. and V. fhict-us. fruct-us. Gen. fract-us. fruct-uum. N., A., V. corn-u. com-iia. Dat. fract-ui. fruct-ibiis. Gen. corn-US, or u. com-uum. Ace. fruet-um. fruct-us. Dat., Abl. com-u. com-ibus. Abl. fract-u. fruct-ibus. [Rem. 1. The following take ubus in dat. and abl. plur. instead of ibiis, viz., acus (f,), needle; arcus (m.), bow ; artus (m.), joint; ficiis (.t), Jig-tree; laciis (m.), lake; partus (m.), birth; portQs {m.), harbor ; querciis (f.), oak; specus (m.), den; tribiis (f.), tribe; pecii (n.), cattle; v6ru (n.), a spit.^] 2. The feminine nouns of this declension are, acGs, needle; anus, * The fourth declension is only a contracted form of the third : thus, N. fruct-us. G. fruct-uis, contr. fructus. D. fruct-ui. Ace. fnict mm, contr. fructOm, &c. t The following verses embrace these : Arcus, actts, portQs, vSru, Ficus, lactis, artiis, SpgciSs, querciis ; also, pScu, TribOs too, and partus. NOUNS.— FOURTH DECLENSION; 49 old woman; domiis, house; ficns, Jig ; mSniis, hand; nuriis, daughter-in-law ; It or t^u^, gallery ; tribus, tribe; querctts, oak. Also, Idus, -uum oXi only in plural), tfie Ides."* 3. Domtis (f.), house, is thus^clined: Sing. Plnr. K, V. dom-us. dom-us. G. -us. ? -uum, -orum. »J D. -ui. -ibus. Ace. -OS, -us (rarely) J Abl. -6. -ibiis. -uiuiii. 3 -us ^^^a^e^y;. ) 4. The gen. do mi is used only in the sense of at home; e. g., do mi Ta^ss, at my home, at my house. -fi^3.) EXERCISE. I. Vocabulary, To lead over, or across, transducSre. Approach, adventus, us (m.). To a2vait, expectare. Singing, eantus, us (m.). Fi'uit, fructus, us (m.). To adorn, omarg. Four, quattuor (indeclin.). To build, aedificarS. Horn, comu, us (n.). Army, exercitus, us (m.). Harbour, portus, us (m.). Enemy, hostis, (host) is (c, 25, IV.). Bird, avis, (av) is (f.). II. Exarkples. (a) The Helvetians lead part of their forces across the Rhine, (6) Ccesar leads a great ar- my of Germans across the Rhine. Grief, luctus, iist (m.). To lay aside, dep6n6r6. Sadness, moeror, orist (m.). Tempest, procella, se. To raise, tollere. Wave, fluctus, us (m.). Star, sidus, (sider) is (n.) (102). ^^ore,. llttus, (littor) is (n.) (102). Wind, ventus, i (m.). Roll, volvere. Boundary, finis, (fin) is (m.). The Rhine, Uhenus, i. Ship, navis, (nav) is (f). Helve til partem copiarum Rhenura transducunt. C ae s a r magnum Germano- riim exercitum trans R h e n u m ti-ansducit. Rule of Syntax. — (a) Verbs compounded with the prepo- sition trans are generally followed by two accusatives ; e, g., partem and Rhenum in (a), {h) But sometimes the preposition is repeated ; e. g.^ trans in(6). III. Translate into English. Helve til Ccesdrzs (38, h) adventiim expectabant. — Adventu * Acus, manus, tribus, domiis, porticus, and idus. the general rule (25, II.). t M.osror=^sile7it ginef; luctQs = mourning. The rest are fern, by 50 NOUNS.— FOURTH DECLENSION. (abl., 65, a) Caesarls hostes terrentiir. — Avis puellam cantu (55, a) delectat. — Fructus arb6res (ace, pi.) ornant. — Fructus terrae ^giicolam delectant. — Pat6r domus (ace. pi.) quattuor sedifica- bit. — Naves in portti sunt. — Regina luctiim deponit. — Sapientes luctiim et moerorem deponunt. — Procella magnos flucttis (ace. pi.) toUebat. — Procella fluctus (ace. pL) ad siderS, toUit. — Puer tauriim cornu (abl., 55, a) tenet. — Cornua cervi magna sunt.— Fluctus magni ventis (55, a) volvuntiir. — Legatus exercitura du- cit. — Legatus ab ^duis (from the iEduans ; i. 6., their country) exercitum ducit. — Agi-icola tam-um cornibiis (55, a) tenebat. — Adventiis patris puellam delectabit. — Caesar exercitiini flum^n transducit (113, II., a). — Legatus per fines Helvetiorum exer- citiim ducet. — Ariovistus Germanos ti'ans Rheniira transducit (113, II., 6). Rem. Home is translated by do mil m, the ace. of domns; thus, The sailor leads the boy liome — ^Nauta puerum do mum ducit. IV. Translate into Latin. My father will build four houses. — The tempest is rolling great waves to the shores (63, 1., ^^). — Vast waves are raised to the stars by tempests. — The turbid sea is roUing vast waves to the shores. — The farmer leads the girls home from (ah) the city. — Caesar will lead the army over the turbid river. — Cassius leads the army through the boundaries of the ^duans and Helvetians. — The Helvetians await the coming of Caesar. — The boy will hold the bull by the horns (55, a). — The farmer is delighted by the fruits (55, a) of the earth. — The king lays aside his griefs and sadness. — The singing of the birds (avium) will delight the soldiers. — The trees are adorned by many fruits. — There are many large ships in the harbour. — The winds raise the great waves to the stars. — The lieutenant was leading the army of the JEduans across the Rhine. (Repeat trans (113, tl., h) ). — The horns of bulls are large. — The queen will lay aside her grief and sadness, — The master sends his slaves home § 14. FIFTH DECLENSION OF NOUNS. LESSON XIX. Nouns, — Fifth Declension, (114.) The Fifth Declension comprises all nouns whose gen, ending is 6 i. The nom, ending is e s. (115.) There are but few nouns of this declension, and they are all feminine except dies, day, and me- ridies, mid-day; and even dies is fern, in the sing. when' it means a fixed day. (116.) The case-endings are as follows: Sing. Plur. N.V. es. es. G. Si. erum. D. SI. ebiis. Ace. em. es. AbL e. ebils. Rem. In the gen. and dat. the e in e lis long" when a vowel stands be- fore it ; e. ^., di-ei: short when a consonant stands before it; e. g., fid-6i. (117.) By adding the endings to the stems r- and di-, we get the PARADIGMS. Thin^ (f.). Smgular. N.V. G. D. Ace. AbL r-es. r-ei. r-ei. r-Sm. r-e. Plural. r-es. r-erum. r-ebus. r-es. r-ebus. Dai/ {m.). Singular. di-gs. di-ei. di-ei. di-gm. dY-e. Plural. di-es. di-erum. di-ebiis. di-es. di-ebus. Eem. Only res, dies, species dat, and abl. plur. are wanting EX ERCISE. have the plur. complete ; the gen., in all others. (118.) <-'^ 1. Vocabulary, Hope, spes, 6i. Day, dies, ei (m.). To appoint, constituerS, To lead out, ediicerg. To lead back, reducere. Line of battle, acies, ei. To draw upr instruere. About, circiter {prep, with ace). About mid-day, circitSr meridigm. Victory, victoria, e. Mid-day, mgridies, ei (m.). Sixth, sextus, a, um. Reward, praemium, i. Sun, sol, (sol) is (m.). Setting, occasus, \is. Seventh, septimus, a, um. Out of, e or en {prep, with ablative). Faith, promise, fides, 6i. T?ie next, post^riis, ft, Um. To fight, pugnftrS. 52 NOUNS. FIFTH DECLENSION. Caesar aci^m instruit. Posterodie castra movent. II. Examples, (a) Ccesar draws up the line of battle. (b) The next day they move the camp, (c) Rule of Syntax, — The point of time at which any thing occm-s is expressed by the ablative ; e. g,, in (b)postero die, — At sun-set = solisoccasu. III. Translate into English. Spes victoriae milites delectat. — Milites spe (93, II., R.) vic- toiiae delectantiir. — Diesvenit. — Caesar diem constituit. — Caesar diem ciim legatis constituit. — Imperator fortis exercitiim educit, et aciem instruit. — Circiter meridiem pugnant. — Caesar, circiter meridiem, exercitiim in castra reducit. — Sexto die (118, II., c) Caesar exercitiim ex castris ediicit. — Spes praemioriim piieros delectat. — Piieri spe praemioriim delectantur. — Solis occasu Helve til castra movebant. — Septimo die Belgae copias omnes ex castris educebant. — Solis occasii Ariovistus ^ciem instriiit. — Circiter meridiem proeliiim redintegrabunt. — Consiil clariis diem ciim legatis constituit. — Principes nobiles fidem violant. IV. Translate into Latin.^ The hope of victory delights the noble chiefs. — The consul about mid-day leads out the army and renews the fierce battle. — The powerful chiefs, at the-setting of-the-sun (118, II., c), kill all the prisoners. — The day will come. — The consul, at the setting of the sun, will renew the great battle. — At the setting of the sun the great battle will be renewed. — On the sixth day all the forces will be led back to the camp. — The Germans ap- point a day with Caesar. — The next day the Germans move (their) camp.— Ariovistus, on the next day, draws out the line of battle. — Caesar appoints the mid-day with the ambassadors. — About mid-day the messengers come. — About mid-day the con- sul will come. — Caesar will not violate (his) promise. § 15. PRONOUNS. (XX.— XXXI.) LESSON XX. Pronouns. — Substantive-Personal and Adjective^ Personal. — Verbs, First Person. (119.) The three pronouns eg 5, /; tu, thou; sui, of Mmself, herself, itself, are called Substantive, because they are used as substantives, not as adjectives ; and Personal, because they express the person speakings the person spoken to, and the person spoken of. (120.) The Substantive-Personal Pronoun* of the first person is thus decUned : Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. Sing, ggo, L Plur. nos, we. mei, of me. ^o«*^^ I of us. nostrum, 5 mih!, to me. nobis, to XLS. me, me. nos, us. me, hy me, &c. nobis, by us, Sec. (121.) Derived from the Substantive-Personal Pro- nouns are the Adjective- Personal or Possessive Pro- nouns ; called Adjective, because they agree with nouns ; and Possessive, because they express possession (my, thy, his, &c.). (122.) The Adjective- Personal Pronouns of the^r5^ person are declined, in both sing, and plur., like adjec- tives of the First Class (76, 77, a). They are. («) Derived frommeX, N. meus. mea, meum, my, mine. G. mel, &c. meae, mei, of my (voc. masc. mi). &c.(Uke bonus, 76.) m " from nostrl. N. noster, nostra, nostrum, our, ours. G. nostri, &c. nostrsB, nostri, of our. Sec. (like p u 1 c h 6 r, 77, a). (123.) The following forms of Verbs in the first per son must now be learned : E2 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. FIRST CONJUGATION : FIRST PERSON ENDINGS. INFIN. ACT., are. INFIN. PASS., ari. |j Indie, present. Imperfect. Future. | 1st Sing. 1st Plur. Act. amus. Pass. or. amur. Act. abam. abamus. Pass. abar. abamar. Act. abd. abimus. Pass. abor. abimur. (124.) Thus, from the stem am, of am- a re, to love, we have : INFIN. ACT., amare, to love. INFIN. PASS., dmarl, to be loved. Indie. Pres. Act. am-6, I love. dju-amus, toe love. Pass. am-6r, / am loved. am-amur, we are loved. Imperfect. Act. am-abam, I teas loving. am-abamus, we were loving. Pass. am-abar, / was loved. am-abamur, we were loved. Future. A a. am-abd, / shall love. am-abimus, we shall love. Pass. am-abor, / shall be loved. am-abiraur, we shall be loved. [Rem. The student will learn the passive endings readily by observing that r is the passive characteristic, which is added to the active ; the con- sonant ending of the active, where it has one, being dropped.] (125.) EXERCISE. I. Vocabulary, Book, ITber, bri (m.), (64). Friend, amicus, i (m.). Brother, frater, (fratr) is (m.). Cicero, Cicero, (Ciceron) is (m.). Sister, soror, (soror) is (f.). With (i. e., at one's house), &pud (prep. ace). Fault, ctdp&, 83. Yesterday, heri (adv.). II. Examples, {a) I have a hook. All my (possessions), omnia meft (neut. pL). Five, quinque. Sharply, acriter. To-morrow, eras (adv.). Very much, greatly, valde (adv.). To blame, vitiiperarS. To sing, cantare. Threet tres, tri& (adj. of Class II.). Est mihi lib^r (i. e., there is a booJc to me). Rule of Syntax. — The dative case is used with est or sunt, to denote the person who has or possesses something.* The thing possessed is nom. to est or sunt. Puer me cum in horto h6ri ambulabat. (6) The hoy wa^ walking with me in the garden yes- terday. Rule of Position, — The preposition cum is sufficed to the personal pronouns ; e. ^., m e c ii m, with me ;*ii 6 bi s c u m, with us, instead of cum me, cum nobis. [Recollect that the personal and possessive pron6uns are not expressed in Latin, unless emphasis or perspicuity demands it.] * This is called the Dative of Possession, and should always be refen'ed tQ BA Auoh hv (he paplL PERSONAL PRONOUNS. FIRST PERSON. 55 III. Translate into English. Ego canto, amicus audit. — Ego et frater ambulamiis.* — Ego 6t filiiis meiis festinamus. — Sunt mihi tres libri (125, II., a).— Sunt mihi quattuor equi et quinqiie c^nes. — In horto ambula- bain. — A b6nis (82, I., R.) amabor. — Cicero ^me laudatiir. — - Hostes nobisciim (125, II., b) acriter pugnant. — H^ri in agris ambulabamiis. — Pater ad nos nuntiiim mittet. — Culpa nostra est. — Cras in horto caenabimiis. — Delectabamiir. — Pueri in horto nobiscum ambiilabunt. — Litterarum studiumf (38, h) mihi (106, II.) utilS erit. — A magistro laudabar. — OmniS, mea mecum porto. — Ego a frati-e valde amor. — Nos laudamur, puellae vitu- perantiir. — Nos a magistro verberabimiir. IV. Translate into Latin, We praise the beautiful girl. — We have (125, II., a) four large cups — I have (= there are to me) four sons and three daughters (125, II., a). — We shall praise Caesar's brave soldiers. — I walk, my friend rides. — I and my sister wiU ride.* — I and my brother will walk* in the king's garden.^ — I and my father will sup* in the garden to-morrow. — We shall always praise the wise and good. — The works of Cicero will be praised by vs (93, II., fe), the works of Caesar by the soldiers. — The fault is mine. — ^We have many large cups (125, II., a). — I have three beautiful sisters. —I have four brothers. — My father will walk with me in Cae- sar's garden {Ccesdris in hortd),t — The study of literature is useful to us (X06, II.). — To-day we shaU sup with (apud) Crassus. • LESSON XXI. Pronouns, Personal and Possessive, continued, — Verbs^ First Person, continued. (126.) The following are some of the endings for the first person in verbs of the * If a predicate have two or more nominatives, connected by a conjunc- tion, it takes generally the plural number ; and if the nominatives be of different persons, the verb takes the first person rather than the second, the secoiid rather than the third. tLittera!-umstudium = ^Ae pursuit (or study) of literature (letters). X In all such cases, put the prep, betwee?^ the genitive and the noon governed by the prep. *» 56 VERBS. FIRST PERSON^ SECOND CONJUGATION. STEM. SIXGULAR ENDINGS. PLURAL ENDINGS. |[ Present Imperfect. Future. mon- mon- mon- Active. e6. eb&n. ebo. Passive. eor. ebar. eb5r. Active. emus. ebamus. ebimus. Passive. emur. ebamur. ebimur. [Rem. The student wiU learn these forms readily by observing that they differ chiefly from those of the^rs^ conjugation in having e be- fore the last syllable instead of a. By adding the endings, as above given, to the stem mon-,. which stands at the left hand, he will form the paradigm of monere, to advise.\ (127.) The following are some of the endings for the first person in the third and fourth conjugations* THIRD CONJUGATION. STEM. SINGULAR ENDINGS. PLURAL ENDINGS. \ Present. Imperfect Future. reg- reg- reg- Active. 6. ebam. am. Passive. or. ebar. ar. Active. imus. ebamus. emus. Passive. imiir. ebamur. emur. [Rem. Compare these with the endings of the 2d conj., and observe that, 1. In the ^res. e is dropped in the sing., and i assumed in the plur. 2. The imperfect is precisely the sazue. 3. But th.Q future is a new form. 4. By adding the endings to the stem placed at the left, you form the paradigm of reggre, to rule.] (128.) FOURTH CONJUGATION. STEM. SINGULAR ENDINGS. PLURAL ENDINGS. ^ Present. Imperfect. Future. aud- aud- aud-^ Active. id. iebam. iam. Passive, ior. iebar. iar. Active. imiis. iebamiis. iemus. Passive. imur. iebamur. iemur. [Rem. Observe tfcat the endings of the 4th conj. differ from those of V the 3d simply by prefixing the letter i. In the 1st plur. the t pre- fixed combines with that of the endings unus, imur, and forms imus, uniir.] (129.) EXERCISE. aei^-Ht^ Vdcabulary. Fierce, ferox, (feroc) is (107). Nothmg, nihil (neut. indecl.). To he well, valere. To arrange, disponere. 11. Example, I have nothing to do with Antony (125, II., a). WicTced, improbiis, a, fim. Garrison, proesidium, T. Latin, Latiniis, a, Gm. Antony, Antonius, i. Nihil est mihi ciim Antonio (i. c, there is nothing to mc with Antony), VERBS. SECOND PERSON. 5T, III. Translate into English, 2d Conjugation. — Ego et frater valemiis (125, III.*). — ^A magistro docebimur. — Linguam Latinam doceo. — A patre mo- neor. — ^A magisti*o bono docemur. — ^Ab hoste timebar. — Hos- tium adventiim non tamebo. ^d Conjugation. — Regebamur. — Praesidia disponebamiis. — ^A Deo regimur. — Ego exercitum ducam. — A filio ineo relinquar. — Lup5s feroces occidimus. Ath Conjugation. — Castella muniemus. — Avium cantum audi- miis. — Cras ad urbem veniam. — Nihil est mihi cum improbis. — Nihil est nobis ciim hostibiis. IV. Translate into Latin. 2d Conjugation. — I and my son are well (125, III.*). — We shall see the brave soldiers. — I am taught by good masters. — We were fearing the approach of the enemy. — 1 was teach- ing the Latin language. — We shall be feared by the enemy. — We shall be advised by our father. 3d Conjugation. — We were led by a brave general. — I was killing three wolves. — We are ruled by a good king. — We shall arrange the gamsons. — • I shall bring (ducere) my daughter from (ab) the city. — We shall lead the forces of the Germans. Ath Conjugation. — We were heard by the master. — We shall sleep in the little town (89, XL). — ^We shall come to the town to-morrow. — I shall be heard by the girls. — ^We were fortifying the towns. — We have nothing to do with the foolish (129, II.). — I have nothing to do with Caesar. LESSON XXII. Pronouns, — Substantive-Personal and Adjective-Per- sonal, — Verbs, Second Person, (130.) The Substantive-Personal Pronoun of the second person is thus declined : I Norn. Sing. Plur. tu, tTwu. vos, you. tuT, of thee. vestri, > of vestrum, \ you. tibi, to thee. vobis, to yoi te, thee. vos, you. tu, thou. vos, you. (131.) The following are some of the endings of the second person of verbs of the 58 PERSONAL PRONOUN. SECOND PERSON. FIRST CONJUGATION. STEM. SINGULAR ENDINGS. PLURAL ENDINGS. | Pres. Imp. Fut am- am- am- Act. as. abas, abis. Pass. aris. abaris. aberis. Act. atis. abatis. abitis. Pass. amM. abamini. abimim. (132.) EXERCISE. I. Vocabulary. Yesterday, hen. (adv.). I To wound, vulnerare. To-day, Hodie (adv.). I To fight, pagnare. II. Translate into English. Cras mecum coenabis. — Tu me amas, ego te amo. — Vos vdbisciim pugnatis. — Tu cantas, nos audimus. — In horto ambii- labatis. — Tu a patre valde amaiis. — Vos vituperamini, nos lau- damiir. — Nihil est tibi cum Caesare. — Cras vobisciim coenabo. — Nos laudabimur, vos vituperabimini. — Nihil vobis est ciim bo- nis. — Heri ambiilabatis. — ^Hodie pugnabitis. — Laudabamini. — Vulnerabimini. — Vocatis. — Vocamini. — Amatis. — Amamini. — Cantabatas. — Vocabamini. III. Translate into Latin, To-day ye were supping with us (125, II., h), — Ye love us, we love you. — Ye were singing, we were hearing. — Ye have nothing to do with the king (129, II.). — Thou wast greatly loved by Caesar. — Ye shall be praised by our master. — Ye shall t>e blamed by the good (82, 1., R.). — Ye are called by the mes- senger.— Thou fightest with thyself* (125, II., 5).— Ye shall sup with us to-morrow. — Thou wilt fight to-morrow. — Thou wast loving. — Thou wast loved. — Thou wilt blame. — Thou wilt he blamed. — Ye are praising. — Ye are praised. — Thou woundest. — Thou art wounded. LESSON XXIII. Pronouns, Personal and Possessive, continued, — Verbs, Second Person, Second Conjugation, (133.) The following are some of the endings for the second person, in verbs of the * Tecum. VERBS. SECOND PERSON. s» SECOND CONJUGATION. STEM. SINGULAR ENDINGS. PLURAL ENDINGS. |j Act. Pass. Act, Pass. Pres. mon- es. eris. etis. eminl. Imp. mou- ebas. ebarls. ebatis. ebaminl. Fut. mon- ebis. eberis. ebitis. ebiminl. (134.) The Adjective- Personal (or Possessive) Pro- nouns of the Second Person are, tiiiis, a, um, thy ; and vester, vestra, vestrum, your, (a) Derived from t u i, | N. tuiis, a, um, thy, thine, I G. tui, ae, i, of thy, &€. (6) Derived from vestri, N. vester, vesti'a, vesti'um, your. I G. vestri, vestrae, vestri, of your, (135.) EXERCISE. I. Vocabulary, Thou art, es (Sd person sing. ind. pres. of esse). Ye are, estis (2d person pi. of do.). / was, ^ram {1st imperf. do.). Cause, ) causa. For the sake of, ) causSL (abl.). To learn, disc6r6. II. Examples, (a) N e is an interrogative particle used in asking questiojis. It is annexed to the word to vv^hich it especially refers ; e, g,^ Of concerning', d© (prep. abl.). To laugh, ridere. To rejoice, gaudere. Sajety, salus, (salut) is (f.). Leader, guide, dux, (due) is (m.). Why, cur (adv.). Because, that, qudd (conj.). (1 ) Do you teach the boy ? (2) Do you teach the boy ? (3) Do you teach the hoy ? Tune pueriim doces ? D 6 c e s n ^ pueriim ? Puerumne doces ? In (1) tu has the emphasis; in (2) doces; and in (3) p u e r ii m. (6) Ye are warned, ^br iAei Vestrae salutis causit sake of your (own) safety, \ m6nemini. Rule of Position. — C a u s a, for the sake of (the abl. of causa, a cause), is always placed after the genitive which depends on it. (c) I ivas your leader, |Dux egfi vester er^m. III. Translate into English, Videsne serviim meiim? (135, II., 2). — Tuae salutis causa , (135, II., h) moneris. — Cur ridetis ? — Vestrae salutis causa moneminl. — Gaudeo quod tu et pater tuus valetis (125, III., *)• 60 VERBS. SECOND PERSON. — Videbasne milites ? — De culpa tua monebaiis. — Cur ridsba- tis. — Hostium adventum non timebis. — Tuae salutis causa mon- eberis. — Nos discemus, vos docebimini. — Timetisne Caesaris adventum? — Esne tu beatus ? — Culpa tua est {the fault is thine), — Pueri in horto v5biscum ambiilabant. — M agister ego vester eram (135, II., c). IV. Translate into Latin,* [The emphatic words are in italics.] Did you see your master ? — Do you fear the approach of Caesar? — Are you happy? — You were warned (advised) for the sake of your own safety. — Are you and your father well ? (125, III., *). — The fault was yours. — You shall see the ene- my, but (sed) shall not fear (them). — I am your friend. — I was your friend. — You teach, but we learn. — You shall teach, but we shall learn. — ^Why do you not (non) fear the master ? — You were warned of (d e) your fault. — Do you see your slaves ? — Are you Caesar ? — Why do you fear the master ? — You shall see great cities and many men. — We shall sup with you to-mor- row. — You shaU be warned, for the sake of your own safety. — • We rejoice that you and your daughter are well (125, III., *). LESSON XXIV. Verbs, Second Person, Third and Fourth Conjugations, (136.) The following are some of the endings of the second person in verbs of the THIRD CONJUGATION. STEM. ACTIVE ENDINGS, PASSIVE ENDINGS. \ Pres. Imper. Fut. reg- reg- reg- 2d Sing. is. ebas. es. 2d Plur. itis. ebatis. etis. 2d Sing. eris. ebaris. erls. 2d Plur. imini. ebamini. emini. (137.) The following are some of the endings of the second person in verbs of the FOURTH CONJUGATION. STEM. ACTIVE ENDINGS. PASSIVE ENDINGS. j Pres. Imp. Fut. aud- aud- aud- 2d Sing. IS. iebaa. ies. 2d Plur. itis. iebatis. i:tis. 2d Sing. iris. iebaris. ieris. 2d Plur. imini. iebamini. iemini. * When you, your, occur, translate them both in sing, and plur., for the sake of practice. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 61 (138.) Observe, (a) That the present endings of the 3d and 4th conjugations are nearly alike, the vowel (i) of the fourth being long (i). (b) That the imperfect and future endings of the fourth conjugation diflPer from those of the third by prefixing the letter 1. EXERCISE. (139.) Vocabulary. Plant, planta, ae. To sow, to plant, sererS. To find, iuvenirS. Orator, orator, (orator) Is (m.). Voice, vox, (voc) is (f.). To read, legerfi. Whence, und6 (adv.). Long; longe (adv.). Badly, mSlS. To punish, punirS. So, tam (adv.). Bird, avis, (av) is (£) (140.) Translate into English, 3d Conjugation. — Cur n5n scribis. — Arbores et plantas s6r6- batas. — Hodie ad Caesarem mitteris. — Cur tam male scribis ? — Ad castra reducemini. — Legis-ne Ciceronis opera ? — Scribis- n6 epistolam ad Caesarem? 4tli Conjugation. — Unde venis? — Cur tam longe dormis ? — Magistriim boniim invenies. — Audis- -ne magistri v6c6m? — Cur non venietis ? — A Caesare audiris. — A magistro puniemini. — Oratorem audietis. — ^In horto dor- miebatis. — Cantiim avium auditis. (141.) Translate into Latin. [Refer to 1 35, II.] 3d Conjugation. — Are you writing a letter ? — Thou wast planting a tree to-day. — Were (you) reading the works of Cicero ? — ^Why do you read so badly ? — Are you writing a Letter to the messenger? — Thou wilt read Caesar to-day. — Thou art sent to the camp. — Thou wilt be led by the ambassadors. 4th Con- jugation. — ^Why do you not come ? — Ye shall hear the voice of Caesar. — Thou wilt sleep in the camp. — Ye shall be heard by the master. — Thou shalt be punished. — Ye are heard. — Thou shalt hear the singing of the birds. LESSON XXV. Pronouns. — Substantive- Personal and Adjective-Per- sonal, Third Person. (142.) The Substantive Pronoun of the third per- son is thus declined : F 62 PERSONAL PRONOUN. ^THIRD PERSON. __ Sing. Plur. sui, ofhimsdf, herself, itself. sui, of tltem- selves. sib!, to him- self, &c. sibi, to them- se, /imseZ/i &c. se, by himself, I &c. ;, by them- selves, &c. (143.) The Adjective Pronoun of the third person is decHned hke an adjective of the first class : thus, Derived from sui, I N. suus, a, um, his^ hers, its, his own, I G. sui, 98, i, of his, hers, its, &c. Rem. Observe that sui is not a regular pronoun of the third person, like the English he, she, it, but reflexive ; e. g., puer s e laudat, the boy praises himself. It therefore has no nom. case. [The nom. pronouns he, she, it, are not often expressed in Latin; but when they Tnust be, a demonstrative pronoun, generally hie, is, or i lie, is employed.] EXERCISE. (144*) Vocabulary, Hand,, manus, us (f.) (112, 2). To love [with esteem), dilig-ere. To live, viv-€r6. To contend, contend-^re. To defend, defeud-erg. To burn, incend-ere. Townsman, oppidanus, a, um. A Sequanian, Sequanus, i. (145.) Examples, (a) Caesar colls Divitiacus to himself. (h) The girl writes the let- ter with her own hand. Am^ong, inter (prep.). Com, friimentum, i. From (prep.) a or Sb.f A legion, legid, (legion) Is (f.). To ride, command, imper-^re (with dat. of person). To send away, j dismiss, ? dimitt-€rg. Caesar Divitiaciim ad se v6c&t. Puella ^pistoiam m^nu suft scribit. [Rem. Se is often doubled, for the sake of emphasis.] (c) Men always love them- selves. (d) The good live not for themselves, but for all. Homings semper sese dili- gunt. Boni non sib!, s^d omnibus vivunt. (146.) Translate into English, Hostes inter s& contendunt. — Oppidan! se suaque ab hosti- bus defendebant. — Helv^tii oppidS, sua omnia incendunt. — Cae- sar ti-es legiones seciim habet. — ^Consul legatos ab se dimittet. — Sapiens omnia sua* seciim portat. — ]3elvetii et Sequani ob- * Omnia sua = all his {property) ; the noun being understood. t A is used before consonants only ; ab before either vowels or consonants. DEMONSTEATIVE PRONOUNS. 63 sides inter sese dabant. — ^Boni sese non diligunt. — HelvStu frumentum omne* s6cum portabant. — Improbi sibi semper vi- vunt. — Sapiens sibi semper imperat (147). (147.) Rule of Syntax. — The Dative is used with some verbs signifying to command, to rule, to obey, (148.) Translate into Latin, Good men do not praise themselves. — The townsmen were fighting with each other (inter s e). — The wise man always carries all his (property) with him. — Bad men always love them- selves. — The general has three legions with him. — The towns- men will carry all their corn with them. — Bad men do not rule themselves (147). — The jEduans will defend themselves and their (property) from the soldiers. — Caesar was dismissing the messenger from him self. — The Germans will burn their vilk^es. LESSON XXVI. Demonstrative Pronouns. (149.) The Demonstrative Pronouns are so called because they are used to point out an object ; e. ^., this, that, these, those. J (150.) Is, that (often used for he, she^ it (143jR.), is thus declined; also idem, the very same, com- pounded of i s and d e m . Singular. Plural Singular, Plural. N. is, ea, id. il, eae, ea. idem, eadem, Idgm. iidem, eaed6m, eadem. G. ejus. eorum, earum, eoriim. ejusdem. eorundem, ea- rundgm, eo- rundem. D. ei. us, or eis. eidem. iisdem. Ace. gum, €Sm, Id. COS, eas, ea. gundem, ean- dem,idem. eosdem, eSs- dem, eadem. Abl. eo, ea, eo. us, or eis. eodem, eadem. iisdem. eodem. (151.) The following forms of the verb esse, to be, ftiust now be learned. * Frfimentum omnd = all their eom. 64 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. TENSES. SINGULAK. f Present. Imperfect. Future. 1st. Slim, I am. eram, ivas. er6, shall 07' will be. 2d. es, thou art. eras. eris. 3d. est, lie, she, Scc.,is. erat. erit. PLURAL. 1 Present. Imperfect. Future. Ist. siimus, we are. eramiis, were. erimiis. 2d. estis, 7/e are. gratis. eritis. 3d. sunt, thei/ are. erant. erunt. — ■ ' EXERCISE. (152.) Vocabulary , To keep off, > ^, ^_ ^ To prevent,] '''''^^'''' To refrain, temperare. Merchant, mercator, (mercator) Is (m.). Colour, color, (color) is (m.). And, atquS (conj.). Plato, Plato, (Platon) is. (153.) Examples. (a) The Helvetians contend with the Germans, and "keep them off from their hoimdaries. (h) mhe father calls his {own) sm to hmi{self)» (c'Wrhe father calls his daughter and her son to him(seZ/). B^ Observe carefully, that if his, hers, its, refers to the principal sub- ject of the sentence, it is expressed by the possessive (suiis, a, um); but if not, by the genitive (ejiis) of the demonstrative (is, ea, id). (154.) Translate into English. (1) Is, e a, id, used for he, she, it (personal). li ab injuria tempeptnt. — Is est in provincia tua. — Merca- tores ad eos saepe veniunt. — Ab iis multa (82, I., R.) poscimus. — ^Belgae cum iEduis contendunt, eosqiie suis finibiis (153, a) prohibent. • W (2) I s, used as demonstrative, this, that ; also,/m e m^ the same ____ . : ^i^ -v.. * Suisfinibus is in the ablative. All verbs o^ separating, depriving, Jcc may take a noun in the ablative, with the direct object in the accusative. Elegant, 61egans, (elegant) is. Gladly, willingly, libenter (adv.). Way, journey, iter, (itiner) is (n.). Kingdom, regnilm, I. Flower, flos, (flor) is (m.). Writer, scriptor, (scriptor) is (m.) Never, nunquam (adv.). Helve til cum Germanis con- tendunt," eos que suis fim- bus prohibent.* PatSr f ilium suum ad se v6- cat. PatSr filiam suam ^t f ilium e j ii s ad s e vocat. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 65 In eo itinere Caesar Crassum videt. — Dumnorix, ed tempore {118, II., c) regnum tenebat. — Non semper idem floribus (125, tl., a) est color. — In ea provincia sunt quattuor legiones. (3) Distinction between ejus and suus, a, iim. Cicero est scriptor^lariis ; ejUs Kbros Kbenter legimus. — Caesar ad se Dumnorigem atque f iliiim ejus vocabit. — Plato est scriptor elegans ; ejus opera lib enter lego. Dux ego vester eram. — Es-ne tu Socrates ? — Estisne beati? — Caesar dux vester erat. (155.) Translate into Latin. They were walking in the garden yesterday. — The king will give them (dat., 54) rewards. — They are in Gaul. — Mer- chants never come to them. — ^We were demanding rewards of (ab) them. — In that province Caesar finds many deserters. — In that province there are three legions. — At that time (abl.», 118, II., c) Caesar was leading the army.- — Horses (125, II., a) have not always the same colour. — Caesar calls Divitiacus and his brothers to him (self). — Caesar is an elegant writer ; we read his works with pleasure. — I am your leader. — You shall be our leader. — Caesar was our leader. — The -^duans contend with the Helvetians, and keep them off their boundaries. LESSON XXVII. Demonstrative Pronouns, continued. (156.) The Demonstrative hie, haec, hoc, this^ pomts out an object which is present to the speaker, and is called demonstrative of the first person; e. g., this book {of mine), h i c 1 i b e r. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. Sing. Plur. hic, haec, hoc. hi, hae, haec. hujus. horum, harum, horiim. huic. his. hunc, hanc, hoc. hos, has, haec. hoc, hac, hoc. his. Bern. Hic is used also (as was stated 143, K) for he, she, it ; e. g'., hie dicit, he (this man) speaks. (157.) IstCvista, istud, this, that, points out an 66 PBMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. object which is present to the person spoken to, and is called the demonstrative of the second person ; e, g,, that book {of yours), iste liber. 1 Nom. Gen. Dat F Ace. Abl. Sing. Plur. iate, ista, istQd. istI, istae, ista. istlus. istoriim, arum, orum. istl. istis. istum, ist^m, isttid. istos, istas, ista. isto, ista, isto. istls. Rem. Iste is often used to denote contempt; e. g., iste-ne dicit? Does that fellow speak ? (158.) II le, ilia, illud, points out an object re- mote from the speaker {that, the former, opposed to hie), and is called the demonstrative of the thii^d per- son. It is used often for the personal pronoun he, she, U (143, R.). It is declined throughout like iste, ista, istud. Mem. In the genitives, istlus, illius, ipsius, the penult i is long, contrary to the general rule (84, 1) that a vowel before another is short. (159.) Ipse, ipsa, ipsum, is properly an adjunc- tive pronoun, as it is added to other pronouns ; e, g., Ego me ipse laud6. Eg6 m.& ipsum laudd. / (and not another) praise myself. I praise myself (and not another). EXERCISE (160.) Vocabulary. Opi7iion, sententia, ce. To please^ placSre. To displease, dispUcerg. Soul, animtis, i. Proverb, proverbmm, i. Lazy, ignavus, a, um. Excellent, Celebrated, Reason, r&tifi, (ration) is (f.). Animal, animal, (animal) Is {neut). Pleasing, agreeable, gratus, a, iim. Base, torpis, g (104). Friend, amicus, I. To boast, praedicarg. To obey, parere (with dat., 147). Old, vetus, (veter) is (108, R., 2). Song, carm6n, (carmin) is (n.). prseceptum, i. [ praeclarus, S, iim. (161.) Examples, (a) This opinion jp leases me, I Haec sententid mih! pl^c^t ikmt displeases {me), \ ilia displicet. Turpe est de seipso praB- dicare. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 67 Rule of Syntax. — Verbs of pleasing, obeying, persuading, commanding, favouring, and the reverse,take the Dative case. (b) Thot friend of yours w Ist6 tuus Amicus vir clarus an illustrious man. est. (c) The soul itself moves it- Animus ips6 se mSvet. self. (d) It is base to boast of one's self. Rule of Syntax. — The infinitive is used as the subject of a verb, and is then regarded as a noun in the neuter gen- der; e. g., prsedicare (to boast), in {d), is nom. to est, and turpe (base) agrees with it in the neuter. (162.) Translate into English, {a) Hi pueri magistro parent. — Hae litterge valde me delec- tant. — Ciceronis libri valde mihi placent: eos libenter lego. — Hoc belliim gr^ve est. — Hie puer bonus est, ill§ ignavus. (b) Ista tua f ilia pulchra est. — Istud tuiim carmen mihi (106, II., c) gratiim est. — Praeclara sunt ista tua praecepta. — Vetus illud proverbiiim mihi placet. *(c) Omne animal seipsum diligit. — Imperator ipse militibus (147) imperat. — Ego mfe ips6 non laudabam. — Tu teipsum laud- abis. — Sapiens sibi ipsi imperat. (d) Jucundum est amare. (163.) Translate into Latin. (a) That illustrious precept was-pleasing-to (placeb^t) Cato. ■ — That brave general will command the soldiers. — The soldiers willingly obey this brave general. — This precept pleases me, that displeases (me). — The works of Caesar please me very much; I read them gladly (libenter). (6) That horse of yours is a beautiful animal. — I keep in memory (memoria teneo) that excellent precept of yours. — Those songs of yours are pleasing (grata) to me. — That letter of yours was delighting me very much. (c) The soul rules itself (161, c) by reason (rS^tione, 55, a). — The poet himself praises himself (159). — Csesar himself will command the legions (161, c). — The soldiers willingly (libentdr) 68 RELATIVE PRONOUN. obey Caesar himself. — Do you (135, II.,' 1) praise yourself? — Wise men themselves always rule themselves (147). {d) It is pleasant to love (one's) friends. — It is base to boast of (one's) friends. — It is agreeable to please (one's) father. LESSON XXVIII. (164.) The Relative Pronoun {who, which), qui, q u ae, q u 5 d, is thus declined : Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. Sing. Plur. qui, quae, quod. qui, quae, quae. cujus. quorum, quarum, quorum. CUl. quibus. quern, quam, quod, quos, quas, quae. quo, qua, quo. quibus. Rem. duicunque, quoecunque, quodcunque {whosoever, which- soever, whatsoever) is declined like qui, quae, quod: cunque be- ing simply annexed to the different cases. (165.) The Relative commonly refers to some preceding word, which is therefore called the antecedent ; e. g.^ The man, who lives well, is happy. Here man is the antecedent; who, the relative. The sentence in which the relative occurs is call- ed the relative sentence ; the other the principal or antecedent sentence ', e, g, (above), the man is happy, is the principal son- tence : who lives well, the relative sentence. EXERCISE. ( 1 66,) Vocabulary, Poor, aegens, (aegent) is (108). Enough, satis (adv.). Nearest to, neighbours to, proximus, a, iim. To dwell, incolere (intrans.). To inhabit, incolere {trans.). Blood, sanguis, (sanguin) is (m.). Also, etiSm (conj.). Heart, cor, (cord) is (n.). To despise, contemnere. Magnanimous, magnanimus, a, iim. Honest, honourable, honestiis, a, iim. (167.) Examples, (a) The boy, who reads, learns* Fountain, fons, (font) is (m.). Water, aqua, ae. Winter-quarters, hibemft, drum (pi.). To winter, hiemare. Arethusa, Arethiisa, ae. To return, restore, reddere. Virtue, virtiis, (virtiit) is (f.). To repel, propulsare. To vaunt, ostentare. Fame, fama, se. To do, to make, f acere. One, urms, a, iim. P u 6 r, qui l^glt, discit. RELATIVE PRONOUN. 69 c The girl, who reads, learns, Puella, quae l^g!t, discit. (b) The hoy, whom we see, Puer, quern vTdemus, est 15 handsome. pulchSr. The girl, whom we see, is Puella, quam videmus, est handsome. pulchra. Rule of Syntax. — The Relative Pronoun must agree witli its antecedent in gender and number (as in («) ), but its case is fixed by the construction of the relative sentence (e. g., in (a) qui is nomin. to legit: in (b) quern is ace, governed by videmus). (c) J who write. We who write. (d) He is poor who has not . enough. qui non non Ego, qui s c r i b 6. Nos, qui scribimiis. Rule of Syntax. — The verb in the relative sentence agrees with the relative in number, but takes the person of the antecedent. (1) Mgens est is, satis habet. (2) Is aegens est, qui satis habet. (3) Qui non satis habSt, is aegens est. (4) Qui non satis hab^t, aegens est. Rule of Position. — The relative generally stands at the be- ginning of its sentence, and (1) as near to its antecedent as possible. (2) I s and qui are made emphatic when IS begins the principal sentence and qui the relative sentence ; (3) and still more emphatic when the relative sentence stands first. (4) The antecedent is often ' omitted entirely. (168.) Translate into English. {a) Proximi sunt Germanis, qui trans Rheniim incSIunt. — Omne animal, quod sanguinem habet, habet etiam cor. — Cae- sar, ti-es legiones, q u ae in provincia hiemabant, ex hibernis edu- cit. — Omnia (82, I., R.) quae pulchra sunt, honesta sunt. (b) Felix est rex, que m omnes cives amant. — In hac insu- la est fons aquae dulcis, cui nom^n est Arethusa (125, II., a). 70 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. — Ariovistus obsides reddit, quos h^bet ab JEduis, — Galliae Sunt partes tres, quarum un^m Belgae incolunt. {d) (1) Beat! sunt ii, quorum vita virtute (abl., 55, a) regi- tfir. — (2) Is fortis est, qui injuriam propuls^t. — (3) Qui se ostentat, is stultus dicitur {is called a fool), — (4) Qui famam bonam contemmt, virtutem contemnit. — Fortis et magnanimiis est, non qui facit, sed qui propulsat injuriam. (169.) Translate into Latin. (a) The songs which we hear are pleasant (grata) to us (106, II., c). — The king who rules wisely is hap^. — All animals which have blood have also hearts. — Caesar leads across the Rhine the five legions which were wintering in the province. (6) Happy is the teacher whom all (his) scholars love. — In tliat (e a) island (there) is a city whose name is {to which the name is*., 125, II., a) Syracuse (Syracusae). — In this (hac) city there is a fountain whose name is Arethusa. — Of Britain (there) are three parts, of which (gen.) the English inhabit one. {d) (1) Happy is he whose life is ruled by the precepts of virtue. — He is wise who diligently serves (c5lit) the gods. — (2) They are brave who repel an injury. — (3) They who vaunt themselves are called fools. — (4) Who repels an injury, is brave and magnanimous. LESSON XXIX. Interrogative Pronoun. (170.) The Interrogative Pronoun is precisely like* the Relative in form, excepting that for the nom., sing., and masc,, it has q u i s, and for the nom. and ace, neut, quid; thus, qui s, quae, quid. (171.) Quisnam, qusenam, quidnam, express a more emphatic interrogation than the simple q u i s, q u ae, quid, the syllable nam answering to our English *' pray ;" e, ^., Pray, what are you doing ? \ Q u i d n a m agis ? | * S u n t, plural, because Syracfissa is plural. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 71 (172.) In asking questions, the different cases of quis can bo used as substantives or as adjectives, excepting that (1) In the nom. sing, masc, quis is used as a substantive. In the nom. sing, masc, qui is used as an adjective. (2) In the nom. and accus., neut., quid is used as a sub- stantive. In the nom. and accus., neut., quod is used as an ad- jective. Quis venit? Qui homo venit ? Quis homo est 1 Quid times? Quod periciilum timgs 1 (1) Who comes 7 What man comes ? Who is the man ? (2) What do you fear ? What danger do you fear ? (173.) The answer yes is given by repeating the verb which asks the question ; no, by repeating the verb with non. Vero {certainly), added to the verb in an affirmative answer, gives it more emphasis ; e, g., Are you writing J I am writing. Are you reading 7 I am not reading. Will you do what I ask 7 I will certainly do (it), EXERCISE, (174.) Vocabulary, Scribis-n6 ? Scrib8. Legis-n6 ? Non 16 go. F^cies-ne quae* r6g5? Faciam vero. New, novus, a, van. News, novi (neat. gen. of noviis, used with a neut. adj. or pronoun). Num, interrogative particle, used when no is expected as the an- swer. To do, agerg. To he among, intSresse (inter + essg) ; but quid interest ? = ickai is the difference ? Between, among, IntSr (prep., ace). Beast, brute, bestia, ae. An evil, malum, I. Without, sine (prep., abl.). Figure, figura, ae. Mortal, mortalis, e. Certainly, ver6 (afltenative parti cle). To carry, v6hSr#. Immortal, immortdlis,! S. * HaBC, quae, plural, should be translated this, what, singular, t Observe the force of in prefixed to adjectives. Mortalis = mortal j in 4- mortalis = immortalis, immortal. 72 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. (175.) Examples, (a) What is the news ? (6) Is there anything new ? (There is not, is there ?) (c) Why do you laugh ? Quid est novi? (=What is there of new?) Num est quidnam novi? (N u m expects the answer no.) Quid rides? (176.) Translate into English, Quis nos vocat? — Cujus hic liber est? — Quern vides?— Quid agis. — Quid interest inter hominem ^t bestiam ? — Quam domiim invenies sine mails? — Quid legis? — Epistolam. — Quaa amicitia est inter improbos ? — Niim Csesar^m times ? — Non ti- meo. — Qua in urbe (125, IV., N., X) siimus? — Quis homS est? — Ego sum Csesar. — Niim animus f igtiram habet ? — Sunt ne homines mortales ? — Sunt vero. — Quid times ? Caesarem veins. (177.) Translate into Latin. Who calls me ? — Whose are those books ? — ^What men do you see ? — ^What are you writing ? — A letter. — What book are you reading ? — What is the difference between the good and the wicked ? — Who is the soldier ? — What is the difference be- tween wolves and dogs ? — Do you not fear the enemy ? — I do not fear (them.) — What man will you find without a fault (cul- p a) ? — In what town are we ? — Whose house is this ? — What city will you find without evils? — What is the difference between men and beasts ? — What do you fear ? You are car- rying the king. — Are men immortal (niim) ? — They are not. LESSON XXX. Indefinite Pronouns, (178.) The Indefinite Pronouns denote an object in a general way, without reference to a particular indi- vidual ; e, g., any one, some one, &c. They are, 1. duidSm, a certain one, &c., plural, some. 2. Cluivis, ) , INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 73 3. Cluisquam, any, any one (e. g., when it is denied that there are any). [Neut. q u i c q u a m {subst) ;quodquam (adj.). This pronoun is used chiefly in negative sentences.] 4. duispiam, somebody, some (neut.). 5. Aliquis, some one, something (neut); any (adj.). 6. Q,uisqu6,eac/i, unusquisqu6,eac^ owe (stronger than quisquS). 7. Ecquis? used mterrogatively, (does) any onel anything 1 ^^ Observe carefully that each of the above takes quid in neuter nom., and ace, when used substantively; and quod when used adjectively. EXERCISE. (179.) Vocahulary, The tenth, dgclmiis, a, um. A javelin, tragula, ae. To see, to owtice, conspicerS. Judgment, discretion, consilium, i. Eternity, aetemitas, (setemitat) is (f.). Maker, artificer, faber, fabri (m.). Fifth, quintus, a, um. Youth, juventus, (juventut) is (f.). Fortune, fortunfi, oe. Forever, in aetemura. Belong, pertinerS. (180.) Examples, {a) Something new. JEach one of us. A certain thing new. Some dignity. Art, ars, (art) is (f.). Form, forma, ae. To discover, inv6nirS. For, etenim, conj. (alvp'ays stands first in its clause). Cultivation, humanity, humamtag, atis (f.). Common, communis, is, 6. Bond, vinculum, i. Dignity, dignitas, (dignitat) is (f.). Body, corpus, (corp6r) is (n.). Aliquid novi. Unusquisque nostrum. Quiddara novi. Aliquid dignitatis. TR,ule of Syntax. — The indefinite pronouns may be used partitively, and then govern the genitive. (h) A certain one of the sol- diers. Some of the soldiers. Quidam (sing.) ex militl- bus. Quidam {plur.) ex militi- bus. Rem. The ablat. with ex is used instead of the genitive, especially with quidam. (181.) Translate into English. Quidam ex militibiis decimae legionis venieb§,t. — Quinto did (118, II., c) tragula a quod am milite conspicitur. — Yiri, in quibus aliquid consilii (180, a) est, magnanimi simt.- — Tempua G 74 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. est pars q used am aeternitatis. — Cuivis (125, 11., a) &nimali corpus est. — Quilib^t est faber fortunae suae. — IJnicuique* (125, II., a) nostrum (180, 120) est animus immortalis. — Qui s que nostrum (180) in aetemum vivet. — Animus non habet form^m aliquam, nee figurdm. — A liquid novi invenies. — Etenim omnes artes, quae ad humanitatem pertinent, habent quoddam commune vinculum. (182.) Translate into Latin, [The pronouns of the lesson are italicized in the exercise.] Some of the soldiers of the fifth legion are wounded (pres.).-^ On the fifth day (118, II., c) the enemy is noticed by a certain soldier of the tenth legion. — Men, in whom there is some dignity (180), are magnanimous. -^To each man (=of men) there is a soul and a body.— I will give the book to any-one-you-please of the scholars. Each one of us shall live forever. — You will discover a certain thing new. — Some of the soldiers are in the city. — For all the arts which belong to cultivation have a certain common bond. — Youth is a certain part of life. — Is not (estne) any man-you-please the maker of his own fortune ?— Has the soul {use num) any form or figure ? LESSON XXXI. Correlative Pronouns. (183.) Correlative Pronouns are such as an5t^?er to each other ; e, g,, how great ? so great. How many f so many, &c. [This correlation is often expressed in English by adverbs or conjunc- tionB : stick a man as : as Is the general, so are the troops, &c.] (184.) The Correlative Pronouns are Demonstrative: Relative. Indefinite. talis, such. tantus, so great, so much. *t6t, so many. *t6tid6m, just so mxmy. qaalis ; as, of what kind. quantus, as great. ^ i *qu6t, as many. qualiscunquS, of whatever kind. quantuscunquS, however great. Sliquantus, somewhat great. *&liqu6t, some. *quotqu6t, however many. * Unus and quisquft are both declined in unnsquisqu6. UnQg has gen. unius, dat. uni. CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 75 Rem. 1. dualis? of what kind? quantus? how great? qn5t? how many ? are also used interrogatively. 2. Those marked thus (*) are indeclinable ; the rest are declined like adjectives. EXERCISE. (185.) Vocabulary, Vhere, ubi (adv.). Toil, opera, ae. 'Pleasure, voluptas, (voluptSt) Is (f.). Reward, praemium, i. 3rold, aurum, i. y, pScuni^, ae. (186.) Examples. [a) So much toil (= of toil). How much pleasure ? (== of pleasure ?) No reward (=: nothing of re- ward^. Much gold (= of gold). Fear, timor, (timor) is (nx.). Or, v6l (coiy.). Advantages, bonS (neut. adj.). To afford, praeberg. To covet, expetere. [is (f.). Liberality, liberalitas, (Hberalitat) Tantum 6peraB. Quantum v61uptat!s? Nihil praemii. Multum auri. (But, much money = magna, pecunia, not multum pecuniae.) Aliquantum &gri. A pretty large piece of ground. Rule of Syntax. — The neuters, tantum, quantum, aiiquantiim; also, multum, nihil, quid, aliquid, and others, are used as neuter nouns, and followed by the genitive (Synt., 695, 6., K.). Ohs. Tantum, quantum in neut, with genitive = so much, so many, how much, how many ; but in masc. and fern., agreeing with the noun, io greats, how great; e. g., how many books ? quantum Hbrorum; so great fear, tantus timor. (6) As is the master, so are the scholars. Qualis est magister, tales sunt discipiili ; or (with est and sunt omitted), qualis magister, tales discipuE. (187.) Translate into English, Quales sunt duces, tales sunt milites. — Fortunae bona (82, II.), quantacunque sunt, incerta sunt. — Tantus timor omnem ex- ercitiim occupabat. — Ubi tantam virttitem invenies? — Quan- tum voluptatis virtus prsebet ! — Fratri est (125, II., a) ftliquan- 76 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. tiim pecuniae. — Virtus nihil praemii vel pecuniae expetit. — Pat6r inihi magnam pecuniam dabit. — Quantum (166, Obs.) librorum habes ? — Quot homines, tot sententiae. (188.) Translate into Latin. As are the generals, so are the soldiers. — As is the king, so are the leaders. — As are the masters (heri), so are the slaves. — As ai*e the fathers, so are the children. — So great an army is coming. — The advantages of the body, however gi-eat they may be (sunt), are uncertain. — Where will you find so great liberality ? — How many (186, Obs.) rewards does virtue afford ? — Good (men) covet no (186, a) reward. — Will your father give (135, II.) you much money ? — Has your brother much gold ? — ^As are the chiefs, so are the citizens. — My father has (125, II., a) a pretty large piece of ground. § 16. NUMERAL S. (XXXII.— XXXIII.) LESSON XXXIL Numerals, — Partial Table, (189.) Numerals are divided into the four classes bllowing, of which the first three are adjectives, the burth, adverbs. CAKDINAi. ORDINAL. DISTRIBUTIVE. ADVERBIAL. One apiece, one by One, two, &c. First, second, &c. one, one at a time, &c. singuli, 8B, a. Once, twice, &c. I. unus, a, um. primus, a, um. s6mel. II. duo, oe, 6. secundus, a, um. blnl, ae, a. bis. III. tres, es, triS. tertius, a, um. temi, ae, a. t6r. IV. quattuor. quartus, a, um. quatemi, ae, a. quater. V. quinque. quintus, a, um. quinl, ae, a. qumquies. VI. sex. sextiis, a, um. seni, ae, a. sexies. VII. sept6m. Septimus, a, um. septeni, ae, a. septies. VIII. octo. octavus, a, iim. octoni, ae, a. octies. IX. D6v6m. noniis, a, um. noveni, ae, a. novies. X. dec6m. decimiis, a, um. denl, ae, a. d6cies. XL undgcim. undecimus, a. undenT, ae, a. andficies. XII. duSdScim. duodficimus, a, um. duodeni, ae, &. duodecies. Rem. For the declension of uniis and duo, see 194. Tres is declined like a plural adjective of second class, 194. The remaining cardinals are undeclined. The ordinals and distributives are declined like adjectives of the first class. EXERCISE. (190.) Vocabulary, In ally altogether, omnind. Multitude, multitudd, (multitudln) is (f). Hour, hora, as. To he distant, distarS. Mile, miUia,* (mill) ium (pi. n.). Year, annus, i. Month, mensis, (mens) is (m.). Another, altSr, a, um (194, R. 1.). Thirty -six, sex et triginta. To levy, conscriberS. Night-watch, vigilia, 83. From, after, de (with abl.). To strive, to hasten, contenders. Italy, Italia, 8B. * Mi lis, plur. milli& = 1000. Millia (passuum, of paces understood) =2 a mile, G2 *f8 NUMERALS. Horas quattuor pugnant. UrbsdistatquinquS millia. (101.) Examples. (a) They fight four hours, (b) The city is distant five miles. (c) A ditch eleven feet wide , Foss& undecim p6des lata. Rule of Syntax. — The accusative answers to the questions how long 1 (whether of time or space), how broad ? how high? &c.; e. g., m (a) IjLor&s; in (b) milliS.; in (c) pedes. (d) How long ? may also be expressed by a noun in the geni- tive, depending on another noun ; e. g., a ditch of ten feet, fossa decern pedum. (192.) Translate into English. Erant ommno itinera duo. — Galliae sunt partes txes, quarum imam incolunt Belgse, alteram Aquitani. — Uniis 6 raultitudinS vulneratiir. — Horas sex pugnabant. — Urbs distat dec6m milli^. — * In anno duodecim menses sunt. — Caesar diias legiones conscri- bit. — Caesar tres legiones quae in Gallia hiemabant educit. — Caesar tres legiones ex hibernis educit. — Sunt omnino itinera quattuor.— Caesar de quarta vigilia legiones educit. — Consul legiongm d^cim^m in castrS, reducit. — Caesar cum quinque le- gionibiis in Itali&m contendit. — Erat omnino in Gallia legiS una. (193.) Translate into Latin. There are in all three ways. — There are of Gaul three parts, of which the Sequanians inhabit one. — There are of the city five parts. — Four of (= out of) the multitude are wounded. — The soldiers fight seven hours. — In three years are thirty-six months. — The villages are distant nine miles. — The wood is dis- tant four miles. — The consuls will levy six legions. — Caesar will lead out five legions from Italy. — The general was levying two legions in Gaul. — Caesar will lead out the soldiers in the second watch. — The consul, in the third watch leads back the soldiers into the camp. — The tenth legion fights (pugnat). — There are altogether in Gaul two legions. — Caesar brings back the fifth le- gion. — Caesar brings back the fifth legion after the second watch. NUMERALS. 79 LESSON XXXIII. Numerals^ continued. (194.) Declension of unus, du5, and tres. / One, Sing. Two, Plur. Three, Plur. N. G. D. unus, a, iim. unms, Tus, lus. unT, i, i. the rest regular. N.V. Gen. D. Ab. Ace. duo, duee, duo. duorani, duarum, duorum. duobus, duabus, duobus. duos and duo, duas, duo. tres, tres, tria. trium, trium, triiim. tribus,tribus,tribus. tres, tres, tria. Rem. (1.) Like unus are declined ilius, a, ud, another. yt6r, a, um, the one, the other (of two). S'euter, trtL, trum, neither of tlve two, S^ullus, §, um, no one. Solus, a, um, alone. lotus, ft, fipa, the whole. Ullus, a, una, an^ one. IJtSr, trft, trum, which of the two. UterquS, traqu6, tmmque, each of the two, both; and other compounds of titer. (3.) Like dtio is declined ambd, od, 6, both. EXERCISE (195.) Vocabulary. What one, quotiis, ft, um. Most, plerusque, ftquS, umquS ; e. g., most men, homines plerlqu6 , most insects, insecta plerftquS. Virgil, Virgilius, i. More, mftgis (adv.). [Refer to the colmxm of distributives (189).] (196.) Examples. A beam, trabs, (trab) is (£).' Insect, insectum, i. Horace, Horatius, i. To migrate, m!grftr6. Writer, scriptdr, (scriptdr) fe (m.). Mother, matSr, (matr) is (f.). {a) My father will give us two hooks apiece. (6) What hour is it ? The third, (c) He will come for my sake alone. {d) Which pleases you ? Neither. (e) The beams are three feet distant (apart) from each other. Pater nobis bin 6s Kbros d&- bit. Quota horl est? Tertia. Mea uniiis causa (abl.) v6- niet. titer tibi placet? Neut6r. Trabes inter se distant ternos pedes (191, c). * When ftlius is repeated, it means some, others. 60 NUMERALS. (197.) Translate into English. Mat^r nobis quaternos libros dabit. — Nobis sunt (125, II., a) temi equi. — Binae omnibus avibiis alas sunt. — Insecta pleraque senos, alia octonos, p^des habent. — Quota hora est ? Nona. — Milites utriusque exercitus sunt fortes. — Tua iinius causa ve- nient. — Virgiliiis atque Horatiiis poetae sunt praeclari ; uter tibi magis placet? (161, a.) Virgiliiis. — Bis in Einno milites veni- unt. — September est nonus anni mensis. — Trabes int^r se dis- tant binos pedes (191, c). (198.) Translate into Latin, [Some of the words will be found in 194, R. 1.] We have (125, II., a) four dogs apiece (196, a). — The mas- ter gives us five books at a time. — All men have (125, II., a) two eyes apiece. — Most insects have six (senos) feet; some (194*) nine, others (194*) ten, others (194*) twelve.— What o'clock (hour) is it ? — The fifth.— The eighth.— The eleventh. — The tweljfth. — The generals of each army are brave. — Why do you come ? For your sake alone (196, c). — Cicero and Caesar are excellent writers ; which pleases you ? Neither. — Which pleases you more ? Caesar. — The birds migrate twice in the year. — The soldiers will come eight times a year. — Oc- tober is the tenth month of the year ; November the eleventh ; December the twelfth. — The beams are four feet distant from each other. — The beams are seven feet apart from each other. § 17. /ERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN 18. LESSON XXXIV. Verbs of the Third Conjugation in id, (199.) Some verbs of the third conjugation, instead of taking the simple verb-stem for the tense-stem in the tenses for incomplete action, add i to the verb- stem in these tenses. They form the infinitive, how- ever, in ere, like other verbs of the third. (200.) Infin. Active, cap-gre, to take. SINGULAR. ll Present. Imperfect. Future. capi-6. cap-i-ebam. cfip-i-5m. cap-is, cap-i-ebas. cap-i-es. cap-it. II cap-i-ebat. cap-i-6t. PLURAI.. Present. Imperfect. Future. cftp-i-mus. cfipi-ebamus. cap-i-emiis. cap-i-tis. cap-i-ebatis. cap-i-etis. cap-i-unt. cap-i-ebant. cap-i-ent. Infin. Passive, cap-i, to &6 taken. SINGULAR. 1 Present. Imperfect. Future. cap-i-6r. capi-ebar. cap-i-ar. cap-6-ris. cap-i-ebaris. cap-i-eris. cap-i-tur. cap-i-ebatur. cap-i-etur. PLURAL. 1 Present. Imperfect. Future. cap-i-mur. capi-ebamur. cap-i-emur. cap-i-mini. cap-i-ebamini. cap-i-emini. cap-i-untur. capi-ebantur. cap-i-entur. EXERCISE. (201.) Vocabulary. [In aU cases, verbs of the class described above will be indicated in the vocabularies by the ending id, after the infinitive form ; e. g., to make, ftlc6r6 (id).] 82 VERBS OF THIRD CONJUGATION IN 10. Pardon, favour y vSniS, 89. Excuse, excusatid, (excusation) is (£)• To receive, accept, accipSrS (io). Way, road, iter, (itingr) is (neut.). To undertake, susciperfi (id). To make, facerS (id). (202.) Example. Willingly Ccesar gives par- don and receives the excuse. And, quS.* Ship, navis, (nav) is (f»). To repair, to renew, to rebuild, rSfi- c6r6 (io). Lon^, lon^s, a, um. Wall, murus, i. » Harbour, portiis, iis (m.). Libenter Caesar dat veniam, excusationemque* accipit. (203.) Translate into English, Labieniis multa Germanorum (78, II., b) oppida capiebat. — Helvetii per provinciam nostram iter faciunt. — Vulnera gravia a militibus accipiuntur. — Mdui bellum raagniim suscipiebant. — Libenter Caesar nuntios accipit, iisque (201, N.) veniam dat. — Imperator obsides civitatis libenter accipiet. — Nuntiiim a patre eras accipies. — Crassiis naves longas, quae in portu sunt, reficit. — Consul muros urbis reficit. (204.) Translate into Latin. The enemy were making (their) way through our province. — The Romans were rapidly (celeriter) making their way through Gaul. — We shall receive a messenger from the city to-day. — The Helvetians were undertaking a severe and great war. — The soldiers receive many and severe wounds. — We shall make (our) way through Britain. — Caesar will willingly receive the excuse of the iEduans, and grant them (iisque) favour. — The gifts of a father are gladly (libenter) received. — The long ships are repaired by Caesar — The general was rebuilding the old (ve teres) ships which were in the harbour. — We shall re- build the old walls. (205.) Observe the formation of the following words : Accip6r6 {to receive), = ftd {to)+c&p&Y^ {to take), Suscip6r6 {to undertake), = sub {under)-\-c&peiY6. Kef ic6r6 {to rebuild), = rfi+facSrd {to make again). § {^* In the composition of verba with prepositions, ^ £requen|iy passei into i, as in these examples. * E t joins words or sentences which are considered independent and of equal importance with each other ; qu6 joins a word or sentence close- ly to another, as an appendage to it. § 18. DEPONENT VERBS. LESSON XXXV. Deponent Verbs. (206.) Deponent verbs are such as have the pass- ive form, but an active meaning ; 6. ^., ho r tor, I ex- hort (not / am exhorted), (207.) The forms of deponents in the tenses for incomplete action of the indicative mood are precisely the same as those of passive verbs (Lessons XIL, XIIL) ; we therefore need only give the^r^^ persons. (208.) DEPONENT FORMS. INDICATIVE. let conj. 2d conj. Sd conj, 4th conj. hortor, I exhort, [hortabar, I was exhorting, fateor, I confess, fatebar, Iwcls confessing. sequor, I follow, sequfibar, I was following. metior, / measure. raeMeh^r, I was measuring. hortabor, I will exhort. f atebor, / will confess. sequar, I will follow. metiar, I tdU measure. INFINITIVE. 1. hort-ari, totxhorL 2. ftlt-€i1, to confess. 3. sequ-i, to follow. 4. m6t-iri, to measure. [ B^" In the vocabularies deponent verbs are always given by the in- Jinitive forms. Observe that the ending -ari shows that the yerb is of the 1st conj.; -eri, the 2d; -i, the 3d; -iri, the 4th.] EXERCISE. (209.) Vocabulary, [Transitive deponents govern the accusative, unless it is otherwise mentioned in the vocabularies.] To embrace, amplect-i. To gain, to possess on^s self of, p6t- M (with gen. or abL ; general- ly gen. in Caes.). To endeavour, con-ari. To follow, sequ-T. Asi as if, tanquam (adv.). To strive after, purstte, persequ-i (per + sequi, to follow through). Glory, gloria, ae. All, tottis, a, urn (194, R., 1). Bravery, virtue, virtus, (virtut) is (f.). Long, diu (adv.). Sin, fault, peccatum, i. 84 DEPONENT VERBS. (210.) Example. Helvetii p6r provinciS,m nos- tramit^rf^cere conantiir. The Helvetians endeavour to pass (= to make way) through our province. Rule of Syntax, — The infinitive is used in Latin (as in English) to complete the imperfect ideas expressed by certain verbs ; e. g.^ I wish, I can, I hasten, I endeavour, &c., as facer e in the above example.* (211.) Translate into English. P ater filiiim et filiam amplectitiir. — Imperator milites diti hor- tabatur. — Dumnorix totiiis (194, R. 1) Gallise potitur. — Pecca- tS, me a fatebor. — Principes totius Galliae potiri conabantiir. — Romani per Britanniam iter facere conantiir. — Gloria virtutem tanquam umbra sequitiir. — Magnos homines virtute (55) m^ti- miir, non fortuna. — Milites semper gloriam persequuntiir. — Milites ducem libenter sequebantiir. (212.) Translate into Latin. The father will embrace (his) sons and daughters. — The chiefs possess themselves of all the province. — Do you confess (135, II.) your fault? — The Helvetians were endeavouring to pass through Gaul. — Glory will foUow bravery as a shadow. — We were exhorting the soldiers yesterday. — ^We shall gladly follow Caesar. — They are rapidly making their way through our prov- ince. — ^You measure men by (their) fortune, not by (their) bravery. — The chiefs will endeavour to lead the army across the Rhine (113, II., a). — Generals always strive after glory. — Are you exhorting (135, II.) your son ? — The Romans always fol- lowed glory. ' * Observe carefully that a purpose is never expressed by the simple infinitive in Latin. It would not be Latin to saydiscferg venit, Accowes to learn. § 19. ADVERBS. LESSON XXXVI. Adverbs, [This section need not be learned by heart in the first course, but the iistinction oi primitive and derivative should be acquired ; and the section ihould be afterward referred to whenever examples occur.] (213.) Adverbs (17) are either Primitive or Deriva- tive. [We give but a few here ; a fuller list will be given hereafter. — See Summary of Etymology, 678.] $. 7. (214.) Primitive Adverbs: 1. Negative. — ^N5n, not; baud, not; ne (interrog. crimper.), not; ne- quidem (always separated by some word), nx)t even. 2. Of Place. — Ub!, where; ibi, there; quo? whither? hiic, hither j illuc, thither; undS, whence ; ind6, thence, &c. 3. Of Time. — ^unc, now; tvLm or tunc, then ; nuy&r, lately ; eras, to-m,orrow ; ho die, to-day ; hSri, yesterday, &c. 4. Of Quality, &c. — Admodum, very; an, whether; cur, why (in- terrog.) ; 6tiam, also ; f6re, almost, &c. (215.) Derivative Adverbs are nearly all formed from adjectives or participles by adding e or iter to their stems. 1. Add e to the stem of adjectives of the ^rs^ class ; e. g., Adjectives. Adverbs. Alt-US, high. Alt-e, high. LibSr, free. Lib6r-e, freely. Clar-us illustrious. Clar-e, illustriously. &c. &c. Rem. Bonus makes b6n6, well, and milus {bad),m.^\^, badly. All others end in e {long). ' 2. (a) Add it fir to the stem of adjectives of the second and third doss* es ; e. g., Adjectives. Adverbs. C6l6r, swift. Celer-itfir, swiftly. BrSv-is, brief. Brev-it6r, briefly, {h) But those which end in ns do not take the connecting vowell; H 86 ADVERBS. Prudens, prudent. I Pruden-tSr, prudently. Sapiens, wise. \ Sapien-tfir, wisely. Rem. Audax, bold, makes audac-tSr, boldly. 3. Some are derived from nouns by adding tus or timto the stem by means of a connecting vowel , e. g., ccel-itus, /row heaven ; fund- ita&ifrom the ground, totally ; gr6g-a-tim, byjlocks, &c. (216.) Cases of adjectives, especially in the neuter gender, are often used as adverbs ; e. g,, dulce, sweet- ly ; ^rimUm, first ; islso, falsely, &>c. EXERCISE. (217.) Vocabulary. Well, b6n6, derived irregularly from bonus, good. Bravely, fortit6r, derived regularly (215, 2, a) from fortis, brave. Sharply, spiritedly, acrit^r, derived regularly from ac6r (acr-is), sharp. Swiftly, cel6rit6r, derived regularly from cel6r, swift. Happily, beate, derived regularly (215, 1) from beatiis, happy. Honestly, honeste, derived regularly from honestus, honest. Almost, fere. Rightly, recte, derived regularly from rectus, right. Impiously, impie, derived regularly from impius, impious. In flocks, gregatim. To labour, I&b6rar6. To blame, to accuse, find fault with, incusare. Socrates, Socrates, (Socrat) is. Not even, nequidem (always separa- ted by one or more words). Honeste et recte viv^re est bene et beate viverS. (218.) Examples, {a) To live honestly and rightly is to live well and happily. Rule of Position. — The adverb is generally placed hefore the word which it qualifies. (6) Almost all men love them- I Omnes f 6r 6 h6mines s^se diM- selves. I gunt. Fere is generally placed between the adjective and noun. (c) He does not praise even Socrates Ne SocrS-temquidSmlaudat. (219.) Translate into English. Hostes nobiscum (125, II., b) acrit^r pugnabant. — Equi in §,gris celeriter currebant. — B6n§ vivSre est beate viv^r^. — Cer- vi grSgatlm semp6r currunt. — Semper sapiens rect© vivit. — Diu ADVERBS. 87 et acntSr milites pugnabant. — Omnes fere homines impie vivunt. — Omnes fere aves bis in anno migrant. — Ne Ciceronem quidem laudabit. — Ne hoc quidem (not even with this) delectabitiir. (220.) Translate into Latin. The JEduans were fighting long and bravely. — Caesar sharply accuses the Helvetians. — Horses and stags run swiftly. — The farmers were labouring long in the fields. — Almost all men love their (own) children. — Caesar led almost all the Germans across the Rhine (113, II., a). — I waited for you long. — The bad do not live happily. — To live happily is to live rightly. — You will not be delighted even with this. — Not even this will delight (my) father. — Not even Caesar will be praised. — Almost all birds fly in flocks. — They do not praise even Virgil. — Almost all wise (men) live happily. — Almost all men strive-after glory. — To live pru- dently is to live happily. — The commander will blame the lieutenant sharply. § 20. PREPOSITIONS. (XXXVII.— XXXVIII.) LESSON XXXVII. Prepositions, [This section (221) need not be learned by heart in the first course, but should be constantly referred to whenever examples occur.] (221.) The following prepositions govern the ac- cusative case : Ad, to. Jtpiid, at. Ante, before (of time and place). Adversus, adversum, against. C 1 s, c i t r a, 071 this side. Circa and circum, around, about. Circit6r, about, towards (indefi- nitely of time or number). Contra, against. Erga, towards. Extra, beyond, without. Infra, beneath, below (the contrary of supra). Int6r, between, among. Intra, within (the contrary of ex- tra). •Tux t ft, near to, beside. Ob, on account of. P e n 6 s, in the power of. P6r, throu.^h. P6n6, behind. Post, after (both of time and space). Proetfir, beside. P r 6 p 6, near. Propter, near, on account of. Secundum, after, in accordance with. Supra, above. T r a n s, 071 the other side. Versus (is put after its noun), t(h wards a place. Ultra, beyond. PrsB, before, owing to. Pro, before, for. Sin6, without. T 6nu s (is put after its noun), as far as, up to. , (222.) The following govern the ablative case : A, lib, from, by. Clam, without the knowledge of. Coram, in the presence of. Cum, with. De, down from, concerning. £, ex (e before consonants only, ex before both consonants and vowels), out of from. The following lines contain the prepositions governing the ablative, and can be readily learned by heart : Absque, a, ab, abs, and de, Coram, clam, cum, ex, and e, Teniis, sin6, pro, and prse. (223.) The following govern the accusative or ablative : 1. f n, [a] with the accus., (1) into, on, to (to the question whither 7) (2) against, (b) With the ablative, in, on (to the question where ?) 2. Sub, [a) with the accus,, (1) under (to the question whither?) {2) about PREPOSITIONS. 89 or towards (indefinitely of time), {b) With the ablative, under (to the question where ?) 3. SupSr, (a) with the accus., above, over, [b) With the ablative, upon, concerning-. 4. Subt6r, under, beneath (but Kttle used). EXERCISE. (224.) Vocabulary. The Garonne (river), G&nimna, ae. An Aquitanian, Aquitaniis, i. Aquitania, Aquitania, ae. The Leman, or Geneva (lake), L6- mannus, T. Jura (mountain), JurS, ae (m. 25, a). To extend or carry, perducSrS (pSr +duc6r6). State, civitas, (civitat) is (f.). Royal power (kingdom), regnum, i. (225.) Examples. History, hist6ria, sb. Fable, fabiila, ae. To bound (limit), continerfi (con+t6- nerS). Part or side, pars, (part) is (f.). On one side, ima ex parts. The Rhone (river), Rhoddniis, i. To divide, dividSre. Lake, lacus, us (m.), (112, R. 1). To remain, mfinerfi. Gallos ab Aquitanis G&rum- na fltimen dividit. {a) The river Garonne sepa- rates the Gauls from the Aquitanians. Rule of Syntax, — Two nouns expressing the same person or thing take the same case, and are said to be in appo- sition with each other ; 6. g.^ in the above example, G a- rumna flumen. Csesarin Galliam contendit. Erat omnino in Gallia legi6 una. (&) Ccesar haptens into Gaul. (c) There was altogether in Gaul one legion, (226.) Translate into English. CaBs2.r a lacu ad montem, muriim perducit. — Apiid* Herodo- tiim, patrSm historiae, sunt multae fabiilse. — Caesar a lacu Le- manno ad montem Juram, muriim perducit. — Mercator in urbe manet. — Pueri in domo sunt. — Princeps regnum in civitate oc- cupat. — Consul exercitiim in fines Sequanorum ducit. — Hel- ve tii continentur una ex parte (125, IV., N.J) flumine Rheno ; altera ex parte monte Jura, tertia ex parte l^cu Lemanno 6t flumine Rhodano. * A^nid is used with the names of authors (instead of in, with the name of their works) ; e. g., ipud Cic6r6nem l^gimus, we read in Cicero, H2 90 PREPOSITIONS. (227.) Translate into Latin* Caesar was extending walls and ditches (fossasque) from the river to the camp. — The soldiers remain in the camp. — Caesar will seize the royal power in the state. — The river Rhine sep- arates the Gauls from the Germans. — Caesar hastens into Italy and levies (conscribere) five legions. — The deserters remain in the town. — The general will lead'the soldiers into Italy. — Aqui- tania is bounded on one side by, the river Garumna ; on another side by mountains; on the third side by the river Rhone. — You will find (invenies) many fine (praeclara) precepts in (apud) Cicero. — You will find many fables in Herodotus, the father of history. LESSON XXXVIII. Prepositions in Composition, (228.) Most of the prepositions given in Lesson XXXVII. are used as prefixes in composition with verbs, and modify their signification; e. ^., pone re, to place; post-ponere, to place after, (229.) The foUow^ing prepositions are never used alone, but always as prefixes in composition : 1. Amb, round, about (from am bo, both) ; ambir6 (from amb-j-ird, to go round), to walk round, to canvass for votes. % Con, together (a variation of cam, with) ; con-jnng6r6 (con+jun- g6r6), to join together, to unite. 3. D i or d i s, asunder (a variation of d e,from) ; dis-ced6r6(di s-f-c h- d6r6, ^o give place asunder), to depart. In, with adjectives, means not; in-doctus, unlearned; with verbs, means in, into; e. g., ir-rump6r6 (in+rump6r6), to burst into. 4. R e, back, again ; r S - fi c 6 r 6 (r 6+f &o6v6,to make again), to refit 5. Be, aside; se-duc$r6 (8e+duc6r6, to lead astray), to seduce. PREPOSITIONS. 91 Cohort, c6hors, (c6hort) is (f.) To station, coll6car6 (con+l6car6). To distribute, distribuSrS (dis+trf- buere). Africa, Africa, ae. Europe, EuropS, ae. Horseman, 6quSs, (Squit) ia (m.). EXERCISE, (230.) Vocabulary. Again (adv.), rursus. To join together, conjungSrS. To burst iruo, irrumpSre. To burst into the camp, in castri ir- rumpSrS. Mediterranean, MSditerranens, ft, um. To separate, separarS (se+parllrS). (231.) Translate into English. Consul rursus legiones in hiberna reducit. — Legatiis quinqu^ cohortes ciim exercitu conjungit. — Milites omnes in oppidum irrumpunt. — Mare Mediterraneum AMcara ab Europa sepa;rat. — Belgae se cum Germams conjungebant. — Imperator exercitiira in hibernis coDocat. — Germani equites in castrd (223, 1, a) irrumpere conantur. — Galba exercitum in hibernis collScat, l^gionesque in civitates distribuit. (232.) Translate into Latin. Caesar will lead the cohorts back again into winter-quarters. — All the Gei-mans were bursting into the camp. — The Belgi- ans will unite themselves with Caesar. — The brave soldiers were trying to burst into the town. — The illustrious general was sta- tioning the soldiers in winter-quarters. — The legions are distrib- uted among (in, with accus,) the states. — The legions are led back into winter-quarters. — The Mediterranean Sea separates Spain (Hispania) from Africa. — Caesar will join all the horsemen with the army. § 21. ANALYSIS OF TENSE-FORMATIONS. (XXXIX — XLI.) LESSON XXXIX. Active Voice. (233.) (a) The student must have observed that in all the tenses for incomplete action in the active voice the person-endings are as follows : Sing. Plur. 1st person, o or m, 1st person, mus. 2d person, s. 2d. person, tis. 3d person, t. 3d person, nt. (b) He must have observed, also, that these end- ings are added to the proper tense-stem in each tense. We take up the tenses in order. (234.) PRESENT TENSE. — (a) Person-endings, o, s, t, m u s, t i s, n t. ^ (h) The Tense-stem is the simple verb-stem. (c) To connect the person-endings v^ith the tense- stems, certain connecting vowels are used. In the present tense these are, for (1.) First conjugation, a; e, g,, am-a-if. (2.) Second " e ; e, g,, mon-e-t. (3.) Third " i; e, g,, reg-i-t. (4.) Fourth " i ; e, g., aud-z-^.* Hem. 1. Observe that in the 1st person of the 1st and 3d conjugations the connecting vowel does not appear ; a m - o, r e g - o (not am-a-o, reg-i-o). Rem. 2. In the 3d person plural, the third conjugation uses u instead of i; e. g., reg-vL-nt', the fourth inserts u ; e. ^., a u d - i - u n t. * Am a, mone, audi, are the proper crude forms of these verbs re- spectively. They are classed together, in a philosophical treatment of the language, as one. conjugation oi pwre verbs ; while those of the third con- jugation form the conjugation of consonant verbs. U' ■• ■>»•■> ANALYSIS OF TENSE (235.) TABLE. Tense- Stem. Connect. Vowel. Person - Endings. FORMS COMPLETE. 4. am- mon- reg- ETld- a. e. i. i(u). O. s. t mus. tifl. nt. 1. amo (ama-o). ama-8. ama-t. ama-mus. ama-tis. ama-nt 2. mone-o. mone-s. mone-t. mone-mus. mone-Hs. mone-nt. 3. reg-o. reg-is. reg-i-t. reg-i-mils. reg-i-tis. reg-u-nt 4. audi:0. audi-3. audi-t audi-mus. audi-tis. audi-u-nt Rem. Observe that the vowels are long- before the person-endings hi 1st, 2d, and 4th conjugations, except where they come before o or t. In those before o, the general nde (24, 1) prevails ; and it is also an invariable rule, in Latin, that no vowel tn ajinal sellable can be long before t. (236.) EXERCISE. [The pupil should hereafter analyze the tense-forms, as they occur, some- what as follows :] A mas: verb-stem, am-; pres. tense-stem, am-; connecting voivel, a; 2d per s, ending, s. Mon^mus: verb-stem, mon-; pres. tense-stem, mon-; con^ necting vowel, e ; 1st plur. ending, mus. Regitis: verb-stem, reg-; pres. tense-stem, r6g-; connect* ing vowel, i ; 2d plur, ending, tis. Audiunt: verb-stem, aud-; jpres. tense-stem, aud-; cori' necting vowels, i and u; 2d plur. ending, nt. In like manner, analyze Festinas, h^bet, videtis, convoco, Vigilamus, prohibent, legit, habetis, Vocatis, poscimus, dormimiis, muniunt, festinatis, pugnat, laudant. Revocant, veniunt, auditis, ambiilamus, vuln^ramus. LESSON XL. Analysis of Tense-Formations, continued. Active. (237.) IMPERFECT TENSE. (a) Person-endingSj m, s, t, mus, tis, nt. {b) The tense-stem, (1.) In 1st conj. adds ab to the verb-stem ; e. g., ftm-ab. (2.) In 2d conj. " eb ** 6. ^., mon-eb. (3.) In 3d conj. " 6b " e.g.,r&g-eh. (4.) In 4th conj. ** l6b " e. ^., aud-i6b. 94 ANALYSIS OP TENSE-FORMATIONS. (c) The connecting vowel a is used to join the tense- stems and person-endings ; e. g., amab-a-m. Tense- Stem. Con. Vow. Person- Endings. FOBMS COMPLETE. 1. 1 4. am-ab- mon-eb- reg-eb. aud-ieb- a. m. 8. t. mus. tis. 1. Smaba-m. amaba-s. amaba-t. amaba-mus. amaba-tis. amaba-nt 2. moneba-m. moneba-s. moneba-t. moneba-mus. moneba-tis. moneba-nt. 3. regeba-m. regeba-s. regeba-t regeba-mus. regeba-tis. regeba-nt 4. audieba-m. audieba-s. audieba-t audieba-mus, audieba-tis. audieba-nt FUTURE TENSE. (238.) I. We treat the 1st and 2d conjugations first. In these, (a) The person-endings are, o, s, t, mus, tis, nt. (b) The tense-stems, precisely like the imperf. in the same conjugations, (1.) In 1st conj., add ab to the verb-stem; e. g.y ^m-ab. (2.) In 2d conj., " eb " e. g.^ mon-eh. (c) The connecting vowel i is used to join the tense- stems and person-endings; 6. ^., amab-i-t ; moneb- i-t. But in the third person plural, u is used instead of i; e. g.j amab-u-nt. Rem. In the 1st person the connecting vowel is dropped (as in 234, c, R. 1) ; thus, amab-o (not ftmftb-i-o). (239.) TABLE. Tense-stem. Connecting Vowel. Peraon- Endings. FORMS COMPLETE. || 1. 2. &m-ab- i. u. 0. il: ^ mus. I tis. nt. 1. &mab-o. ftmabi-s. amabi-t. amftbi-mus. amabi-tis. &mabu-nt. 2. moneb-o. monebi-s. monebi-t. monebi-mus. monebi-tis. monebu-nt | (240.) n. The 3d and4th conjugations present some irregularity in the future. (a) The person-endings dire, m, Sftf mus, tis, nt. (b) The tense-stem, (1) In the 3d conj., is the simple verb-stem; e, g.^ reg. (2) In the 4th conj., it adds i to the verb-stem ; €. ^., au d -i. ANALYSIS OP TENSE-FORMATIONS. 95 (c) The connecting vowel e is used to join the tense-stem and person-endings; reg-e-miis, aud-i- e-mus. But in the first person a is substituted for e in both conjugations; e. g., reg-a-m, aud-i-a-m, not reg-e-m, audi-e-m. (241.) TABLE. Tense-Stem. Con'g. Vowel. Pere. Endings. FORMS COMPLETE. 3. 4. r6g. a. m. r6ga-m. audia-m. fs. rSge-s. audie-s. t. r6g6-t. audie-t. audi- e. < mus. rfige-mus. audie-mu0. tis. rege-tis. audie-tis. [nt. r6ge-nt. audie-nt. (242,) (a) EXAMPLES. Amsiheiti a I verb^stem J &m-; tense-stem, &ma,b-; imperf, con, vowels a ; 2d plur, ending, -tis. Amabitis: verb-stem^ ftm-; tense-stem, Siin^h -; fut, con. voweL i; 2dplur, ending, -tis. Audiemus: verb-stem, aud-; fut. tense-stem, audi-; cow- necting vowel, e; 1st plur. ending, -miis. [i^^ The pupil should keep up the hahit of finding any ten«e-form which he may need to use, by putting together its proper parts; e. ff., stem, ending, &c., rather than by recurring to the paradigms.] (b) Analyze the following : Laudabam, laudabo, laudabitis, Docebamiis, muniebamfis, legam, Occidebant, dormiebatis, scribemiis, Dormiam, audiet, docebunt, 6cc. &CC. &c. LESSON XLI. Analysis of Tense-Formations^ continued. PASSIVE VOICE. (243.) The passive-endings are, Sing. 1st person, r; 2d person, ris or r6; 3d person, tur. Plur. 1st person, m ii r ; 2d person, mini; 3d person, n t u r. (244.) These endings are affixed to the tense-stems, formed as in the active voice, and with the same con- 96 ANALYSIS OF TENSE-FORMATIONS. necting vowels. Only the following apparent irregu- larities are to be noticed. (a) In the 1st pers. pres. indie, the ending r is added to the full present active form ; e. g-., amo, amo-r; doceo, doceo-r, &c. (b) In the 3d conj., 2d pers. sing., pres., e is used for con- necting vowel instead of i ; e. g*., reg-e-ris, reg-e-re, in- stead of reg-i-ris, &c. (c) In the 1st and 2d conj., future, 2d pers. sing., e is used for connecting vow^el instead ofz; e. g,, moneb-e-ris, amab- e-ris, instead of amab-i-ris, moneb-i-ris. (245). EXERCISE. Examples. — D 6 c e n t ii r : verb-stem, doc-; pres, tense-stem, doc-; connecting vowel, e ; 3d plur, pass, ending, - n t u r. Amabamur: verb-stem, am-; imperf. tense-stem, amab-; imperf. conn, vowel, a; 1st plur. pass, ending, -mur. Audientiir: verb-stem, aud-;fut. tense-stem, audi-;/w^ conn, vowel, e; 3d plur, pass, ending, -ntiir. Regor: verb-stem, reg-; pres. act. 1st pers., rego-; 1st pers. pass, ending, -r. (246.) Analyze Regebamiir, occidemiir, laudantiir, Docebimur, audiemini, videbimur, Timebaris, doceb^ris, docebuntiir, Docebamini, &matur, rSgitiir, &c. &c. &c. PART 11. FULLER EXHIBITION OF THE FORMS OF WORDS. §1. ADDITIONAL RULES OF QUANTITY. LESSON XLII. [The student should now learn thoroughly the following rules of quantity, most of which he has seen illustrated frequently already.] GENERAL RULES. (246.) (1) A vowel before another is short ; e, g., vl-a. (2) A vowel before two consonants, or a double one, is long hy position ; €. ^., b e 11 um. Rem. A mute followed by a liquid in the same syllable renders the preceding short vowel common in verse; e. g,, volfl-cris. (In prose, the short vowel remains short.) (3) All diphthongs and contracted syllables are long ; e. g.^ au-riim, co-go (for co+ago). SPECIAL RULES. (1.) Final Syllables* 1. MoTiosyllables. (247.) {a) Most monosyllables ending in a vowel are long ; but the particles que, ve, ne, pte, &c., attached to other words, are short. (6) Most monosyllables ending in a consonant are long ; but the nouns c 6 r, f e 1, m e 1, v i r, 6 s (ossis) ; the pronouns q ui s, quid, qu6t; and the particles nee, in, an, ad, s6d, with all ending in ^, are short ; also es, 2d person of sum. 2. Dissyllables and Polysyllables* (A) Final Vowels. (248.) a final is short in nouns, except the abl. of the 1st de- clension ; long in verbs, and in indeclinable words, except 1 1 a, quia, e j a. (249.) c final is short in nouns (except 5th declension) and verbs (except imperatives) ; long in adverbs de- rived from adjectives of the first class, with ferme, fere, ohe. (250.) i final is long ; but mihi, tibi, sib!, ibi, iibl, are ccfftimon ; nisi, quasi, short. 100 ADDITIONAL RULES OF aUANTITY. (251.) o final is common; but long in dat. and abl. cases of nouns and adjs. used as adverbs (e. ^., falso, (tec); ego, duo, 6c to, ure short, (252.) u final is always long ; e. g., diu. (B) Final Consonants. (253.) All final syllables ending in a consonant (except s) are short Rules for s final. (254.) Final as, es, 6 s, are generally Zow^ ; e.g., am as, doces, equ6s. Rem. 1. 6 s is short (1) in nouns which have short penult in the gen. ; e. g., mil 6 s (mil i t -is). 2. 6 s is short in comp 6 s, imp 6 s. (255.) Final is and us are generally short; e, g., reg-is, domin- ii s. Rem. Lis is long' (1) in dat. and abl. plural of nouns ; (2) in 2d per- son sing, of verbs of 4th conjugation ; (3) compounds of v i s ; e. g., mavis, quamvis, &c. 2. u s is long (1) in nouns of 3d decL v^hich have u long in the penult of gen.; e.g., virtus (utis), palus (udis); (2) in gen. sii^, and N., A., V. plur. of 4th declension. (2.) Derivation and Composition, (256.) Derivative and compound words generally retain the quantity of the primitive and simple words; e.g., &mo, a micus ; p 6 no, im p 6 no. (3.) Increase, [A noun is said to increase v^hen it has more syllables in the gen. than in the nom. [e.g., mil-6s, mil- it -is ; here it is the increase); a verb, when it has more syllables than the 2d pers. sing, indie. [e.g., ftm-as, am- at -is ; here at is the increase.] (257.) In the increase of nouns, a and o are generally long ; e, i, u, y, short, (258.) In the increase of verbs, a, e, and o are generally long ; i, w, short. (4.) Penults, (259.) Every perfect tense of two syllables has fhe first long , (as V i di), except b i bi, f i di, t ii li, d 6 di, s 1 6 ti, and s c i di. (260.) Penults of adjectives, (1) id us, icu5, short; (2) ADDITIONAL RULES OP aUANTITY. 101 !nus, doubtful (often Zong) ; (3) ilis and bills, derived from verbs, short ; from nouns, long, [All exceptions to the above rules that are not stated will be marked ua the vocabularies.] (261.) EXERCISE ON QUANTITIES. [Give the quantity of the unmarked syllables of the following words, with the rule for each.] 1. Final Vowels. Ipse, agmine, die, r6g6re, rege, docebgre, re, m6ve, movere, bSne (adv., from bonus), Caesare, optime (adv., from optimiis), me, domini, vigilia, audi, adventu, ire, hi, consilio, consule, de, tertia, vigiliae, contra, roga, m6neo, ita, fructu, amo. 2. Final Consonants. Obsides, bonas, vigilias, 5mat, miles (milTtis), milites, rogavgras, has, bSnum, lampas (lampadis), pedes (pSditis), pgdites, illas, adventus (gen.), rggis, simul, audis, linter, auditis, vigiliis, caput, virtus (virtutis), ddminis, manus, regitur, regitis, munis, muniveras. 3. Increase. Amatis, militis, audiris, obsidem, monemus, monebatis, itineris, rSgabas, mSnebamur, audimus, monebimini, voluptatis, sermonis, murmure, pSdites, clamorem, milites, vulturem, amatis, mSnebatis, mSnetote, audite, legimas, pedem, s6getis (from seges). 4. Penults. MalSdicus, mirificus, b§n6ficus, fecilis (from fido), pu6rilis (from puer), fimabilis (from Smo), servilis (from servus). § 2. TENSES OF VERBS FOR COMPLETED AC- TION.— PARTIAL STATEMENT. (XLIIL— XLVL) LESSON XLIIL Tense Forms for Completed Action, — Indicative, (262.) In Part I. we made use only of those tenses of the verb which express action as continuing or incomplete, viz., the present, imperfect, and future. There are three tenses also for completed action, viz., perfect {I have i^n^^e/i), pluperfect {I had written), fu- ture perfect {I shall have written). The stem for all these is the same. (263.) The endings for these three tenses are. SINGULAR. PLURAL. 1 Perfect. Pluperf. Fut. Perf. Ist. I. gram. erd. 2d. isti. 6ras. eris. 3d. It. erat. grit. Ist imus. gramus. erimus. 2d. istis. eratis. eritis. 3d. J erunt, or ^ere. grant. erint. (264.) By adding these endings to the perfect-stem fu' of the verb esse, to be, we obtain the forms per- fect {I have been), pluperfect {I had been), future per- fect {I shall have been). Tense-Stem. Perfect. Pluperfect. Future Perfect f'^' gr&n. erd. isti. gras. giis. Fu- lit. grat. grit. ) imus. gramus. grimus. istis. gratis. gritis. V grunt, or ere. grant. grint. (265.) Double use of the Perfect, — It must be carefully ob- served that the Latin perfect has two uses, one answering to the English perfect, and the other to the English imperfect. TENSES FOR COMPLETED ACTION. 103 Thus, ful *aeans not only / have been, but / was. We call the former che perfect present ; the latter the perfect aorist,* which expresses momentary action in past time ; e. g,, Crassiis w* chief of the embassy — Crassiis princeps legationis fuit. EXERCISE. (266.) Vocabulary. Praise, laas, (laud) is (£). After, post (prep. ace). Before, ante (prep, ace,). Because, qui* (conj., 248). How long 7 quamdiu (adv.). Afterward, postea. Virtuous, probils, a, um. Si in vita semper probi fuSri- mus, etiam post mortem beati erimus. Milites Romani praeliis multis interfuerunt. To be over, to preside over, to com- mand, praeasfi (prae+esse, to be before). To be wanting, de-ess^ (de+essfi, to be from). To be in, to be present at, interess6 (inter+esse, to be among). Sick, aeger, gra, gram (77, a). (267.) Examples, (a) If we shall have been al- ways virtuous in life, after death also we shall be happy, (b) The Roman soldiers were present at many bat- tles. Rule of Syntax. — ^The compounds of esse with the prepo- sitions p r ae, i n 1 6 r, o b, p r o, d e, take the dative case. (268.) Translate into English, Theniistocles vir magniis 6t clarus fuit. — CGr h^ri in schola non fuisti ? — Quia ciim patre in horto fui. — Quamdiu in urbe fuistis ? — Sex dies (191, c), — Ante belluin in urbe fueramiis. — Crassus legatus (225, a) copiis Romanoriim praefuerat. — Nunquam deerit tibi laus hominiim, si semper probus fueris. — iEgerne (1^5, II., a) fuisti heri ? — Ante Ciceronis setatem oratores multi et clari fuerant, nee postea defuerunt. — Caesar praeliis multis interfuit. (269). Translate into Latin. [Recollect the double use of the perfect [present and aorist, 265).] Divitiacus commanded (praef uit) the forces of the ^duans. * The aorist use of the perfect is more common in Latin than the present. 104 TENSES FOR COMPLETED ACTION. — If you shall have been always virtuous in life, after death also you shall be happy. — If we are always virtuous, the praise of men shall never be wanting to us. — We were not in school yesterday, because we had been in the garden with (our) fa- ther. — Had you been (135, II., a) in our garden ? — Have you been sick ? — How long have you been in the city ? Four days (191, c). — The lieutenant had been in the city before the war. — Before the age of Caesar there had been many and great generals ; nor were they wanting afterward. — Caesar and the Roman soldiers were present at many battles. LESSON XLIV. Tenses of Verbs for Completed Action, continued, (270.) The tense-stem of the perfect tense is form- ed in most verbs as follows : (1) In 1st conj. by adding av to the verb-stem ; e. g., am-av. (2) In 2d conj. " u " 6. ^.,m6n-u. (4) In 4th conj. " iv " e.^., aud-iv [The third conjugation is treated in the next lesson.] (271.) By adding the perfect-endings (263) to tht5 tense-stems formed (as in 270), we obtain the follow- ing perfect-tense forms of am are, to love ; monere> to advise ; audire, ^o Ae^r.* PBF.-STEMS. ENDINGS. Isfconj. 2d conj. 4th conj. amav- m6nu- audiv- /, thou, he, we, ye, they, >i, isti, it, imus, istis, erant,or J ) er6, ( have loved, have advised, have heard. * In the first, second, and fourth conjugations, it is obvious that the per- fect is made up of the crude-form of the verb and/wi; e. g., ama-fui=^ ftmavi ; mone-fui = mouui ; audi-fai = audivL PERFECT TENSE. 106 Pleasant, jucxindus, S, um. All night, p6r totSm noctfim. Diligently, diligentSr (215, 2, h). From every side, undiqu6 (adv.). To excite, excitarS. Puerum &mavi. A puero (i, €., from a hoy) matrem amavi. EXERCISE, (272.) Vocabulary. preceptor, praeceptor, (proeceptor) is (m.). Tribune, tribunus, i (m.). Sister, soror, (soror) is (f.). Disgrace, ignominia, ae (f.). (273.) Examples, (a) I loved the hoy. (h) From my hoyhood I have loved my mother. [Obs. In (a) the perfect aorist is used; in [b] tlaQ perfect present.'] (274.) Translate into English. Caesar omnes undique mercatores ad se (145, a) convocavit. < — A puero fratrem et sororem amavi. — Cur per totam noctem vigilavisti ? — Quia pater seger fuit. — Milites diu et acriter pug- naverunt. — Hos pueros* magister diligenter docuit linguam Latinam.* — Tua ipsius (159) causa (135, II., h) te saepe monui. — Timor ignominiae Germanos ad virtutem excitavit. — Jticun- diim aviiim (78, II., h) cantiim audivimus. — Dormivistine ? — Non dormivi. — Csesaris adventiis oppidanos terrmt. [Inflect all the verbs in this lesson through the perfect tense, and form the perfect according to (270).] (275.) Translate into Latin. Caesar called together aU the lieutenants from every side to himself (145, a), — From myAoyhood I have loved my precep- tors. — The good preceptor taught me* the Greek language. — Caesar called-together all the lieutenants and tribunes (tribunos- que, 202, N.) of the soldiers to himself. — The slaves have watched all night. — (Your) father has often advised you for your own sake (135, II., 6). — The Gauls took-possession-of Rome. — The love of glory has always excited the Romans to bravery. — ^We have diligently taught the boys. — Why did you not sleep ? Because my mother was sick. — They have heard the pleasant singing of the birds. — We have fortified all the * Verbs of teaching tak© two accusatives, one of the person, the other of the thing. 1»0*. PERFECT TENSE. towers of Gaul. — The coming of Caesar terrified the ^Eduans and Helvetians. — I have often walked in Caesar's garden, on- the-other-side-of the Tiber (trans Tiberim). LESSON XLV. Tenses for Completed Action, continued, — Perfect Tense^ Third Conjugation, (276.) The perfect tense-stem of most verbs of the third conjugation is formed by adding s to the verb- stem; e.g,, Perfect-stem. reg-ere, to rule, reg-s = rex- scrib-ere, to write, scrib-s = scrips- lud-ere, to play, liid-s ^^ lus- (277.) Rules of Euphony. (1) A c-sound before s forms x; duc-s = dux; reg-s = rex. Rem. c, g, h, gu., qu, are classed among k-sounds. v also (generally) before s forms x; viv-s = vix. (2) b before s is changed into p ; e. ^., s c r i b - s = s c r i p s ; nub-s = nups. (3) A t-sound is (generally) dropped before s; lud-s = lus; claud-s = claus. Rem. t and d are the t-sounds. (278.) By adding the perfect-endings (263) to the stems of reg-ere, scrib-ere, lud-ere, we obtain the perfect tense-forms (have ruled, have written, have played). PEBFECT-STEMS. ENDINGS. (r6g-s = )rex- (scrib-s = ) scrips- {lud-s = )lus. /, thou, he, we, ye, they, >l, isti, it, imus, istis, enint,or< > ere. ( have ruled, have written, home played. PERFECT TENaB. 107 EXERCISE, (279.) Vocabulary, Suddeidy, siibito. To say, dlcSre. To draio (as a sword), stringSrg. Sword, gladius, i. Tried, judicium, i. To lead together, conduc6rg. (280.) Examples, (a) Did not Ccesar say these things ? To divide, dividSrg. Household, famflift, 8B. Orgetorix, Orgetorix, (Org^tortg) is. A dependent, cliens, (client) is (c). Nature, natura, ae. Stoic, stoicus, i. (5) Did Caesar say this (i,e., is it possible that he did) ? N o n n e Caesar haec dixit ? (NonnS is used in asking ques- tions when the answer yes is expected.) N u m Caesar hsec dixit ? (N u m is used when the answer 710 is expected.) (281.) Translate into English. [Recollect double use of perfect (265).] Caesar duas legiones consci*ipsit ; tres ex hibernis eduxit. — Principes Germanorum omnes suas copias Rhenum (113, II., a) transduxerunt. — Consul gladium strinxit. — Nonne (280, a) gladios strinxistis ? — Num imperator gladium strinxit ? — Or- getorix ad judicium omnem suam familiam et omnes clientes conduxit. — Caesar exercitiim in duas partes divisit. — Nonne epistolam ad pati'em scripsisti ? — Stoici diviserunt naturam hominis in 3,nimura 6t corpus. — Mult^s litt^ras h6die scrip- simiis. [What is the force of S in eduxit ? of con in conduxit ? of trans in transduxit? Describe the formation of the perfect, and the euphonic changes, in aU the verbs of this lesson.] (282.) Translate into Latin. The soldiers suddenly drew their swords. — Caesar levied five legions in Italy. — Caesar levied six legions in Italy, and led out four from (their) winter-quarters in Gaul. — The ^duans en- deavour to lead (113, II., a) all their forces across the Rhine. — The general divided the army into five parts. — Did Cfesar say these (things) yesterday (280, h) 1 — Didyounot write a let- ter to your brother ? — Have you written a letter to the king (280, b) ? — Orgetorix led- together all his household to the trial. 108 PLUPERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT. — Orgetorix led-together to the trial all his household and all (his) dependents. — Why have you drawn (your) sword ? — Why have you not written to (your) father ? — The iEduans levied many soldiers. — We have divided the nature of man into soul and body. LESSON XL VI. Tenses for Completed Action, continued. — Pluperfect and Future Perfect Tenses. (283.) (a) The pluperfect tense simply adds to the perfect tense-stem the imperfect of esse {to he) ; viz., 6 r d m, 6ras, &c. (h) The future perfect simply adds to the perfect tense-stem the future of esse; viz., e r 6, 6 r i s, &c. ; but in 3d plural it changes u into i; viz., erint, instead of ^runt. (284.) Thus, from am-are, mon-ere, reg-ere aud-ire, we have, PKF.-STEM. PLUPERFECT-ENDING. 1. amav- 2. m6nu- 3. rex- 4. audiv- /, thou, he, we, ye, they, \ gram, gras, 6rat, 6ramus, eratis, 6rant,< had loved, had advised, had ruled, had heard. FUTUBE PERFECT. 1. amav- 2. monii- 3. rex- 4. audiv- \ 6rd, ens, erit, 6rimus, giitis, 6rint, \ shall have loved, shall have advised, shall have ruled. shall have heard. .1 EXERCISE. (285.) Vocabulary, Defiles, angustiae, arum (pL). To err, errarS. To draw, duc6re. A principle, principium, I. To attack, oppngnflrS. Near, juxta (prep. ace). Already, jam (adv.). To take by storm, expngnarS. (286.) Translate into English. {a) Pluperfect. — Milites diu et acrit^r pugnav^rant. — PS,t6r filium saep6 m5nu6r^t. — Duas legiones in Italia conscripsera- mus. — Helv6tii j&m p6r angustias copias suas transduxSrant.— PLUPERFECT AND FUTUEE PERFECT. 109 Caesar castella Galliae muniverat et tres legiones ex hibernis eduxerat. {b) Future Perfect, Hem. The future perfect is sometimes used in Latin, when in Eng- lish we should use the simple perfect; or future ; e. g.. When I {shall) have written the I daum epistolam scripserd, ^t6 letter, I shall come to you. \ veniam. Quum amicum in hortiim duxero, ad te veniam.— Haud erravSro, si a Platone principiiim duxero. — Quum hostes cas- tella explignaverint, urbem ipsam (159) oppugnabunt. — Haud erraveris, si a Cicerone principia duxeris. (287.) Translate into Latin, (a) Pluperfect. — The general had drawn his sword. — Near the city the soldiers had fought long and spiritedly. — Caesar had levied one legion in Italy, and led-out seven from (their) win- ter-quarters in Gaul. — The Helvetians had ah'eady led their forces across the Rhine (113, II., a), through the boundaries of the Sequanians. — I had often advised you for your own sake (135, II., 6). (i) Future Perfect (R., 286, h). — When we have written the letters, we shall come to the city. — We shall not have err- ed, if we shall have drawn (ducere) our principles from Plato. — When Caesar shall have taken-by-storm the city, he will at- tack the tower itself (159). K § 3. NOUNS OF THIRD DECLENSION.— FULLER TREATMENT. (XLVII.— LVII.) [The third declension contains more nouns than all the others togeth- er. It also involves greater difficulties ; and we therefore give it a full treatment in the following section, which should be carefully studied.] LESSON XLVIL (288.) The genitive-ending of the third declension is is. Rem. To find the stem of any noun of this declension, strike off is from the gen.; e.g., G., ndmlnis {of a name), stem, ndmin. (289.) ENDINGS FOR ALL THE CASES. SINGULAR. PLUKAL. ll M. and F. N. M. and F. N. N. — — N. es. a(m). G. is. is. G. um (ium). um (ium). D. i. i. D. ibus. ibas! A. 6m (im). Uke Nom. A. es. a (ia). V. like Nom. like Nom. V. es. a (ia). A. 6(i). 6(i). A. ibus. ibiis. (290.) The nom. -ending is not given, because of the many forms in which that case occurs. The most common nom.-end- ing is s ; but the stem itself is often employed as the nom. ; and IS often, again, changed. We make six classes, which must be carefully distinguished, viz. : (291.) CLASSES. I. Nouns which add s to the stem in the nominative with- out any vowel change. {Feminines.) II. Nouns which insert a connecting vowel (e or i) before adding s. (Feminines,) III. Nouns which change the stem-vowel (i into e) before adding s. (Masculines,) IV. Nouns which add 6 to the stem. (Neuters,) NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS I. Ill V, Nouns which present the unchanged stem in the nom- inative without adding s. (Masculines^ except -al, -ar, -ur, which are Neuter.) , VI. Nouns which present the stem changed in the nomina- tive without adding s. (Masculines, Feminines, and Neuters.) (292.) [Before entering upon the paradigms, the student should learn thoroughly the following rules of euphony, which prevail generally in Latin nouns and verbs.] (1) c or g before s unites with it to form x ; e. ^., le g-s is written lex; arc-s = arx; voc-s = vox, &c. (2) d or t before s is dropped; e. g., laud-s = laus; quie t-s = quies ; parent-s = parens. (293.) Class I. — The Nominative adds s to the Stem, without any Vowel change, (Feminines.) Sing. City (f.). Citadel (f.). Praise (£). Race (nation), f. Quiet (f.). N. and V. urb-s. arx (arc-s). laus (laud-s). gens(gent-s). quies. Gen. urb-is. arc-is. laud-Is. gent-is. quiet-Ts. Dat. urb-i. arc-I. laud-T. gent-i. quiet-i. Aoc. urb-Sm. arc-6m. laud-em. gent-em. quiet-em. Abl. urb-e. arc-e. laud-6. gent-e. quiet-e. Plur. Cities. Citadels. Praises. Races (nations). N., A., V. urb-es. arc-es. laud-es. gent-€S. quiet-es. Gen. urb-ium. arc-ium. laud-um. gent-iiim. quiet-iim. D. and A. urb-rbus. arc-ibus. laud-ibtis. gent-ibus. jquiet-ibus. | On this class, observe carefully that, (294.) As to the case-endings, i ii m is the gen. plur. ending of those nouns whose stems end in two consonants ; e. g., urb-s, urb-is, urb-ium; nox, noct-is, noct-iiim; cohors, cohort- is, cohort- iiim. (295.) As to gender, they are mostly feminine. Hence, Rule of Gender. — Nouns which add s to the stem, without changing the stem- vowel, to form the nom., are feminine, [Rem. Exceptions. The 'SoUowiag are Tnasculines : 1. dens (dent-is), tooth. mons (mont-is), mountain. fons [font-Is), fountain. pons (pont-is), bridge. riidens (rudent-is), rope. *bidens (bident-rs), hoe. *torrens (torrent-is), torrent. *tridens (trident-is), trident. *6riens (orient-is), east. '^occidens (occident-Ts), west. * These nouns in ens are properly adjectives, with a masc. noun under- Btood ; e. g., oriens sol, torrens amms, &c. 112 NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS I. 2. Grex, (greg) is, ajlock; also a few nouns in ix and ax. 3. Paries, (pariet) is, wall; pes (ped-is), /oo^ ; lapis, (lapid) is, stone, vas (vad-is), surety.] {7^^ The rules of gender should be learned by heart ; the lists of ex* ceptions need not be, unless they are very short. All exceptions ai j marked in the vocabularies ; and the Usts should be referred to whenever cases occur.] To Class I. belong the nouns of the following endings, of which the pupil has had frequent examples : Libertas, libertat-is, liberty; dignitas, dignitat-is, dig' nity ; and, in short, all nouns in as, a t i s. Virtus, \ir tut -IS, virtus; and all others in us, utis. P a 1 u s, p a 1 u d -is, swamp ; and others in us, u d i s. In the following exercise several of the exceptions will be found. EXERCISE. (296.) Vocabulary, Highest [the top), summus, a, um. Middle, medius, a, um. To leave, relinquere (perf-stem, r6- liqu-). To secede, seced6re (perf.-stem, se- cess-). To take care of, curare. To touch upon, to reach, attingere. To seek, to aim at, pet6re. To cut down, rescindere. Romulus, Romulus, i. Hercynian, Hercynius, a, um. Senate, senatus, us (m.). Agrippa, Agrippa, ae (m.). ' Wliere, ubinam ? The common people, plebs, (pl6b) Is. Patricians [of Rome), patres, (patr) iim (pi.). An interreign, interregnum, i. Speedy, citus, a, um. [The nouns which occur in the preceding lesson are not named in the vocabulary : the learner will find them, and observe their gender.] (297.) Examples. In summo montS. In summis arbdribus. In media urb^. Ubinam gentium? (a) On the top of the mount- ain, (6) On the tops of the trees. (c) In the middle of the city. (d) Where in the world ? (298.) Translate into English, Magn^ pars plebis m-bem reliquit, et in mont^m (295, R. ] ) 86cessit. — Turn patres Agrippam ad pleb^m miserunt (401, 3, h), — HercyniS, sylva fines multariim gentium attingit. — Cassiiis, l6gatus (225, a), tres cohortes in arcem oppidi duxit. — Ubi- nam gentium sumus ? — Deiis curat gentes. — Aquilae in sum- NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS II. 113 mis montibus nidificant. — Magnus (78, II., b) avium grex (295, R., 2) summam arcem petunt. — Milites pontem (295, R., 1) rescindunt. — Leges Romanorum justae fuerunt. — Summiis mons (295, R., 1) ab hostibus tenetiir. — Caesar ad utramque (194, R. 1) partem pontis presidium reliquit. — Post Romuli mortem uniiis (194) anni interregnum fuit. — Sapientes mortem non timent. — Mors cita veniet. [All the nouns should be declined, the rule of gender given, and the ex- ceptions referred to if necessary. The formations of the verbs should be carefully analyzed.] (299.) Translate into Latin. The laws were just. — The fountain was beautiful. — The Hercynian forest touches the boundaries of five nations. — The common-people left the city, and seceded to the mountain. — The doves built-their-nest in the top of the citadel (297, a). — ^A large flock of birds flew over the city. — The soldiers fought long on the middle of the bridge (297, c). — Then the senate sent an ambassador to the common-people. — God takes care of cities and nations. — The Belgians inhabit one part of Gaul, the Aqui- tanians another. — Where in the world (297, d) are we ? in what city do we live ? — Caesar fortified each part of the bridge. LESSON XLVIIL Nouns, — Third Declension, continued. (300.) Class II,— The Nominative inserts a Con- necting-vowel (e or i) before adding s to the Stem. (Feminines,) e inserted. i inserted. 1 Singular. Cloud (f.). Ship (f.). N. and V. Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. nub-€ar, car-US ; clearer, car-ior ; dearest, cax-issimus. Brave, fort-is ; braver, fort-ior ; bravest, fort- i s s i m u s. Happy, more happy, most happy, felix (felic-s) ; felic-ior ; felic- i s s i m u s. (364.) But adjectives whose stems end in e r add the ending r i m u s. Unhappy, miser ; most unhappy, miser- r i m u s. Swift, celer ; swiftest, celer- r i m ii s. V Beautiful, pulcher ; most beautiful, pulcher- r i m ii s. (365.) Several adjectives whose stems end in 1 add 1 i m u s. Easy, f acil-is ; easiest, facil- 1 i m u s. EXERCISE. (366.) Vocabulary, Cyrus, Cyrus, i. To preserve moderation, mddum hS- Hannibal, Hannibfil, (Hannibal) is. ber6 (= to luwe moderation). Difficult, difficilis (di-f-facilis). Carthage, Carth&go, (Carthagpfn) is. Moderation, m6dus, i. Metal, mfitallum, i. Darius, Darius, i. To stain, mactHarS. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 137 (367.) Examples. (a) Socrates was very wise. \ Socrates sapientissimus 1 fuit. A high degree of quality [very good, very wise, &c.) is expressed in Latin by the superlative. (h) Of all these, the Bel- gians are the bravest. Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgse. Rule of Syntax. — The genitive plural is used with the superlative degree : the most learned of the Romans ; doctissimus Romanorum (partitive gen., synt., 697). (c) Among the Helvetians the noblest was Orgetorix. Apud Helvetios nobi- lissimus fuit Orgetorix. (368.) Translate into English. Urbs Syracusae (app., 225, a) Graecarum urbium est pul- cherrima. — Praestantissimi Persarum regesfuerunt Cyrus et Darius. — Pompeius magnam belli gloriam morte (55, a) tur- pissima maculavit. — Hannibal fortissimiis erat omnium Carthaginiensium. — Gallorum omnium fortissimi sunt Bel- gae. — Cicero eloquentissimus fuit Romanorum. — Difficilli- mum est modum habere (161, d). — Apud iEduos nobilissi- mus et fortissimus fuit Divitiacus. (369.) Translate into Latin, Plato was very wise (367, a). — Plato was the wisest of all the Greeks (367, h). — The city Rome was the most beaufiful of all the Roman cities. — Of all these, the Britons are the bra- vest. — The most excellent leaders of the Romans were Caesar and Pompey. — Carthage was a very beautiful city. — Of all things, the most difficult is to preserve moderation. — Of all (men), the most happy (beatus) is the wise (man). — The hard- est of all metals is iron. — Among the Greeks Themistocles was the noblest. — Caesar led the bravest soldiers across the very broad river. M2 138 IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. LESSON LX. Irregular Comparison of Adjectives. (370.) Several adjectives are quite irregular in their comparison. The following are the most im- Dortant. Positive. Comparative. Superlative. good, bonus. bad, mSlus. better, m6li6r. best, optimus. worse, pejor. worst, pessimus. great, magnus. greater, maj6r. greatest, maximiis. much, multus. '^'^^' \ plures, a (pi.). very many, 5 ^ ^^""o- small, parvus. less, minor. least, minimus. old, senex. older, senior. wanting. young, juvenis. younger, junior. wanting. outivard, exterus. more outward, exterior. outermost, extremiis. below, inf gnis. lower, inferior. lowest, infimiis, or imus. above, sup6rus. higher, superior. highest, supremiis, or summus. hind, posteriis. hinder, posterior. hindmost, postremus. (371.) Several adjectives have no positive, but form the comparative and superlative from a preposition, adverb, or obsolete word. Comparative. Superlative. {on this side, citra.) [within, intra.) {beyond, ultra.) {near, prope.) {bad, deter.) rwarer, citerior. inner, intgrior. farther, ulterior. nearer, pr6pi6r. worse, deteriSr. former, prior. nearest, citimus. inmost, intimus. worst, deterrimui first, primus. Rem. 1. Dives, rich; richer, ditior, divitior; richest, dItissTmus, tissimus. (Cicero uses the longer form, Caesar the shorter.) 2. Compound adjectives in dicus, ficus, volus, add entior for the comp., and entissimus for the superl. ; e. g., bSne-volus [benevolent), bSn6v6l- entior, bSnSvol- en tissimus. EXERCISE (372.) Vocabulary. Disgraceful, unworthy, indignus, S, tim (in+dignus). Infamy, disgraceful crime, fl&gi- tium, T. Wisdom, sapientia, oe. The Su£vians, Suevi, orum. Warlike, bellicosiis, a, iim. Condition, conditio, (condition) is. America, America, 09. Emperor, impgrator, oris (355, L, 2). IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 139 (373.) Examples. (a) It is disgraceful to he conquered by a superior ; more disgraceful {to he conquered) hy one inferior and lower. Indignum est a siiperiore vinci ; indignius ab inferi- or e atque humiliore. [Here the infin. pass, vinci is used as a neut notm, nom. to est, and indignum agrees with it in the predicate.] (h) What is hetter for man I Quid est homini meliiis sa- than wisdom ? | pientia (360, c) ? [Here homini is in the dat. (advantage or disadvantage, 106, II., b).] (374.) Translate into English. Nihil est melius quam (360, h) sapientia. — Hibemia minor est quam Britannia. — Nihil est pejus flagitio. — Hos- fes celeriter loca (309) siiperiora occupabant. — Maxima pars AquitaniaB obsides ad Caesarem misit. — Suevorum gens est longe maxima et bellicosissima Germanorum omnium (367, 6). — Ariovistus agrum Sequanum, qui optimus erat totius Galliae occiipavit. — Infima est conditio et forttina ser- vorum. — Primus et maximus regum Romanorum fuit Romiilus. (375.) Translate into Latin. It is disgraceful to be conquered by a junior, more disgrace- ful by a senior. — What is better than virtue ? what worse than vice 1 — What is better for man than honour ? Wisdom. — Eu- rope is less than Asia ; Asia than America. — The bravest of the Belgians were seizing the higher grounds (loca). — The greatest part of Gaul made (fecit) a surrender. — The first and greatest of the Roman emperors was Caesar. — The poor are often more benevolent (371, R. 2) than (quam) the rich. — The worst (men) are often more-happy than (quam) the best. — Among the Helvetians (by) far the richest and noblest was Orgetorix. § 5. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. (376.) Adverbs derived from adjectives admit of comparison. The comp, is the neuter form of the comparative of the adjective : the superlative substir tutes e for u s. Learnedly, more learnedly, most learnedly, doct- e ; doct- i u s ; doct- i s s i m e. Joyfully, more joyfully, most joyfully, Iset- e ; laet- i ii s ; laet- i s s i m e. Happily, more happily, most happily, felic-i t e r ; felic-i ii s ; felic- i s s i m e. Well, bene ; letter^ melius ; hest, optime. [No separate exercise upon these is necessary.] sy or '^^^ § 6. SUPINE. (377.) The Supine presents the action of the verb under the form of a noun in two cases, the accusative and ablative. The former supine ends in um, the lat- ter in u ; which endings are added to the supine-stem of the verb. LESSON LXI. Supines. (378.) The Supine-stem is formed by adding to the verb-stem, (1) In 1st conj., at; c. ^., am-at-. (2) In 2d conj., it; e. ^., mon-it-. (3) In 3d conj., t; c. g-., reg-t = rect-. (4) In 4th conj., it; c. ^., aud-it-. [Rem. Many supines, however, use different connecting vowels, or take s (and not t) before nm and n. For this reason, therefore, all supine-stems will be given in the following vocabularies. Where no supine-stem is given, it is to be understood that the verb has no supine.] (379.) The supine in um is a verbal noun of the accusative case, and is put after verbs of motion to express the design of that motion ; e. g., Legati S,d Caesarem veniunt rogatiim* auxilium. Ire dormitiim. (a) Ambassadors come to Ccesar to ask assistance, (6) To go to sleep (to sleep- ing). (380.) The supine m u is a verbal noun of the ablative case, and is used after adjectives signifying good or bad, easy or diffi- cult, pleasant or unpleasant, &cc. * R6gatum= accus. answering to the question whither. 142 SUPINE. Est facile fact u.* Est mirabilS d i c t u. (a) It is (a thing) easy to do (or, to he done), (6) It is (a thing) wonderful to tell (or, to be told). (381.) The following are nearly all the supines in u which are in use : dictu, audit u, cognitu, factu, invent u, meraoratu. EXERCISE. (382.) Vocabulary, To asJc, demand, postulare (postu- l§t). To congratulate, gratulari (gratii- lat), dep. To come together, convfenire (con+ venire, conven-, convent-). To complain, queror (quest). Custom, consuetude, (consuetudin) IS (f., 355, II., 3). To collect corn, frumentari (friimen- tat). A Trevirian, Tr&vvc, i (65). (383.) Example, To besiege, oppugnarS (oppugnat). Hand, band ofme7i, manus, us. Wonderful, mirabflis, e (104). Very easy, perfacilis, e (104). To do, facere (fact). To say, tell, dicere (diet). Best, optimus, a, um (370). To find, invemre (in+v6nir6), ii vent. To happen, accidSre. To endure, tolSrare (t6l6rat). Senate, s6natus, us. Divitiacus came to Rome to ask assistance. Divitiacus .R 5 m a m venit auxiliiim postulatiim. Mule of Syntax. — The accusative is used with the names of towns and small islands, to answer to the question whither ; e. g., in (a) Romam. (384.) Translate into English, 1. Supine in um. — Principes civitatis ad Csesarem gratu- latiim convenerunt. — Treviri magna manu (55, a) castrS, op- pugnatiim venerunt. — L egati ab ^duis venerunt, q u e s t u m. — Caesar ex consuetudme unam legionem misit frumenta- tiim. — Legati Romam M senatiim venerunt auxilium pos- tulatum. 2. Supine in u. — Est perfacile factu. — Est jucundum au- di tu. — Quaedam (178, 1) sunt turpia dictu. — Quod optimum est factu, faciam. — Virtus diflficilis est inventti. — ^Mult& accidunt dura toleratu. F actu = ablative of respect, wherein. SUPINE. 143 (385.) Translate into Latin. [Words in Italic to be rendered by supines.] 1. Supine in um. — The consuls, according to (ex) custom, sent a large band to collect corn, — All the chiefs of the jEduans were coming to Rome to ask assistance. — All the ambassadors, according to custom,* came-together to Caesar to congratulate (him). — The soldiers of the tenth legion came to the general to complain, — The Germans came (in) a large band to attack the town. 2. Supine in u. — It is (a thing) wonderful to he heard, — What (quod) is base to he said, I will not say. — What is diffi- cult to he done, I will do. — A true (verus) friend is difficult to he found, — Some-things are very easy to he done, * According to custom = ex consuetudine. Uli.^ § 7. TENSES OF VERBS FOR COMPLETED AC- TION.— PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FU- TURE PERFECT. — FULLER STATEMENT. (LXIL— LXIX.) (386.) It has been stated (262) that the tense-stem of the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect tenses is the same. In Lessons XL IV., XLV. we gave one mode of forming this tense-stem for each conjugation. There are several other modes, which we now proceed to state, taking up the conjuga- tions separately. To make the tables complete, we shall repeat the first method at the head of each. d-^re, dSd- LESSON LXIL Forms of Perfect-stem, — First Conjugation. (387.) There are four ways of forming the per- fect-stem in the first conjugation, I. By adding av to the verh-stem ; am -are, am-av II. " u " son -are, son-u III. reduplicating* the first con- sonant with e ; IV. lengthening the stem-vowel ; juv-arS, juv-. On this table, observe that Class I. contains most of the verbs of the first conjugation. II. contains eleven simple verbs (of which a list may be found, 664). m. contains but ttoo simple verbs, viz., dS.r6, to give, and starfi, to stajid. rV. contains but two simple verbs, viz., juvarS, to assist, and ISvarg, to wash. (388.) To form the perfect, pluperfect, or future perfect of a * To reduplicate a consonant is to prefix it to a stem with some con- necting-vowel ; thus, mord-, reduplicate with o, momord; st- are, re- duplicate with e, stest-, but the second s is dropped, stfit-. PERFECT-STEM, FIRST CONJUGATION. 145 verb of any of the above classes, simply add the endings of those tenses respectively to the perfect-stem ; thus : Infinitive. Perfect-stem. Perfect tense. To forbid, v6t-ar6, v 6 1 u - To give, d- fir6, d 6 d - Tohdp, juv-ar6, juv- 1. isti. It. imus. istis. eront, or ere. Pluperfect eram. Sras. 6rat. Sramus. Gratis. erant. Future Perfect. 6r6. 6ris. erit. erimus. 6ritis. erint. EXERCISE. (389.) [S^^ Hereafter, in all the vocabularies, the perfect and supine stems of verbs will be given in parentheses, immediately after the injini' tive. When no perfect or supine stem is given, it will be understood that those forms of the verb are wanting ; and where two are given, that the verb uses both. Thus : to help, juvftr6 (juv-, jut-) ; to glitter, micarS (micu-) ; to fold, plicare (plicav-, plicu-, plicat-, plicit-). In these exam pies micare has no supine ; plicare has two perfect and two supine forms.] (390.) Vocabulary: To demand [command], impSrare (av-, at-). To give, dare (ded-, dat-, 387, HI.). Hunger, fames (is), (300). To taine, domare (domu-, d6mit-, 387, II.). To shine, or flash forth, emicare (emicu-, e+micare, 387, II.). To surround, circumstare (stit- and stet-). The sand, dry ground, aridum, i {n£ut. o/aridus, dry). An attack, impetus, us (110). To assist, adjuvar6 (juv-, jut-, ad+ juvare). (391.) Examples. (1) Stare = to stand; con-stare, to stand together, to halt ; circum-stare, to stand-around^ to surround. (The compounds of s t a r e, with prepositions of one sylla- ble, have stit- for perfect-stem ; those with two, st§t-.) (2) To resist or vnthstand Alicui resistor e. any one. Partial Rule of Syntax.— Monj verbs compounded with prepositions govern the dative, N Door, foris, (for) is (300). To creak, cr6par§ (crepu-, crepit-). To chide, reprove, incrSpare (in+ crepare, crepu-, crepit-). A little while, paullisper (adv.). To withstand, rgsist^re (restate re-|-stare). To halt, constarS (constit-, con-f- stare). As soon as, simulatque (adv.). To slay, kill, interfic^re (interfec-, interfect-). To make, facSre, id (fee-, fact-, 199). 146 PERFECT-STEM, FIRST CONJUGATION. (3) To put any one to flight, (4) To make an attack. Aliquem in fiigam dare ( = to give unto flight), Impetum facere. [The Latin words in the following exercises which illustrate the leS' sons are spaced.] (392.) Translate into English, Oppidani, obsides quos Caesar imperav-erS.t, ded-erunt. — Venatores fame (abl., 55, a) lupos domu-erunt. — Ex monte subito (adv.) flammae emicu-erunt. — Imperator oppidanos frumento (55) adjuv-it. — Num ere pu-e runt fores ? — Cae- sar vehementer (215, II., b) milites increpu-it. — Hostes nostris paullisper r es tit -e runt. — Hostes militibus (391, 2) circumstet-erunt, multosque interfec-erunt. — Nostri in hostes impetum fec-erunt, atque eos (391, 3) in fugam ded- erunt. — Nostri simiilatque in an do constit-erunt, in hostes impetum fec-erunt atque eos in fiigam ded-erunt. (393.) Translate into Latin, • The flame shone-forth. — From (e x) the-top-of the mountain (297, a) the flame suddenly shone-forth. — The huntsman had tamed the wolf. — The townsmen had given the hostages. — The Belgians gave all the hostages that {rel, pron.) Caesar had demanded. — The general had reproved the lieutenant and (que) the soldiers. — Our (men) were-withstanding the enemy (dat.) — Our (men) bravely withstood the enemy, and (que) killed many. — The Belgians surrounded our {men) (dat., 391, 2), and killed many. — The Romans often put the Belgians to flight. — Our men haltsd upon {in) the dry-ground. — As-soon-as our men halted upon diy-ground, they bravely withstood the enemy (391, 2). — Our men put-to-flight the enemy whom (dat., 391, 2) they had bravely withstood. LESSON LXIII. Perfect-stem, — Second Conjugation. (394.) The perfect-stem in second conjugation is formed mfive ways. PERFECT-STEM, SECOND CONJUGATION. 147 mord-erS, mo-mord-, I. By adding u to the verb-stem ; mon-ere, mon-ii-. II. " ev *' del-ere, del-ev-. III. ** s " man-er^, man-s-. IV. reduplicating the first con- \ sonant and vowel ; V. lengthening the stem-vowel ; v i d -ere, v i d -. (395.) On this table, observe that Class I. contains w.ost of the verbs of the second conjugation.* II. contains only f 1 e r e, to weep ; n e r e, ^o spin ; d e 1 e r 6, ^o destroy ; with the compounds of the obsolete words pi ere, to Jill; 6lere,t to grow ; suere,t to be accustomed. [For a list, see 663, II.] HL contains many verbs, of which a list may be found (663, III.). The rules of euphony must be applied here. {a) b before s sometimes passes into s. Infinitive. Perfect. Sap AfricanuSj } Africanus, i. Numantia, Niimantia, ae. A defence, fortification, munitio (nis), (f., 333, R.)- Even up to, as far as, usqufe (adv.). Great, ingens, (ingent) is (107). Standard, signum, I. Tooth, dens, (dent) is, (m., 295, R.)- To remain, manere (mans-, mans-, 394, III.). To come, venire (ven-, vent-). A slayer, interfector, 5ris (319). To see, videre (vid-, vis-, 395, V.). To open, aperire (aperu-, apert-). Gate, porta, ae. To flee, fugere (io), (fug-, fugit-). Bit, bridle, fraenum, i (plur. I and a). Saguntum, Saguntum, i. Hill, coUis, is (m., 302, R.). (397.) Example. On the very day of his ar- lEodem quovenerat die rival, \ {^=ithe very day on which I day he had come), (398.) Translate into English, Hannibal Saguntum delevit, Scipio Carthaginem. — Scipio Africanus urbes duas potent) ssimas, Carthaginem et Niiman- tiam delevit. — Caesar has munitiones diligenter auxit. — Galli partem coUis, usqiie ad murum oppidi, castris (55, a) compleverant. — Adventus legati summa spe et voluntate urbem complevit. — Diu barbari in fide manserant. — Ita complures dies (191, a) manserant castr^. — Caesar eodem die (118, II., c) in ^duos castra movit. — Imperator, eodem quo venerat die (397) castra movit. — Brutus et Cassius, in- terfectores (225, a) Caesaris, bellum ingens moverunt.* — Legiones, simiilatque nostrS, signa viderunt, portas aperue- runt. — Equus fraenos momordit. — Spopondistine pro am- ic6 ? Spopondi. (399.) Translate into Latin, Scipio destroyed Carthage, a most powerful city. — God has filled the world with all blessings (bona, neut.). — Socrates never laughed. — The forces of the Gauls had filled the whole (o m n e m) place, even-up to the wall of the town. — The Gauls had fiUed-up the higher (superior) part of the hill with (their) very -crowded (densissimus) camp. — The coming of Caesar filled the army with the highest hope and good-will. For many years the barbarians had remained in friendship and * In the sense of excited, stirred up. PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGAIION. 140 fidelity (fide que). — Caesar moved (his) camp into the (terri- tory of the) ^duans on the very day of his an-ival. — The ene- my saw^ our soldiers, and fled. — The horses were champing the bits. — The wolf bit the dog with his teeth (55, a). LESSON LXIV. Perfect-stems, — Third Conjugation, (400.) The perfect-stem in the third conjugation is formed in six ways. I. By adding s to the verb-stem ; scrib-ere, scrip-s-. II. " XL " col-ere, c61-u-. III. " V, or iv " pSt-er^, pet-iv-. IV. reduplication ; c u r r -ere, c u c u r r-. V. lengthening the stem-vowel ; f u g-^re, f u g-. VI. taking the simple verb-stem ; v o 1 v -ere, v o 1 v-. We shall take up these separately, treating in this lesson only the first. (401.) Class I. — Perfect-stem formed by adding s to the Verb-stem. Most verbs of the third conjugation come under this class^ It has already been illustrated, but we here give a fuller ac- count of the rules of euphony, in connexion with the various stem-endings. 1 . b before s or t passes into p. Infinitive. Perfect. Supine. To write, scrib-ere, scrips-i (scrib-s-i), scriptnm (scrib-tum). To marry, nub-6r6, nnps-i (nub-s-i), nuptum (nub-tum). 2. A c-sonnd H-s = x (c, g, h, v, gu, qn are classed with c-sounds. If a stem ends in ct, the t is dropped, and the c unites with s to form x). Any c-soand before t = c. Infinitive. Perfect. Supine. To lead, duc-6re, dux-I (dnc-s-i), duc-tum. To cover, t6g-er6, tex-i (teg-s-i), tec-tnm (teg-tum). To dranjD, trSh-grS, trax-i (trah-s-i), trac-tum (trah-tum). N2 150 PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. Supine. flux-nm (fluv-sum). Infinitive. Perfect Supine. To live, viv-6r6, vix-i (viv-s-i), vic-tum (viv-tum). rrr T . . , . , { extiiic-tum To quench, extingu-6rS, extinx-i (extingu-s-i), \ / ^ 4ttj^\ To hail, c6qa-$re, cox-i (coqu-s-i), coc-tum (coqu-tum). We class here also, Infinitive. Perfect. To flow, flu-ere (fluv-), flax-i (fluv-s-i), To huild, stru-gre (struc-), strux-i (struc-s-i), struc-tum. 3. d or t before s either [a] is dropped, or {h) passes into s. Infinitive. Perfect. {a) To divide, divid-ere, divis-i (divid-s-i), [b) To yield, go, ced-erg, cess-i (ced-s-i), To send, mitt-er6, mis-i (mit-s-i), 4. {a.) m or r before s sometimes passes into s. Infinitive. Perfect. To press, prem-6re, press-i (prem-s-i), To bear, ger-er6, gess-i (ger-s-i), Supine. divi-sum (divid-sum). ces-sum (ced-sum). mis-sum (mit-snm). Supine. pres-sum (prem-sum), ges-tum (ger-tmn). {b.) But if m be retained, it assumes p before it. Infinitive. Perfect. Supine, To take, sum-6re, sum-ps-i (sum-s-I), sump-tum (sum-tum). 5. If the stem ends in rg, the g is dropped before s. Infinitive. Perfect. To scatter, sow, sparg-6r6, spars-i (sparg-s-i), EXERCISE. Supine. spar-sum. (402.) Vocabulary. To bind, surround, cinggre (cinx-, cinct-, 401, 2). To draw up, instriiere (instrux-, in- struct-, 401, 2). To shut, claudgre (claus-, claus-, 401, 3, a). To retreat, recedere (re+cedSre, cess-, cess-, 401, 3, b). To approach, accedere (ad+cedere, cess-, cess-, 401, 3, b). To grant, concedSre (con+cedere, cess-, cess-, 401, 3, b). To bear, carry on, g6r6re (401, 4, a). To spend, consumere (con+sumSre, sumps-, sumpt-, 401, 4, b). (403.) Examples, (a) In all directions, (b) Upon an expedition. Rampart, vallum, i. Triple, triplex, (tripKc) is (107). Janus, Janus, I. Numa, Numa, sb. Veteran, v6teranus, S, um. In three divisions, tripartito (adv.). Suddenly, repente (adv.). By -night, noctu (adv.). There, ibi (adv.). Dragon, drSco, (drScon) is (333). Arms, arma, orum [used only in plu- ral). Neighbouring, finitimus, &, um. State, civitas, (civitat) is (293). In omnes partes. In exp^ditionem. PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. 151 (404.) Translate into English. In tua epistola nihil mihi scripsisti de tuis rebus. — ^Bar- bari vallo et fossa (55, a) hiberna cinxerunt. — Caesar ti-ipli- cem aciem instruxit legionum veteranarum. — Romani tem- plum Jani bis post Numae regnum clauserunt. — Imperator exercitum in duas partes divisit. — Caesar tripartito milites equitesque in expeditionem mi sit. — Principes repente ex oppido cum copiis recesserunt. — Milites noctu usque ad castra accesserunt. — Caesar obsidibus (54) libertatem con- cessit. — Germani cum Helve tiis bellum gesserunt. — Mag- num et grave onus armorum milites pressit. — Explorator ad castra hostium ace es sit, atque ibi magnam partem diei con- sumpsit. — Cadmus dentes draconis spars it. (405.) Translate into Latin, The ambassador wrote nothing concerning his own affairs. — The scout approached even-up to the walls of the town. — The aeutenant sent-away messengers in all directions. — Caesar sent- away the horsemen in three divisions into the neighbouring states. — Cadmus slew (interfecit) the dragon and sowed Lis (ej us) teeth. — Caesar drew up the veteran legions in (abl.) a triple line. — The soldiers spent a great part of the day in the camp. — The enemy approached the town by-night. — The townsmen shut the gates. — The Helvetians retreated by night with all (their) forces. — Caesar sent-away the scouts in three divisions upon an expedition. — The general sent-away the mes- sengers by night in all directions. — The soldiers approached even-up-to the rampart, and there spent a great part of the day. LESSON LXV. Perfect-stem. — Third Conjugation, continued. (406.) Class II. — Perfect-stem adds u to the Verb- stem. (a) Without change of the verb-stem (see list, QQQ^ II., a) ; To nourish, maintain, al-Sre, al-u-T, al-tam, 2V hwwur, cuUivate, c6l-6rS, col-u-i, ciil-tura. 152 PERFECT-STEM, THIXD CONJUGATION, {h) With change of verb-stem (666, II., h). To place, pon-ere, p6s-u-i,* pos-Ttum. To begetf gign-erS, gen-u-i, gen-i-tum. Class III. — Perfect-stem adds v or iv to the Verb- stem, (a) Adds V (and lengthens stem-vowel, if short). (List, 666, III., a.) [These generally drop n, r, or sc,t or change the order of the letters. They must be carefully observed, as they occur in the vocabularies^ To despise, spem-ere, sprev-i, spre-tum (spem-tum). To be accustomed, suesc-SrS, suev-i, sue-tum. (h) Adds iv (list, 666, III., 5). To seek, strive after, pet-ere, p6t-iv-i, pgt-i-tam. EXERCISE. (407.) Vocabulary. Spaniard, Hispanus, i. Command, jussus, as. Against, contra (prep., ace). People, populils, I. Immediately, statim. Avienus, Avienus, i. To instigate, stir up, instigare (av-, at-). To place in, to put into, imponerg (im+ponSre, 406, h). To remove, remoyerS (rSmov-, re- mot-, re+movere). To arrange, distribute, disponerS (dis+p6n6re, 406, b). To relate, comm6m6rar6 (av-, at-, con-^m^morarg) . (408.) Examples, (a) By the command of Cee- Property, fkmilia, jb. To cross over, transirS (trans-f-ir6^ iv-, it-). To decree, determine, decemerg (decrev-, decret-, de+cemerg). To discourse, diss6r6r6 (dissem-, dissert-, dis-fs^rerS). To plunder, diripgrS (ripu-, rept- di+rapere)4 A beast of burden, jumentum, i. Sacred rites, sacra, orum (n., pL). Instead of, pro (prep., abl.). Ad/vice, counsel, consilium, i. On account of, 6b (prep., ace). To despise, spem6re (406, III., a). Winter, hiems, (hi6m) is (293). Jussu (abl., 55, a) CaBs^ris. * P6nd = p6sino ; p6sui = pos-iv-i. t In these verbs the n or s c does not properly belong to the root, but is employed simply to strengthen the present indicative and infinitive ; to knmo, no- ere, strengthened nosc-ere, &c. X Observe that the compounds of rap6re, facgrg, c^pgrg, withprcp- 0«i^w>7ts, change a into i m the infinitive; dirip6r6, confic6r6, accl- p6r6. PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION^ 153 In naves imponere (put into ships). Ad exercitum. Ad fines iEduorum. (b) To place on shipboard. (c) With {near) the army. On the borders of the JEduans. Ad is often used by Csesar in the sense of near or with (i. e., along with). (409.) Translate into English. Hispani, jussu Caesaris, eos exercitus quos (165) contra pop- ulum Romanum multos jam annos (191, a) aluerant, statim dimiserunt. — Aviene (voc.), quod {because) in Italia milites populi Romani contra rempublicam instig^sti (349, N.) ; et, pro militibus, tuam familiam in naves imposuisti; 6b eas res, S,b exercitQ meo te removeo. — Csesar legiones quas in Italia, hibern5rum causa (135, II., 5), disposuerat, ad se revocavit. — Cur consilium meum sprevisti? — Csesar, his de causis quas commemoravi, Rhenum transire deer eve rat. — Multi salutem sibi (dat.) in fuga petiverunt (or petierunt, 349, N.). — Caesar totam hi^mem (191, a) ipse ad exercitum (408, c) manere decrevit. — Caesar duas legiones ad fines .Slduorum posuit. (410.) Translate into Latin, The Spaniards had maintained an army (for) many years (191, a). — Orgetorix maintained, at-his-own-expense (sumptti suo), a large number of soldiers. — Caesar placed the camp on- the-borders-of (408, c) the Sequanians. — Socrates discoursed concerning (de) the immortality of the soul. — The pirates plundered many towns. — Caesar distributed three legions in Italy, for-the-sake-of winter-quarters. — Thou-hast-despised my counsels ; thou-hast-instigated the soldiers against the re- public ; thou hast put beasts-of-burden instead of soldiers into the ships : on-account-of these things, I remove thee from my army. — The Romans honoured most-rehgiously (maxima religione) the sacred-rites of Jupiter. — Caesar, for (de) these reasons, had determined to cross the Rhine. — Many sol- diers sought safety for themselves (by) flight. — The inhabitants sought peace from (a) the Romans. 154 PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. LESSON LXVI. Perfect-stem. — Third Conjugation, continued. (411.) Class IV. — Perfect-stem reduplicates the first Consonant. [Some of these present votoel-changes, which must be carefully ob- served, {a) When the first vowel is i or u, the first consonant is reduplicated with that vowel ; {b) m other verbs, with e. (c) The compounds of dare, to give, withi.] [a) First vowel i, o, or u. Infinitive. To learn, disc-ere. To demand, posc-ere, To beat, tund-6re, (fe) Other verbs reduplicate with e (note vowel-changes in stems). Perfect Supine. ce-cid-i (i short), c§-sum (cad-sum). pe-piil-T, pul-sum. ce-cid-I (i long), caes-um. Perfect. Supine. di-(^c-i (s dropped), (no supine). p6-posc-i, (no supine), tii-tud-i, tu-sum (tud-sum). Infinitive. To fall, cad-ere, To drive, repel, pell-erg. To fell, kill, caed-ere, (c) Compounds of dare. To add, To lose. Infinitive. ad-der6, per-der6, Perfect. ad-did-1, per-did-i, Supine. ad-di-tum. per-di-tum. EXERCISE. (412.) Vocabulary. The whole, umversus, a, um. Duty, service, munus, (muner) is (345). Walls, maenia, ium (pi., neut.). Coming together, conflict, congres- sus, us. Seventy, septiiaginta (indecl.). To touch, tangerS (t6tTg-, tact-, 411, b). To spare, parcSre (pgperc-, parcit-, pars- ; governs dative). (413.) Examples. (1) To demand peace of Caesar. To surround, cingere (401, 2). Nobody, nemo, (nemin) is (m. and f., 25, a). Woman, mulier, is (f, 25, a). Child, infant, infans, (infant) is (c, 25, a). Thirty, triginta. Ej^ghty, octogintft. Immense, immensus, ft, um. Sum-of -money, p6cunia, 88. To add, addgre (411, c). (a) CaesarSm pac^m pos- cSre ; or (h) pacem a Cae- sftre poscere. PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. 155 Rule of Syntax. — Verbs of demanding {a) govern two ac- cusatives, one of the person, the other of the thing; but {h) the person may be put in the ablative with the preposition a or ab. (2) About twenty. (3) To give one's self wholly up. (4) T^he leader spared wom- en. Circiter viginti. To turn se dare ( = to give one's seZ/* whole up). Dux mulieribus peper- cit. Rule of Syntax. — Verbs oi sparing govern the dative. ^^ Observe, the perfect of cadere, to fall, is cecidi; of caed^rS, to fell or kill, cecidi. ■ (414.) Translate into English, Legati ad Caesarem venerunt, eumque pacem (413, 1, a) poposcerunt. — Hoc a me (413, 1, h) munus universa pro- vincia p6 pose it. — Pueri linguam Latinam di dicer ant. — A Gi-aecis Galli urbes maenibus cingere di dice runt. — Nostri, in primo congressu, circiter septuaginta ceciderunt; in his Quintus Fulginius. — Arbor vetus cecidit, quam (165) ferro (55, a) nemo cecidit. — Legatus, simulac provinciam tetigit, inertiae (dat.) totum se dedit. — Postquam Caesar venit, obsides, ai'ma, servos p6 pose it. — Milites non mulieribus, non infanti- bus, pe p ere e runt. — Caesar legionibus cohortes circiter tri- ginta addidit. — Mors nuUi (194, R. 1) hominum (partit. gen.) pepercit (413, 4). (415.) Translate into Latin. The ^duans demanded peace of Caesar (413, 1, h) — The whole province demanded peace of the Romans (413, 1, a). — Of-our-men (nostri, nom., pi.) about eighty fell; among them, Labienus. — Have you (135, II., a) learned the Latin language? — The farmer felled very-many (plurimas) trees in the wood. — As soon as the lieutenant touched the province, he plundered many towns — The general demanded seventy hostages, and an immense sum of money. — The old trees fell. — This service the general demanded of me. — The leader spared all the temples of the gods ; but the soldiers spared not (non) women nor (non) children. — Caesar added to the foot- soldiers about twenty cohorts. — Caesar added to the foot-soldiers thirty horse-soldiers. 15x3 PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. LESSON LXVII. Perfect-stem. — Third Conjugation^ continued, (416.) Class V. — Perfect-stem lengthens the Stem- vowel of the Verb, (a) Without vowel-change. To read, gather, l6g- 6re, leg-i, lec-tum. To conquer, vinc-6r6, vici, vic-tum. (6) With vowel-change. To drive, ag-< 3re, eg-i, ac-tum. To break, frang-erS, freg-i, frac-tum. (c) io verbs (199). Tojly, fug-i6, fug-6re, fng-i, fug-i-tum. To take, cap-id, cap-er6, cep-i, cap-turn. To cast, jac-id, jac-er6, jec-i, jac-tum. To dig, fod-id, f6d-6re. fod-i, fos-sum. To make, do, f ac4d, fac-6re, feci, fac-tum. EXERCISE. (417.) Vocabulary. Jtemains, remnant, rSliqnise, arum (pl.) (57, R.). To collect, collig6r6 (leg-, lect-, con+ Iggere). To receive, take hack, reciperfi (cep-, cept-, rg-i-caperS). Headlong, prseceps, (prfecipit) is (adj., 107). To receive, accipSre (cep-, cept-, ad-{- capere). To bring-together, to compel, c6g6re (coeg-, coact-, con+&g6r6). To break through, perfringerg (freg-, fract-, peH-£rang6r6). Da^t, javelin, telum, T. (418.) Examples. (a) To betake one's self back. He went hack to his house, (h) Within the memory of our fathers. To hurl, conjicer6 ( jec-, ject-, con-f- jacSre). To undertake, suscipgrfi (cep-, cept-, sub+capere). To finish, conf icSre (fee-, feet-, con-|- facerS). To begin, mcipgre (incep-, incept-, in-i-cap6r6). Safe, tutus, a, um. Cappadocia, Cappadocia, oe. A district, pagus, i. ^gypt, ^gyptus, i (f.). Easily, filcil6 (adv.). Trial, judicium, i. Family of slaves, f Smilia, as. S© rScip^rS. Ss d6mum rScSpit. Patrum nostrOrum unfi- mdria (abl., 55, a). PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. 157 (c) Lucius Cassius, the con- L. Cassius, consul. sul. The {prcBnomen) first name is rarely written out. L . stands for L u c in s, T. for Titus, &c Consul is in apposition (225, a) with L. Cassius. (d) In mid-summer, jMedia aBState(118, II., c). (419.) Translate into English, Servus meus wationes et historias et carmina legit. — Le- gatus reliquias exercitus co lie git, itineribusque tutis per Cap- padociam se in Asiam recepit. — Nostri acriter impetum fe- cerunt atque praecipites hostes egerunt. — Labienus, cum his copiis quas a Caesare acceperat, ad fines ^duorum con- tendit. — Pompeius magnam ex Asia et Mgypto classem coe- gerat. — Milites facile (adv.) hostium ^ciem per fr egerunt atque in eos impetum fecerunt. — ^Hic pagus tinus, patrum nostrorum memoria, L. Cassium consulem (418, c) interfece- rat, et ejus exercitum sub jugum (323, N.) miserat. — Hostes subito tela in nostros conjecerunt. — Pompeius bellum verS (in the spring, 118, II., c) s usee pit, media sestate confecit. (420.) Translate into Latin, The general had collected (cogere) great forces. — Pompey brought-together a great army from Asia and Egypt. — Have you read the books of Cicero ? — The general collected the remnant of his army, and betook himself into Gaul. — Our (men) drove the enomy headlong, and slew many. — Labienus had received four legions from Caesar. — Labienus, with the legions which he had received from Caesar, hastened to the confines of the iEduans. — Orgetorix brought-together to the trial all his family-of-slaves from every side. — The enemy brought-together ail (their) ships into one place. — The Romans easily broke-through the line-of-battle of the JEduans. — Caesar finished the great war in-mid-summer (418, d) which he had begun in-the-spring (118, II., c). o 158 PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. LESSON LXVIII. Perfect- stern. — Third Conjugation, concluded, (421.) Class VI. — Perfect-stem = simple Verb-stem, (a) Stems ending in u or v (list, 666, VI., a). To sharpen, To roll, acu-gre, volv-Sre, &CU-1, volv-i. acu-tum. volu-tum. (h) Consonant-stems (list, 666, VI., b). To turn, vert-er6, vert-i, ver-sum. (c) Compounds of can do and fendo (obs.) belong here; - i To burn, incend-6rg, incend-i, incen-sum. To defend, ward off, defend-6re, defend-i, defen-sum. EXERCISE. (422.) Vocabulary, The hack, tergum, i. Tojlow together, conflugre (conflux-, conflux-, con-ffluere, 401, 2). Discipline, disciplina, se. Austerity, severity, severitas, (seve- ritat) is (293). To dissolve, dissolvSrS (solv-, sdlut-, dis+solvere). To return, revert6re (r6v6rt-, re- vers-, re+vertere). (423.) Examples. (a) The general appointed a day for the council, (b) What (number of) long skips he had. (c) To divide or distribute among. To appoint, to statiori, to determine, constituerfe (stitu-, stitut-, con+stS,- tuere). To divide, to distribute, distribuerfi (bii-, but-, dis-f tribuere). Desirous, covetous, cupidus, S, um (governs genitive). To know, learn, cognoscSre (cognov-, cognit-, con+nosc6r6). To turn, vert6re (421, b). Imperator diem c o n c 1 1 i o (dat.) constituit. Quidquid n avium (180) lon- garum habebat. Distribuere (with ace. of thing, and dat. oi person). (424.) Translate into English. Hostes terga verterunt. — Divitise (57, R.) quae ad Romam confluxerunt, morum disciplinam seventatemque dissol- verunt — Caesar diem cum legatis constituit. — Dies, quam Caesar constituerat cum legatis, venit, et legati ad eum PERFECT-STEM, FOURTH CONJUGATION. 159 (150) reverterunt. — Milites sese (145, c) fortiter (215, 2) defenderunt. — Hostes copias suas in tres partes distribu- erant. — Caesar, quidquid navium longarum habebat, legatis praefectisque (423, c) distribuit. — Procellge fluctus vastos ad littora volverant. — Cgesar exercitum flumen (113, II., a) transducere constituit. — Caesar Dumnorigem jEduum se-* cum (125, II., b) ducere constituit, quod (conj.) eum cupi- dura imperii (synt., 698, b, 1) cognoverat. — ^dui ex itinere domum (113, III., R.) reverterunt. (425.) Translate into Latin. The soldiers defended the city very bravely (376). — The general stationed the foot-soldiers near (ad, 408, c) the wall of the town. — On-the-next-day (118, II., c) Caesar stationed all the horse-soldiers in-front-of (p r o) the camp. — The chiefs of the states returned to Caesar. — The day which Caesar had ap- pointed for the council came, and the chiefs of the states re- turned to him.— Our (men) turned their backs. — The riches of the Romans had dissolved (their) discipline and austerity of manners. — What money (423, b) he had he distributed among (423, c) the lieutenants and soldiers. — The -iEduans divided their forces into two parts. — The tempests rolled vast waves to the stars. — The general determined to take (ducere) the lieutenant with him. — The seas were rolling great waves to the shores. LESSON LXIX. Perfect-stem. — Fourth Conjugation. (426.) The perfect-stem in the fourth conjugation is formed in five ways. I. By adding i v to verb-stem ; a u d -ire, a u d - i v-. " II. " u " aper-ire, ^per-u-. 'III. " s " sep-ire, sep-s-. IV. lengthening stem-vowel; yen-ire f ven-. , V. taking simple verb-stem ; c o m p 6 r -ir^, c o m p 6 r -. 160 PERFECT-STEM, FOURTH CONJUGATION. (427.) On this table, observe that Class I. contains most of the verbs of the fourth conjugation. [Numerous examples have already occurred. Any peculiar sapines are given in the vocabularies.] II. contains / writing. (bcribendum, ) ° Abl. Scribendo, with writing. (489.) The rules for the us^e of the cases of nouns apply also to the cases of the infinitive and gerund ; e, g., Nom. Writing is useful, scribere est utile. n rm, * J- w ' /• 7 ( ars scribendi est uti- Gen. The art of writing is useful, < * Also in the io verbs (199) ; e. g., cap-io, cftp-iendT. THE GERUND. 185 Dat, Paper is tisefulfor writing, < charta scribendo est titalis. scribe re disco. ter scribenduin disco, scribendo discimus. ) sc r ^ I learn writing, Ace. < I learn during writing, Abl. We learn hy writing, Rem. With a preposition, the accusative gerund must be used, and not the infinitive ; a d (inter, ob) scribendum, not a d (inter, ob) scribSre. (490.) The gerund governs the same case as the verb from which it is derived -, e. g.. The art of training hoys is difficult. Ars p u e r o s difFicilis est. ediioandi EXERCISE. To deliberate^ deliberftre (ftv-, at-). To take, sumSre (sumps-, sumpt-). Agriculture, Sgricultura, bb. Desire, studium, i. Life, age, aetas, (setftt) is (293). Mind, mens, (ment) is (355, 11., L) (491.) Vocabulary. To make war, bellare (av-, at-). To plunder, to obtain-booty, praedftri (praedat-), dep. Wearied, defessus, S, um. Sufficiently, satis. To think, cogitare. Opportunity, time for, spatium, i. (492.) Examples. (a) Time was given for SpS,tium armS. c&piendi (= opportunity w^as given datum est. of) taJcing-up arms, (h) For the sake of collect- Frumentandi causa (a&- ing'Corn. lot.). (493.) Translate into English. Spes praedandi homines ab agricultura revocabat. — Spa- tium defessis ex pugna excedendi non datum est. — Br^ve tempus setatis satis est longum ad bene beateque vivendum. — Hominis mens discendo ^Ktur.— Pars equitatiis, p r se - d a n d i causa, missa est. — Nox f inem oppugnandi fecit.- — Magna pars equitatiis, frumentandi causa, missa erat. — Cognoverat enim Caesar, magnam partem equitatiis, praedandi frumentandi que causa, trans Rhenum missam fuisse (471). Q 2 186 GERUND. — Imp^rator diem ad deliberandum sumit. — ImpSrator dixit, se diem ad deliberandum sumpturum (484, a). — Spes praedandi, stiidiumque bellandi incolas ab §,gricul- tura et labore revocabat. — D 6 c e n d o docemur. (494.) Translate into Latin. The desire of plundering and maJcing-war has recalled the farmers from (their) fields. — Time for (492, a) hurling the darts was not given to the soldiers. — Time for (of) fighting was not given to the horsemen. — The horsemen were sent into the territories of the ^Eduans for the sake of -collecting-corn. — The mind of man is nourished hy thinking. — Time for depart- ing-out-of the town was not given to the wearied citizens. — The citizens ask time for (of) deliberating. — ^Wisdom is the art of living well. — Caesar recalled the tenth legion into Gaul, for-the-sake-of wintering. — We learn by teaching. — Oppor- tunity of attacking the town was not given to the soldiers, though they desired it (= desiring it). § 12. THE GERUNDIVE, OR VERBAL ADJECTIVE IN DUS, DA, DtJM. (495.) (a) The gerundive expresses the action of the verb (generally vi^ith the additional idea of ne- cessity or continuance) under the form of an adjec- tive of the^rs^ class (76). (b) The gerundive-stem is precisely the same as the gerund-stem. The cases are formed by adding the endings of the adjective ; e. ^., N. &mand-us, ft, iim. G. amand-i, ae, i, &c., and so through all cases and both numbers. LESSON LXXXL TJie Gerundive used instead of the Gerund, (496.) The gerundive is used (to express contin- ued action) as a verbal adjective, agreeing with the noun, instead of the gerund governing the noun ; e. g,, Gen. Ofioriting a letter. Dat. To or for toriting let- ters. Ace. To write a letter. Abl. By writing a letter. Scribendae epistolae, in- stead ofscribendi 6pis- t5]am. ScribendisSpistSlis, in- stead of s crib en do ^pis- tolas. Ad scribendam ^pisto- 1am, instead of ad scri- bendum fipistolam. Scribenda 6pist6la, in- stead of scribendo Spis- tdlam. 188 GERUNDIVE. Rem. The gerundive must be used for the dative or accusative of the gerund when it has an active government. It may be used for it in any other case, u n 1 e s s the object of the gerund is a neuter ad- jective or pronoun ; e. g., of learning the true = vera discendi, not verorum discendorum ; of hearing this, hoc audiendi, not hujus audiendi. EXERCISE. (497.) Vocabulary. To choose, deligSre (deleg-, delect-, de+legere). To pursue, consequi (consecut), dep. To fail, to be insufficient, deficere (defec-, defect-, de-ff acere). To form a design, consilium cap6re (io). Space-oftwo-years, biemiium, i. (498.) Examples. {a) The Helvetians reckoned that the space-of-two-years was enough for themselves. (h) The space of three-days. (c) The house was given to the rohhers to plunder. The farmer gave his house to the robbers to plunder. To reckon, deem, duc6re (dux-, duct-). To discern, cemere (406, CI. III., a). Care, cura, oe. To apyply, adhibere (adhibu-, adhib- It-). Negligent, negligens, (negligent) is (107). Helvetii biennium sibi satis esse duxerunt. Tridui spatium. Doraus latrombus diripien- d a data est. Agiicola domum latrombus diripiendam d^dit. It^ After verbs of giving, going, sending, receiving, and the like, the gerundive expresses a purpose or object. {d) For completing {^fin- I Ad eas res conficiendas. ishing) these things. \ (499.) Translate into English. Urbs a duce militibus diripienda dS,ta est. — Urbem dux militibus diripiendam dedit. — Subito Galli consilium belli gerendi ceperunt. — Subito Galli legionis oppugnandae consilium ceperant. — Ad eas res conficiendas Orgetorix deligitur. — Helvetii, ad eas res conficiendas, biennium sibi satis esse duxerunt. — Crassus legates tribunosque militum in f initimas civitates friimenti petendi causa dimisit. — Plato Komam (453, c)ad cognoscendas Numae leges contendit. —In voluptate spernenda virtus maxime cemitur. — Multi. GERUNDIVE. 189 in Squis pS,randis, adhibent curam, sed in Smicis deli- gendis negKgentes sunt. — Milites, ad urbem expugnan- d a m, tridui spatium sibi satis esse duxerunt. (500.) Translate into Latin, For completing these things (498, d) Caesar gave to the Gauls the space of three days. — The iEduans had suddenly formed the design of besieging the town. — Crassus is chosen for carrying-on the war (498, d). — Pythagoras went to Sparta (453, c) to learn (498, i^^) the laws of Lycurgus. — Caesar reckoned that the space of two years was enough for himself, for overcoming the Gauls and finishing the war. — The general sent all the cavalry across the Rhine, for the sake of seeking corn. — Ariovistus hastened (contendere), with all his forces, to attack the town (498, J^*). — The Britons sent ambassadors to Caesar, in-order- (a d)-to-seek (498, 1^^) peace. LESSON LXXXII. . The Gerundive used to express Necessity, ^c, THE GERUNDIVE AS SUBJECT. (501.) (a) The gerundive in the nominative neuter (diim) is used with esse to express necessity or duty. If the person be expressed, it must be put in the dative. One rrvust write, I must lorite. Scribendiim est. Scribendiim est mih!. I^#^ Here the gerundive is the subject of the sentence (the duty of writing is to me), (6) This neuter nominative may be combined with all the tenses of esse ; e, g,^ Scribendum est mihi, / must write, Scribendum erat mihi, I had to write, Scribendum erit, I must write hereafter. &c., &c. 190 GERUNDIVE. (c) This neuter nominative may govern the case of its verb ; €• g'* We must help the citizens. One must use reason. Civibus (dat) subveniendum est. Ratione utendum est. Omnia Caesari 6rant agenda,. THE GERUNDIVE AS PREDICATE. (502.) The gerundive is also used with esse, in all cases and genders, as a verbal adjective, agreeing with the noun, to ex- press necessity or worthiness ; e. g,, I am to he loved, amandus sum ; thou art to he loved, amandus es, &c. The person, if specified, is put in the dative. I must love Tullia (= Tul- TulliS, mihi amanda est. lia is to he loved hy me.) All things had to be done hy Ccesar (= Ceesar had to do all things), B£3^ Here the gerundive is the predicate. EXERCISE. (503.) Vocabulary. Flag, vexillum, i. To set-up, proponere (pr6+p6n6re, p6su-. posit-, 406, h). To go-forward, procedSre (pr6-f ce- dere, 401, 3, b). A little too far, paullo longius [adv.). To think, piitare (av-, at-). (504.) Examples, {a) Caesar causes a hridge to he made (= takes care that a hridge should he made), I must hear. Est is often omitted with the {h) The centurions thought that nothing should he done rashly. To send for, arcess6re (arcessiv-, arcessit-). To understand, perceive, intelligfire (intellex-, intellect-). To determine, statuere (statu-, sta- tut-). In vain, frustra. More widely, latius [adv., 376). Caesar pontem faciendum (esse) curat. Mihi audiendum. gerundive, as in (a), Centuriones nihil temSre S,gendum (esse) existima- bant. * The accusative is hardly ever used after the neut. gerundive. GERUNDIVE. V' or TTix- (505.) Translate into English, (1.) Gerundive in the n^ominative neuter (dtlm). Militibus de navibus 6rat desiliendum. — Militibus simul et de navibus (erat) desiliendum, et cum hostibus ^ratpugnandum. % (2.) Gerundive as a verbal adjective, agreeing with the noun. Caesari omnia uno tempore (118, II., c) Srant Agenda; vexillum proponendum; revocandi milites ; qui pauUo longius processerant arcessendi; acies instruenda; mi- lites hortandi; signum dandum. — Prohibenda est ira. — Bellum nobis est suscipiendu m. — Caesar sibi latius distribuendum exercitum putat. — Imperator dicit, jam sibi legates audiendos. — Caesar iibi intellexit frustra tan- tum laborem sumi (471), statuit expectandam classem. — Caesar pontem f&ciendum ctirat atque itfi. exercitum trft- ducit. (506.) Translate into Latin. (1.) Gerundive in nominative, neuter (dum). We must leap-down from the ships.— TFe must read. — You must hear. — You must fight for liberty (pro libertate). — All must hear ; we must read. — With whom (quibuscum) must I fight ? — We must leap down from the walls and fight with the horsemen. (2.) Gerundive as a verbal adjective. I must do all things at once (= all things ?nust he done hy me at one time). — You must give the signal. — We had to set up the flag. — Caesar must send ambassadors. — The soldiers must fortify the camp. — The general must encourage the soldiers. — The Helvetians cause bridges to he made over the river. — Cae- sar thought that the army must he led-over. — Caesar thought that the army must he divided by him (sibi), and distributed more-widely. — The general says that he must wait-for the fleet. — Divitiacus says that this-thing (hoc) must he done by all the Gauls. § 13. IMPERATIVE MOOD. LESSON LXXXIII. (507.) The imperative mood expresses the action of the verb as a command, wish, entreaty, &c. ; e. g,, Love thou ! Hear thy parents. (508.) FORMS OF THE IMPERATIVE. ACTIVE. j 2d Sing. 3d Sing. 2d Plur. 3d Plur. am- a or ato. ato. ate or atots. anto. nion- e or eto. eto. ete or etote. ento. r6g- 6 or ito. Ito. ite or itote. unto. aud- 1 or ito. Ito. it6 or itote. iunto. PASSIVE. 1 am- are or ator. ator. amim or ammor. antor. mon- er6 or etor. etor. emini or emmor. entor. reg:- erS or itor. itor. imini or iminor. untor. aud- ire or itor. itor. imini or immor. iuntor. Rem. 1. Observe that the 2d per s. sing-, act. can be obtained from any verb by striking off r 6 from the infinitive ; e. g., inf., a m a r 6 ; imper., a m a ; and that the 2d pers. sing. pass, is the infinitive form precisely. 2. The longer forms of the 2d person are used especially in reference to future time ; e. g., in laws, statutes, and the like. 3. The io verbs of 3d conj. take the imperative endings of the 4th in the 3d pers. plur.: thus, capiunto, let them take; cfipiuntor, let them be taken. P & c i o has 2d pers. sing, fa c. EXERCISE. (509.) Vocabulary. [Deponents take, of course, th6 passive endings.] Enmity, inimicitia, ae. To despise, contemnSre (con-j-tem- n6r6, temps-, tempt-). FUeting, fugax, (f ugac) Is (107). To pursue, follow, persSqui (persS- cut-), dep. Association, fellowship, sociStfts (fttls, 293). IMPERATIVE MOOD. 193 Shxrw, spScies, sp6ciei (117). To trust, credere (credid-, credit-, 411, c) ; governs dot. Admire^ admirari (at-), d^. Ne audi. Ne credd c61ori. Frail, perishable, cSducus, a, urn (from cddere, to fall). To shun, avoid, vitare (av-, at-). Judge, judex, (judic) is (306;. To revere, venerari (ven^rat-), dep, (510.) Examples, (a) Do not hear. Do not trust appearance (colour). Rule. — With imperatives, ne must be used for noU (N o n would be very bad Latin.) (6) Let the judge neither give Judex praemia ne dat6 nev$ nor take rewards. c a p 1 1 o. Neither — nor = ne — nev6. (c) Instead of parents = |Parentumloco (abl.) (511.) Translate into English. Pueri (voc), parentes am ate. — Magistri pueros linguam Latinam decent o. — Magna vis est in virtutibus ; eas ( 150 ) e X c i t a, si forte dormiunt. — Abstinetote omni injuria (abl.) atque iniraicitiis. — I m p e r a irse ( 147 ). — Ne perse- q u e r e omnia, quae speciem glorise habent. — Haec omnia, quae hS,bent speciem gloriae contemne : brevia, f ugacia, caduca exist! ma. — Ne credite omnibus. — Judices preemium ne Gapiunto, neve danto. — V i t a societatem improborum. — Venerare Deum, venerare parentes, et quos parentum loco (55, a) tibi (54) natura dedit. — Pueri praeceptores, a qui- bus docti sunt, amanto etvenerantor. (512.) Translate into Latin. Boys, revere (your) -parents.— Let the master teach the boys the Greek language. — Do not rouse-up (your) vices : rouse-up (your) virtues, if perchance they sleep. — Abstain ye from (abl.) all vices and enmities. — My son, rule (your) anger (dat., 147). — Do not admire all things v^hich have the show of glory.— Do not ye fear death. — Do not trust to the show of glory. — Love those whom Nature has given to you in place of parents. — Do not seek the association of the wicked.— iVeiY^er take (cdpSre) nor give a reward.— iJear the wis© and good, R § 14. SENTENCES. [The student should now be made to understand something of senten- ces. The following simple statements can readily be understood.] (513.) (a) The sentence, ^^ the messenger fled ^^^ ia b. simple sentence, as it contains but one subject and predicate. (h) The sentence, " the messenger, who saw me, fled,'''' is a compound sentence, as it contains more than one subject and predicate. (c) In the last example, " the messenger fled''^ is called the PRINCIPAL SENTENCE ; and " who saw me," the subordinate sentence. (514.) The following are some of the classes of subordinate sentences : (a) The accusative with the infinitive ; e. g., Nuntius dixit, equitgs tela conjicer^ (The messenger said that the horsemen were hurling darts). Here equites tel^ conji- cere (that the horsemen were hurling darts) is the subordinate sentence ; nuntius dixit, the principal sentence. {b) Conjunctive sentences, i, e., such as are introduced by a conjunction or adverb of time ; e. g», Ccesar, when he had crossed the river, drew up his army. Here, Ccesar drew up his army is the principal sentence ; when he had crossed the river, the subordinate sentence. (c) Relative sentences; 6. g"., Nuntius, qui missus est, dixit {The messenger, who was sent, said). Here nun- tius dixit is the principal sentence ; qui missus est, the relative subordinate sentence. {d) Interrogative sentences (i. e.), such as are introduced by an interrogative word ; e. g., Tell me what you are doing 1 Here what you are doing is a subordinate interrogative sen- tence. § 15. CONJUNCTIONS.— (LXXXIV.—LXXXV.) LESSON LXXXIV. Copulative Conjunctions, (515.) Copulative conjunctions unite words or sentences together. They are, And, Neither^ nor, Mso, Et, qu6, ac, atxju^. ^ N^c, n6qud. Etiftm, DecD5n, quoquS, it^m, itad^m. EX ER CISE. (516.) Vocabulary, Onlyy solflm ; not only, nou sSlQin. A debtor, dbseratus, T. Formerly, at one time, quondam. Rich, opulens, (dpulent) is (107). To hasten, to march rapidly, pr6p6- rarfi (&v-, at-). To give largess, to bribe, largiri (largit-), dep. Once aiid again, s6m6l atquS itS- rum. Estate, res f amiliaris, e (104). A wheel, rota, ae. (517.) Examples, {a) Darius equipped a fleets and placed over it Datis and Artaphernes, {a) E t connects independent words and sentences word or sentence to another Bather as an appendage. Some {some persons), nonnnlli, ae, & (ndn+nullus). Javelin, tragulft, ae. To hurl under, subjicfirS ( jec-, ject-f sub-fjftcSre). I profit, benefit, prosum* (pro+sum) ; governs dat. To the same place, e6d6m (adv.). Too much, mmius, S, um. Top, summit, cubnfin, (calmih) is (345). To pray, orare (av-, at-). Darius classem comp§,ravit, eiqu6 Datim prgefecit et Aitaphemem. q a 3 joins one Thus, in {a), 6 1 * Prosum is inflected like sum, but inserts d before the vowels; €.^., prod-ess e, prod-6s, prod-est (not pro-es, pro-est). 19G COPULATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. joins Datim and Artaphernem; and qae joins the sentence ''placed (wer it," &c., as an appendage to the equipment of the fleet. Homines feri ac barbari in provinciam veniebant a t q u e in Italiam contendebant. (6) Fierce and barbarous men were coming into the prov- ince, and were hastening into Italy. [b] Ac is used before consonants, but not before vowels or h, Atqu6 may be used before either vowels or consonants. (c) Ccesar both had induU ged and was greatly con- fident in the tenth legion, {c) E t followed by another S t means both — and. Decimse legioni Caesar et in- dulserat et confidebat max- Etiam atque etiam. E t etiam. Non solum — sed etiam. {d) (1) Again and again. (2) And again. •' (3) Not only — but also. (518.) Translate into English, Orgetorix ad judicium omnem suam familiam coegit, et omnesclientesobseratosque eodem (adv.) conduxit. — Carthago et Corinthus atque Numantia, opiilentissimae quondam et validissimse civitates, deietae sunt a Romanis. — Caesar finem properandi (489) f acit, pontem q u e ad flumen Rhenum ponit. — Discipiili e t audiunt e t amant praeceptores. — Romani non solum itinerum causa (135, II., R.) sed etiam possessionis, culminS, montium occupaverunt. — N on solum vires (plural of \is) sed etiam tela nostris (dat.) deficiebant. — His rebus Dumnorix e t suam rem f amiliarem auxerat e t facilitates ad largiendiim magnas comparaverat. — Hostes e t e loco sup^riore in nostros tela conjiciebant e t nonnulli inter carros rotas que tragiilas subjiciebant, nostros que vulnerabant. — Contemnuntiir ii qui nee sibi nee alteri (194, R. 1) prosunt. — Nee melior vir fuit Scipione (360, c) quisquam, nee clarior. — ^dui n e q u 6 obsides repetiverunt n e q u e auxilium imploraverunt. — Sapi- entem neque paupertas neque mors neque vincula tor- rent. — Nimius somniis neque corpori neque ammo (dat., 516) prodest. — Rogo te, ^t oro; etiam atque etiam te rogo. — ^dui s^mel atque iteriim ciim Germanis contenderant. — Milites ex castris eruperunt (erump^re) atqu^ omnem spem salutis in virtute posuerunt. DISJUNCTIVE AND ADVERSATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 197 LESSON LXXXV. Disjunctive and Adversative Conjunctions. (519.) I. The disjunctive conjunctions (meaning or) are a u t, v e I, v e, and s i v e or s e u. Rem, 1. Aut indicates a real difference of object; e. g,, Here, soldiers, we must conquer or I Hie vincendum aut moriendum, ml- die! I lites! When a u t is used, but one of the conditions can be fulfilled, as in the above example. Rem, 2. V e 1 (derived from velle) means if you wish, or rather, (Hence it is used for even.) Viri ndbiles v S 1 cormmpgrg more* civitatiis, v e 1 corriLg6r6 possunt. The nobles can either corrupt or correct the morals of the state [i. e., they can do whichever they please). Rem. 3. Ve is alv^ays affixed to another word; duo, tresve == two or three. Rem, 4. These conjunctions are frequently repeated. raut — aut. Either — or, } v e 1 — v e 1. (sive — sivS. Whether — or, | seu — seu. " (520.) II. The adversative conjunctions express opposition Q)ut). The most important are. At, atqui, autem, caeteriim, sed, veriim {hut). Tamen {however)-, \ero (truly). EXERCISE. (521.) Vocabulary. To run up, accurr6r6 (accurr- and accucTirr-, accurs-, ad+curr6r6). Very rich, perdives, (divit) 13 (per+ dives), 107. Chance, casus, us. By change, casu (abl.). Goodness, bdnltas (atXs). To pay up, persolvgre (solv-, s6- lut-). To suffer full punishment, poenas persolvere. Handsome, formosus, S., um. Eloquent, f acundiis, ft, um, Ulysses, Ulysses, (Ulyss) is. R2 198 CONJUNCTIONS. To possess, possiderS (possed-, pos- sess-). Weeping, fletus, us. Effect, eflfectus, us. Sorrow, sadness, tristitia, 83, Generally, plerumquS (adv.). Joy, gaudium, I. Daily, qnotldianiis, &, um. A living being, animans, (animantl is (107). Motion, motus, us. Various, diversus, a, um. To swim, natare (av-, at-). Sometimes, interdum. Fortes sunt habendi, non qui f aciunt, s e d qui propulsant injuriam. Gyges a nullo videbatur, ipse a u t e m omnia videbat. (522.) Examples. (a) Those are to he esteemed brave, not who do, hut who ward off injury, (h) Gyges was seen hy no- body, hut he himself saw all things. {a) S e d indicates a strong opposition ; it always stands first in its clause, as in {a). (h) Autem expresses a weaker opposition than sed. Au- tem and vero never stand first in a sentence, but always after one or more words. (523.) Translate into English. Nostii celeriter accurrerunt ; a t Germani fortiter irapetum gladiorum exceperunt. — Amici regis duo tresve (519, R. 3) per- divites sunt. — Sive casti (55, a) sive consilio deorum immorta- lium, paenas persolverunt. — NonnuUi, sive felicitate {ahl.) quadam, sive bomtate naturae, rectam vitae secuti sunt viam. — Fortes et magnanimi sunt habendi, non qui f aciunt sed qui propulsant injuriam. — Non formosus erat, sed erat facundus Ulysses. — Avarus non possidet divitias (57, R.) sed divitiae possident eiim. — Fletus plerumque est effectus tristitiae ; inter- dum vero etiam (even) gaudii. — Helvetii fere quotidianis praeliis (55, a) ciim Germanis contendunt, quum aut surs fini- bus eos prohibent, aut ipsi in eorum f inibus bellum gSrunt. — Amman tium motiis diversus est ; v e 1 ambulant et currunt, v61 volant, v61 n^tant. — Corpus moritiir (dcp.), verum ani- mus nunquam morietiir. — Milites nostri fortes f uerunt, sed - ftvari. § 16. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.— (LXXXVI.— XCII.) j (524.) The subjunctive mood expresses affirma- tion doubtfully, indefinitely, or as conceived by the mind; e. g., / may write; I might write; I might have written ; if I should write ; if I had written. Rem. — The subjunctive has no future tense-form. LESSON LXXXVI. Subjunctive Present. (525.) Forms of e s s e (^o be) in subjunctive present. Pres. Sim, / ma7/ be. SIS, thou may- est be. sit, he, she, it may be. simus, we may he. sitis, '6 may be. smt, they may be. (526.) Forms of regular verbs, (a) The subjunctive present adds the person-endings m, 8, t, mus, tis, nt, for the active^ and r, ris or re, tur, mur, mini, ntur, for the passive, to the verb-stem by means of the following connecting vowels, viz., (6) %ctive. Passive. 1st conj., e ; e. g., fim-e-m, am-S-r. 2d conj., 6a ; e. g., m6n-ea-m, m6n-ea-r. 3d conj., a ; ft g., r6g-a-m, reg-a-r. 4th conj., ia ; e. g., aud-ia-m, aud-ia-r. PARADIGM. SUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT. Active. — I may love, advise, rule, hear. \ Stem. Singular. Plural. 1 am- mon- aud- em. 6am. am. Tam. es. 6as. as. Tas. et. 6at. at. iat. emus, eamus. amiis. lamGs. etis. 6atis. atis. iatis. ent. 6ant. ant. iant. 11 Passive.— Jwiay he loved, advised, ruled, heard. |! .stem. Singular. | Plural. II am- mon- res-- aud- er. ear. ar. iar. eris or ere. earis or ar6. arts or are. laris or are. etur. eatur. atur. iatur. emur. Samiir. amur. iamur. eminl. 6amim. amini. iaminl. entur. 1; eantur. an tur. iantiir. 200 SUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT. EXERCISE. (527.) Vocabulary. Value, prgtium, I. To obey, parere (paru-) ; governs dat. To despair, desperare (av-, at-). Otherwise, aliter {adv.). To hinder, impSdire (iv-, it-). Carefully, stiidiose [adv.). To exercise, exercere (exercu-, ex- ercit-). To grieve, dolere (dolii-, dolit-). Would that, utinam (conj.)- To fear, metuere (metu-). Incredible, incredibilis, e (104). Mind {talent), inggnium, i. (528.) Examples. [The principal nse of the subjunctive in Latin is in dependent sen- tences ; but in this lesson we show its uses in principal sentences, in which it occurs only when something is said without dejiniteness or cer- ■ • "/.] Nemo sanus de virtutis pr&tio d u b i t e t. Sim salvus ! Salvus sis! To he ignorant, ignorare (av-, fit-). To deny, negare (av-, at-). To knoio, noscere (nov-, not-). To afford, praebere (praebu-, praebit-). To make on^s self a judge, se judi- c6m pra&berS. To apply, to employ, adhiberfi (u-. It-). Cautious, cautus, a, um. Rashly, temerfe {adv,). Ever, unquam {adv.}. Truly, obviously, prorsus {adv.j. Finally, denique {adv.). (a) 1. No san.e man can doubt ahout the value of virtue. 2. May I be safe ! 3. / hope you are well (==raay you be safe). 4. May I not be safe, if I write otherwise^hhn I thinTc. 5. I hope my father is alive ( :;= would that my father may be alive). 6. I wish he would come, Utinam v ^ n i S, t. (a) The subjunctive present is used for the English poten- tial, may, can, &c., and also to express a wish, when the thing wished is possible. A negative wish is expressed by n e pre- fixed, as in (4). Ne s i m. salvus, si Mit^r scribo ac sentio. Utinam pater v i v a t. (b) 1. Let us believe. 2. Let us obey virtue. 3. Do not despair. Credamus. Virtuti pareamus. Ne desperes. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 201 (b) The subjunctive present is used, instead of the impera tive, to soften a command. N e is used for prohibition. (c) Who would not love vir- tue? What can I do 1 Who is ignorant 1 Who can douht 1 Quis virtutem non ^ m e t ? Quid faciam ? Quis ignoret? Quis dubitet? (c) The subjunctive present is used in direct questions when any doubt is impHed. (In English, we generally use can^ toill, would, &c., in such questions.) (529.) Translate into English. {a) Use of snbjunctive as potential, or to express a wish (the latter indicated by ! ). Tempus v e n i a t. — Salvus sis! amicS. — F a v e a t for- tuna ! — Utinam hoc verum sit ! — Diu vivas ! — Nemo bonus de Providentia Dei dubite t. — M o r i a r, si alitor scribo ac sentio. — Utinam nemo te i m p e d i a t ! — Utinam domum meam veris amicis (55, a) impleam! (b) Use of STibjnnctive as imperative. Se quisque studiose exerceat. — Naturam, optimam ducem, sequamur, eique pareamus. — Amemus patriam, parea- mus senatui, consulamus bonis. — Suutot quisque noscat ingeniura, acremque se et bonorum et yjtiilii'um suorum judi- cem prsebeat. — Ne ametis improbos: — Prudentiam adhib- eamus. — Cautiorem adhibeamus J^rudentiam. — In rebus gravioribus cautiorem adhibeamus prudajjhp, sed nee in levioribus temere unquam agamus. — N^r^apJ^ks. (c) Use of subjunctive in direct qtuestions. r Quis hoc credat ? — Quis fabiilas istas credat ? — Quis im- probos ac stultos diligat? — Quis eum^idili gat quem metuit? — Quis credat illiid quod prorsiis inciedibile est? — Quis de virtutis pretio dubitet ? — Quid faciimus? — Quis neget omnes leves, omnes avaros, omnes .denique improbos ess§ servos ? (530.) Translate into Latin, (a) No wise (man) can doubt concerning the benevolence of God. — My friends, I hope you are well (= may you be safe). 202 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. — I-hope-that (utinam) the commander is alive (=may" live). — I hope our friends may come ! — May these things be true ! — May the citizens be wise. (h) Let us not believe this. — Do not believe these fables. — Let us exercise ourselves diligently. — Let us love our friends, let us obey our parents, let us worship God. — Know your (own) mind. — Let the soldiers take-possession-of the mountain. — Let us not love the wicked. (c) Who can say this ? — Who can love a fool ? — Who would obey a wicked king ? — What good (man) can doubt concerning the value of virtue ? — ^Who can deny that all avaricious men are slaves ? LESSON LXXXVIL Subjunctive Perfect, (531.) Form of esse (to be) in subjunctive perfect. fuerim, / ma7/ have been. fuSris, thou mayest fuerit, he, she, it\ 'may fu6iimus, %ce may have been. fudrftis, '/emay' been. fu^rint, they wiay have been. (532.) Forms of regular verbs. 1. The subjunctive perfect active adds the endings 6rim, 6ris, Srit, Primus, iritis, Srint, to the indie, perf. stem of the verb; e. g.<, amav-erim, &c. 2. The subjjxnctive perfect passive is formed by combining the perfect paieticiple with the subj unctive present of e s s e ; e. g., a m a t ii s s i m, &c. [ Sld^ Deponents, of course, are formed like passives.] 3. PARADIGM, SUBJUNCTIVE PERFECT. fimav- mdnu- rex- audiv- AcTivE. — I may have loved, advised, ruled, heaard. 6rim. 6ris. Primus. SrftTs. Srint. Passive. — I may have been loved, advised, ruled, heard. ( toifttus, a, um, Sing. \ ^6;^tiis a um, ° I rectus, ft, um, 1^ auditus, a, Qm, sim. sis. sit. Plur. \ ' ftmati, 88, ft, mdniti, jb, ft, recti, ae, ft, i, audit!, 86, ft, ^ simtis. sitis. sint. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 208 EXERCISE. (533.) Vocabulary, Health, valetudd, (valetudin) is (339). So, thus, ita [adv.] Kindness, pardon, venia, ae. To take captive, cap6r6 (io, c6p-, capt-, 199). Patience, patientia, ab. To slay, cut to pieces, caedferS (ce- cld-, caes-, 413, i^"). It makes no difference, it matters not, nihil refert. OC?* Form the subjunctive perfect active and pass- ive of the follovs^ing verbs : Absiim, to be absent (no passive). Prosiim, to profit (do.). Desum, to be wanting (do.). V6car6, to call. Confirmarfi, to assert. Dicerg, to say (dix-, diet-). Traders, to assert, deliver (tradid-, tradit-). Laudare, to praise, Videre, to see. (534.) Examples. {a) Do not do it | N e f e c e r i s. {a) The subjunctive perfect (as well as the present) may be used in prohibitions, with ne, or nihil, instead of the imper- ative. InvSmre, to find (inven-, invent-). Scrib6r6, to write. FacSre (io-, fee-, fact-), to do. L6qul (16eut-), to speak {dep.). Censer6 (eensu-, cens-), to think. OpprimSre (press-, press-), to re- press, crush. Constituere (stitii-, stitut-), to place. Oppugnarg, to assault. Il6v6car6, to recall, restore. (b) By your leave I would say. Epicurus may have said. Perchance some one may say. Pace tua dixerim; or, VeniH tua dixerim. Dixerit Epicurus. Forsitan aliquis dixerit. (h) The subjunctive perfect may be used with or without an adverb, to express a supposed case (that may be true). (c) I think I can assert this. Hoc confirmaverim. You will scarcely find a man Vix ullius gentis hominem in- of any nation. veneris. (c) The subjunctive perfect (as well as present) is used to soften an assertion. (Such phmses as, Probably I might, I think I can, I would, perhaps, &c., can be expressed in Latin by one w^ord in the perfect subjunctive, as above.) 204 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Cur rides ? Die* mihi cur ride as. Ubi fuisti? Nescio iibi fueris? (d) (1) Why do you laugh? (2) Tell me why you laugh, (1 ) Where have you been ? (2) I do not know where you have been. The sentences marked (1) are direct interrogative sentences, and take the indicative mood ; those marked (2) are indirect (or subordinate) interrogative sentences, and take the subjunctive. Hence, {e)Rule of Syntax. — The subjunctive mood is used in all in- direct interrogative sentences. Rem. Such sentences are introduced by the interrogative pronouns quis, qui, quantus, qualis, uter, &c., or the adverbs ubi, unde, quan- do, quo, cur, num, utrum, an, &c. (535.) Translate into English. (a) Quod diibitas, ne f e c e r i s . — Id ne d i x 6 r i s. — Nihil in- commodo (to the injury) valettidinis tuae f e c e r i s. — Ciim im- probis ac stultis nelocutus sis. (b) Faciat hoc aliquis. — Fecerit hoc aKquis. — Dix^rit Epicurus, Deum esse nullum. — Forsitan eum amaveris. — Forsitan ita censueris. — Puerum magistri monuerint. — Urbem hostes oppugnaverint. (c) Frater (wc), bona tua venia dixerim, med, sententia melior est. — Patientiam laudav6rim boum (351, 2) atque equorum. — Ingenia studiaque oppresseris facilius (376) quam rSvocaveris. (d) Nescio cur ridea s. — Die, cur ad me non veneris. — Helvetii ibi erunt, ubi eos Caesar constituerit. — Magno ciim periculo (89, II.) id fecit. — Intelligit, quanto cum peri- ciilo id fecerit. — Multi in prgelio caesi sunt. — Multi in prgslio capti sunt.— Ubi (when) victoria amissa est (is lost) nihil refert, q u 6 1 in praelio c ae s i aut in fuga capti sin t. — Die mihi iibi fueris. (536.) Translate into Latin, {a) Do not love the wicked. — Do not hear the foolish. • The imperative of dic6rS is die, not dic6. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 205 (b) §ome philosophers may-have-denied the soul to be im- mortal. — Perhaps-you-have-advised the young-man. (c) / think-I-can-advise the young man. — You may easily repress the minds of young men.— You cannot easily recall the industry (studium) of men. (d) The mind itself knows-not what (qualis) the mind is. — Tell me where you were. — I-do-not-know why you did not come to me. — Tell (me), were you (fuerisne) in school yesterday? — It makes no difference how many are taken-captive. — The boy will remain (erit) there, where the master may appoint him. — I will tell you what I have seen. — I will tell you what I have heard. — Tell me what you have done. LESSON LXXXVIII. Subjunctive Imperfect and Pluperfect, — Conditional Conjunctions and Sentences. (537.) The subjunctive imperfect simply adds the person-endings, m, s, t, m u s, t i s, n t, for the active^ r, ris (re), tur, mur, mini, ntur, ior \hQ passive, to the present infinitive form of the verb. Thus, Inf. Pres. esse, to be. a mar 6, ^o love. regerS, to rule. Imperf. Subj. Act. e s s e m, / might be. ftmare-m. reg6re-m. Imperf. Subj. Pass. ftmare-r. r6gere-r. (538.) PARADIGM. SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT. 1. EssSm. — I might, could, would, or should be. essem. esses. I ess6t. 1| essemus. | essetis. ] essent. 2. Active. — I might, could, would, SfC., love, advise, rule, hear. amar- mSner- reger- audir- 6t. emus. etis. 3. Passive. — I might, could, would, 6fc., be loved, advised, ruled, heard. amar- ^ monSr- r&g&r- audlr- , •gr. 'ens or erg. etur. 6mur. 206 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. i2ewi.— The vowel e of the ending is long, except where it comes before m or t final, when it is short of necessity. (539.) {a) The subjunctive pluperfect active simply adds the person-endings, m, s, t, mus, tis, nt, to the past infinitive form of the verb. Thus, Past Infinitive. Pluperfect Subjunctive. f u i s s e, to have been. fuiss6-m, / might have been. amavisse, to have loved. amavisse-m, / might have loved, (b) The subjunctive pluperfect passive is formed by combining the perfect participle with the subjunct- ive imperfect of e s s e ; E- g", amatiis essem (sometimes with the subjunctive pluperfect of e s s e ; e. g.j a m a t ii s f ii i s s e m, &c.). (c) PARADIGM. SUBJUNCTIVE PLUPERFECT. I might, could, would, should have been, &fG. fuissem. I fuisses. I fuisset. || fuissemiis. | fuissetis. | fuissent. 2. Active. — I might, could, (fC, have loved, advised, ruled, heard. ftmav- monu- rex- audiv- isset. 3. Passive. — I might, could, 6fC., have been loved, advised, ruled, heard. i amatiis, a, iim, J g- 3 monitiis, a, um, f °' J rectus, a, iim, ^ y. auditus, a, um, ) essem. esses. esset. C amati, as, S, Plur. { "^^f^"' ^J ^' A recti, 88, a, ' auditi, ae, a. essemus. essetis. essent. Conditional Conjunctions and Sentences, (540.) (a) The conditional conjunctions are si, if; sin, but if; nisi, or ni, if not, unless. (h) A conditional sentence is one which is introduced by a conditional conjunction; c. g., if men were good, they would be happy. Rem. The sentence introduced by if is called the conditional sen- tence ; the other, the consequent sentence : if men v)ere good is the conditional ; they would be happy, the consequent. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 207 EXERCISE. (54 1 .) Vocabulary, To diminish^ minu6re (minu-, mi- nut-). To cross over, transire (irreg.). The world, orbis terrariim. To subdue, siibiggrS (subeg-, subac^, sub+Sgere). Longer, diutius [adv., compar.), I wish that, utinam (conj.). (542.) Examples and Rules. (a) Would that my father were alive ! I vnsh he could come ! Utinam pater v i v 6 r e t ! Utinam v e n i r e t ! i^* In these examples (which refer to present time), the thing wished is supposed to be impossible (the wish is vain). I wish he had lived I Utinam v i x i s s e t ! I wish he had come ! ' Utinam venisset ! I^P* In these examples (which refer to past time), t^e thing wished is supposed to be impossible (the wish is vain). (a) Rule of Syntax, — The imperfect and pluperfect sub- junctive are used to express an impossible supposition^ or a vain wish ; the imperfect., with reference to present or future time ; the pluperfect., with reference to past time. (b) Conditional Sentences, (1) If he has (any) money., Si pecuniam habet, d^t. he gives (it). Here the man is supposed to have money ; the condition expressed by * if " is therefore reed. Si pecuniam habeat, dabit. Here the condition is possible, if not real. The man may have money. Si pecuniam habere t, d aret. Here the man is supposed to have tio money : the condition is unreal, (Observe that it refers to present or future time.) (4) If hehadhada/i^/moTicy, I Si pecuniam h^buisset, he would have given it, \ d e d i s s e t. Here the man is supposed not to have had any money ; the condition is therefore unreal (referring to past time). Hence, (6) Rule of Syntax. — In conditional sentences (1), a real (2) If he has {any) money, he will give (it). (3) If he had any money., he would give it. 208 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. condition is expressed by the indicative ; (2) a possible condition by the present or perfect subjunctive ; (3) an unreal or impossible condition in present time by the im- perfect subjunctive ; and (4) an unreal or impossible con- dition in past time by the pluperfect subjunctive. Rem. 1. In cases (3) and (4), the subjunctive must be used in the consequent as well as in the conditional sentence. 2. It follows that the perfect or pluperfect indicative can never be used with su If he had come = si venisset, not si venerit. (543.) Translate into English. Utinam salvus esses. — Si hoc die is, erras. — Si hoc d i c a s, erres. — S i hoc diceres, errares. — S i hoc d i x - isses, erravisse s. — Si venisses ad exercitum, ab impera- tore visus esse s. — Frater mihi narrabat quid amicus tuus fecisset (534, d). — Memoria minuitur, nisi eam e x e r - c e a s. — S i Helvetii flumen transire conentur, Caesar eos prohibebit. — S i Helvetii flumen transire conarentur, Caesar eos prohi beret.— Si Helvetii flumen transire conati assent, Caesar eos prohibuisset. — Si obsides ab Helve tiis Caesari (54) dentur, ciim iis pacem faciet. — Si obsides ab Helve tiis Caesari darentur ciim iis pacem f a c e r e t. — S i obsides ab Helvetiis Caesari dati essent, ciim iis pacem f e c i s s e t. — Non siiperaremur, cives {voc.) s i nostri fortes essent. — Non siiperati essemiis, cives, si fortiores milites nobis (Ja^, 125, H., a) fuissent. — Alexander totum fer6 orbem terrarum siibegit. — Alexander, si diutius vixis - set, totum orbem terrarum siibegisset. '^ (544.) Translate into Latin, I wish my father had lived longer. — / wish you had come, — Would-that the soldiers had been braver. — If you-would-read this book (542, 6, 2), I would give (it) to you. — Iu;ish the gen- eral had led the army across the Rhiue. — If you had any thing (quid), you would willuigly give (it). — If they had had the money, they would willingly have given it. — If-you-had-loved the boy, you-would-have advised him. — If you-love the boy, you-will-advise him. — If the soldiers would come to the army, they -would-be-praised by the general. — If the Gennans had-led (their) army across the Rhine, Caesar would-have-made an at- tack upon (in) tii§m. — Ifwe-are brave, we shall not be overcome SUBJUNCTIVE WITH UT, NE. 209 LESSON LXXXIX. Subordinate Sentences expressing a Purpose. — tit and Ne, (545.) The subjunctive forms of the verb posse, to he able, are the following : [Observe that p o s s e is compounded of p 6 1 -, the stem of p 6 1 i s, able, and esse; thus, p 6 t-e s s 6, contracted, posse. So all similar forms are contracted, and the t changed into s before s.] Subj. Pres. pos- sun. (Potis Sim = pot-sim = possim.) sis. sit. sTmus. sTtis. sint. Subj. Imperf. pos- s6m. (Potis essem = potessem = possem.) ses. set. semus. setis. sent. Subj.Perf. p6tu- 6rim. (Potis faerim = pot-fuerim = potuerim.) eris. erit. erimus. eritis. erint. Subj. Plup. potu- Iss^m (Pdtis fuissem = pot-fuissem = potuissem.) isses. iss^t. Issemus. issetis. issent. (546.) The^TiaZ conjunctions (i. 6., such as denote o. purpose, aim^ or result) are ut (or iiti), ne, quin^ quo, quo minus. duo, in order that, to the end that. duominiis, that (after verbs of hin- dering). IJt, or uti, that, so that, in order that. Ne, that not, so that not, lest. duln, but that. EXERCISE. (547.) Vocabulary. To cat, eder6 (598). A Rauracian, Rauracus, i. A Tulingian, Tulingus, i. To burn up, exur6re (exuss-, ex- ust-). Together, una [adv.). Basely, turpiter (215, 2). To surround, circumv6nii6 (vgn-, vent-). To resist, resistere (resttt-, restit-). To fix, hence to decide, statuere (statu-, statu-). To decide on something quite se- vere, aliquid grivius statuSre. To enjoin, praecipere (io, prsBCep-, cept-), prae+capere). To join battle, praelium committ^re. End, finis, is (m., 355, Ex. XL, 2). Subordinate Sentences expressing a Purpose, End, or Object. (548.) Examples and Rules, (a) I beseech you that you 1 ^^ ^^ ' I Te obsecro, u t hoc f ^ c i a s. or, I I beseech you to do this, j S2 210 UT, NE, EXPRESSING PURPOSE. Dux imperavit, ut miKtes stationes suas servarent. Dux imperavit ne milites stationes suas des^r- e r e n t. The general commanded that " i the soldiers should keep their stations ; or, The general commanded the soldiers to keep their sta- tions. J (h) I beseech you that you ') do not do this ; I m . « , /. . >Te obsecro n§ hoc facias. or, I beseech you not to do this, j The general commanded that " i the soldiers should not desert their stations ; or, The general commanded the soldiers not to desert their stations, j (a) These examples show that a purpose or aim may be ex- pressed in English by that, in order that, or (especially after verbs of asking and commanding) by the infinitive. In Latin, such sentences are expressed by u t, with the subjunctive.* (h) An object to be provided against is inti'oduced in English by that not, in order that not, or by not, with the infinitive. In Latin, such sentences are always expressed by n e, with the subjunctive. (549.) Translate into English. 1. Ut. Edimus ut vivamus, non vivimus iit 6 damns. — Venio ii t d i s c a m. — Veni iit discerem. — Orgetorix persuadet Castico (dat.) u t regnum o c c ii p e t. — In eo itinere, persuasit Castico, cujus pater regnum in civitate sua multos annos (191, a) obtinuerat, ii t regnum in civitate sua occiipare t. — Orget- orix persuadet Dumnorigi ut idem (150) conetur. — Orget- orix persuasit Dumnorigi ut idem conaretur. — Helvetii persuadent Rauracis, iiti ciim iis proficiscantur. — Helve- tii persuadent Rauracis et Tulingis, ii t i, oppidis suis vicisque * JubBr^ takes accugative with infinitive. UT, NE, EXPRESSING PURPOSE. 211 exustis'(457), una cum iis proficiscantur. — Caesar castella communit, u t Helvetios prohibere p o s s i t. — Caesar castella communivit u t Helvetios prohibere posset. — Caesar rogat Divitiacum iit f inem orandi faciat. — Caesar rogavit Divitia- cum lit finem orandi faceret. — Helvetiis (147) Caesar im- perat uti perfugas re due ant. — Helvetiis Caesar impSravit liti perfugas reducerent. 2. Ne. Te obs^cravi ne hoc faceres. — Pater f ilium obsecrat nS quid turpiter f a c e r e t.— Milites, n e ab hoste circumven- i r e n t u r, audaciiis (376) resistere ac fortius pugnare coepe- inint. — Divitiacus Caesarem obsecrat, ne quid gi-aviiis in fra- trem statu at. — Divitiacus, multis ciim laciymis (89, H.) Caesarem obsScrare coepit, n e quid gravius in fratrem s t ^ t u - ere t. — Pi-aeceptum est (perf. pres., it has he€7i enjoined to or upon) Labieno, n e praelium committat, nisi Caes8,ris copiae V i s ae s i n t (542, 6, 2). — Praeceptum erat Labieno, ne praelium committeret, nisi Caesaris copiae visae essent. [Recollect that a purpose or aim is often expressed in English by the infinitive; but in Latin never — always by ut with the subjunctive for a positive aim, by n e with the subjunctive for a negative aim.] (550.) Translate into Latin. The general commands the lieutenant (147) not to do (= that he may not do) this. — The general exhorted the soldiers to make (= that they should make) the attack sharply. — The father be- seeches his daughter to make an end of praying. — Some-men (quidam) live to eat, not eat to live. — He comes to see the gen- eral. — He came to see the general. — The Helvetians persuade the Tulingians to set out together with them. — The captive beseeches the general not to decide-on any-thing at-all-severe against (in) him (se). — Caesar commands the Gauls (147) to bring hack {=that they should bring back) the deserters. — The Romans, that they might not he surrounded by the Gauls, began to fight more bravely. — The commander enjoins-it-uiX)n the lieutenant not to join battle. — The commander enjoined it upon the lieutenant not to join battle. 212 SUCCESSION OF TENSES. LESSON XC. Succession of Tenses, — tit expressing a Result (551.) (1.) We cannot say in English, *' He comes^ that he might see the general ;" or, '■'•He came, that he may see the gen- eral ;" but we must say, •' He comes, that he may see the gen- eral," and, " He came, that he inight see the general." It is obvious that this tense of the verb in the subordinate sentence depends upon that of the principal sentence ; and this depend- ence is called the succession of tenses, 2. The tenses of the Latin verb are divided into primary and historical. {a) Primary, {h) Historical, '■{ Present. a mat, he loves. Imperfect. ^ ( amabat, was loving. Future. a m a b i t, he will love. Pluperfect. amaverat, he had loved. Pres. Perf. a m a V i t, he has loved. Perf. Aoriat. a m a V 1 1, he loved. 3. The Rule for the succession of tenses then is : If there be a primary tense in the principal sentence, there must be a pri- mary tense in the subordinate sentence ; if a historical tense in the principal, a historical tense in the subordinate. [The examples in the preceding lesson illustrate this rule, and those in the present lesson will farther confirm it.] EXERCISE. (552.) Vocabulary, To strive, contend, niti (nis- and nix-), dep. Despair, desperatid, (desperation) is (333, R.). To run together, concurrere (con- curr- and concucurr-, concurs-). Storm, tempestas, (tempestat) is (293). To rise (as a storm), cooriri (coort-, con-f-oriri). Palisade [rampart of stdlces) val- lum, i. To cut or tear down, scindSrS (scid-, sciss-). To begin, incip6re (incep-, incept-, in+cap6r6). To afford means or facilities, dar6 facultatem. Deceit, dolus, i. RatJier, magis. Integrity, probitas, (prSbitat) is (293). Course, cursus, us. Change, commutatio (onis, 333, R.). ' UT WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 213 Subordinate Sentences expressing a Result. (553.) Examples and Rules, So great is the power of in^ tegrity, that we esteem it even in an enemy. The Helvetians have been so taught by (=have so learn- ed from) their fathers, that they contend (or, as to con- tend) rather tvith valour than deceit. Tanta vis probitatis est, ut earn vel in hoste diliga mus. Helvetii ita a patribus suis^ didicerunt, ii t magis virtute quam dolo nitantur. (a) These examples show that a result (especially after the words such, so, so great, &c.) is expressed in English by that with the indicative, or, as to with the infinitive ; in Latin, by u t with the subjunctive. (6) Rule of Syntax, — Ut, signifying that, and introducing a result, governs the subjunctive. Rem. U t, expressing a result, generally follows the correlative words talis, tantus [such, so great); ad^o, sic, iti {so)\ and verba signifying to accomplish, to bring to pass, &c. (554.) Translate into English. Imperator perficit, iiti Sequani dent obsides. — Dumnorix perficit, iiti Sequani dent obsides, ne itinere (153, a) Hel- vetios prohibeant (548, h) — Imperator tanta vi (55, a) oppi- dum oppugnat, ii t desperatio animos oppidanorum o c c ii p e t (551, 3). — Imperator t a n t a vi oppidum oppugnavit ti t desper- atio animos oppidan5rum occupare t. — T a n t u s timer om- nem exercitum occupavit, ii t omnium animos perturbaret. — Tanta tempestas siibito coorta est (perf. aor.) ut naves cursum tenere non p o s s e n t. — Imperator t a n t a m sibi (54) jam in Gallia auctoritatem comparaverat, iit undique ad eum legationes concurrerent (551, 3). — Galli vallum scindunt. — Galli vallum scindere et fossam complere incipiunt. — Galli sic nosti'os contemnunt, iit vallum scindere et fossam complere in ci pi ant. — Oppidum natura (55, a) loci sic muniebatur, lit magnam ad ducendum (496) bellum daret facultatem. — Auxiliorum adventu (55) magna rerum commutatio facta est. 214 auo, auiN, auoMiNus, with subjunctive. — Horum adventu t a n t a rerum commutatio fact& est, ii t nos- tri fortius pugnarent atque hostes repellerent. (555.) Translate into Latin, [Recollect that as to with the English infinitive must be translated by ut with subjunctive.] The commander hrougJit-it-to pass that the Sequanians gave hostages. — The Sequanians gave hostages that they would not prohibit the Helvetians from (their) journey (153, a). — So- great-a fear suddenly seizes the whole army, that it alarms the minds of all. — So great a tempest suddenly arises^ that the ships can not hold their course. — The commander procures for himself so great authority in Italy, that even the senators run- together to him. — The Helvetians begin to cut-down the bridge. — The Helvetians so despised our men, that they began to cut down the bridge. — By the approach of the iEduans, so great a change was made that the Helvetians began to fight more bravely. — The Helvetians had so learned from their fathers, as to contend rather with valour than deceit. LESSON XCI. Periphrastic Conjugation, Subjunctive. — Use of quo, quin, quominus, with the Subjunctive. (556.) The want of a future subjunctive is supplied to some extent by the periphrastic conjugation, formed by combining the participles in riis and d us with the subjunctive tenses of e sse, to 6e. AcnvE. 1 Pres. Jmperf. Perf Pluperf. ftmaturus sim, / m^y be about to love. amaturus essem, / migkt be about to love. dmaturus fa6rim, / may have been about to love. amaturus fuiss6m, / migkt have been about to love. PASSIVE. 1 Pres. Imperf. Perf. Pluperf. ftmandus sim, I may be to be loved {one must love me). amandiis essSm, / might be to be loved. ftmandus fuerim, / may have been to be loved. &mandus fuiss6m, / might have been to be loved. Esse {to he). \ Pres. Imperf. f iiturus sim, I may be about to be. 1 f uturiis essgm, / might be about to be. -.-:...-i. ujt.....j.:...'...-juji ■ -^. 3 ■ .■..-■^.■-T:r^ : : i-afr- ■■ •. ■ auo,auiN, auoMiNus, with subjunctive. 215 EXERCISE. (557.) Vocabulary. To hold back, restrain, retiuere (re- tinu-, retent-, re+tenere). To stand in the way, prevent, ob- staxe (obstit-, obstat-, ob-f-stare). To sustain, sustinere (tinu-, tent-, Bub-ftenere). Novelty, no vitas, (nSvitat) is (293). To decree, consciscere (consciv-, con- scit-). To commit suicide, stb! mortem con- sciscere (= to decree death to one's self). Cowardice, ignavia, ae. To take away from, eriperS (io-^ eripu-, erept-) ; governs ace. and ahl. To train, educate, ednc&rg (av-, at-). To deceive, fallere (f^fell-, fals-). It was Ccesar's fault, Per Caesa- rem stetit (=it stood through Cae- sar). To finish, perficSre (perf ec-, per feet-). Suspicion, suspicio, onis (333, R.). (558.) Examples and Rules, (a) Caesar erects forts, that he may the more easily * keep off the Helvetians. Caesar castella commumt, quo f a c i I i u s Helvetios prohib- ere possit. (a) Quo is used to express a purpose (instead of ii t), espe- cially when a comparative enters the sentence. Caesar castella communit ut possit {that he may, &c.). Caesar castella communit quo facilius possit {that he may more easily, &c.). (5) (1) There is no one but thinks ; or, There is no one who does not think. (2) There is no one so brave as not to be con- founded, (3) It is not doubtful but that the soldiers will fight bravely. (4) I did not doubt that the soldiers would fight bravely. (6) They could not be resti-ained from hurl- ing darts (= but that they should hurl darts) . Nemo est quin putet. Nemo est tarn fortis perturbetur. quin Non diibium est quin milites forliter pugnaturi sint. Non dubitabam quin milites fortiter pugnaturi es- sent. Non pot^rant r^tineri quin tela conjicSrent. Nihil impedit, quominus hoc faciat. 216 auo, auiN, auOxMiNus, with subjunctive. (b) Quin is used in the sense of " but,^^ or "as not,^^ after negative sentences ; and in the sense of " that not^'''' and '* that^''^ after non dubito, non dubium est, &c. ; in the sense of '''from'''' (= but that) after verbs of restraining, &c. (c) (1) What stands in the Quid obstat quominus Ju- way of Julius being lius sit beatus? happy (= what stands in the way in order that Julius may not be happy) ? (2) Nothing hinders him from doing this (= no- thing impedes, in order that he may not), (c) Quominus is used (in preference to ne) after verbs of hindering, preventing, standing in the way of &c. (It can generally be rendered into English by of or from, with a parti- ciple, as above.) (559.) Translate into English, {a) duo {=in order that, used instead of ut, with comparatives). CaBsar milites hortatus est iit fortes essent. — Caesar milites hortatus est quo fortiores essent. — Eo opere perfecto (456) Caesar praesidia disponit, castella communit, quo facil- ius, si Helvetii transire conentur (542, 6, 2) prohibere possit. — Scrips!, ut auctoritatem haberem. — Scrips! quo in suadendo (488) plus auctoritatis (186, a) haberem. — Auxilium rogant, ut hostium copias sus tine ant. — Subsidium rogant, quo fa- cilius hostium copias sustineant. {h) duin (= but that). Nemo est tam fortis quin re! novitate (55, a) perturbetur. — Orgetorix moituus est, nequS abest suspicio qu!n ipse sibi mortem consc!verit. — Helvetii non diibitant qu!n Romani ^duis {abL, verb of depriving) libertatem ereptur! sint. — Non dubium est qu!n c!ves, iibi {when) patria in periciilo fiiturS, sit (534, e), fortiter pugnaturi sint. — Non dubito quin puerumbene educaturus sis. — Turpe estfalli. — Tur- piiis est fallere. — Non dubium est quin turpius sit fallere quam fall!. — German! r^tineri non poterant quin in nostros tela conjicfirent. aUUM WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. 217 (c) d u 6 m ! n u s (= i7i order that not). Per Labienum stetit quominus Romani oppidum occupa- rent. — Nostrorum ignavia obstabat quominus hostes super- arentur. — Non me impedies quominus id faciam. — Sen- ecttis non impedit quominus litterarum studia teneamus. (560.) Translate into Latin, [E,emember tlie rule for the Succession of Tenses (551, 3).] {a) duo. Cajsar, having finished the work (= the work being finished), exhorted the soldiers to he of a braver spirit (fortiori animo). — I ask your assistance, that I may do this the more easily. [b) duin. There is no one who does not think that the wise are always happy. — It is not doubtful that Caesar will cross the Rhine. — I do not doubt that my father will come. — I was not doubting that you had educated the boys well. (c) duo minus. Nothing hinders me from being happy. — It was the fault of the commander that the soldiers did not fight bravely. — The cowardice of the commander stood in the way of our taking- possession-of the town. LESSON XCII. Use of Quiim, with the Subjunctive* (561.) The conjunction quum (sometimes written cum) has two uses : (1) to denote time simply {when, while) ; (2) to denote a cause, or reason (since). The former is called quum temjporal, the latter quum causal. EXERCISE. (562.) Vocabulary. To contemplate, contemplari (at-), dep. To perceive, ammadverterfi (vert-, vers-, animum+ad+vertere). To delay, tardarg (av-, fit-). To get sight of, conspIcSre (spex-, spect-). Incessant, continuous, continena, (nent) is (107). Of right, ju9tly, jur6 (ahl. of jos). T ai8 aUUM WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. To order, juber§, does not take ut with subj., but ace. with inf. ; Jie ordered them to await =jussit eos expectarS. Destruction, interitus, fis. To make-haste, maturare (av-, at-) To announce, nuntiare (av-, at-). To meet, convgnire (ven-, vent-). (563.) Examples and Rules, (a) Whenwe contemplate the \(^ num. coelum contempla- Jirmament, we wonder at\ mur, Dei magnitudinem the greatness of God. I admiramur. (a) Rule of Syntax. — Quum, when used simply to express the time (especially with the primary tenses), is followed by the indicative. Caesar, quum Pompeium vi- c i s s e t, in Asiam trajecit. (6) Ccesar^ when he had con- quered ( = having con- quered) Pompey, crossed over into Asia. (6) Rule of Syntax. — Quum temporal is followed by the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive, if the events de- scribed depend on each other, and especially when the aorist perfect is used in the principal sentence. [In the above example, the verb trajecit, of the principal sentence, is in the aorist perfect. In all such cases, the subordinate sentence with quum can be rendered by the English participle, as in the example above, and in the two following.] The prtJBtor, having come (=when he had come) into the forum, perceived. The commander, having got sight of the enemy, or- dered. (c) Since these things are so. Since they cannot defend themselves. Although the soldiers were retarded hy rains, yet they overcame all (obstacles). Praetor, quum in forum ve- nisset, ^nimadvertit (perf.). ; Imperator, quum hostes con- spexissit, jussit. n5n Quae quum ita sint. Quum se d efendSre p o s s i n t. Milites, quum imbribus t a r- darentur, tS,men omnift siiperaverunt, (c) Rule of Syntax. — Q u u m causal (signifying since, or although) is always followed by the subjunctive. ^ aUUM WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. 219 (564.) Translate into English. 1. duum temporal, with subjunctive (563, b). Caesar, quum id nuntiatum esset, maturavit ab urbe proficisci. — Quum legio decima constitisset, omnes hostes ad eum locum contenderunt. — Quum legatus ad oppidum ac- cessisset, pueri miilieresque pacem ab Romanis petiverunt. — Quum Caesar ad oppidum accessisset, oppidarri pacem ab eo petierunt. — Quum imperator signum d e d i s s e t, milites in hostes impetum f ecerunt. — Caesar, quum Gallos v i c i s s e t, in Italiam contendit (perf.). — Quum legati Caesarem in itinere convenissent, eos suum adventum expectare jussit. 2. duum causal [since, or although), with subjunctive (563, c). Milites, quum frigore et imbribus tardarentur, tamen continenti labore (55, a) omnia siiperaverunt. — Cicel-o jure pater pteiae dictus est, quum urbem ab interitu servasset.* — ^dui, quum se suaque ab Helvetiis defendere non pos- s i n t, legatos ad Caesarem mittunt, rogatum (379) auxilium.— - Quum omnes homines mortales s i n t, etiam tu morieris. (565.) Translate into Latin. 1. duum temporal, with subjunctive (563, h). The ambassadors having asked (= when the ambassadors had a^Tced) peace of Caesar, he ordered them to await his coming. — Caesar having ordered them (=when Ccesar had ordered them) to await his coming, (they) obeyed. — The lieutenant, when that was (=had been) announced^ returned to the citadel. — The fifth legion having halted^ the enemy made an attack upon them. — The praetor, having come into the forum, saw the cap- tives. — The boy, having approached the wood, heard a voice. 2. duum causal, with subjunctive (563, c). Since these things are so, let us believe (528, 6, 1). — Nations, when they cannot defend themselves, ask assistance. — The scout, though he was delayed by the cold, came to the camp.— Since Caesar took- away (eripere) liberty from the iEduans, they rightly feared. * Contracted from servavisset. «so RELATIVE SENTENCES. LESSON xcm. Use of the Subjunctive in Relative Sentences, (566.) The relative pronoun often takes the place of a con- junction in introducing a sentence, and is therefore followed by the subjunctive. The follov^ing exaniples illustrate some of these uses. {a) You err because you think = {b) They sent men to seek for peace = (c) I am not such a man as to be delighted with vices = You err who think. They sent men who should seek for peace. I am not he who can be delighted with vices. EXERCISE. (567.) Vocabulary. A herald, a proclaimer, praBco, (prae- con) is (333). A Nervian, Nervius, i. It pleased, plScuit (with dat.). At length, demum. Affection, affectio, (tion) is (333, R.). To hurt, nocere (with dat). To be present, adesse (ad+esse). To bear, ferre {irreg.). Fortunate, fortunatus, S, tim. A youth, adolesoens, (cent) is (m. and f., 25, «). Innocence, innScentia, sb. Fit for, idoneus, a, um (with dat). (568.) Examples and Rule. (a) Hannibal did wrong in wintering {■= because he wintered) at Capua. Male fecit Hannibal, qui Ga- puae hiemav^rit (=^ who wintered at Capua). Here qui introduces the ground or cause of the judgment tiiat Hanni- bal erred. {b) They send ambassadors to say {=who may say). They sent ambassadors to say {=who might say). Legates mittunt, qui dicant. Legates miserunt, qui dic6- rent. Here qui (=ut ii) introduces v^ purpose. (c) You are not the man to be ignorant. He ordered all (those) who could bear arms to he present. Non is Ss, qui nescias (=:you are not he who can be ignorant). Omnes (eos understood) qui armd, feiTe p o s s e n t, ftdessS jussit. RELATIVE SENTENCES. 2^1 In these examples, qui introduces a nearer definition of the demon- Btrative, which is expressed or implied. (d) Rule of Syntax. — The subjunctive is used in a relative sentence to express a ground, a jpurpose, or to give a nearer definition of a demonstrative expressed or implied. Rem. 1. Talis, tam, tantus, it a, &c., maybe these demonstra- tives, as well as is, ea, id. 2. The relative to express a purpose is very common, especially in Caesar, and should be thoroughly studied and practised. (569.) Translate into English, [Remember the rule for the Succession of Tenses (551, 3).] {a) dui, ground, cause, or reason. Erras qui censeas Deum esse injustum. — Fortunatus fait Alexander, qui'virttitis suae Homerum praeconem (225, a) invenerit. — O fortunate adolescens, qui tuae virtutis Ho- merum praeconem inveneri s. — Nervii inctisaverunt reliquos Belgas q u i se populo Romano (54) dedidissent. ib) dvLi, purpose. Eripiunt aliis (153, a) quod aliis (54) largiantun — Legates ad Romanes miserunt, qui peterent pacem. — Caesar 6quitatum praemittit, qui* videant quas in partes hostes iter faciant (534, d). — Imperator misit exploratores, qui cognos- cerent qualis esset (534, d) natura mentis. — Caesar copias suas in proximum coUem subduxit, equitatumque, qui s u s - tin ere t hostium impetum, misit. — Ariovistus omnes copias, quae nostros perterrerent, et munitione (153, a) pro- hiberent, misit. — Placuit Caesai-i ut ad Ariovistum legates mitteret (548, a). — Placuit Caesari ut ad Ariovistum legates mitteret, qui ^beo postularent, iit aliquem locum collo- quio (54) diceret (548, a). — Tum demum Ariovistus partem suarum copiarum q u ae castra oppugnarent misit. (c) dui, defining a demonstrative [express or implied). Imperator omnes cives qui arma ferre possent adesse jussit. — Legatus poposcit (411, a) obsides, arma, servos, qui ad Helvetios perfiigissent. — Milites ea quae imperarentur * Equitatum {cavalry) being a noun of multitude, the relative qui may be in the pluraL T 2 222 RELATIVE SENTENCES. Bbenter f ecerunt. — Non talis sum qui te fall am. — Inn6- centia est affectio talis animi, quae noceat nemini (54). (570.) Translate into Latin, (a) Caesar did badly in-crossing {who crossed, perf. subj.) the Khine. — They err who think that the soul is not immortal. — The father censured his son for setting-out* (= wJw had set out, plup. subj.) from the city. (h) Caesar sends forward scouts, to choose (= who may choose) a place fit for the camp. — Caesar sent ambassadors to Ariovistus to demand (=who should demand). — The general brings back his forces to the hill, and sends forward the cavalry to sustain (= who may sustain) the attack. * Proficiscor. § 17. ORATIO OBLIQUA. (XCIV.) LESSON XCIV. Oratio Ohliqua {Oblique Narration). (571.) In relating the words of another, we may either, (1) represent him as speaking in the first person, and give his words precisely as they were uttered ; e.g.^ " He said, ''I will come;' " or, (2) we may state what he said in a narrative form ; e. g,^ " He said that he would come.'*^ The former is called Oratio recta (direct narration) \ the latter, Oratio obliqua (oh- lique narration), ^p* The example above given shows that the moods must be different in the two modes of narration. (572.) The sentences introduced in the oratio obliqua are either princij)al or subordinate ; e. g.^ Ariovistus said that he would not wage war upon the ^ d u a n s, if they paid the tribute yearly. In this example, the sentence in spaced printing is the principal sentence ; the sentence in italic the subordinate sentence. EXERCISE. (573.) Vocabulary, To bring upon, to wage, inferre (il- lat-)» irreg. Tribute, stipendium, i. Yearly, quotannis (used as adv.). To pay, pend6re (pepend-, pens-). To shmv, point o^it, ostendere (os- tend-, ostens-, and ostent-). To excel, praestare (praesttt-, praes- tit-, and praestat-). Because, propt^rei quod. To get, to gain for another, concil- iarg (av-, at-). To get possession of, potiri, (pdtit) dep. (governs gen. or abl.). Very easy, perfacilis, e (with dat.). Affirm J confirmare (av-, at-). H^* The Helvetians intend, Hel- vetiis est in animo (=it is in mind to the Helvetians). 224 ORATIO OBLiaUA. (574.) Examples and Rules, (a) Ariovistus said that he would not wage war upon the JEduans. Ariovistus dixit, se jEduis bellum non illaturum esse. (a) Rule of Syntax. — In principal sentences in oratio o b 1 i q u a, the accusative vnth the infinitive is used. Kem. When they express a command or wish, the subj. is used. (b) Ariovistus said that he would not wage war upon the JEduans^ if they paid Ariovistus dixit, s e JE d u i s bellum non esse illa- turum, 5l stlpendium qudt^ the tribute yearly, | annis penderent, (h) In subordinate sentences in oratio obliqua, the 5W&- junctive is always used (e. g., penderent). (c) The lieutenant denied that he had crossed the Rhine, He denies that he can give. Legatus, nSgavit se Rhenum transiss©.* Negat s6 poss^ d&re. (575.) Translate into English, Caesar dixit se, postquam hostes fusi essent, castra muniturum esse.- — De decima legione Caesar non diibitabat. — Caesar dixit, se de decima legione non dubitare. — Caesar dixit, se ciim sola decima legione esse iturum.f — Caesar dixit se cum sola decima legione, de qua non diibi- taret, esse iturum. — Imperator dixit, maximas nationes pulsas superatasque esse. — Helve tiis (54) perfacile erat totiiis Galliae imperio (all.) potiri. — Dumnorix ostendit, Hel- vetiis perfacile esse, quum virtute (55, a) omnibus {dat.) praestarent, totius Galliae imperio potiri. — Dumnorix ipse Castico (54) regnum conciliaturus erat. — Dumnorix con- firmat se Castico regnum conciliaturum esse. — Hel- vStiis est in animo iter p^r provinciam f acere ; aliud iter bS,hent nullum. — Sibi ess6 in animo (573, ^P),dicunt Hel- v^tii, sin6 ullo mMeficlo iter per provinciam fac^re, prop- tSre^ qu6d S,liud iter h^beant nullum. — Imperator non potest iter Helvetiis (54) p6r provinciam dare. — Imperator • Past infin. of transIrS. ^ t Fut. infin. of ir6, to go. oRATio eBLiauA. 225 nSgat sg, m6r6 et exemplo popiili Romani, posse iter Hel- v6tiis per provinciam dare. (576.) Translate into Latin. Caesar said that he, after Pomjpey was conquered, would cross-over into Asia, — Caesar had full confidence in (z=did not douht concerning) the fourth legion. — Caesar said that he would attack the town with the fourth legion alone, in which he had full confidence, — Cicero said that the greatest cities had he en attacked. — The lieutenant affirms that he will lead the army across the Rhine, if the enemy attempt to hinder (them) (prohibere). — The Helvetians say that they intend (573, 8!^') to seek peace of Ccesar. § 18. IMPERSONAL VERBS. (XCV.— XCVI.) LESSON XCV. Impersonals, — Pudet, Piget, TcBdet, <^c. (577.) Impersonal verbs are those which have no subject, and take the pronoun it before them in English; e. g,, pluit, it rains* (578.) {a) Some impersonals are never used in the personal form; e.g.^ piget, it grieves, &c. ; (b) others are simply the third person of personal verbs : e. g,, placet, it pleases (placeo, I please), (c) Again, the third person singular of many intran- sitive verbs is used impersonally in the passive : curritur, they run (it is run) ; I am envied, invideturmihi; nun- ciatum est, it was told. (579.) (a) The following impersonals (which express certain feelings) take the accusative of the person and genitive of the cause of the feeling. Piggt, piguit, it grieves. P-jjti. -J-*. ^ ^ shames, ud6t, puduit, < . / i one IS ashamed, PoenitSt, poenituit, it repents. Taed6t, pertoesum est, it wearies, disgusts. MisSrSt, one pities. Your f ally grieves me. I Me pigfit stultitise tuoe (=i^ grieves me of your folly). (h) Sometimes the cause or object of the feeling is expressed by the infinitive, or a sentence with quod. / am not asham^ of having done J repent of offending you. Non pudet m6 hoc f e c i s s 6 {=ii does not shame me to have done this). Poenitet mS quod te offendl {=it repents Tne that I have of fended you). IMPERSONAL VERBS. 227 EXERCISE, (580.) Vocabulary. Indolent, ignav-us, &, um. Folly, ineptiae, arum (57, R.). To sin, peccare (av-, at-). Business, nfegotium, i. Undertaken, susceptus, a, iim (part, of suscipere). To confess, fat6ri (fass-), dep. Because, since, quoni&m [conj.). Almost, paene {adv.). Some day, aliquandd {adv.). Innocent, iimocens, (innocent) is Lot, sors, (sort) is (293). [(107). (581.) Translate into English. {a) Ignavum poemtebit aliquando ignaviae. — Non poeni- tet m e hujus c o n s i 1 i i. — T u i* m e miseret. — E o s i n e p - t i a r u m poenitebat. — Poemtebat me peccat i. — Miseret t e aliorum, tui* nee miseret, nee pudet. — Nos miseret ca- lamitatis tuae. — Nunquam Csesarem suscepti negotii pertaesum est. — Me civitatis morum piget, taedetque. {h) Ilium poenitet quod me offenderit. — Socratem non puduit fateri se multas res nescire. — Teidpiiduit face re. — Non poenitet me vixisse, quoniam non frustra vixi. — Q u e m poenitet peccasse, paene est innocens. (582.) Translate into Latin. (a) Thou wilt repent of thy folly. — He will be ashamed of his indolence. — We shall be ashamed of thee. — We pitied them. — He was ashamed of us. — We shall never repent of our industry. — The boy will some-day be ashamed of his indolence. — Thou wilt some-day repent of thy folly. — ^We are weary of life. — He was ashamed of the citizens. — I am ashamed of you and your ignorance. — Many are grieved (at) their lot {gen.) {=z It grieves many of their lot). — I am not only grieved at, but also (sed etiam) ashamed of, my folly (=It not only grieves, but also shames me of my folly). (fc) I repent of having-sinned. — I am ashamed of doing this. — A wise man is not ashamed to confess that he is ignorant-of many things. — I am weary of living (vivere) . — I repent of hav- ing lived in-vain. — The boy repents of having offended (quod, with jperf. subj.) the master. — The young man is ashamed of having lived in-vain. — The general repented of having moved {inf.) the camp. — The Helvetians repented of having crossed {inf.) the river. — The barbarians repented of having approached (inf.) the i*ampart (use ad before the accusative). * Gen. of tt. >2S IMPERSONAL VERB:^ LESSON XCVI. Impersonal Verbs, continued. (583.) Vocabulary, Ought, it behooves, oportet, ebat, uit, &c. (with ace. and inf.). It is becoming, dScet (with ace. and inf.). It pleases, placet, placmt, &c. (with dat.). It is of importance, it interests, in- terest (with gen.). It concerns, it matters, refert (with gen.). (584.) Examples and Rules. It is agreeable, libet, or lubet (with dat.). It is allowed, lawful {one must), li- cet (licuit and licitum est), dat. It happens, contingit {dot.). Accidit (used rather of evil accidents). It is expedient, expedit [dat.). With my permissioii, me a voluntate [abl., 55, a). Pueros oportet diligentes esse (=i^ behooves boys to be diligent). D e c e t verecundum ess6 adolescentem. (a) Oportet and decet are followed by the accusative and infinitive. [I^" Oportet is also followed by the subjunctive.] (a) Boys ought to he dili- gent. It becomes a young man to be modest. Majari parti pi a c uit castra defendere. P 1 a c u i t Csesari ut ad Ario- vistum legates mitteret. (b) (1) It pleased the major- ity to defend the camp. (2) Ccesar determined {=it pleased Ccesar) to send ambassadors to Ariovistus. ^(h) Placet (expressing b. purpose) may be followed by the dative, with (1) the infinitive, or (2) the subjunctive with ut. (c) / may go (= it is allowed to me to go). You may go. I might have gone (= it was allowed to me to go). I may be idle. I do not choose (= it is not agreeable to me). Mihi ire licet. Tibi ire licet. Mihi ire licuit. Mihi 6tioso esse 1 i e e t. Non 1 i b e t mihi. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 229 (c) Licet, lib^t, and, in short, aU impersonds which admit to or for after them in English, are followed by the dative. {d) It concerns all (=it is the interest of all). It concerns me. It is your concern. It is my business* Interest omnium. Mea interest. Tua refert. Mea refert. {d) Interest governs the genitive ; but when a personal pronoun is to be used, the possessive ablative (mea, tua, &c.) is used instead of the genitive (mei, tui, 6cc.). Refert is rarely used except with these ablative forms. (585.) Translate into English. Omnium interest vera (accus.pl.) dicere. — Interest mea recte facere. — Non libet mihi pi-aeliiim committere. — Caesari n5n placuit prselium committere. — Interest mea hoc (accus.) scribere. — Legatus petebat, ut sibi discedere liceret. — Expedit reipublicae (dat.,5S4:,c.). — Tibi licet id facere. — Mea voluntate tibi id facere licet. — Helvetii rogant ut (548, a) Csesaris voluntate id facere lie eat. — Caesa- rem oportet ad Ariovistum venire. — Ariovistus dixit; Caesa- rem oportere (574, a) ad se venire. — Placuit Caesari ut decimam legionem mitteret. — Amicitiam immortalem esse oportet. — Mihi negligenti esse non licet. — Nobis venire licuit. — Liberorum (65, R.) interest parentes vivere et salvos esse. — Tibi ignavo esse non licet. — Peccare nemini lice t. — D e c e t te esse diligentem. (586.) Translate into Latin, ] Boys ought to be modest (584, a). — You oight to do this.— You ought to have done this (oportuit, with pres. infi} facere). — It becomes us to follow nature. — It becomes a young man to love his parents. — The general determined (= it pleased the general) to make the attack. — The Helvetians de- termined to send ambassadors to Caesar. — You may do this (584, c). — You may not do this. — I do not choose (=it is not agreeable to me) to ride-on-horseback. — I do not choose to come to the city. — It is every -body's interest (=it interests all) to do rightly (584, d). — It is my business to keep (my) word (fides). — You are not allowed to come. — We ought to praise the brave. u § 19. IRREGULAR VERBS. (XCVII.— CII.) LESSON XCVIL Possum, Posse, Pot-ui, to be able, (can). (587.) Pos-sum is compounded of pot-is, able, and the verb sum. The t before s is changed to s ; e. g., pot-sum, pos-sum; pot-sunt, pos-sunt. INDICATIVE. Pres. Ipos-sum. | p6t-es. |p6t-est. [pos-sumns. |p6t-estis. 1 pos-sunt. I7np., p6t-6r^Lm; Petf., p6t-ui; Plup., pot-ueram; Fut., p6t-er6 j Fut. Perf., p6t-u6r6 ; all regit lar. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres. pos-sini. pos-sis. pos-sit. Imperf. pos-s§m, posses, pos-set. pos-simiis. pos-sitis. pos sint. pos-semus. ^^^^ f^^-'ic m^a .,«»,<- pos-setis. pos-sent. Perf., pot-uerlm ; Plup., pot-uissem : regular. Injin. Pres., pos-se ; Perf., p6t-uiss6 ; Part., pot-ens (used only as an adjective). EXERCISE. (588.) Vocabulary, Laughter, risiis, us, m. To sow, sSrSrS (sev-, sat-). Good deed, act of kindness, bSnSf i- cium, i. Reap, m6t6r6 (messu-, mess-). To do good to, to benefit, prodessS (prof U-, pr6+sum) ; governs dot. Hang over, impendere. (589.) Examples, (a) To he very powerful, (6) Of the whole of Gaul^ the Helvetians are the most powerful. To render, reddfire (reddid-, red- dit-). Influence, gratia, re. Fraud, fraus, (fraud) is (293). Restrain, retinere (r6tinu-, retent-, re4-t6nere). With equanimity, eequo Snimo {abl., = with equable mind). Plurimum posse (= to be very much able), Totius Galliae plurimum Hel- v6tii possunt. POSSE, TO BE ABLE. 231 (c) A very few can keep o^(many). (d) In the rest of Gaul. Perpauci prdhibere possunt. In reliqua Gallia. [What is the rule for the Succession of Tenses ? 551, 3.] [What case do the compounds of sum (prosum, desum, &c.) govern ? 267, b.] (590.) Translate into English. Beatus esse sine virtu te nemo potest. — Per risum multum poteris cognoscere stultum. — Sere {imperative) beneficia, ut possis (548, im. is. tt. imus. itis. int. Imperf. ) vell- noU- mall- > 6m. es. §t. emus. etis. ent. Hem. 1. Regular are, Perf., voluerim, noluerim, maluSrim ; Pluperf., v6luissem, noluissem, maluissera. 2. Imperative, noli, nolltd ; nolite, nolitotS, ndlunt5. (Imperative of void and maid wanting.) 3. Participles, vol-ens, nol-ens. 4. Infinitives : Pres., vellS, nolle, mallg ; Past, v61uiss6, noluissS, maluissS. EXERCISE. (593.) Vocabulary. To he empty, unoccupied, vftcarS (av-, at-), intrans. Neighbour, finitimus, S, um (with dat.). Attentive, attentiis, a, um. Attentively, attents [adv). Grant, concession, concessfts, fls. Content, contentus, &, um (with ahl). (594.) Examples, (a) If they luish anything. (a) .The verbs velle, noil govern the accusative. To seem, videri {pass, of viderfi). To return, to come back, rSvertI (revers-), dep. Old man, s6nex, (sen) Is (108, R. 1). On the Ides of April, ad idus Apri- lis (the 13th of April). April, Aprills, Is, m. (25, [UNIVEHSn £4,: PART III. SUMMARY OF ETYMOLOGY. X2 SUMMARY OF ETYMOLOGY. § 1. LETTERS, QUANTITY, &c. (615.) 1. The letters are the same as in English, with the omission of w. 2. Six are vowels^ a, e, i, o, u, y : the remaining nineteen are coTisgrnarUs, 3. The consonants are divided into (a) Liquids, 1, m, n, r ; (b) Spirants, h, s, j ; (c) Muies ; the remaining consonants, among which there are (1) c-sounds, c, g (ch) ; q ; (2) p-sounds, b, p (ph) ; (3) t-sounds, d, t (th) ; (4) Double consonants, x, z. 4. The diphthongs are, aa,entae, oe (rare, ei, oi, ui). (616.) GENERAL RULES OF QUANTITY. (1) A vowel before another is short ; e. g., via. (2) A vowel before two consonants, or a double one, is long hy post- tioii; e. g., am ant. f As a mute followed by a liquid causes some exceptions to this role, we shall mark the quantity, in that case, doubtful ; thus, igri.] (3) All diphthongs are long ; e. g., mens «, au-rum. (4) Contracted syllables are long ; e, g., cogo (coago). § 2. NOUN. (617.) 1. The Twun is the name of any object (person or thing). Nouns are proper (13, a)y cormnon (13, b), or abstract (13, c). 2. There are three genders, masculine, feminine, and nerifer : two num- bers, singular and plural : six cases, nomindeclmiis. Seni- >dgi]5. Sedgcies. 17 Septendecim. Septiraus- Septenl- Decies «fe septies. 18 Octodecim. Octavus. Octoni- Duodevicies. 19 Novemdecim. Nonus- J Noveni- J Undevicies. 20 ViginH. Vicesimus. Viceni. Vicies. 30 Triginta. Tricesimus. Triceni. Tricies. 40 Quddraginta. Quadragesimus. Quadrageni. Quadragies. 50 Quinquaginta. Quinquagesimus. Quinquageni. Quinquagies. 60 Sexaginta. Sexagesimus. Sexageni. Sexagies. 70 Septuaginta. Septuagesimus. Septuageni. Septuagies. 80 Octoginta. Octogesimus. Octogeni. Octogies. 90 Nonaginta. Nonagesimus. Nonageni. Nonagies. 100 Centum. Centesimus. Centeni. Centigs. 200 Ducenti. Ducentesimus. Ducenteni. Ducenties. 300 Trecenti. Trecentesimus. Trecenteni. Trecenties. 400 Quadringenti. Quadringentesimus. Quadringenteni. Quadringenties. 500 Quingenti. Quingentesimus. Quingenteni. Quingenties. 600 Sexcenti. Sexcentesimus. Sexcenteni. Sexcenties. 700 Septingenti. Septingentesimus. Sepfingenteni. Septingenties. 800 Octingenti. Octingentesimus. Octingenteni. Octingenties. 900 Noningenti. Nongentesimiis. Nongenteni. Nongenties. 1000 MiUe. Millesimus. Milleni. MiUies. For the declension of unus, duo, and tres, see 194. Ducenti, and all the compounds of centi, are declined like the plural of b o n u s. Millia, thousands, the plural of mi lie, is declined like a neuter noun of the third declension. Ordinal numbers are declined like bonus. Distributives, like the plural of bonus. All the rest are undeclinable. In the combination of cardinal numbers, from twenty to one hundred, the smaller with et, or the larger without et, precedes ; asquattuoret viginti, orviginti quattuor. Above one hundred the larger number precedes, with or without et; as centum et unus, or centum unus. § 5. PRONOUN. (634.) The pronoun is a substitute for the noun ; e. ff., he, she, it, may be substitutes for man, woman, book, 1. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. (635.) (a) Substantive Personal, so called because used as substantives, not as adjectives. SINGULAR. PLURAL. 1 N. G. D. Ace, Abl. N., A. Gen. Dat., Abl. /. ego. m6i. mihi. me. We. nos. nostrum, or nostri. n<5bis. Thou. tu. tui. tibi. te. You. vos. vestrum, or vobis. Him, I her, it.S — sui. sibt se. Them. vestri, | 1 (same as sing*.) i {b) Adjective Personal, or Possessive (derived from the above). Mine. Thine. His, hers, its. mens, S, um (voc., mi), tuus, a, um. suus, a, um. Ours. Yours. Theirs. noster, nostrS, nostrum, vester, vestra, vestrum. suus, sud, siium. j 2. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. (636.) The demonstrative pronmins are so called because they serve to point out an object ; e. g"., this, that, these, those, &c. (1.) Is, 6 a, id, this, that {he, she, it), often antecedent of qui. Sing, Plur. Nom. is, ea, id. ii, eae, 6a. ejus. eorum, gariim. goriim. Dat. lis, or 6is. Ace. gum, 6am, id. 60s, eas, 6a. Abl. eo, ea, 66. lis, or 61s. (2.) idSm, eadem, id6m, the very same, compounded of is and dem. Declined like is with dem added; thus, ejus dem, eid6m, eundem (not eumdem), &c. (3.) Hie, h sec, hoc, this, points out an object present to the speaker, and is called the demonstrative of the ^rs^ person. (It is also used for he, she, it.) 1 Nora. Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. Sing. hie, haec, hoc. hujus. huic. hunc, banc, hoc. hoc, hae, hoc. Plur. hi, hae, haec. hortim, rum. hariim, ho- his. hos, has, haec. his. (4.) Iste, ista, istud, this, that, points out an object present to the person spoken to, and is called the demonstrative of second, person. 256 PRONOUNS, RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. Sing. ist§, ista, istius. isti. istum, istam, isto, ista, istud. istud. isto. Plur. isti, istae, istorum, istarum, is- istis. istos, istas, istIs, istis, ista. tOrum. ista. istis. ^^ Iste is often used to express contempt. (5.) II le, ilia, illud, points out an object remote from the speaker {that, the former, opposed to hie), and is called demonstrative of third person. (It is often used for he, she, it.) I^P" Declined throughout like istS, istS, istud. (6.) Ips6, ipsa, ipsiim, self, is added to other pronouns, me, te, se, &c., and expresses myself, thyself, himself, &c., accordingly. 5^* Declined like ist§, except that neuter is ipsum (not ipsud). 3. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. (637.) The relative pronoun {who, which, what) is so called because it commonly refers to some other word called the antecedent. (1.) dui, quae, qu6d, who, which, what. Sing. qui, quoB, cujus. cui. quem, quam, quo, qua, quod. quod. quo. Plur. qui, qusB, quorum, quSrum, quibus. quos, quas. quibus. quae. quorum. quae. (2.) duicunque, quaecunqu6, quodcunquS {whoever, whichever, whatever), declined like qui, quae, qu6d, with cunque added. (3.) duis qui s {whoever, whatever), used without a substantive. The following cases only occur, and of these only quisquis and quic- quid commonly. Sing. Plur. Nom. quisquis (m., f.), quicquid fn.). quiqui (m., t). quibus qui- bus. quemqu6m (m., f.)j qaidquid (n.). AbL quoquo, quft- qua, qudqud. 4. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. f (638.) The interrogative pronouns {who ? which ? what ?) are used in asking questions. (1.) duis, quae, quid {wTio? which? what?), is declined precisely like the relative qui, except #iat in nom. sing. masc. it has quis, and in nom. and ace. sing, neut., quid, [dui, quae, qu5d, is also used interrogatively, as an adjective (172).] (2.) duisn&m, quaenftm, quidnftm, is more emphatic than quis. {Pray, what are you doing ? quidnftm ftgis ?) It is declined like quis, qu88, quid. PRONOUNS, INDEFINITE AND CORRELATIVE. 257 5. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. (639.) The indefinite pronouns denote an object in a general way, with- out reference to a particular individual [any one, some one, &c.). ( quod dam, used as an adjective^ \ (1.) auidim, qneedim, \ q^i^^am, used as a « eack on^ ^ ^ ' 1 ^ * I -quidqug, as subst, ) (stronger than quisqu5). Genitive, uniuscujusquS, &c., both unus and quis being declined. (7.) Ecquis ? Used interrogatively [does) ; any one, anything, ^ „ ( ecqu6d, as adj., ) neut. plural, Ecquis. ecqu», or ecquS, \ ^^^^j_j_ ^ ^^^^^ \ ^^^ B^P* E c quis expects the answer none. 6. CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. (640.) Correlative pronouns are such as answer to each other; eg., how great 7 so great ; as many, so many, &c. (1.) The following are declined (a) Like adjectives of Class L (625) : Tantiis, so great, so much; quantuscunquS, however great Cluantus,as great ; Sliquantus, somewhat great, [b) Like adjectives of Class EC. (626) : Talis, such. du al i s, as, of what hind. dualiscunque, of whatever hind, (2.) The following are indeclinable : T 6 1, so many ; SHqu 6 1, som£. ^ 6\.\di^m, just so many; quotqu6t, however many, Qk,\x6t, as many. Y2 § 6. VERBS. (641.) The verb declares something of a person or thing: the eagle fiies i the queen loves her daughter. 1. CLASSES OF VERBS. (642.) Verbs are active, passive, or deponent. (1.) Active verbs express action : {a) either transitively, requiring an object ; e. g., the queen loves [whom ?) her daughter ; or [b] iiUraU' sitively, not requiring an object ; the eagle ^z'es. (2.) Passive verbs express the receiving or svffering of an action ; / am loved ; I was punished. Obviously intransitive verbs have no passive form. We cannot say, / am danced, I am slept. (3.) Deponent verbs have the passive form, but an active signification. 2. PARTS OF THE VERB. (643.) The verb is divided into, (a) The indefinite verb, including certain parts which do not refer to a definite person or time. [b) The finite verb, including the parts which always do so refer. Indefinite Verb. (644.) (a) The indefinite verb includes, (1.) The infinitive, which expresses the action of the verb without relation to a definite person, and partakes also of the nature of a noun ; e. g., to learn ; to love is pleasant. (2.) The participle, which expresses the action of the verb under the form of an adjective ; loving, blooming. (3.) The gerund, which expresses the action of the verb under the form of the noun, in aU cases but the nominative, and supplies ob- lique cases to the infinitive. (4.) The gerundive, which expresses the acticm of tibe verb as neces- sary or continued, under the form of an adjective, in all cases and genders. (5.) The supine, which also expresses the action of the verb in the form of two cases (ace. and abl.) of the noxm. Finite Verb. (645.) [b) The finite verb includes those parts which express the (1.) Different varieties of affirmation, viz., the moods. (2.) Diflferent times at which the action of the verb takes place, viz., the tenses. (3.) Difierent relations of the verb to persons or things, viz., the num- bers and persons. PARTS or THE FINITE VERB. 25d (1.) The Moods. (646.) The verb expresses affirmation ; the moods of the rerb are used to vary the character of the aflSrmation. (1.) By the indicative, affirmation of a. fact is expressed ; e. g., I write, I did not write. (2.) By the subjunctive, affirmation is expressed doubtfully, contir^ gently, or indefinitely ; e. g., I may write, if/ should write, perhaps some [may] think. (3.) By the imperative, affirmation is expressed as an injunction or request ; e. g., write. (2.) The Tenses. (647.) Time may be past^ present, or future, and the verb has therefore three tenses to express these. But action may be represented as going on or as co'mpleted, either in past, present, or future time, and therefore two forms are required for each, making six in all. Present Past. Future. Action going on, or imperfect. \ Action completed, 1 or perfect. / love, or am loving. I have loved. (Perfect.) / was loving. (Imperfect.) / had loved. (Pluperfect.) / shall love, or be loving. (Future.) I shall have loved. (Fu- ture Perfect.) Rem. 1. The Latin uses its perfect form in two ways : (1) like the English perfect, to express action complete in present time ; e. g., Smavi, / have loved : (2) like the English imperfect, to express ac- tion indefinitely in past time ; e. g., amavi, I loved. This is called the perfect aorist. [The latter use is by far the most common. This distinction should be thoroughly understood.] 2. The subjunctive mood has no future (it uses the periphrastic form 661). 3. The present, perfect, and future are called primary tenses, refer- ring, as they do, either to present or future time ; the imperfect, perfect aorist, and pluperfect are called historical tenses, referring, as they do, to past time. (3.) Numbers and Persons, (648.) As there may be more than one person engaged in an action, the verb has two numbers, singular and plural. These persons must be either /, thou, we, ye, or some other person or thing; therefore the verb has three persons, 1st, 2d, and 3d, which are denoted in Latin by different endings. 3. CONJUGATION. (649.) Conjugation is the inflection (21, R.) of a verb through all its parts. There are in Latin /(wr conjugations of verbs, distinguished by the ending of the infinitive ; thus : 1. S. 3. 4k -arfi. -Sr6. -€r6, -IrS* 260 PARADIGM OF ESSE, TO BE. 4. THE AUXILIARY OR SUBSTANTIVE VERB ESSE, to he. (650.) [Before proceeding to the conjugations, we must give the forms of ess 6, ^o be, called an auxiliary, because it is used in forming some of the parts of the verb ; and substantive, because it is the verb expressing simple existence.] 1. INDICATIVE. ACTION INCOMPLETE. Singular. Present. Imperf Future. sum, I am. eram, I was. 6r6, / shall be. 6s, thou art. eras, thouwast. ens, thou, Sf'C. est, he is. erat, he was. erit, he, Spc. siimus, we are. eramus, we were. erimus, we, SfC. estis, ye are. eratis, ye were. eritis, ye, SfC. sunt, they are. erant, they were. erunt, they, Spc. ACTION COMPLETED. Singular. Plural. fuimus, fuistis, ■ we have ye have been. been. fiieramus. fueratis. we had ye had been. been. fuerimus. fiieritis, we shall, ye shall, ^c. SfC. Perfect. Pluperf. Fut. Perf. fill, / have fuerfim, / had been. fuerd, / shall have been. fuisti, thou hast been. fueras, thou hadstf^c. fueris. fuit, he has been. fuerSt, he had, been. fuerit, thou Iheshall,^ shalt, SfC] S^c. fiierunt, they have been. ffierant, they had been. fderint, they shall, Sfc. 2. SUBJUNCTIVE. INCOMPLETE. Plural. Present. Imperf. Sim, / may be. ess em, / might be. sis, thou, SfC. thou, 8^c. sit, he, 8fC. esset, h£, 8fC. simus, we, Sg'C. essemuS; we, SfC. sitis, ye. SfC. essetis, ye, SfC. smt, they, S^c. essent, they, ^c. COMPLETED. Perfect. Pluperf. Singular fuerim, / may have been. fuiss6m, / might have been. fueris, thou, ^c. fuisses, thou, <^c. fuerit, he, SfC. fuisset, he, SfC. fu6rimus, we, Spc. fiiissemus, we, SfC. fiieritis, ye, SfC. fuissetis, ye, SfC. fuerint, they, SfC. fiiissent, tJiey, ^c. 3. IMPERATIVE. Singular. 2. 6s, estd, be thou. 3. estd, let him be. 2. este, estote, be ye. 3. sunt6, let them be. 4. INFINITIVE. Ess6, to be. ftiiss6, to have been, futurus, ft, um, esse, to be about to be. 5. PARTICIPLE. Only in compounds ; absens, abserd (from absum) ; praesens, present (fro m praBsum). FuturGs, ft, um, one who will be. PARADIGMS OF REGULAR VERBS. 261 5. PARADIGMS OF REGULAR VERBS. (651.) (1.) Verb-stem. — The stem of any verb is found by striking off ;he infinitive-ending ; e. g., of am-are, m6n-ere, reg-ere, and aud-ire the items are am-, mon-, reg-, and-, respectively.* (2.) Tense-stem, — Each tense has its own tense-stem, consisting of the verb-stem with or without some additions. Thus, in the first conjugation : Pres. tense-stem = verb-stem = am-. Inperf. tense-stem = veijj-stem +ab = amah-. Perf. tense-stem = verb-stem +av = amav-. [La the annexed paradigms the tense-stems are shown upon the left- hand side. Observe that the perfect tense-stem serves also for the stem of the pluperfect and future perfect tenses.] (3.) Tense-ending. — Each tense has its own endings, which, added to the tense-stem, give the person-forms. Thus : Imperfect-stem &mab- +am= amah am, ]st person. amah- -j-as = am abas, 2d person,t &c. (4.) The perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect of the passive voice are formed by means of the past participle and forms of esse ; thus : Smatus sum, dmatus eram, &matus ero. [No farther explanation of the paradigm is necessary. The student should learn the modes of formation, and the tense-endings for each tense, apart from the stems am-, mon-, &c., and unite them afterward with those or any other stems.] * In reality, the crude-forms are am a-, mon e-, audi- (the three pure conjugations), and reg- (the consonant conjugation). But the changes of the crude-form in inflection form too great a difficulty for beginners ; we therefore present the stem as the language affords it to us, without going into a nicer analysis. t Farther, the person-ending forms part of the tense-ending. From the paradigm (active), it wiU be seen that in every tense except the perfect the endings are o, or m, s, t, mus, tis, nt. These endings are added to the tense-stem, either directly, as am-o, or by means of a connecting-vowel, as reg-i-s, or of a flexion syllable and con- necting-vowel, as amav-er-a-s. 262 PARADIGMS FOR THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. PARADIGMS FOR ACTIVE. (652.) INDICATIVE MOOD. Pkesent, I love or am loving, thou art loving, &fc. JLm- mon- reg- aud- d. ed. 3. i6. as. at. 6t. it. it. amus. emus, imus. imus. atis. etis. itis. Itis. ant. ent. unt. iunt. Imperfect, I was loving, advising, ruling, hearing, 6fC. am-ab- mon-eb- reg-eb- aud-ieb- ' Sm. Future, / ahdll or will love, advise, rule, hear, 6fC. am-ab- mon-eb- reg- aud-i- is. It. et. imus. emus. itts. etis. unt. ent. Perfect, I have loved. (Perfect Aorist, I loved.") m6n-u- (reg-s) rex- aud-iv- isti. it imus. erunt, or erg. Pluperfect, I had loved, 9fC. fim-ftv- mon-u- rex- aud-Iv- • 6ram. Sras. 6rat. eramus. gratis. Srant. Future Perfect, I shall have loved, ffc. ftm-av- m6n-u- rex- aud-iv- 6rd. gris. grit. grfmus. grftls. grint. (653.) IMPERATIVE MOOD. 2d Singular. 3d Singular. 2d Plural. 3d Plural. am- mdQ- and- % atd. &, etd. 6, it«. i, it«. atd. et«. it«. it«. ate, atotg. etg, etote. it6, itotg. Itg, itotg. ant6. ent6. untd. iuntfi. PARADIGMS FOR THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 263 THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. PASSIVE. INDICATIVE MOOD. Pbesent, I am loved, 6(C. ftm- mon- aud- or. 66r. dr. ior. ) aris. \ eris. [ ere. I €ris. I ere. \ iris. >ir6. atur. etur. itur. itur. amur. emiir. imur. imiir. ATYiTnT- emini. imml. antur. entur. nntiir. iuntnr. Impekfect, / was loved, «^. am-ab- mon-eb- r6g-eb- aud-ieb- ) ans. >are. atiir. amiiu. antur. FuTUBE, I shall be loved, 6fC. am-ab- mon-eb- reg- aud-i- j 6ris. [fire. [ 6ris. > ere. itur. etur. imur. 6mur. imini. emim. untur. entur. Pekfect, Ihave been loved, SfC. amatiis.* monitus.* rectus.* auditus.* es, or fiiisti. est. or ftiit. sumus, or fuimus. estis, or fuistis. sunt, or fuerunt. Plupekfect, I had been loved, 6(C. Smatiis.* monitus.* rectus.* auditus.* • grSm.t eras. eramus. eratis. erant. FuTUiiE Perfect, 1 shall have been loved, i(c. ftmatiis.* mdnitus.* rectus.* auditus.* ► er«.t 6ris. 6rit Srimiis. 6ritis. enmt IMPERATIVE MOOD. 2d Singular. 3d Singular. 2d Plural. 3d Plural. am- m6n- r6g- aud- 5r6, at6r. gre, 6t6r. erS, itor. ir6, itor. ator. Stor. itor. itor. amini, aminSr. emini, eminor. imini, iminor. imini, iminor. ant6r. entor. untor. iontor. * The participle must be inflected in gender and number to agree widi the subject, t Sometimes fueram, iueras, &c. X Sometimes fuero, faeris, &c. 264 PARADIGMS FOR THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. (654.) SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present, I may love, <^. am- mon-e- reg- aud-i- 6m. es. as. St. at. emus, amas. etis. atis. 6nt. ant. Imperfect, I might love, SfC. am-ar- m6n-er- r6g-§r- aud-ir- ' em. es. 6t. etis. ent. Perfect, I mag have loved, ^. am-av- mon-u- rex- aud-Iv- • grim. 6rit. erimtts. 6ritis. 6rint. Pluperfect, I might have loved, SfC. am-av- mon-u- rex- aud-iv- ' issem. issSt. issetis. issent. (655.) INFINITIVE. Present [to love or be loving, 6fc.]. &m-are, mon-6r§, r6g-6r6, aud-ire. Perfect [to have loved, Sfc.]. I. amav-iss§, m6nu-iss6, rex-is se, audiv-IssS. Future [to be about to love, SfC.]. fimaturus ess6, momturus ess6, recturus ess§, auditurus essS. (656.) PARTICIPLES. Present [loving, advising, ruling, hearing]. 1. am-ans, mon-ens, r6g-ens, and-iens. Perfect [having loved, advised, ruled, heard]. "Wanting : supplied by abl. absol., or by quum with subj. Future [about to love, advise, rule, hear]. ftmaturus, momturus, recturUs, auditurus. (657.) GERUND AND Gerunds: &mandi, mSnendl, regendi, audiendi. (658.) Supine in um : fanatum, " u : ftmatu, monitum, monitu, rectum, rectfl. anditum. aa(Utd. PARADIGMS FOR THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 265 PASSIVE. 1 _ subjunctive mood. Pbesent, I may be loved, 6fc. || ftm- mon-e- lud-i- Sr. j eris. jaris. t arS. etur. atur. emur. &mur. emini. aminl. entur. antdr. Impekfect, I might he loved, «^. || am-ar- mon-er- Y&g-er- audlr- Ver. ( eris. \ ere. etur. emur. emini. entur. Perfect, ImMy have been loved, fyc. \\ amatus. monitus. rectus, auditus. >sim * sis. sit. slmus. sitis. sint. Plupebfkct, I might home been loved, ifc. || amatus. monitus. rectus, auditus. > essem.t esses. ess3t. essemus. essetis. essent. INFINITIVE. Pbesent [to be Qyeing) loved, 4«.]. I, am-ari, 2. 3. 4. m6n-erT, r^g-i, aud-Iri. Pebfect [to have been loved, ffc.l. || 1. Smfttus essS 2. 3. 4. mSnitus essS, rectus ess6, auditu^ essS. FuTUBE [to be about to be loved, (fC.]. || 1. amatiim iri, 2. 3. 4. monitum iri, rectum ui, audltum iri. PARTICIPLES. Pbesent ajstd Perfect [loved, being loved, having been loved, Sfc}. 1. amatus. 3. 3. 4. II mSnitus, rectus, auditus. || ' GERUNDIVE. Gerundive : 1. S. 3. 4. amSndus, mfinendiis, rggendus, andi6ndus. * Sometimes fuerim. t Sometimes fuissem. || 266 VERBS IN 10 AND DEPONENTS. 6. VERBS IN i6 OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. (659.) Some verbs of the third conjugation assume i before the person- ending in some of the tenses, as shown in the following paradigm of cap- 6 r 6, ^o take. INDICATIVE. Pres. Imperf. Fut. cap- cap-i-eb- cap i- 1-6. is. it. imus. itis. am. as. at. am6s. atis. am. es. et. emiis. etis. i-unt. ant. ent. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres. I cap-i- I at. amus. 1 atis. 1 ant. INDICATIVE. Pres. cap- i-6r. 6ris. itur. imilr. imini. i-untur. Imperf. cap-i-eb- ar. ans. atur. amilr. amini. antur. Fut. capi- ar. ens. etur. emiir. emini. entur. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres. I cap-i- | ar. | aris. | atur. ) amur. | amini. | antur. IMPERATIVE. 3d Plur. Active, cap-T-unt6. 3d Plur. Pass., cap-i-unt6r. PARTICIPLES. Pres. Active, cap-i-ens. Fut. Pass., cap-i-endus. Gerund, cap-i-end-i, 6, &c. 7. DEPONENT VERBS. (660.) (1.) Deponent verbs have the passive form with active significa- tion. As the endings are the same as those of the passives (Paradigm, p. 263, 265), we need not repeat them. (2.) But deponents have three active participles, while other verbs have but two : thus, Pres., exhorting, Perf , having exhorted, Fut., about to exhort, hort-ans. • hort-atus. hortat-uriis. (3.) Also, all transitive deponents have the verbal adjective in dus; e. g., ho r tan dus, one that should be exhorted: intransitive deponents have it only in the neuter ; e. g'., moriendum est, one must die. 8. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. (661.) By means of the tenses of e s s e, combined with the future parti- ciple in rus, and the verbal in dus, the periphrastic conjugation is form- ed ; e.g., ^maitvLrvLS sum, I am about to love, I intend to love ; a m an- d u s snm, I am to be loved, I must be loved, one must love me ; and so through all the tenses and persons. The deponent verbs employ this per- iphrastic conjugation also. FORMATION OF PERFECT-STEM. 267 1. WITH PARTICIPLE IN rUS. — INDICATIVE. ^ SUBJUNCTIVE. ('sum, es, est, &c. amaiurus, j ^^^^ fmgtl, &C. ^ ^^' faeram, fueras, &c. Uro, 6ris, &c. I' Sim, sis, sit, &c. amaturus, J essem, esses, &c. a, iim, | fuerim. i^fuissem. INFINITIVE. Pres., amaturus esse, to be about (or intending) to love. Perf., amaturus fuisse, to have been about to love, Fut., amaturus f6re, to intend to love hereafter. 2. WITH VERBAL IN duS. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Tsum. eram. amandus, a, urn, \ fui. fugram. Ler6. rsTm. amandus, a, urn J -«^^; i^fuissem. INFINITIVE. Pres., amandus, a, iim, esse, ought to be loved. Perf., amandus, a, iim, fnisse, ought to have been loved. Fut., amandus, a, iim, for6, ought to be loved hereafter. 9. ON THE FORMATION OF THE PERFECT-STEM. (662.) In the paradigms, the perfect-stems are formed by adding to the verb-stem in the 1st conj. av- (am-av-) ; in the 2d, ii (mon-u-) ; in the 3d, 8 (reg-s); in the 4th, iv- (aud-iv-). But, although most Latin verbs form the perf.-stem thus, many use different endings, which are exhibited in the following classification : I. FIRST CONJUGATION. (663.) Four ways of forming the perfect-stem : I. By adding av to the verb-stem : am-arS— am-ftv-I. XI, " ft " cr6p-ar6 — cr6p-u-i. in. By reduplicating the first consonant : darS — dgd-i. IV. By lengthening the stem-vowel : jiiv-are— juv-i. II. SECOND CONJUGATION. Five ways : I. By adding ii to the verb-stem : mfin-SrS— mon-fi-I. jj, " ev " del-ere — del-ev-i. III. ^ .' s " alg-ere— al(g)-s-i. rV. By reduplication : inord-er6— mo-mord-L V. By lengthening the item-vowel : cav-6r6— cftv-i. 268 FORMATION OF PERFECT-STEM. III. THIRD CONJUGATION. Six ways : I. By adding s to the verb-stem : 6crlb-6re — scrip-s-L ^11. " u "^ al-ere — &l-u-i. III. " V or iv " cem-6re — crev-i. arcess-6re — arcess-iv-i. IV. By reduplication : curr-6re — cu-curr-i. V. By lengthening the stem-vowel : 6m-ere — em-i. VI. By presenting the simple verb-stem : acu-ere — acu-i. rV. FOURTH CONJUGATION. Five ways : I. By adding iv to the verb-stem ; aud-Tr6, aud-iv-i. II. " ii aper-ire, ap6r-u-i. III. " s fulc-ire, ful(c)-s-L IV. By lengthening the stem-vowel : ven-ir6, ven-i. V. By presenting the simple verb-stem : comper-irS, comper-I. [In the following lists, the verbs are arranged according to the above classification, and the supines also given. When any peculiarity exists in the compounds, it is stated. Of Class I. (which embraces most of the rules in the language), only one example is given in each conjugation, as the student is familiar with its form ; but under the rema,i^jLIlg heads a^l the verbs in common use are mentioned.] 10. LIST OF VERBS. (664.) FIRST CONJUGATION. I. Perfect-stem adds av to the Verb-stem. To love, am-5; am-ar6, Sm-av-i, am-a-tum, II. Perfect-stem adds u to the Verb-stem. To creak, cr6p-o, cr6p-are, cr6p-u-i, crep-i-tfim. Lie dow7i, cub-o, cub-ar6, cub-u-i, cub-i-tum. So the compounds ; e. g., accubo, accubarS, acciibui, accubitum. Some compounds, however, which take m before b, follow the 3d conj. ; e. g., accumbd, accumbgrd, accubui, accubitum. To tame, dom-o, dom-arS, dom-u-T, d6m-T-tum. To rub. fric-o, fne-are, £nc-H ( fric-t-um an( l fric-a-tum. To glitter. mic-o, mic-ar6, mic-u-i. To gush forth, emic-o, emic-ar§, enuc-u-i, gmic-a-tum. Tofold, plic-o, plic-ar6, plic-u-I, plic-i-tum. PHc-fl is used only in composition : supplied, duplTcft, multiplied, have avi, atum ; explicd, to explain, avi, atum ; to unfold, ui, itum. To cut, s6c-o, sSc-are, s6c-u-i, sec-t-um. To sound, son-o, son-arS, s6n-u-i, sSn-i-tum. To thunder, t6n-o, ton-arS, t6n-u-i, tSn-i-tiim. To forbid, v6t-o, vSt-arS, v6t-ii-i, v6t-i-tiim. LIST OF VERBS, SECOND CONJUGATION. 269 III. Pei-fect-stem reduplicates the first Consonant with e. To give, d-o, d-ar6, ded-i, da-tum. So, also, those compounds of which the first part is a word of two syU lahles ; e. g., circumdS, circumdare, circumdedi, circumdStum, to sur- round ; but the compounds with monosyllables follow the 3d conj. ; e. g., addd, add6r6, addidi, additum, to add. To stand, st-o, st-are, stet-i, st-atiim. The compounds have in the perfect s t S t i when the first part is a dissyllable ; e, g., circumstd, circumsteti ; but s t i t i when it is a Tnonosyllable ; e. g., adstd, adstiti. IV. Perfect-stem lengthens the Stem-vowel. To assist J juv-o, jiiv-arg, juv-i, ju-tum. ( lava-tum. To wash, lav-o, lav-are, lav-i, < lau-tum. ( lo-tum. (665.) SECOND CONJUGATION. I. Perfect-stem adds u to the Verb-stem. To admonish, mon-eo, mon-erg, mon-u i, m6n-I-tiim. n. Perfect-stem adds 6v to the Verb-stem. To blot out, del-eo, del-er6, del-ev-i, del-e-tum. To weep, fl-eo, fl-ere, fl-ev-i, fl-e-tum. To spin, n-eo, n-ere, n-ev-i, n-e-tum. To fill up, compl-eo, compl-erS, compl-ev-i, compl-e-tmn. To abolish, abol-eo, &b61-er6, abol-ev-i, abol-i-tum. The primitives oleo and pleo are obsolete: like compleo are con- jugated impleo, expleo ; like aboleo, adoleo, and exoleo. TTT. Perfect-stem adds s to the Verb-stem. Euphonic Rules. 1. A t-sound before s is dropped; e. g^., ar(d)-si = ars-i. 2. Ac-sound 4- s = x; e. g., aug-si = aux-i. 3. Bat a c-sound after 1 or r, before s, is dropped; e. g'., fal(g)-si=a fuls-i. To shiver \ ,. „i^s-x < al-s-I Sar-s-1 (ard-s-i). To increase, aug-eo, aug-er6, J (rug-s-i). 5 ^^,^"*^"^ To be bright, fulg-eo, fulg-erS, < Z2 ] ful-s-i (fulg-s-i). 270 LIST OF VERBS, SECOND CONJUGATION. To stick, hser-eo, hser-ere, ( hae-s-i I (haer-s-i). ? h8B-sum. To indulge, indulg-eo, indulg-erg, C indul-s-i \ (indulg-s-i), > indul-tiim. To command, jub-eo, jub-er6, jus-s-i ( jub-s-i , jas-sum. To remain, mgln-eo, man-er6, man-s-i, man-sum. To assuage. mulc-eo, mulc-erS, ( mul-s-i \ (mulc-s-i), > mul-siim. To milk, mulg-eo. mulg-erS, C mul-s-i \ (mulg-s-i), > mulc-tum. To laugh. rid-eo, rid-ere, rl-s-i (rid-s-i), ri-siim. To advise, suad-eo, suad-ere, ( sua-s-i I (suad-s-i), 1 • sua-sum. To wipe, terg-eo, terg-erg, ( ter-s-i I (terg-s-I), > ter-sum. To swell. turg-eo, turg-ere, ( tur-s-i I (turg-s-i). To twist, torqu-eo, torqu-ere, ( tor-s-i ( (torqu-s-i), > tor-tum. To press. urg-eo, urg-erg, ur-s-i (urg-s-I . To shine. luc-eo, luc-ere, lux-i (luc-s-i). To m,ourn, lug-eo, lug-ere, lux-i (lug-s-i) IV. Perfect-stem reduplicates Jirst Consonant and Vowel. To bite, mord-eo, mord-ere, momord-i, mor-sum. To hang, peni-eo, pend-ere, pepend-T, pen-sum. To betroth, spond-eo, spond-ere, spopond-I, spon-sum. To shear, tond-eo, tond-ere, totond-T, ton-sum. The compounds of these verbs drop the reduplication ; e. g., re-spondl (not re-spopondl). V. Perfect-stem lengthens the Stem-vowel. To take care. cav-eo, cav-erS, cav-i, cau-tum. To favour, fav-eo. fav-erS, fav-i, fau-tum. To cherish, fdv-eo, fov-ere, fov-i, fo-tiim. To move. m6v-eo, mov-ere, mov-i, mo-tum. To dread. pav-eo, p&v-er6, pav-i. To sit, sed-eo, B6d-er6, sed-T, ses-sum. In the same manner are conjugated the compounds with dissyllables ; e. g., circumsSdeo, circumsederg, circumsedi, circumsessum, to sit around ; but those with monosyllables change 6 of the stem into i; e. g., assideo, assidSrS, assedi, assessum, to sit by. To see, vid-eo, vid-6r5, vid-i, vi-sfim. To vow J v6v-eo, v6v-ef S, v6v-i, vO-tfim. LIST OF VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. 271 666.) THIRD CONJUGATION. I. Perfect-stem, adds s to the Verb-stem. Euphonic Rules, 1. b before s = p ; e. g., scrib-sl = scrip-sT. 2. c-sound H-s = X ; e. g.^ cing-si = cinx-i. [c, g, h, qu, are regarded as c-sounds.] 3. t-soDud (d or t) before s is dropped ; e. g., claud-s-i = claus-I. ». m before s is either changed into s, or p is interposed (prem-s-i=: prear^i ; com-s-i = comp-s-I). To write. To bi^id, To carry ^ To cook, To shuif scrib-o, cing-o, veh-o, c6qu-o, claud-o, scrib-ere, cing-6re, veh-ere, c6qu-er6, claud-ere, scrip-turn. scnp-s-i (scrib-s-i), cinxl (cing-s-I), cinc-tum. vexT (vch-s-i), vec-tum, coxi (coqa-s-i), coc-tum. clau-s-i ) , ,1 , -^ !>clau-sum. (claud-s-i), 5 An in the compounds is changed into u ; e.g., includo, includ6re, in- clusl, inclusum, to shut in. To give way, ced-o, ced-Srg, cessT (ced-s-i), ces-sum. To scatter, sparg-o, sparg-^re, \ ^ .. In the compounds a is changed into e ; e. g., aspergo, aspergfirfe. asper-s-I, aspersum, to besprinkle. To adorn, c6m-o, c6m-6re, com-ps-T, com-p-tiim. To press, pr6m-o, prem-ere, C press-I I (pr( spar-sum. pres-sum. prem-s-l), In the compounds 6 is changed into i ; e. g., comprimo, comprim6r6, compress!, compressiim, to press together. To carry, g6r-o, g6r-6re, gess-i (ger-s-i), ges-tum. n. Perfect-stem adcis u to the Verb-stem, (a) Without change of Verb-stem. To nourish, al-o, al-gr6, ai-u-i, 81-i-tum. To tUl, c6l-o, c6l-ere, c6l-u-i, cul-tum. To ask advice, consul-o, consul-ere, consul-u-i, consul-tum. To knead. deps-o. deps-ere, deps-uT, deps-tum. To murmur. frem-o, frem-ere, frem-u-i, frem-i-tum. To groan, gem-o, gem-ere, gem-u-T, gem-i-tum. To grind, mol-o, mol-ere, mol-u-T, mol-i-tum. To conceal, occul-o, occul-ere, occul-u-I, occul-tum. To grind. pins-o, pins-ere, pins-u-I, pins-i-tum. To snatch, rftp-io, rap-ere, rap-u-I, rap-tum. To join to- gether, :' sSr-o, sgr-gr6, s6r-u-i, ser-tom. 272 LIST OF VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. To weave, tex-o, tex-gre, tex-u-i, tex-tiim. To tremble, trem-o, trem-ere, trem-u-L To vomit, v6m-o, v5m-ere, v6m-u-i, vSm-i-tum. (&) With change of Verb-stem. To beget, gign-o, gign-erfi, gen-u-i, g^n-i-ttlm. To reap, met-o^ met-ere^ mess-a-T, mes-snm. To place, p6n-o, pon-ere, p6s-u-i, pos-i-tum. [For compounds of cmnbere, see 664, II.] •III. Perfect-stem adds v or iv to the Verb-stem, (a) Adds V, and lengthens Stem- vowel if short. cem-ere, cre-v-T, cre-tum. cem-o. To separate, perceive, The perfect and supine of cemo are found only in the compotmds e. g., decemo, decernere, decrevi, decrStum, to decree. To grow, cresc-o^ cresc-ere, cre-v-T, cre-tum. To smear, lin-o, lin-ere^ le-v-i, or li-v-i, li-tum. To know, nosc-o, nosc-ere, no-v-i, no-tum. So, also, the compounds inter, ig, per, prae-nosco, have ovi, otum ; bul cog, ag, praecog, recog-nosco, have ovi, itum ;. e. g., agnosco, agnosc- 6r6, agnovi, agnitum, to ^perceive. To feed, pasc-o, pasc-ere, pa-v-T, pas-tum. To rtst, quiesc-o,. quiesc-Sre, quie-v-T, quie-tum. To decide, scisc-o, scisc-ere, sci-v-i, sci-tum. To sow, sSr-o, ser-ere, se-v-i, s5-tum. The compounds have the supine in itum ; e. g., consero,. consSrferJf, consevi, consitum, to plant. To allow. sin-o. sin-ere, sT-v-I, si-tufid. To despise. Bpem-G, spern-ere,. spre-v-i. spr§-tum. To strew. stem-G, stem-ere. BtrarV-i, sti-a-tum. To become \ f accustom^ \ > suesc-o. suesG-er6, &ue-v-I, sue-tum. ed. ! > ilf) Ferfec^stezQ adds hr. To summon. arcess-o. arcessere, arcess-iv-i, arcess-i-tam. In the same manner, capesso, facesso, incesso, lacesso. To seek, 1 strive of- > p6t-o, pet-Srg, pet-!v-i, pgt-i-tiim. ter, ) To seek, quser-o, quoer-6re, quses-iv-i, qu«s-I-tam. The compounds change ee of the stem into i ; e. g., conqmro, cone quirgrg, conquisivi, conquisitum, to examine. To rub, t6r-o. tgr^rg, 5 *^-i^-^ X \ (/orter-iv-i), ) tii-tilm. LIST OP VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. 27^ IV. Perfect-stem reduplicates the first Consonaiit, Some of these present vowel-changes, which must be carefully observed. {a) Wlien the first vowel is i, o, u, the first consonant is reduplicated with that vowel ; {b) in other verbs with e ; (c) the compounds of dare, to give, with i. (a) First Vowel i, o, or il To run, curr-o, curr-ere, cu-curr-i, cur-sum. Most of the compounds have the perfect both with and without the reduplication ; e. g.^ accurro, accurrere, accurri and accucurrT; ac- cursum, to run to. To learn, disc-o, . disc-6r§, dl-dici. The compounds also reduplicate ; e. g.^ perdisdJ, perdidici, to horn To weigh, pend-o, pend-erS, p6-pend-i, pen-sum. The compounds do not reduplicate ; e. g., appendd, appenderS, ap- pend!, appensum, to hang to. To demand, posc-o, posc-6r6, po-posc-L The compounds reduplicate ; e. g., r6posc6r§, rSpoposci, to deffumA bach again. To prick, pnng-o, pung-erS, pu-pug-i, punc-tum. Compounds have perf. punxi. To beat, tund-o, tund-6r§, tu-tud-i, tun-sum. Compounds have supine tusum; e. g., contundSrS, contusom, to crush. (6) Other Verbs reduplicate with & To fall, cad-o, cad-6riB, c6-cid-i, cfl-sum. To cut, csed-o, CBBd-6r6, c6-cid-i, cae-flum. The compounds have cidi, cisum; e. g., occld6re, occldl, oc&s^a^to kill. To sing, can-o, can-ere, c6-cin-i, can-tum. The compounds have cinul ; e. g., succin^rS, succinui, to sing to. To cheat, fall-o, fall-6r6, f e-fell-i, fal-sum. To bargain, pang-o, pang-erS, p6-pig-i, pac-tum. The compounds have pingd, pegi, pactum ; e. g., comping6r6, compdgiT comp actum, to fasten together. To spare, parc-o, parc-erS, pe-perc-i, par-s&xL To bring forth, p&r-io, pSr-ere, pe-p6r-i, par-tuiii. To drive, pell-o, pell-gr6, pe-pul-i, pul-sdm. To touch, tang-o, tang-gr6, te-tig-i, tac-tum. 274 LIST OF VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. The compounds have tingo, tingSrg, tigl, tactum; e, g., attinggrfi, attigi, attactum, to reach. (c) Compounds of dare, reduplicate with i. To hide. ab-do, abd-6re, ab-did-i, ab-di-tnm. To add. ad-do, add-er6, ad-did-i, ad-di-tum. To lay up, con-do, con-d-er6 con-did-T, con-di-tum. To believe, credo, cred-gre, cre-did-T, crg-di-tum. To surrender, de-do, ded-6re. de-did-i. de-di-tum. To publish. e-do, ed-er6, e-did-i, e-di-tum. To put in, in-do, ind-ere, in-did-i, in-di-tum. To oppose, ob-do, obd-ere, ob-did-T, ob-di-tum. To destroy, per-do. perd-ere, per-didi. per-di-tum. To betray. pro-do. prod-erS, pro-did-i, pro-di-tum. To restore. red-do, redd-ere. red-did-i, red-di-tum. To deliver. tra-do, trad-erS, tra-did-i, tra-di-tum. To sell, ven-do. vend-er6, ven-did-I, ven-di-tum. em-i, em-tum. fod-i, fos-sum. fug-T, fug-i-tum. fud-i, fu-siim. leg-i, lec-tum. V. Perfect-stem lengthens the Stem-vowel of the Verb, (a) Without Vowel-changes. To take, gm-o, em-6r6, Componnds, co6mo, adim6, eximd. To dig, fod-io, fod-6re, 1*0 jly, fug-io, fug-erg, To pour, fund-o, fund-6re, To read, leg-o, leg-6r6, The compounds with per, prae, re, and sub retain e ; e. g., perl6g6rg, perlegi, perlectum, to read through ; but those with col, de, e, se, change 6 into i ; e. g., coUigSre, coUegi, coUectiim, to collect : three, diligo, / love; intelligo, / understand; neglTgo, / neglect, have exi, ectum ; e. g., diligfirg, dilexi, dilectum. To leave, linqu-o, linqu-ere, liqu-i, To burst, rump-o, rump-er6, rup-T, To conquer, vinc-o, vinc-erS, vic-i, (b) With Vowel-change. To drive, Sg-o, Sg-erS, eg-i. Three of the compounds retain ft, circum^go, perago, sltftgo : two un- dergo contraction, cogo (con + ago), dego (de + ago) : compoimds with ab, amb, ad, ex, prod, sub, change & into i ; e. g., abigSrS, abegi, abactum, to drive avjay. To take, cap-io, cap-6rg, lic-tum. rup-tum. vic-tum. ac-tum. cep-i. cap-turn. All the compounds change a into i, and have supine ceptum; e. g^ accip-6r6, accepi, acceptum, to receive. LIST OF VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. 276 fac-io, fac-6r6, fec-T, factum. To make, To do, 1. Compounds with verbs retain a ; e. g., labef acSrg, labgf eci, labe- factiim, to weaken. 2. Compounds with prepositions change a into i ; e. g., aflFicgrS, affect, affectum, to affect. To break, frang-o, frang-6r6, freg-i, frac-tum. Compounds change a into i ; e. g., refringere, refregi, refractum, to break open. To cast, jac-io, jac-erS, jee-i, jac-tum. Compounds ab, ad, de, e, in, ob, re, trans, all change & into i ; e, g^ abjicerS, abjeci, abjectum, to throw away. VI. The Perfect-stem presents the simple Verb-stem, (a) Stems ending in w or t?. To refuse, abnu-o, abnu-er6. abnu-i. To sharpen, acu-o. acu-gr6, acu-I, acu-tum. To show. argu-o. argu-Srg, argu-i, argu-tum. To agree, congru-o, congru-6r§. congru-i. To jmt off, exu-o. exu-gre, exu-i, exu-tiim. To put on, indu-o, indu-6re, indu-i, indu-tum. To imbue. imbu-o. imbu-6r6, imbu-i. imbu-tum. To pay. lu-o. lu-6re. lu-i. lu-tiim. Tofear, m§tu-o, m6tu-ere, mgtu-i. To lessen, minu-o, minu-ere. minu-i, minu-tum. To rush. ru-o, ru-6r6. ru-T, ru-tum. To hose, solv-o. solv-ere, solv-i. sol u-tum. To spit. spu-o, spu-ere, spuT, spu tum. To place, statu- 0, statu-erS, statu-i, statu-tum. To sneeze. stemu-o, stemu-ere, stemu-i, stemu-tum. To sew. su-o. su-6r6. su-T, sii-tum. To give. tribu-o, tribu-6re. tribu-i, tribu-tum. To roU, volv-o, volv-6re. volv-i. volii-tum. (6) Consonan^stems. To weigh, append-o, append-ere, append-I, appen-som. So, also, the other compounds of pendo. To attend, attend-o, attend-ere. attend-i, atten-sum. So, also, the other compounds of tendo To drink. bib-o, bib-erg, bib-i, bibi-tum. Toforge, cud-o, cud-gre, cudi, cu-sum. To eat. 6d-o, ed-ere, ed-I, 6-sum. To lick. lamb-o. lamb-ere, lamb-T. To cheia, mand-o. mand-erg, mand-i, man-sfim. To spread, pand-o, pand-grg, pand-i, pas-sum. 276 LIST OF VERBS, FOURTH CONJUGATION. To take, prehend-o, prehend-ere, prghend-i, pr6hen-stim. To scratch, sc&b-o, scab-ere, scab-i. To climb, scand-o, scand-ere, scand-i. scan-sum. Compounds (a, e, de, con, in) change a into e ; e. g., ascendo. To sink down, sid-o, sid-SrS, sid-i. The compounds take the perf. and supine from s6de6 ; e. g., consi derg, consedi, consessum, to sit together. To hiss, strid-o, strid-gre, strid-i. ^ To turn, vert-o, vert-6re, vert-i, ver-sum. Deverto, praeverto, and rSverto are also used in the passive form as deponents ; e. g., rSvertor, reverti, reversus, sum, / turn back. To brush, verr-o, verr-Sre, verr-i, ver-sum. To pluck, vell-o, vell-er6, vell-i, vul-siim. Compounds of cend6 and fend6 belong here, viz., To bum, incend-o, incend-§re, incend-i, incen-sum. To defend, defend-o, defend-6r6, defend i, defen-sum. (667;) rOUKTH CONJUGATION. I. Perfect-stem adds iv to the Verb-stem. (Obs.) This class contains most of the verbs of the fourth conjugation; the following alone has a peculiar supine : To bury, s6p6l-io, sepel-ir§, s§p6l-iv-i, sepul-tum. II. Perfect-stem adds u to the Verb-stem. To clothe, Smic-io, ftmic-irg, Smic-u-i, amic-tum. To open, ap6r-io, aper-ire, ap6r-u-i, aper-tum.* To cover, 6p6r-io, 6per-ir6, 6p6r-u-i, oper-tum. To leap, sal-io, sSl-ir6, sal-u-i, sal-tiim. Compoxmds change 2 into i ; e. g., dSsilirS, desflui, desultum, to leap down. m. Perfect-stem adds s to the Verb-stem. To cram, farc-io, farc-irfi, < ,„ _, > farc-tiim. I (farc-s-i), 5 The coiiipounds change & into e ; e. g., confercire, confersi, confertum, to Jill up. To prop, fulc-io, fulc-ire, 5 ful-s-i > (fulc-s-i). > ful-tuiH. To draw, haur-io. haur-ire, i hau-s-i \[ (haur-s-i), ] haus-tum. To decree, sanc-io. sanc-ir6. ( sanx-i \ (sanc-s-i), ) sanc-i-tuih «wi ) sanc-tum. * The compounds of par-id which begin with a vowel have ui, ertiim, as in Class II.; those beginning with a consonant have i, ertiim, as in Class V. LIST OF DEPONENT VERBS. 277 To pcdck, sarc-io, sarc-ir6, < ^'*'* >sar-tum. ( (sarc-s-ij, 5 To fed, sent-io, senMrS, ) / ^^t^ -1 ( sen-sum. Instead of kssentid, assentiSf, deponent is more common. To hedge in, sep-io, s6p-irS, sep-s-i, sep-tflm. To bind, vinc-io, vinciru, < , . .^ >vinc-tam. I (vmc-s-i), > rV. Perfect-stem lengthens the Stem-^owel. Contains but a single simple verb. To come, v§n-io, venire, v6n-i, ven-tilm. V. Perfect-stem takes the simple Verb-stem, To ascertain, compfir-io, comp6r-irS, compfir-i, comper-tuitt.* To discern, r6p6r-io, t&pST-ir&, r6p6r-i, r6per-ttbh.* (668.) DEPONENT VERBS. FIRST CONJUGATION. To exhort, hort-6r, hort-ftri, hort-§t-n8« The deponents of the first conjugation are the inosit numerous, btil aj!% formed like hortor, vrith ari, atus. SECOND CONJUGATION. To acknowledge, fit-eor, fat-eri, fas-sus. The compounds make fitedr, fessils ; e. g., confiteSr, confiteri, ccwtt" fessus, to confess : diffiteor has no participle. To bid, lic-eor, lic-erl, lic-it-us. To heal. med-eor, m6d-eri. To deserve, m6r-e6r, m6r-eri, mSr-it-iis. To pity. mis6r-e6r, mis6r-eri, ; mis6r-it-us, or \[ miser-tfis. To think. r-e6r, r-eri, ra-tus. To look upon. tu-e6r. tu-eri. J tu-it-us, or \ tu-tus. Tofear, v6r-e6r. vfir-eri, v6r-it-us. THIRD CONJUGATION. To devise. comminisc-6r, comminisc-i, commen-t&« R6miniscor, to remember, has no perfect. To obtain, adipisc-6r, adipisc-i, adep-tfis. To be wixiry, d6fetisc-6r, d6fetisc-i, dsf(^-i^e. * See note, p. 276. A A 27a LIST OF DEPONENT VERBS. To awakcj expergisc-6r, expergisc-i, experrec-ttli. C fruc-tiis and To enjoy, fru-6r, fru-i, I fru-it-us. To perform, fung-6r, fung-i, fanc-tus. To proceed, grad-i6r, grftd-i, gres-siis. Compounds change the & into 6 ; ; e. g., aggrSdl, aggressus, to assail To he angry, irasc-6r, irasc-i. TofaU, lab-6r, lab-i, lap-sus. To speak, I6qu-6r, I6qu.i, I6cu-tus. To die, m6r-i6r, m6r-i, mor-tuiis. To obtain, nancisc-6r, nancisc-i, nac-tus. To he horn, nasc-6r, nasc-i, na-tus. To lean upon, strive, '" j nlt-5r. nlt-i, \ ni-sus, or ; nix-US. Toforget, 6blivisc-6r, oblivisc-i, obli-tus. To hargain. pScisc-or, picisc-i, pac-tus. Tofeed, pasc-6r, pasc-i. pas-tils. This verb is the passive of pascere, to give food. To suffer, p&t-i6r, pSt-i, PerpStidr, perpessus, to etidure, changes & into S. pas-sus. (From plectd, to twine.) To embrace. 5 amplect-6r, complect-6r, amplect-i, complect-i, amplex-us. complex-US. To set out, pr6ficisc-6r, proficisc-i. profec-tus. To complain. qaer-6r, quer-i, ques-tus. To grin. ring-6r, ring-I. Tofollow, s6qu-or. s6qu-i, s6cu-tus. To revenge, ulcisc-dr, ulcisc-i, ul-tus. To use. tiror, ut-i, u-sus. FOURTH CONJUGATION. To assent, assent-i6r, assent-iri, assen-sus. To flatter. bland-i6r, bland-iri, bland-it-us. To try, exp6r-i6r, exper-iri, exper-tus. To bestow money. larg-i6r, largiri, larg-it-Qs. To lie, ment-idr, ment-iri, ment-it-us. To measure. m6t-ior. met-iri, men-sus. To move a mass, m6l-i6r, mol-iri, mol-it-us. To wait for, - opp6r-i6r, opp6r-iri, opper-tus. To begin. ord-i6r, ord-iri, or-stls. INCHOATIVE AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 279 To rise, To divide, To possess myself of, To cast lots. 6r-i6r, 6r-iri, or-tus. part-ior. partiri, part-it-US pot-ior, pot-iri, p6t-it-us. sort-ior, sort-iri, sort-it-US, (669.) INCHOATIVE VERBS. Inchoatives are verbs derived from nouns, adjectives, or other verbs, expressing a beginning or becoming of the act or state denoted by the primitive. Their stems always end in sc, and they all follow the form of the 3d conj. ; e. g., From puer, boy, we have puerasc-ere, to become a boy [again), " matur-us, ripe, we have matdresc-Sre, to become ripe. " dorm-ir6, to sleep, we have obdormisc-6re, to fall asleep, (1.) It is enough to observe on those derived from adjectives and nouns that they either have no perfect, or else-form it in ui. (2.) As to those derived from verbs, [a) Most are from verbs in the second conjugation, and form their perfect-stem by adding u to the stem, rejecting sc; or, in other words, their perf.-stem is the same as that of the simple verb from which they are derived ; e. g., To become gray, canesc-er§ (canere), canu-L To grow sour, acesc-6re (acere), acu-i. {b) Those derived from verbs of the other conjugations take the per- fects of the simple verbs from which they are derived. To grow old, inv6terasc-6re [inveterdrS), inveterav-i, invetera-tum. To come to life, r&yivisc-ere (vivSre), rSvix-i, rSvic-tum. To fall asleep, obdormisc-ore [dormirS), obdormiv-i, obdomu-tom ^ 11. IRREGULAR VERBS.* (670.) INFINITIVE MOOD. Tenses for Incomplete Action. Tenses for Complete Action. 1] Present and Imperfect. Perfect and Pluperfect. 1. posse, to beuble. potuisse, to have been able. 2. velle, to be willing. voluisse, to have been willing. 3. nolle, to be umoilling. noluisse, to have been unwilling. 4. malle, to be more willing. maluisse, to have been more willing. 5. 6der6, or esse, to eat. edisse, to have eaten. 6. ferre, to bear. tuUsse, to have borne, or suffered. 7. fieri, to become. factum essS, to have been made, or done. latum essS, to have been borne. 8. ferri, to be borne. ^ See note, next pa^e. 280 IRftEOtJLAR VERBS. (671.) INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, I am able, 6fC. Perfect, I have been able, (fc. 1. possum,* potes, potest, 1. p6tu-i, isti, it. possumus, potestis, possunt. potu-imus, istis, erant or ere. 2. void, vis, vult, 2. v61u-i, isti, it, volumiis, vultis, volunt. volu-imus, istis, erunt or er6. 3. nolo, nonvis, nonvult, 3. nolu-i, isti, it, nolumus, nonvultis, nolunt. nolu-imus, istis, erunt or er6. 4. maid, mavis, mavult. 4. malu-i, isti, it. malumus, mavultis, malunt. malu-imus, istis, erunt or erS. 5. edo, edis or es, edit or est. 5. ed-i, isti, it. edimiis, editis «>r estis ; edunt. ed-imus, istis, erunt or 6r6. 6. f erd, fers, fert. 6. tul-i, isti, it. ferimiis, fertis, ferunt. tiil-imus, istis, erunt or ere. 7. fio,t fis, fit, 7. factus sum, gs, est. fimus, fitls, fiunt. facti sumus, estis, sunt. 8. f 6r6r, ferris ar ferre ; fertur, 8. latus sum, es, est, ferimur, fgrimini, feniiitur. lati sumus, estis, sunt. Imperfect, / wets able,. 6(C. Pluperfect, / had been able, Sfc. 1. pot-eram, 6ras, erfit, 1. p6tu-eram, eras, erat. pot-eramus, Gratis, grant. potu-eramus, eratis, erant. 'z. vol-ebam, ebas, ebat. 2. v6lu-6ram, eras, grat. vol-ebamus, ebatis, ebant. v6lu-6ramus, eratis, grant. 3. nol-ebam, ebas, ebat, 3. nolu-eram, eras, erat. nol-gbamus, ebatis, ebant. nolu-6ramus, erStis, grant. 4. mal-ebam, ebas, §bat, 4. malu-grftm, grSs, gillt. mal-ebamus, ebatis, ebant. malu-eramus, eratis, grant. 5. ed-ebam, ebas, ebat, 5. ed-eram, gras, grat, ed-ebamus, ebatis, ebant. gd-eramiis, gratis, grant. 6. f er-ebam, ebas, ebat, 6. tul-gram, gras, erat, fer-ebamus, ebatis, ebant. tul-eramus, eratis, erant. 7. f i-ebam, ebas, ebat. 7. factus gram, eras, grat. fi-ebamus, ebatis, ebant. facti gramus, gratis, grant. 8. fer-ebar, ebarisorg, ebatur, 8. latiis gram, eras, erat. f6r-ebamur, ebamini, ebantiir. lati eramus, gratis, grant. Future, Future Perfect, / shall or wUl have been able, 6fc. 1. p6t-6r6, ens, 6rit, 1. p6tu-grd, gris, grit, p6t-6rimus, eritis, erunt. potu-erimus, gritis, erint. 2. v6l-am, es, gt, 12. v61u-gr6, gris, grit, vol-emiis, etis, ent. v6lu-erimus, eritis, erint. 3. nol-am, es, gt, 3. nolu-ero, eris, grit, nol-emus, etis, ent. nolu-grimus, eritis, grint. 4. mal-am, es, et. 4. malu-erd, gris, erit, mal-emus, etis, ent. malu-erimus, eritis, erint. 5. ed-am, es, et, 5. ed-erd, gris, grit. 6d-emus, etis, ent. ed-erimus, gritis, erint. 6. f er-am, es, et, 6. tul-er6, eris, erit, f6r-6nius, etis, ent. tul-erimus, gritis, grint. 7. fi-am, 5s, 6t, 7. factus gr6, gris, erit. fi-emus, etis, ent. facti erimus, eritis, erint. S.fer-ar, ens or 6rg, etur, 8. latus ero, gris, erit. 1 fer-emur, emini, entur. lati erimus, eritis, grint. * As many of these verbs are nearly related to each other, it seems un- necessary to separate their forms of inflection. The correspondent num- bers will be sufficient direction in tracing the several tenses of each verb. t Fio, contranr to the general rule (24, a), has i long throughout, before ▼ow«ls : but berore r it is short ; as, figri. IRREGULAR VERBS. 281 (672.) IMPERATIVE MOOD. Note. — Possum, volo, malo, have no imperative mood. 3. noli, or nolitS, be thou unwilling. nolite, or nolitote, be ye, ^c. 5. 6d6, 6ditd, or es, estd, eat thou. edite, editdtg : 3. 6dunt6. 6. f er, or fert6, bear thou. ferte, or fertotS : 3. f eruntd. 7. f i, or fito, become thou. f ite, or f itote : 3. fiuntd. 8. f erre, or fertor, be thou borne. f erimini, or f eriminor : 3. f enm tor. (673.) SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present, 1. poss-im, poss-imiis, 2. vel-im, vel-imus, 3. nolim, nolimus, 4. mal-un, m&l-unus, 5. 6d-am, 6d-ftmus, 6. f er-am, fer-amus, 7. f i-am, fi-amus, 8. f 6r-ar, f6r-amur, I may he able, SfC is, it. itis, int. IS, % itis, int. is, it. itis, int. is, it. itis. int. as. at. atis, ant. as. at, atis, ant. as, at. atis. ant. aris or are, atur. amini, antur. Pebfect, I may 1. potu-erim, p6tu-6rimus, 2. v6lu-6rim, v6lu-6rimus, 3. nolu-grim, nolu-erimus, 4. malu-6rim, malu-6rimus, 5. 6d-6rim, ed-erimus, 6. tul-erim, tul-6rimus, 7. factus sim, facti simus, 8. latas sim, lati simus, have been eris, 6ritis, eris, eritis, eris, Sritis, eris, iritis, eris, gritis, eris, 6ritis, sis, sitTs, sis, sitis, able, 6fC. erit, 6rint. erit, 6rint. erit, erint. erit, erint. erit, 6rint. erit, erint. sit, sint. sit, sint. Impekpect, Imi^ht be able, ifc. 1. Poss-6m, poss-emus, 2. veU-em, veil-emus, 3. noU-em, noil-emus, 4. mall-6m, mall-emus, 5. eder-6m the7i. perendie, two days hence. h6rT, yesterday. nondum, not yet. dudum, prTd6m, pridie, i heretofore, the day before. 4. Indefinite. quando ? when 1 aliquando, "^ nup6r, lately. nonnunquam > sometimes. 3. Future. interdum, ) [Very Near.) semp6r, always. nunquSm, Tiever. jamjam, mox. ^ presently. > immediately. iS«^; \intl^-^^ntin^. statim. } hy-and-hy. quotidiS, daily. (2.) Continue mce of Time. quamdiu ? how long? jamdiu, "> diu, long, so long. jamdudum, > long ago. tamdiu. jampridem, j (3.) Vicissitude, or Repetition of Time. 1. Indefinite, subindS, immediately after. quSties ? hmo often 7 identid6m, several times. soBpe, toties. often, so often. 2. Definite, or in Number, aliquotigs, for several times. s^mel, once. vicissim, by turns. bis, twice. rursus. again. tSr, thrice. itgrum, a second time. quatSr, four times. 3. ADVERBS OF ORDER. indg, then. deindg, thereafter. dehinc, henceforth. porro, m/yreover. deinceps, successively. denuo, anew, demque, finally. (postrem6,t lastly. prime,* -um,t first. secundojt secondly.' &c. 4. ADVERBS OF QUALITY, MANNER, &C. adeo, SO, and therefore. nempe, truly. adm6dum, very, greatly. nimium, too much. an. whether 1 or else 7 non, not. cur. why. num ? whether 7 demum. at length. omnino, at all, in general. etiam, liketcise, yes. parum, little. fere. almost. satis, enough. SIC, so, thus. baud, not. immd, yes, truly. scilicet, namely. videlicit, nximely. ita, so, thus. magTs, m^re. vix, scarcely. ne. TWt. * Primo = at first ; t These fall under (6i primum: 10, c). -first, in the first place. § 8. PREPOSITION. (682.) 1. Prepositions governing: the accusative: Ante, apud, Sd, adversus, CircGm, circa, citra, cTs, Erga, contra, intdr, extra, Infra, intra, juxta, 6b, Pengs, pone, post, and praetfir, Prope, propter, per, secundum, Supra, versus, ultra, trans. [Versus is placed after the noun which it govems.l 2. Governing the ablative : AbsquS, a, ab, abs, and dS. Coram, clam, cum, ex, and S. Tenus, sme, pro, and prae. 3. Governing bc^h accusative and ablative: in, sub, sapSr, subtSr §9. COiNJUNCTION. (683.) Conjunctions connect words and sentences. They may be di- dded into the following^ classes : I. Copulative, which simply unite sentences together [and)-, they arc 6t, atque or ac, que, neque or nee, necnon, etiam, quo- q u e, with the adverbials item and 1 1 i d e m. II. Disjunctive, which connect unlike prepositions {or) : they are aut, vel, the suffix v6, and sivS or seu; [either — or): aut — aut, vel V e 1 ; [whether — or) : s i v 6 — s i v e. III. Comparative [as, like, as if, &c.) ; they are u t, s i c u t, v g 1 u t, prout, ceu, quftm, tamquam, quSs!, utsi, acsi, together with ac and atque, when they mean as. IV. Adversative, expressing opposition of thought [but) : they are s 6 d, autem, verd, at and its compounds, t a m e n (and its compounds with at sed and verum), and ceterum. V. Concessive, expressing something granted [although, even if) : they are etsi, etiamsi, tSmetsi, quamquSm, quamvis, quan- tumvig, quamlibet, Itcet, with u t and q u u m, when they mean although. VI. Conditional, expressing a condition [if, if only, if but) : they ara si, sin, ni or nisi, simodd, dummodo, modone, and some times d ii m and m 6 d 6 used alone. VII. Conclusive, expressing a conclusion or inference [therefore) : they are ergo, igitiir, it^que, eo, ideo, idcirco, proinde, prop- ter e a, and the relatives [wherefore) quapropter, quare, qua- mobrem, quocirca, unde. VIII. Causal, expressing a cause or reason [for, because) : n a m, namqu6, 6nim, 6tenim, quia, qu6d, qudniam, quippd, quum, quando, quanddquidSm, siquidfim. IX. Final, expressing a purpose or aim [in order that, in order that n/)t): ut or uti, quo, ne, utne, nev6, neu, quin, quomt- nus. X. Temporal, expressing a relation of time [when, as soon as, after that, just as): quum, ut, ub!, postquSm, antequam, pri- usquam, quando, simul, simiilac, dum, usqu6 dum, do- nee, quoad. XL Interrogative, used in asking questions: num, utriim, Sn, nS (suffix). Bb § 10. INTERJECTION. (684.) Interjections are simply sig^ns of emotion. ah, ah! hem, hem! how! fipage, away ! 10, huzza ! ecce, hehSUl oh. oh ! alas ! eccum, see him ! papre, O strange ! good ! eu, lot pro, alas ! hei, hefl, alas ! vae. woe ! . vfth. O rare ! PART IV. SUMMARY OF SYNTAX. SYNTAX. INTRODUCTION. (685.) A proposition is a thought expressed in words ; e. g., the rose blooms ; the rose is beautiful. (686.) A simple sentence consists of a single proposition ; e. g., the mes- senger was sent ; the swift messenger arrived. (687.) A compound sentence is one made up of two or more propositions ; e. g., the messenger, who had been sent, arrived. (688.) Syntax treats of the use of words in the formation of sentences, and of the relation of sentences to each other. We speak first, PART I. OF SIMPLE SENTENCES. I. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. ^ 1. Definition of Subject and Predicate. (689.) Every sentence (e. g., the eagle flies) consists of two parts, the subject {e.g., eagle) and the predicate {e. g., flies). {a) The subject is that of which anything is declared, and is generally (1) a noun, or (2) some word used instead of a noun. 1. The eagle flies. Here the noun eagle is the subject. 2. To err is human. Here the infinitive to err is used as a noun, and forms the subject. [b) The predicate is that which is declared of the subject, and is gener- ally either (1) a verb, (2) an adjective or participle, or (3) a noun, con- nected with the subject by some form of the verb to be. 1. The eagle j^zes. Here the \erh flies is the predicate. 2. To err is human. Here the adjective human is the predicate. 3. John is a man. Here the noun man is the predicate. ^ 2. Agreement. (690.) Rule I. The verb of the predicate agrees with the subject in number and person. The trees are green. I Arbores virent. Art thou happy 7 I E s n e tu beatus ? Rem. 1. If the subj. consists of two or more singular nouns denoting persons, the verb is generally in the plural. Bb 2 294 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 2. A collective noun sometimes has a plaral verb. Tke crowd rushes. \ Turba ruunt. [This construction is not used by Cicero, and seldom, if at all, by Caesar.] 3. A plural verb is sometimes used with uterque and quisque. Each of them leads his army out I Uterque eorum ex castris exercitum of the camp. I educunt. 4. The verb agrees with the first person rather than the second ; the second rather than the third. 1^ you and Tullia are well, Cicero I Si tu et TuUia valetis, ego et and / are well. I Cicero v a 1 e m u s. (691.) An adjective may stand either (1.) As predicate ; e. g., the man is happy ; (2.) As modifying the subject ; e. g., the good man is happy ; (3.) As modifying the predicate ; e. g., the good man is a happy man. In either case we have Rule II. Adjectives agree with the nouns to which they refer in gender, number, and case. [This rule applies to all adjectives, pronouns, and participles.] Hem. If there be two or more nouns denoting persons, the most wor- thy* gender prevails ; if things, the neuter is used. My father and mother are dead. I Pater mihi et mater mortui sunt. Labour and enjoyment are united. I Labor voluptasque juncta sunt. (692.) Rule III. If the predicate be a noun, it takes the case of the subject. Numa was made king. \ Numa rex creabatur. ^ 3. Apposition. (693.) A noun may stand (a) In the subject, denoting the same person or thing with the sub- ject-noun ; e. g., the general, a brave man, led the army. {b) In the predicate, denoting the same person or thing with a noun in the predicate ; e. g., we have sent the consul, a brave man. Nouns thus expressing the same person or thing, whether in the sub- ject or predicate, are said to be in apposition with each other ; and in either case we have Rule IV. Nouns in apposition with each other agree in case. * The Tnasculine is said to be more worthy than the feminine; the fem- inine than the neuter. GENITIVE CASE. 295 The commander^ a brave man, led the army. We sent the cotisuI, a brave man. Imperator, vir fortis, exerci- tum duxit. Consulem, virum fortem, misi- mus. Rem. 1. A noun in apposition with two or more nouns is commonly put in the plural. M. Antony and C. Crassus, trib- 1 M. Antonius, C. Crassus, tribuni U7ies of the people. | plebis. 2. A noun in apposition with the name of a town may be put in the ablative, with or without the preposition in. At Roine, the chiei dty of Italy. | Romse, (in) prima urbe Italiae. II. USE OF CASES. ^ ^ 4. Nominative. (694.) Subject-nominative. — The subject of a proposition takes the nom- inative case, and is called the subject-nominative. (2.) Predicate-nominative. — The predicate-nominative (692) is always connected with the subject by e s s e, ^ remember past events. He exhorts the u^duans to for- get their disputes. [The thing remembered is often put in the accusative.] {b) Operations of the feelings. 1. Adjectives expressing desire or aversion, patience or impatience, appetite or passion. Participles used as adjectives fall under this rule. Desirous of praise. I Avidus 1 a u d i s. A lover of (== one loving) virtue. I Amans virtutis. 2. Verbs. [a) Those expressing pity, viz., miseresco, misereor. J pity tJi£ unfortunate. \ Miseresco infelicium. {b) The impersonals pudet, piget, poenitet, taedet, miseret [skamie, disgust, repentance, loathing, pity). GENITIVE CASE. 297. / am not only sorry for my fol- ly, but ashamed of it. I am weary of my life. Me non solum poenitet stalti- t i 33 meae, sed etiam p u d e t. Me taedet vitae. Rem, 1. Observe that the person feeling is expressed by the accusa- tive. 2. The cause of feeling may be a verb, or part of a sentence, instead of a noun in the genitive. / am not sorry (= it does not re- 1 Non poenitet me v i x i s s e. pent me) that I have lived. I (699.) Rule IX. Genitive of Participation. — The genitive is used with adjectives and participles expressing (1) plenty or want^ (2) power or weakness, (3) sharing or its opposite, (4) likeness or unlikeness. (1.) Full of wrath. (2.) Master of on£' s faculties. (3 .) He is like his brother. Plenus irjB. Compos mentis. Similis est fratris. (4.) Man is a sharer of reason. \ Homo particeps est rationis. Rem. 1. Those oi plenty and want take also ablative (716, R. 4). 2. Those of likeness and unlikeness take also the dative (704, 4). (700.) Rule X. Genitive of Value. — The genitive of cer- tain adjectives is used with verbs of valuing, esteeming, buying, selling, 6cc., to denote the price or value. The poor man estimates riches at I Pauper divitias magni eestimat. a great value. I Rem. 1. Such genitives are magni, permagni, pluris, maximi, mi nor is, and others. 2. If the price be a noun, the ablative is used (719). Also, the ablatives magno, permagno, plurimo, parvo, minimo, nihi- lo, are often used. (701.) Rule XI. Genitive of Crime. — The genitive is used with verbs of accusing, condemning, acquitting, &c., to denote the crime or offence charged. Proditionis accusare. Praetor reum cri minis absolvit. To accuse of treachery. The judge acquitted the prisoner of the crime. (702.) Rule XII. Genitive of Property. — The genitive is used with esse to denote (1) that to which something belongs ; (2) that to which something is peculiar. (1.) This book belongs to my father. 1 Hie liber est mei patris. (2.) It is peculiar to the brave ^<7 : Fortium est dolorem fortiter pati. endure pain with fortitude. \ 298 DATIVE CASE. Hem. 1. Under this last head come the following constmctioxui < ' the property It is peculiarity- duty mark characteristic &c. of a wise man = est sapientis. 2. Observe carefully, that instead of the genitive of the personal pro- nouns (mei, tui, &c.), the neuter possessives (meum, tuum, suum, nostrum, ve strum) are used; e.g., it is 'my duty, &c. ; est meum, &c. (703.) Rule XIII. The genitive is used with the impersonal interest (i7 concerns), to express the person concerned. It concerns my brother.. I Mei fratris interest. It coTicerns the state. j ReipublicaB interest. Rem. But instead of the genitives of the personal pronouns (mei, tui, &c.), the possessive forms me a, tua, &c., are always used; and with them the impersonal refert has the same force as in- ter e s t. It concerns you. It is of great importance to me to see you. Tua interest (not tui interest). Magni m e a refert ut te videam- ^ 6. Dative. (704.) Rule XIV. The dative case is used to express the person or thing to or for whom (or which)^ to or for whose advan- tage or disadvantage anything is done or tends. f^^ Almost every instance in which the dative occurs may be ex- plained by a proper application of this rule. Por the sake of fuller illustration, however, we add the following heads : (1.) Dative of Remote Object. — The dative is used to express the rernote object, {a) With transitive verbs governing also a direct object. Mitto tibi librum. Pisistratus sibi Megarenses vicit. I send you a book. Pisistratus conquered tlie Mega- renses for himself. Rem. The accusative is often omitted, and the dative alone appears with the verb ; e. g., I persuade you, tibi suadeo ; he told the gen- eral, nuntiavit imperatori. {b) With intransitive verbs expressing an action done to or for some person or thing. / have leisure for philosophy. | Vaco philosopniae. DATIVE CASE. 299 (2.) On the same principle {advantage or disadvantage), the dative is used with verbs of the following meanings, viz. : Envy, profit, please, displease, obey, Help, hurt, resist, excel, or disobey, Command, indulge, be angry, spare, upbraid. Marry, heal, favour, Tneet, trust, and persuade. Rem. 1. Juvo, laedo, delecto, offendo, rego, gubemo, govern the accu- sative. 2. Impero, credo, minor, comminor, are also used transitively, with accusative and dative, (3.) Dative with Compound Verbs. — The dative is used with most verbs compounded with ad, con, in, inter, ob, proe, sub ; and with many of those compounded with ab, ante, de, e, post, prae, re, super. Rem. These verbs govern the dative when they acquire a meaning from the preposition which calls for the dative ; e. g., tojoin,jungere, takes accusative; but to join to, adjungere, takes dative also. When they are transitive, they take both accusative and dative ; but when intransitive, the dative only. To prefer unknown men to knoivii. I Ignotos notis anteferre. Vices creep upon us. I Vitia nobis obrepunt. (4.) So, also, the dative is used with adjectives expressing advantage, likeness, usefulness, ftness, facility, nearness to, and their opposites. Be kind to all. Hurtful to the body, A place Jit for ambush, Th^y are neighbours to the Ger- mans. Rem. 1. Adjectives pf likeness or unlikeness may take the genitive (699, 3). 2. Those oi ftness and unfitness often take the accusative with ad ; e. g., locus ad insidias aptus. (705.) Rule XV. Dative of Possession, — The dative is used with esse to express the person who has or possesses some- thing. I have a book. \ Est mihi liber (=habeo librum). Rem, 1. / have a name = est mihi nomen ; but if the name be ex- pressed, it may be put either in nominative or dative ; e. g., my name is Lcelius = mihi est nomen L aa 1 i u s (or L ae 1 i o). 2. The possessor is expressed by the dative when the mind refers chiefly to the possession {e. g., I ha,ie a book = est mihi liber) ; but by the genitive when the mind refers chiefly to the possessor (e. g., this book is my father's = hie liber est mei patris). Cunctis esto benignus. Corpori pemiciosum. Locus insidiis aptus. Proximi sunt Germanis. 300 ACCUSATIVE CASE. (706.) Rule XVI. Dativeof the End {Double Dative). — Two datives are used with esse, and with verbs of giving, commg, sending, imputing ; one to express the person, the other the object or end. The Boians were (for) a 'protection to the rear. Pausanias came to aid (for an aid to) the Athenians. Boii novissimis proesidio erant. Pausanias venit Atheniensibus auxilio. Rem. The verbs used with double dative are esse, dare, ducere, tribuere, vertere, accipere, relinquere, deligere, mit- tere, venire, habere. [The dative is used with gerundives, for which see 737, ^.] <^ 7. Accusative. (707.) The accusative is the case of the direct object, and answers the questions whom 1 what 1 to what place ? 1^^ Under this general statement we make three heads ; (1) the ac- cusative with verbs ; (2) the accusative with prepositions ; (3) the accusative according to the usage of the language. I. Accusative with Verbs. (708.) Rule XVII. Accusative of the Direct Object. — The accusative is used with transitive verbs, to express the direct object, CcBsar recalls the lieutenant. \ Caesar legatum revocat. Hem. 1. Some verbs are used both ti'ansitively and inti*ansitively ; the use of these must be learned by practice. 2. Some intransitives (especially those of motion), compounded with prepositions, acquire a transitive force easily recognised from their meaning; thus : to g^o, ire; to go across, trans ire, which takes the accusative. P 3. Some intransitives take an accusative of a noun from the same root with themselves ; e. g., to live a life, vivere vitam. (709.) Rule XVIII. Accusative with Impersonals. — The accusative of the person affected is used with the impersonals pudet, piget, taedet, miseret, poenitet. / am tired of life. \ Taedet m e vitae. Rem. Decet and its compounds (which admit a personal subject), also juvat and delectat, take the accusative. Anger becomes wild beasts. J Decet ira feras. " (710.) Rule XIX. Double Accusative, (a) Two accusatives, one of the person, the other of the (1.) Who taught Epaminondas music 1 (2.) 1 conceal nothing from you. \^.) I ask this of you earnestly. (4.) Avarice renders men blind. ACCUSATIVE CASE. 301 thing, are used with verbs of teachings concealing^ asMng^ or entreating, and also with those verbs whose passives have a double nominative (694, 2, R.). duis musicam docnit Epami- nondam. Nihil te celo. H o c t e vehementer rogo. Avaritia homines ccecos reddit. Rem. 1. With verbs oi asking, demanding, the ablative with a prep- osition is used instead of one of the accusatives. The ambassadors were asking \Lega.ti pacem a Caesare posce- peace of Ccesar. I bant. 2. Petere and postulare always take the ablative with ab ; and quaerere, the ablative with ab, de, or ex. (6) Two accusatives are used also with verbs compounded with trans. CcBsar led the army across ^Ae I Caesar exercitum Rhenum Rhine. \ transduxit. ' The trans is often repeated; e.g., Caesar exercitum trans Rhenum transduxit. Rem. 1. In the passive constraction of verbs which take a double ac- cusative, the person takes the nominative, but the thing generally remains in the accusative. 1 was asked my opinion. Ego rogatus sum sententiam. The multitude is led across the Multitudo Rhenum transducitur. Rhine. 2. But with verbs of demanding the ablative with a preposition is generally used. Mon^y is demanded of rm. \ Pecunia a m e poscitur. II. Accusative with Prepositions. (711.) Rule XX. The accusative is used with the preposi- tions ad, apud, ante, adversus, cis, citra, circa, circum, circiter, contra, erga, extra, infra, inter, intra, juxta, ob, penes, per, pone, post, praster, prope, propter, se- cundum, supra, trans, versus, ultra. Also, with in and sub, when motion is expressed ; with super, when it means over^ and with subter nearly always. III. Accusative according to the Usage of the Language. (712.) Rule XXI. Accusative of Measure.— The accusative is used in answer to the questions how far ? how deep ? how Cc 302 ABLATIVE CASE. thick 7 how broad ? how old ? how long ? (whether of time or distance). The dly is two miles off. The ditch is ten feet vnde {deep, or long). Only one hour. Twenty years old. Urbs duo mi Hi a abest. Fossa decern pedes lata (alta, longa). U n a m modo h o r am. Viginti annos natus. Rem, 1. Hotv far 7 is sometimes answered by the ablative. Six miles from Ccesar's Camp. I Mil lib us passuum sex a Coesaris I castris. 2. For time liow long, the accusative with per is sometimes used, and sometimes the ablative alone. Through the whole night. I P e r totam noctem. He was absent six months. \ Sex mensibus abfuit. (713.) Rule XXII. Accusative of Direction, Whither?^ The accusative is used with names of towns and small islands, in answer to the question, whither ? To set out for Athens. j A t h e n a s proficisci. Rem. 1. With names of countries or large islands the prepositions in, ad, must be used. He crossed into Europe. JlnEuropam traj ecit. 2. Domus and rus follow this rule. To go home. I Ire do mum. I will go into the country. I Rus ibo. (714.) Greek Accusative. — The accusative is used to express a special limitation. Naked as to his limbs. I Nudus membra. For the most part [meii) say so. | M a x i m a m p ar t e m ita dicunt. Rem. This is a Greek usage, common in Latin poetry, but not in prose. (715.) Exclamations. — The accusative is used in exclamations, either with or without an interjection. Miserable m£! I Me mi serum. Behold, four altars ! \ En quattuor aras. [For the accusative with the infinitive, see 751.] ^ 8. Ablative. (716.) Rule XXIII. General Rule. — The ablative is used to express the (1) cause; (2) manner ; (3) means, material, or instrument ; (4) supply. ABLATIVE CASE. 303 1. Cause. — The ablative of cause is used with passive verbs, and with the participles natus, genitus, ortus, contentus. The world is illuminated by tlie sun. I am content with my lot, O thou, born of a goddess ! Sole mundus illustratur. Sorte mea contentus sum. Nate Dea! f^^ If the cause be a person (or a thing personified), a or ab must be used with passive verbs. The world was built by God. | A D e o mundus aedificatus est. 2. Manner. — [a) This ablative generally occurs in nouns denoting man- ner; e. §•., mos, modus, ratio, &c. In this way I wrote. \ Hoc mo do scripsi. {b) "With other nouns, cum is generally used, unless an adjective is joined with the noun. He hears ivith pleasure. ICumvoluptate audit. He bears the injury withjirmness. |jEquo animo fert injuriam. 3. Means, Material, Instrument. — Ablative without a preposition. Equo, curru, navibus, vehi. Cornibus tauri se tutantur. To travel by horse, carriage, ships. Bulls defend themselves with their hxyrns. O^ If the instrument or means be a person, per or propter is used, with the accusative. I was freed by you. \ Per te liberatus sum. 4. Supply. — As supply may be either abundant or defective, the abla- tive is used with verbs and adjectives of abounding, wanting, filling, emptying, &c. ; e.g., abundare, egere, carere, inops, refertus, praeditus, &c. Germany abounds in rivers. I Germania fluminibus abundat. The mind is endowed with per- 1 Mens est prasdita m o t u sempi- petual activity. \ temo. (717.) Rule XXIV. The ablative of the thing needed, and the dative of the person, are used with opus est {there is need). We have need of a leader. | Duce nobis opus est. Rem. If opus est be used personally, the thing needed is put in the nominative as subject. Leaders are necessary for us. | Duces nobis opus sunt. (718.) Rule XXV. The ablative is used with the depo- nents utor, fruor, fungor, potior, vescor. To make use of advice. I Consilio uti. They were enjoying peace. | Pace fruebantur. 304 ABLATIVE CASE. Rem. Potior is used also with the genitive. To obtain possession of all Gaul. jTotius Galliee potiri. (719.) Rule XXVI. Ablative of Price. — The ablative is used with verbs of buying, selling, valuing, &c. ; also with the adjectives dignus and indignus, to express the^Wce or value. Patriam auro vendidit. Odio dignus. Multorum sanguine ea victoria stetit. He sold his country for gold. Worthy/ of hatred. That battle cost the blood of many. [^p* If the price or value be an adjective^ it is generally put in the genitive (700). (720.) Rule XXVII. Ablative of Limitation.— The abla- tive is used to denote the limitation generally expressed in English by as to, in respect of, in regard to. Older (i. e., greater in age). Major n a t u. Skilled in the law. Jure peritus. In affection a son. \ P i e t a t e filius. (721.) Rule XXVIII. Ablative of Separation.— The abla- tive is used with verbs of removing, freeing, depriving, and the like. CcBsar removed his camp from the Caesar castra loco movit. spot. The trees are stripped of leaves. Arbores foliis nudantur. Rem. Many of these verbs also take the prepositions a, a b, d e, e X. (722.) Rule XXIX. Ablative of Quality.— The ablative is used (with an adjective of quality) to express that one thing is a quality or property of another. Ccesar was a man of consummate CaBsar s u m m o fuit i n g e n i o. talent. Agesilaus was a mart of low stat- Agesilaus s t a t u r a fuit h u m i 1 i. ure. Rem. The genitive is also thus used (696). (723.) Rule XXX. Ablative of Comparison. — The ablative is used with the comparative degree (quam being omitted) to express the object with which another is compared. Cicero was more eloquent than \ Cicero fuit eloquentior Ho»'ti»n- Hortensius. I sio. ABLATIVE. 305 (724.) Rule XXXI. Ablative of Measure.— The ablative of measure is used, {a) With comparatives and superlatives^ to express the meas- ure of excess or defect. (6) To express the measure of time before or after any event. Much greater. Themistocles lived many years he- fore Demosthenes. Multo major. Themistocles permultis annis ante fait quam Demosthenes. (725.) Rule XXXII. Ablative of'Time When.— The abla- tive is used to express the point of time at which anything occurs. On tlie sixth day. j S e x t o die. Rem. The time within which anything^ occura is expressed by the ab- lative with or without in or d e. iVithin ten years. Decern annis. Within those days. In his diebus. (726.) Rule XXXIII. Ablative of Place. (a) The place whence is expressed by the ablative. He departed from Corinth, \ Corintho profectus est. (fe) The place where is expressed by the ablative, if the noun be of the third declension ov plural number. Alexander died at Babylon. I Alexander B abylone mortuus est. At Athens. | A t h e n i s. Rem. If the nonn be of the 1st or 2d declension singular, the genitive is used. At Rome. At Corinth. jRomae. Corinthi. (Domi follows this rule.) (727.) The ablative is used with the following prepositions. viz. : Absque, a, ab, abs, and de. Coram, clam, cum, ex, and e, Tenus, sine, pro, and prae. Also with i n and sub (implying rest, not motion), and super, when it means upon. S u b t e r is sometimes, also, used with ablative. (728.) Rule XXXIV. Ablative with Compound Verbs. — " The ablative is used with some verbs compounded with a (a b, abs), de, e (ex), and super. Cc2 306 INFINITIVE. Urbe abesse. Co2sar prjfilio supersedere sta- tuit. To be absent from the city. CcBsar resolved to desist from bat- tle. Rem. The preposition is sometimes repeated. To depart from life [■= to die). | Exire de vita, [For the Ablative Absolute, see 750.] (729.) Verbs followed by genitive, dative, or ablative, where we use no preposition, and should therefore be likely to put the accusative. (Those with asterisks take also an accusative of the thing, though some of them only when the accusative is a neuter pronoun.)* GENITIVE. obtain, pity, forget, remember, recollect, require, need, potior [abl.). 5 misereor. \ miseresco. obliviscor [ace). Tmemini [ace). < recordor [ace). ^reminiscor [a^c). S egeo ? / 2,7\ jindigeo^(^^^-)- abuse, revile, advise, answer, believe, command, commission, charge, congratulate, displease, direct, envy. favour, flatter, give, help, aid, assist, succour, heal, cure. > maledico. ^suadeo. *respondeo. credo. *^impero. i *mando. ■^gratulor. displiceo. *praecipio. *invideo. faveo. adulor iacc.) *do. f auxilior. V opitulor. 5 subvenio. ( succurro. > medeor. hurt, indulge, marry. pardon, permit, persuade, please, oppose, rival. spare, suit, threaten. noceo. *indulgeo. nubo. rpareo. < obedio. (, obtempero. *ignosco. **permitto. *persuadeo. placeo. ? resisto, ) repugno. aemulor (ace). satisfacio. parco. convenio. 5 *minor. i ^minitor. ABLATIVE. abuse, discharge, perform, enfoy, obtain, require, need, want, iLse, want, am loithout. abutor. i fungor. fruor. potior [gen.). I indigeo S utor. / careo. ,fte III. USE OF THE INDEFINITE VERB. (j 9. Infinitive. (730.) Rule XXXV. Infinitive as Subject. — The infinitive is used as the subject of a verb, and is then regarded as a neu- ter noun. To love (= loving) is pleasant. \ Jucundum est a m ar e. ' * Arnold^ ' PARTICIPLE. 307 (731.) Rule XXXVI. Infinitive as Complementary Object. — The infinitive is used (exactly as in English) to complete the imperfect ideas expressed by certain words. / wish to learn. I Capio d i s c e r e. Worthy to be loved. \ Dignus a m a r i. Rem. 1. The complementary infinitive occurs after verbs denoting to wish, to be able, to be accustomed, ought (debere), to hasten, &c. ; after the adjectives dignus, indignus, audax, &c. 2. Observe that this construction, which occurs after all verbs in English, can only stand in Latin after those expressing imperfect ideas, as above stated. A purpose cannot be expressed in Latin, as in English, by the simple infinitive ; e. g., he conies to learn = venit ut discat, not venit discere. (732.) Historical Infinitive. — In animated narrative the in- finitive is sometimes used for the indicative. The Romans hastened, made ready, I Ex)mani festinare, par are, &c. (This construction is quite common in Sallust.) [For Accusative with Infinitive, see 751.] ^10. Participle. (733.) Rule XXXVII. The participle agrees with its noun in gender, case, and number, and the active participle governs the same case as its verb. The honoured man. The blooming rose. I saw him reading a book. Vir laudatus. llosa f lor ens. Eum legentem librum vidi. (734.) The participle future active is used to express a pur- pose (where in English we should use to^ in order to, with the infinitive) . Alexander goes to Jupiter Ammon, in order to inquire concerning his descent. (735.) The passive participle is often used to supply the place of a noun. After Tarentum taken (= after the taking of Tarentum). Alexander ad Jovem Ammonem pergit, consultTirus de origine sua. Post Tarentum c a p t u m. Ab urbe c o n d i t a. From the city built (= from the building of the city). [For Participle in Subordinate Sentences, see 749.] Scribere est utile. Ars scribendi est utilis. Charta scribendo est utilis. Scribere disco. Inter scribendum disco. Scribendo discimus. 308 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. ^11. Gerund. (736.) Rule XXXVIII. As the infinitive is used as a noun in the nominative or accusative, so the gerund is used in the remaining cases, and governs the same case as its verb. Nom. Writing is useful Gen. The art of writing is useful. Dat. Paper is useful for writing. . (I learn writing. ' \ I learn during writing. Abl. We learn by writing. Hem. 1. With a preposition the gerund in the accusative must be used, not the infinitive: ad (inter, ob) scribendum, 7iot ad (inter, ob) scribere. 2. The general rules for the use of cases of nouns (695-728) apply to the cases of the infinitive and gerund, as above given. Special Remark. The gerund is 7iot used in the dative or accusative with an active government; e. g., we can say scribendi episto- las, of v)riting letters, or scribendo epistolas, by writing lettei's, but not charta utilis est scribendo {dat.) epistolas, nor charta utilis est ad scribendum literas. In these last cases the ge- rundive must be used (738). (j 12. The Gerundive, or Verbal in dus, da, dum. (737.) Rule XXXIX. {a) The gerundive in the nomina- tive neuter (dum) is used w^ith the tenses of esse, to denote that an action should or must be done ; and these may govern the case of the verb. {One) must write. \ Scribendum est. (6) The person by whom the action should or must be done is put in the dative. / must write. I Scribendum est m i h i. Caius must write. Scribendum est C a i o. One must use reason. I Ratione utendum est. (738.) Rule XL. (a) The gerundive is used with esse, in all cases and genders, as a verbal adjective, agreeing with the noun, to express necessity or worthiness, I am to be loved ; she is to ^eAmandussum;amandaest, loved, S^c. I &c. (&) When the person is specified, it must be put in the da- tive* SUPINE. 309^ / must love Tullia. All things were to be dotie by C(B- sar at one time. Tallia mi hi amanda est. C 88 sari omnia imo tempore erant agenda. Rem, a or ab with ablative is sometimes used instead of the dative. My cause must be managed by the lA consulibus mea causa s u s- consuls. j cipienda est. (739.) Rule XLI. The geinmdive is used {to express con- tinned action) as a verbal adjective, in all genders and cases (but the nominative) agreeing with the noun, instead of the gerund governing the noun ; €. ^., Gen. Of writing a letter. Scribendae epistolsB, instead of scribendi epistolam. Dati-^o or for writing letters. Scribendis epistolis, instead of scribendo epistolas. Ace. To write a letter. Ad scribendam epistolam, instead of ad scribendum epitf» tolam. Abl. By, ^c, writing a letter. Scribe n da epistola, instead of scribendo epistolam. Hem. As observed in (736), the gerundive must be used for the dative or accusative of the gerund when it has an active government. It may be used for it in any other case, unless the object of the ge- rund is a neuter adjective or pronoun ; e. g., of learning the true = vera discendi, not verorum discendorum ; of hearing this := hoc audiendi, not hujus audiendi. ^ 13. Supines. (740.) Rule XLlI. (1.) The supine in um is used with verbs of motion, to express the design of the motion, and gov- erns the same case as its verb. / come to ask you. \ Venio te rogatum. (2.) The supine in u is used, (a) "With adjectives, to show in what respect they are used ; e. g., Pleasant as to taste. \ Dulce gustatu. (b) "With the nouns fas, nefas, opus, in the same sense : fas est dictu. PART II. OF COMPOUND SENTENCES. (741.) A compound sentence is one made up of two or more simple sea- tencei. The sentences thus combined are either co-ordinate or subordinate. 810 SENTENCES. I. CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES. ^14. Classes of Co-ordinate Sentences. (742.) Co-ordinate sentences are united together, but yet independent of each other :* co-ordination is either, [a) Copulative; e. g., His father has abandoned him, and his friends have deserted hiin, and the son remains. {b) Disjunctive ; e. g., Either his father has abandoned, or his friends have deserted him. (c) Adversative ; e. g., His father has abandoned him, hut his friends have not. (d) Causal ; e. g., His friends will abandon him, for his father has done so. (e) Conclusive; e. g., His father has abandoiled him, therefore his friends will desert him. II. SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. ^15. Classes of Subordinate Sentences. (743.) Subordinate sentences are so imited to others (called principal sentences) as to be dependent upon them. The messenger, who was sent, an- I Nuntius> qui missus est, nun- nounced. I tiavit. Here the messenger announced is the principal sentence ; who was sent, the subordinate sentence.* (744.) Subordinate sentences are of five classes : A. Participial sentences, B. Accusative with infinitive. C. Conjunctive sentences, i. e., such as are introduced by a conjunc- tion or adverb of time. D. Relative sentences, i. e., such as are introduced by a relative word. E. Interrogative sentences, i. e., such as are introduced by an inter- rogative word. We shall treat these in order, premising a few remarks upon the use of tke moods and tenses, which must be thoroughly understood. ^ 16. The Moods. (745.) The verb expresses affirmation. The moods of the verb are used to vary the character of the affirmation. ^ It must be obvious that all co-ordinate sentences are, for gra^imatical Tpnnposea, principal sentences. Moreover, the doctrines and rules applied to simple sentences (Part I.) are applicable to all principal sentences : it is only in subordinate sentences that difficulty is likely to occur. The pupil should, therefore, obtain as accurate a knowledge as possible of the vari- ous kinds of subordinate sentences, and the different modes of affirmation which they express, as it is upon these that their syntax depends. PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES. Sll 1. By the indicAtive, affirmation of a fact is expressed ; e. g., I write, I did not write.* 2. By the subjunctive, affirmation is expressed doubtfully, contingently, or indefinitely ; e. g., / may write, if / should write, perhaps some (may) think. 3. By the imperative, affirmation is expressed as an injunction or re- quest ; e. g., write. (746.) It must be obvious that in principal sentences the indicative mood chiefly occurs, and in subordinate sentences the subjunctive, as af- firmations of fact are made more frequently in the former than in the lat- ter. But, (a) The subjunctive is used (of course), even in principal sentences, when the affirmation is doubtful, contingent, or indefinite (745, 2). (b) The indicative is used, even in subordinate sentences, when the af- firmation is positive. True friendships are everlasting, because nature cannot be chang- ed. Verse amicitias sempitemflB sun^ quia natura mutari non potest. ^17. The Tenses. (a) DIVISION. (747.) The tenses are either primary or historical (647, B,. 3). Present. Future. Pres. Perf. . Camat, amabit, amavit, ^ ' ^' I he loves. he will love. he has loved. Imperfect Pluperfect. Perf. Aorist. lh\ W * ' /Ja^^bat, amaverat, amavit, ^ ' '\he was loving. he had loved. he loved. (b) SUCCESSION OF TENSES. (748.) Rule XL III. If there be a primary tense in the principal sentence, there must be a primary tense in the sub- ordinate ; if an historical tense in the principal, an historical in the subordinate. Principal. Subordinate. Principal. Subordinat*. I kiww what you are doing. Scio, quid a gas. I was knowing what you were doing. S c i e b a m. quid agerei. I have learned what you are doing. Cognovi, quid agas. I learned what you were doing. Cognovi, quid age res (A.) ^ 18. Participial Sentences. [The participle is used to abridge discourse, instead of a relative, ad» verb, or conjunction with a verb. Thus (1), Tarquin, when he was expelled * Of course the action may be either positive or negative, without a^ fecting the affirmation. 812 ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE. from Rome — Tarquin, expelled, from Rome. (2) Caesar, when the work was finished, departed = Caesar, the work having been finished, departed These are abridged subordinate sentences, (1) being called the coiir junciive participial construction, and (2) the ablative absolute.] (749.) Conjunctive Participial Construction. — The participle in a subordinate sentence which has for its subject the subject or object of the principal sentence, agi-ees with this last in gender, number, and case. Aristides, when he was expelled from his country, fled to Lace- daemon. Aristides, patria pulsus, Lace- daemonem fugit. D^^ Observe, in this example, that Aristides is the subject of both the principal and the subordinate sentence, and pulsus agrees with Aristides in gender, number, and case. In Eng- '■ lish such sentences are generally expressed by an adverb or conjunction with a verb. (750.) Rule XLIV. Ablative Absolute, — If the subordinate sentence contains a noun and participle independent of the sub- ject of the leading sentence, both noun and participle are placed in the ablative. (This construction is called the ablative abso- lute.) When Tarquin was reigning, Pythagoras came into Italy. All things having been provided, Pythagoras, Tarquinio regnan- t e, in Italiam venit. Omnibus rebus comparatis, diem dicunt. they appoint a day. Rem. Nouns, adjectives, and pronouns are often used in the ablative absolute without a participle. Under the guidance of Nature Natura duce. (= Nature being guide). In the consulship of Manlius. j Manlio consul e. (B.) ^19. Accusative with Infinitive. (751.) Rule XLV. Many subordinate sentences, which in English are introduced by the conjunction that (especially after verbs of thinking, saying, knowing, &:c.), are expressed in Latin by the accusative with the infinitive. They said that they did not fear Dicebant non se hostem vereri. the enemy. He knows that Cicero is eloquent Scit Ciceronem esse eloquen* tem. SUBJUNCTIVE WITH UT, NE, QUIN, aUO, aUOMINUS. 313 Rem. 1. Observe that the subject of the sentence thus subordinated is put in the accusative, and the predicate in the infinitive. If the predicate contain an adjective, it must agree with the subject. I perceive that the water is cold. \ Sentio aquam f r i g i d a m esse. e. The accusative with infinitive occurs chiefly, {a) After verba sentiendi et dicendi {thinking, feelings 'perceiving, knowings saying, announcing, willing, forbidding, Sec). (b) After such expressions as apparet (z7 ^s evident), constat {it is known), opus est, oportet, necesse est, justum est {it is necessary, right, just, &c.). In this case the accusative with infinitive becomes the subject of the entire sentence. It is known to all that the Romans (Constat inter omnes H o m a n o s were very brave. \ fuisse fortissimo s. ^p* Oportet and necesse est may take the subjunctive, in- stead of the accusative with infinitive. We ought ( = it behooves us) ^olOportetnos virtuti studere ; or practice virtue. \ Virtuti studeamus oportet. (G.) ^ 20. Conjunctive Sentences. Relation of Conjunctions to the Moods. (752.) From what has been said (745, 746), it is obvious, that as the moods express the varieties of affirmation, and as the conjunctions are used to indicate different relations of thpught (as positive, conditional, causal, &c.), there must be a close connexion between the use of the con- junctions and that of the moods. It must be borne in mind, however, that the nature of the affirmation (except, perhaps, in purely idiomatic ex- pressions) decides both the mood and the conjunction that shall be used. It cannot properly be said, therefore, that the conjunctions govern the moods ; but, for convenience' salte, we treat them together. GENERAL RULE. (753.) The subjunctive is used in all subordinate sentences in which affirmation is expressed as dependent upon some pre- vious affirmation, either as purpose^ aim, consequence, condition, or imaginary comparison, SPECIAL RULES. 1. Final Conjunctions, ut, ne, quin, quo, quominus. (754.) Rule XL VI. The subjunctive is used in sentencea expressing a purpose or a consequence, introduced by tjbe finaj conjunctions ut, ne, quin, quo, quominus. Dd 314 SUBJUNCTIVE IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 1. Ut, ne, ex.yressmg purpose. I did not write that in order to instruct you. I beseech you not to do this. 2. Ut, expressing- consequence. The soldiers went with such vio- lence that the enemy betook themselves to flight. (3.) duo is used to express a purpose, instead of ut, especially when a comparative enters into the sentence. Ea non ut te instituerem scripsi. Te obsecro n e hoc facias. Eo impetu milites ierunt, ut hostes se fugae man dare nt. CiEsar erects forts, that he may the more easily keep off the Helvetians. Caesar castella communit, quo fa- cilius Helve tios prohibere pos- sit. (4.) duin is used in the sense of "but that" [as not, &c.) after nega- tive sentences, and after non dubito, non dubium est, &c. There is no one hut thinks. It is not doubtful but that the soldiers will fight bravely. Nemo est q u i n p u t e t. Non dubium est quin milites for- titer pugnaturi sint. (5.) duominus is used (in preference to ne) after verbs of hinder- ing, preventing, standing in the way of, Sec. (It can generally be rendered in English by "o/"" or "from" with a participle.) Nothing hinders him from doing I Nihil impedit quominus hoc f a- this. J c i a t. a. Conditional Conjunctions, si, nisi, dum, dummodo, modo. (755.) Rule XLVII. Conditional conjunctions take the in- dicative if the condition is expressed as real or certain ; the subjunctive, where it is not. If he has any money, he will give S i pecuniam h a b e a t, dabit. it (it is uncertain whether he has any). Rem. 1. If the condition is represented as impossible or unreal, (1) the imperfect subjunctive must be used for present or future time; (2) the pluperfect subjunctive for past time. (1) If he had any money, he would Si pecuniam haberet, daret. Si pecuniam habuissit, dedis- set. give it (but he has none). (2) If he had had any money, he would have given it. Rem.% As dum, dummodo, modo, in the sense of provided that, can never express a real, existing condition, they always take the subjunctive. SUBJUNCTIVE WITH UUUM. 315 3. Concessive Conjunctions (683, 5). (756.) The concessive conjunctions take the indicative when they intro- duce a definite statement of fact, but the subjunctive when something is expressed as possible, not actual. Etsi, quamquam, and t a m e t s i are used principally in the former sense ; in the latter, etiamsi more commonly, and licet and q u a m v i s* nearly always. Hence, Rule XL VIII. Licet and quamvis (although) are al- ways followed by the subjunctive ; e t i a m s i, generally. Veritas licet nullum defensorem o b t i n e a t. Sapiens dolorem patienter tolerat, quamvis acerbus sit. Tliough truth should obtain no defender. The wise man endures pain pa- tiently, even though it be griev- ous. Rem. The comparative conjunctions, when used concessively, velu^ quasi, acsi, tanquamsi, &c. (meaning as if as though)^ al- ways take the subjunctive, for the reason given (756) for licet and quamvis. duid testibus utor, quasi res do- bia sit? Why do I use witnesses, as though the master were doubt- ful? 4. Temporal Conjunctions. (757.) Temporal conjunctions {when, after that, as soon aSf just as, &c.) of course generally take the indicative. After Casar drew up the lin£ of battle. Every animal, as soon as it is bom. Postquam Caesar aciem i li- st r u x i t. Omne animal, simulac ortam est. SPECIAL REMARKS. (A.) Q u u m has two uses : temporal and causal. (a) Temporal. 1. As a pure particle of time, q u u m takes the indicative. 2. In historical narrative (especially where the principal clause has the indicative perfect) quum temporal is followed by the svJ)" junctive imperfect or pluperfect. 'When Casar had conquered Pom- \ CsesBT, quum Pompeium vicis- pey, he crossed over into Italy. I s e t, in Italiam t r a j e c i t. [In many such cases, the action introduced by when is in some sense the cause of the action in the principal sentence.] * auamvis is used by the later writers in the sense of quamquam, with the indicative. 316 RELATIVE SENTENCES. {b) duum causal, expressing the relation of cause and ^ect {since, because, although), obviously requires the subjunctive. Since these things are so. } duse cum ita sint. Hence, Rule XL IX. Quum causal is always followed by the subjunctive ; and quum temporal by the imperfect or pluper- fect subjunctive, when the aorist perfect indicative is used in the principal sentence. (B.) Antequam and priusquam are used, 1. To express simple priority of one action to another, and here the indicative is obviously required. All these things were done before \ Haec omnia ante facta sunt Verres touched Italy. I quam Verres Italiam attigit. 2. To express a connexion between one action and another, and here the subjunctive is obviously required. Before Caesar attempted anything, he orders Divitiacus to be sum- moned. Caesar, priusquam quidquam conaretur, Diyitiacum ad se vocari jubet. 3. To introduce a general or indefinite statement, requiring, of course, the subjunctive. The tempest threatens hQioxQ it \Tlem^&st^ minatur, antequam rises. j surgat. (C.) Dum, donee, quoad, in the sense of until, take the subjunctive when the affirmation is expressed as possible or future. He was unwilling to leave the \ Dum. Milo veniret, locum relin- spot until Milo came. I quere noluit. [For interrogatives, see { 22.] (D.) ^21. Relative Sentences. (758.) In the compound sentence, "the messenger, who was sent, an- nounced," the clause "the messenger aimounced" is the principal sen- tenjce; and the clause "who was sent" the relative sentence. The word " messenger" is the antecedent of the relative " who." 1. Agreement. (759.) Rule L. The relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender and number ; but its case depends upon the consti'uetion of the relative sentence. The bridge which was at Geneva \ Yontem, qui erat ad Q-enevam^ he orders to be cut down. | jubet rescindi. RELATIVE SENTENCES. 317 This Vira§ a kind of fighting in which the Get-mans had exer- cised themselves. Genus hoc erat pngiiaB, quo Ger- mani se exercuerant. Reih^ The verb in the relative sentence takes the person of thd ante- cedent. We who write. | N o s qui s c r i b i m m s. 2. The Moods in Relative Sentences. (760.) (a) The indicative mood occurs in the relative sen- tence only when it states a fact distinctly, with reference to a particular subject. The messenger who was sent. \ Nuntius qui missus est. (b) But qui is used in Latin very commonly (1) to avoid the use of a conjunction, and (2) to introduce indefinite statements, or the words or opinions of another ; and in such cases is al- ways followed by the subjunctive. (761.) Rule LI. The subjunctive is used in relative senten- ces expressing the purpose^ result^ or ground of the principal sentence. 1. Purpose (qui = ut with demonstrative). ' 'L '" They sent ambassadors to sue for 1 Miserunt legatoS, qui pacem pet- (= who should sue for) peace. | erent (== ut ii pacem peterent). 2. Result (qui = ut after is, tarn, talis, dignus, ita, &c.). T am not the man to do this (= 1 am not such "who can do). Pollio is worthy/ of our love (= vs^orthy, whom we may love). 3. Ground or cause (qui = cur or quod). Non is sum qui hoc facidm. Dignus est Pollio, quein diliga- mus. Elf as qui censeas— Male fecit Hannibal qui Capu89 hiemarit. You err, who think (= because you think) — HaimibaJ did virrong in wintering (= because he wintered) at Ca- puai (762.) Rule LII. The subjunctive is used in relative ^eii- tences containing indefinite statements, especially after the words there are, there can he found, there is no one, &c. There cere those who say. I have nothing whereof to accuse (= no reason to blame) old age. Sunt qui die ant. Nihil habeo quod incuft^^tJEi *# nectutem. Rem. When the senteiicfe introduced by th« rel«livtf expre«ffe« t3i© D D 2 318 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. sentiments of another (rather than of the writer), the subjunctive is used. Helvetii constituerunt ea quae ad proficiscendum pertinerent comparare. The Helvetians detertnined to get together those things which (they thought) belonged to marching (were necessary for setting out). ^ 22. Interrogative Sentences. 1. Questions. (763.) duestions are often expressed in English without any interrog- ative word ; e. g., Is Caius toriting ? but in the L atin, almost invaria- bly, an interrogative word is used. These are either {a) interrogative particles, {b) interrogative pronouns, or (c) interrogative adverbs or con- junctions. (a) Interrogative Particles : n e, n o n n e, n u m, u t r u m, an. (1.) N e simply asks for information. Is Caius writing ? jScribitne Caius ? (2.) Nonne expects the answer yes. Do you not think the wise man I Nonne putas sapientem beatum happy ? I esse ? (3.) N u m expects the answer no. Do you think the fool happy ? j N u m putas stultum esse beatum ? (4.) Utrum is used in double questions, with an {whether — or). (Whether) is that your fault or I Utrum eavestra an nostra culpa ours ? I est ? (i) Interrogative Pronouns: quis, qui, qualis, quantus, ec- quis, &c. Who taught Epaminondas mu- I Gl u i s Epaminondam musicam do- sicl &c. I cuit? {c) Interrogative Adverbs or Conjunctions : quare, cur, quando, ubi, quomodo, &c. (764.) duestions are either direct or indirect : direct, when they are not dependent on any word or sentence going before ; e. g., Is Caius wri- ting ? Indirect, when they are so dependent ; e. g., Tell me if Caius is writing, 2. Use of the Moods in Questions, (a) Direct. (765.) In direct questions the indicative is used when the question is put positively, and the subjunctive when it is put doubtfully ; e. g,, (Positive.) What are you doing 7 | duid a g i s ? {Indie.) (Doubtful.) What can we do? \ duid a g a m u s ? ORATIO OBLiaUA. 319 (b) Indirect. (766.) Rule LIII. In indirect questions the subjunctive is always used. I do not know what book you are reading. Tell me what you are doing. Nescio quem librum legas. Die, quid agas. ^ 23. Oratio Obliqua. 1. Nature of Oratio Obliqua, (767.) When any one relates the words or opinions of another, he may do it in two ways : (a) He may represent him as speaking in the Jirst person, and give his words precisely as they were uttered; e. g., Ariovistus said, " I have crossed the Rhine^' — Ariovistus dixit, Rhenum transii. This is called oratio recta, direct discourse. {b) He may state the substance of what the speaker said in narrative form ; e.g., Ariovistus said that he had crossed the Rhine — Ariovistus dixit se Rhenum transisse. This is called oratio obliqua, indirect discourse, 2. The Moods in the Oratio Obliqua. (768.) The sentences introduced in the oratio obliqua are either princi- pal or subordinate ; e. g., Ariovistus said that he would not wage war on the jEduans if they paid the tribute yearly. Here the sentence that he would not wage war upon the ^duans is a principal sentence, and if they paid the tribute yearly is a subordinate sentence. (769.) Rule LIV. (a) Principal sentences in Xh.Q oratio ohli" qua are expressed by the accusative with the infinitive ; e, g,, Ariovistus dixit, s e jEduis bellum non esse illaturum. Rem. If the principal sentence contains a command or wish, it is ex- pressed by the subjunctive ; e. g., The leader said that the troops I Dux dixit, milites suae saluti con- should consult their own safety. \ sulerent. (6) Subordinate sentences in oratio obliqua always take the subjunctive ; e. g., Ariovistus dixit, se iEduis bellum non esse illaturum, si stipendium quotannis penderent (if they paid the tribute yearly). APPENDICES ^ a a ;) i a vi a ■! h a APPENDIX L OF PROSODY. ^ 1. Quantity. ^^ [The rules of quantify in Lesson XL 11. should be reviewed, and die following additional rules learned.] 1. Penults. (770.) Dissyllabic supines lengthen the penult ; e, g., visum. Hem. The following are short, viz. : Datum, ratum, sStmn, stStiun, itum, Citum, litum, situm, rutum, quitum. (771.) Reduplicated perfects shorten both penult and antepenult, e.g-., cScidi, didici. Rem. Penult is long- in cecidi (cseddre) and pdpddi (pSdSre). (772.) In ADJECTIVE penults observe the following : 1. Short Penults: -acus, -icus, -idus, imus ; e. g'., JEgyptiftcus, mo- dicus, cupidus, legitimus. Exceptions. — Meracus, opacus, amicus, aprlcus, anticus, posticus, mendicus, umbilicus, fidus, infidus, bimus, trimus (of two, three years, &c.), matrimus, opimus, patrimus, imus, primus. 2. Long Penults: -a lis, -anus, udus, utus, with all before -rus, -vus, -sus ; e.g., dotalis, montanus, percrudus, astutus, av&rus, sin- cSrus, delirus, decorus, octavus, aestivus, famdsus. Exc. — Lifferi, post3ri, barbfirus, opipfirus. 3. Penults sometimes long, sometimes short: -ilis, -inus. (a) -ilis, from verbs, is short ; fh)m nouns, long ; e. g., facilis {short) ; civilis (long). Exilis, subtilis, and the names of months (Aprilis, &c.), are long. (J) -inus, from noun,s denoting time or m^erial, is short; from f other words, long ; e. g., crastmus, elephantinus [short) ; caninus, Latanus {long). 2. Compound Words. (773.) Compound words generally retain the quantity of the simple words; e. ^., per+l6go = perlSgo; per+l6gi = perlSgi. 324 APPENDIX I. PROSODY. Rem. I. A change of vowels does not affect the rule; e+lego = e 1 1 g o. 2. Dejero, pejero (juro) ; maledicus, &c. (dico) ; cognitum, agnitum (notum), are short, though the simple words are long. (774.) a, e, de, di, pro, s e, in composition are long, but re is short. Exc. — Dirimo, disertus, refert. Pro is short in Greek words, and in the compounds of cello^ fanum, fari, fateor, festus, fugio, fundo, nepos, neptis, torvus ; also in proficiscor. In propago, prdpino, it is doubtful.* (775.) If the first part of a compound word end in a, it is generally long ; if in e, i, or u, generally short ; e. g-., traduce, trade (contracted from trans) ; trScenti, agricola, quadrupes. ^ 2. Rhythm, Arsis, Thesis, Verse, Feet. (776.) {a) By Rhythm we mean a regular alternation of elevations (stress) and depressions of the voice. In poetry this alternation follows certain fixed laws. (b) The effort of voice by which stress iS'laid upon one syllable is called Ictus, or rhythmical accent. A syllable so raised by the ictus stands in the Arsis. The syllable or syllables on which the voice rests or sinks are said to be in the Thesis. (c) A Foot is formed by the union of arsis and thesis. A combination of feet forms a Verse. Thus, in the line vSs6rS mantes, the ictus falls on the syllables marked with the accent ; vis and mon, therefore, are in the arsis, s6re and tes in the thesis. The union of arsis and thesis in viserS forms a foot; so also in mon tes. The combination of these two feet forms the verse VisSrg mdntes. (d) A Dactyl is a foot composed of one long syllable (arsis) and two short syllables (thesis); e.^., vis ere: a Spondee of two long (arsis and thesis) ; e. g., m6nt6s. (j 3. Scanning. (777.) Scanning is the measuring of a verse into the feet which com- pose it. Observe the foUowiug points in scanning : 1. Synalcepha cuts off a vowel at the end of a word when the next word begins with a vowel or h ; e. g., instead ofregina ad, we read re gin' ad; instead of a t q u e hinc, a.tqu' hinc. 2. Ecthlipsis cuts off m with the vowel before it at the end of a word * The following lines contain the exceptions : At rape qam fundo, fugio, neptisque, neposqoe, Et cello, fari, fateor, fanum(]ue, festumque ; Atque procusr proficiscor, cumque propheta, profocto. APPENDIX I. PROSODY. 325 when the next begins with a vowel ; e. g., instead ofigndtnm est, we read i g n 6 1* est. 3. The last syllable of a word ending with a consonant is always long if the next word begins with a consonant ; e. g., m a n i b u s tremor; here bus (naturally short) is made long. 4. SyncBresis contracts two syllables into one; e. g., aur6a into anrea (pronounced aurya). 5. Diceresis divides one syllable into two ; e. g., pictae, pictai; (j 4. Hexameter Verse. (778.) [a) Hexameter verse is so called because it has six measures, of a foot each. The first /owr feet may be either dactyls or spondees ; the Jifth is regularly a dactyl, the sixth a spondee. II 1- Sed fugtt I inffai- 2. fnt€re- dlimRSi 3. gtnaju- 4. I 5. 6. n irrgpa- ribilS t^mpus. ' " I6r6m. II b^s reno-jv^rS do- Rem. 1. Sometimes a spondee is found in the 5tb place, especially when anything grave or solemn is expressed. The line is then called spondaic. 2. The final syllable of a verse is always reckoned long ; e. g.,remr in d o 1 o r e m. {b) CcBsura is the separation, by the end of a word, of syllables enter- ing into a foot. If the feet of a verse be marked off like bars in music^ whenever a bar falls in the middle of a word there is a caesura ; e. g., the following hexameter has^^e caesuras : Ille la- I tus nivg- | um mol- | li ful- j tus, hy^- | cmtho. (c) The ccBsural pause in hexameter verse is a pause or rest of the voice on a caesural syllable, designed to give harmony to the entire verse. (1.) The most approved caesural pause {the heroic) falls on the arsis of the third foot, as in the following examples : SM fugit I intgre- I a || ffigit I irrepS I rabilS I tempus. nie la- I tus niv6 | um || mol- | li ful j tus hyi- 1 cintho. (2;) Next in excellence is the coesural pause in the thesis of the third foot, or in the arsis of the fourth. Occurring in other places, it mars the harmony o£ the verse. Eb APPENDIX 11. (779.) GREEK NOUNS. (Mne-&s, ae, ob, am (an), a, a. 1st Decl. \ Anchis-es, 8B, se, en, e, e. Voo. sometimes a and a. (^Pen6l6p-6, es, sb, en, e, e. (Del-OS, i, o, um,or6n, e, o. Orph-eiis, ei, eo, eum, i, im, > is, i. | es, eon (ibus notfoundj, (eos,) > (in,) 5 Nere-is, G. Nereid-is, \ i, em, ? (Nerei), e. | es, mn, 2d DeclA Pericl-es, , ibus, es. > (as.) 5 s, is, > i, em, > es, \ ^ i, 5 ea, 5 e, 5 lDid-6, us, 6, 6, 6. | (also, 6nis, &c.) Ohs. Neuters in a, gen. Stis, have dat. plur. in atis ; thus : poema, dat. plur. poemfttis, not poematibus. (780.) EXAMPLES OF PATRONYMICS (or names from a father or ancestor). JEneas, Anchises, Tyndanis, Theseus, Masc. ufEneddes, Anchisiddes, Tyndarides, Thesides,* Atlantldes, Atlantiades. Fern, [JEnMsi) Anchisias, Tynddris, ThesSis, Atlas (antis). Atlantis, AilaTUias. (781.) EXAMPLES OP NAMES (derived from one's town or native country). Masc. Persa, Cres, Tros, Thrax, Laco (Lacon), PhoBnix. Fern. Persis, Cressa, Troas, Threissa, Laaena, Phosnissa. Cretis, Thressa. Clusinus Atheniensis AbdentSs [fern., AbderiiU). {of Clusium), {an Athenian), {ofAbdera). Milesius Arpinas {of Miletus) . {of Arpinum) . * For ThesHdes. Hence ides oomes from nom. in eus. Komftnus (Roman). APPENDIX III. (782.) THE CALENDAR. (1.) The Roman months had the same number of days as onrSy bat were diflFerently divided. 1. The Kalends were the Is^ day of the month. 2. The Nones ** 5th or 7th day of the month. 3. The Ides ** IZth or lUh day of the month. ^^* We make in March, July^ Octoher^ May^ The Nones the seventh^ the Ides the Jifteenth day. In all the other months the 5th and 13th were used. (2.) The names of the months are used as adjectives agreeing witii Kalendse, Nonas, and Idas. The 1st of January, The 5th of June. The 13th of September, Kalendis Januariis. Nonis Jnniis. Idibus Septembribns. (3.) (a) Instead of beginning at the 1st of the month and nmnbering the days regularly 2d, 3d, &c., as we do, the Romans counted them backward from the Kalends, Nones, and Ides. Thus, the 2d of January was called the 4th day before the Nones of January, quarto (die ante) Nonas Januarias ; the 3d, tertio Nonas ; the 4th, pridie Nonas ; the 5th, Nonis. {b) From the above cases it will be seen that the day with which the reckoning commences is included (except pridie), i. e., the 2d day before the Nones is tertio Nonas ; the 3d day before, quarto Nonas, &c. The 13th of October, The 3d of June, Tertio (die ante) Idus Octo- bres. Tertio (die ante) Nonas Ju- ntas. (c) Special care must be taken, in designating any day between the Ides of one month and the Kalends of another, to ensure correctness. Thus, III. (die ante) Kalend. Januar. will be December 30 ; but HI. KaL Maias = 29th April, inasmuch as December has 31 days and April but 30, So in. Kal. Martias = 27th February. 328 APPENDIX III. CALENDAR. (4.) The following table, exhibiting the correspondence between the Koman calendar and ours, can now be readily understood : The Days March, May, July,|january, August, and [April, June, Septem- February < has 28, of our and October (have December ( have ber, and November and iu Leap-years Months. 31 days). also 31 days). (have 30 days). 29 days). 1. Kalendis. Kalendis. Kalendis. Kalendis. 2. VI. ^ IV. )ante IIL ^ Nonas. IV. ;ante IV. ? ante 3. V. 1 ante IIL 5 Nonas. IIL 5 Nonas. 4. IV. [Nonas. Pridie Nonas. Pri^e Nonas. Pridie Nonas. 5. III. J Nonis. Nonis. Nonis. 6. Pridie Nonas. VIIL^ VIIL^ VIIL^ 7. Nonis. VII. VIL VII. 8. VIII. ^ VI. ante VL ante VL ante 9. VII. V. 'Idus. V. Idus. V. Idus. 10. VI. ante IV. IV. IV: i 11. V. • Idus. IIL \ Pridi III. J IIL J 12. IV. e Idas. PWdie Idus. Pridie Idus. 13. m. . Idibus. Idibus. Idibus. 14. Pridie J Idus. XIX. ^ XVIIL ^ XVL1 15. Idi bus. xvm. be XVIL .a XV. 16. XVII. ^ ho XVIL o xvi. XIV. i 17. XVI. .& XVI. XV. 1 o XIIL 't, 18. 19. XV. XIV. 1 7? XV. XIV. 1 XIV. XIIL XII. XL 20. XIII. «s XIIL 1 . XIL •s^ X. s 21. XII. XIL ■H XL IX. .rg. 22. XL <^3* XL X. VIII. ^ 23. X. • >£'^ X. 1 IX. ViL 24. IX. f^ IX. VIII. 1 VL 25. vin. VIII. VII. -s V. 1 26. VII. vn. VL ^ IV. 27. VL S VL V. to serve. fluv-ius, river; flu(v)-6re. to flow. coqu-us, cook ; c o q u - S r e, to cook. lud-us, sport i lud-ire, to play. 334 WORD-BUILDING. 2. -um, -ium, with verb-stems, gives a result of the action of the verb. JT2g-um, J'oAe, jung-6re, to join. V a d - u m, ford ; v a d - 6 r e, to go. incend-ium, Jire ; i n c e n d - g r e, ^o bum. 3. -ium, vrith noun-stems, (a) an office, or {b) an assemblage of men exercising an office or function. (a) sacerdot-ium, office o/*sacerdos. minister-ium, office q/'minister. {b) c o 1 1 e g - i u m, assemblage of coll eg bs. conviv-ium, assemblage ofconvivae. 4. -mentum, with verb-stems, the means of doing what the verb expresses. teg-u-mentum, covering ; t e g - e r e, to cover. adju-mentum, aid ; a d j u v - a r e, ^o assist. 5. -ulum, -bulum, -culum, with verb-stems, m^ans or instru- ment. j a - u 1 u m, javelin ; j a c - 6 r e, to hurl. venab-ulum, hunting-spear ; v e n - a r i, to hunt. vehi-culum, carriage ; v e h - 6 r e, to carry. Rem. culum also sometimes — the place where ; e. ^., c oe n a - c u 1 u m, cubi-culum. 6. -cru m, -strum, with verb-stems, j^/ace or thing prepared for any purpose. lava-crum, bath ; 1 a v - ft r e, to wash. claus-trum, lock; claud-6re, to shut. (787.) Diminutives of First and Second Declensions. \ 1 u s, - 1 a, -Ium, with noun-stems, form diminutive nouns, of mascn- line, feminine, and neuter genders. (a) Connecting vowels i, o, u, the latter sometimes with c fili-o-lus, fili-o-la, little son, daughter— {^ms) ; frater- culus (frater) ; opus -culum (opus). {b) Sometimes 1 is doubled: lap-illus (lapis); codic-illug (codex, codicis) ; s a c - e 1 1 u m (sacrum). (788.) Third Declension. 1. -tas, -tus (with or without i as connecting vowel), form, with ad- jective-stems, abstract nouns denoting quality, &c. b o n -i - 1 a s, goodness ; b o n - u s, good. hones -tas, honour; honest-us, honmirable. fort-i-tudo, bravery; fort-is, brave. WORD-BUILDING. 335 S. [a) -or, with verb-stems, the action or condition of the verb, pav-or, fear; pav-ere, to fear, am-or, love; am-are, to love, (b) -or, with supine-stems, the agent or doer. d o c t - o r, teacher ; doc-ere (d o c t -), to teach, mo nit -or, adviser; mon-ere (monit-), to advise, 3. -io, with supine-stems, the action of the verb, especially tiie doing of it. act-io, action; ag-ere (act-), to act, do, c a u t - i o, caution ; cav-ere (c a u t -), to take care, 4. -tudo, with adjective-stems, the abstract quality. fort-i-tudo, bravery; fort-is, brave* (789.) Fourth Declension, Most nouns of the 4th declension are abstracts formed from verb- stems or supine-stems. US -us, use; ufi (us-), to use, mot -us, motion; m6v-ere (m6t-), to move, (790.) Fifth Declension, 1. -es, -ies, -ities, with verb or adjective-stems, a property, oper* ation, quality, &c. fid-es (fid-€re) ; ser-ies (ser-6re) ; fac-ies (fac-fire) ; dur- ities (dur-us) ; mund-ities(mund-us). 2. [Those in -ities coexist with others in -itia (784, 2); e, g., munditia, duritia, &c.] (B.) Adjectives. (791.) First Class, us, a, um. 1. -us, quality in general (coexisting with verb and noun stems). alb-US, white; alb-are, iEilb-umen. ^ curv-us, curved; curv-are, curv-amen. dur-us, hard; dur-are, dur-ities. viv-us, alive; viv-6re, vit-a. 2. -tdus and uus, chiefly with stems of intransitive verbs, the quality of the verb, without addition. turg-idus, swelling; turg-ere, to swell. cal-idus, warm; cal-6re, to be warm, noc-uus, hurtful; noc-ere, to hurt. 3. -b u n d u s, with verb-stems, force of present participle, intensified. hflBsita-bundus, full of hesitation ; hacsit-are, to hesitate, lacryma-bundus, weejnng profusely ; lacrym-are, toweep. 336 WORD-BUILDING. 4. -c u n d u s, same as bundus, generally with the additional idea of permariency. ira-cnndus, passionate; ira-sc-i, to be angry, vere-cundus, bashful; vere-ri, tofear. 5k -i c u s, with noun-stems, belonging or relating to a thing. class -icus, belonging to a fieet ; class -is, fleet. civ-icus, civic; civ- is, citizen* 6. -e n s, -a c e u s, -i c i u s, with noun-stems, material or origin. ferr-eus, of iron; ferr-um, iron. chart-aceus, of paper; chart -a, paper. 7. -i n u s, with noun-stems, similarity, quality, or material. asin-inus, asinine, like an ass ; a s i n - u s, an ass. m a r - i n u s, Tnarine ; m a r - e, the sea. crystall-inus, crystalline; crystall-um, crystal, 8. -a n u s, with names of towns ending in a or oe, a native of such place. Rom-anus, a Roman ; Roma, Rome. 9. -OS us, -lentus, with noun-stems, fulness, abundan,ce (like the English -ous). fam-osus, famous; fam-a, fame. vino-lentus, drunken; vin-um, wine. (792.) Second Class, is, is, e. 1. -is, quality in general (coexisting commonly with noun and verb forms). lev- is, light; lev-ftre, lev- it as. 2. -ilis, -hi lis, with verb-stems, the quality of the verb, or the capacity of it, in two senses, (a) active and (Z») passive. [a) t e r r i - b i 1 i s, exciting terror ; t e r r - 6 r e, to terrify. (6) d6c-ilis, docile; doc-ere, to Uach. a m a b - i 1 i s, amiable ; a m - a r e, to love. 3. -ilis (i long), with noun-stems, belonging or relating to a thing. ci V - 1 1 i s, belonging to a citizen, civil ; c i v - i s, citizen. \\ost-i\iB, hostile; ho s -tis, en^ny. [Observe that il i s, with verb-stems, is short ; with noun-stems, long,^ 4. -alis, -aris, with noun-stems, of or belonging to. conviv-alis, convivial ; conviv-a. cap it -alis, capital; caput, head, consul-aris, consular; consul. 9. -en sis, with names of towns — a native of such town. Cann-ensis, an inhabitant of C&nnss. Arimin-entis, an inhabitant of At iminnm. WORD-BUILDING. 337 (793.) Third Class, one ending-. -ax, with verb-stems, the tendency of the verb, generally in a bad sense. pugn-ax, pugnacious; pngn^lre, tojlgkt, rap-ax, rapacious; rap-6re, to seize, (C.) Verbs. (794.) First Conjugation. 1. -are, generally a transitive ending, with noun-stems. numer-are, to count; numer-us, number. nomin-are, to Tiame ; nomen (nomin-is), name. 2. Frequentative verbs, expressing a repetition or increase of the action of the original verb, are formed by the endings -are and -it are ; thus : (a) -are, added to supine-stems. c u r s - a r e, to run to and fro ; currfire (c u r s - u m), to rU7i, dormlt-are, to be sleepy ; dormire (dormit-um), to sleep, {b) -it are, added to verb-stems, rog-itare, to ask of ten ; rog-are, to ask, vol-itare, to fly to and fro ; vol-are» to fly, 3. -ari, deponent-ending, with noim-stems, is much used for express- ing " to be that which, or of the character that" the noun indicates. . { to attend as com- \ t -^ - \ comit-ari, < . > comes {com.it-iB), companion, \ pamon; > domin-ari, to rule as master ; dLomin-ua, m,aster, (795.) Second Conjugation. -ere, frequently an intransitive ending, with noun and adjective stems, alb-ere, tobe white; alb-us, white. ^ luc-ere, to shine; lux (luc-is), light. (796.) Third Conjugation. Inchoative verbs express the beginning or increase of the action of the verb from which they are derived. They are formed by adding sc to the verb-stem, with the connecting-vowels a, e, or i. Most of them are formed on stems of verbs of second conjugation. pall esc- 6 re, to grow pale ; pall- ere, to be pale. labasc-6re, to totter ; 1 ab - ar e, to waver. (797.) Fourth Conjugation, Desiderative verbs express a desire of that which is impHed in the primitive, and are formed by adding -urire to supme-stems. e s - u r i r e, to want to eat ; edSre (e s - u m), to eat, F f 388 WORD-BUILDING. (ll.) WORD-BUILDING BT PREFIXES. (798.) Under this head we place only the inseparable prepositions (229), viz., amb-, dis- (di-), re-, se. 1. ArrLh- = about, around, on both sides; e.g., amb -ire, to go round (amb+ire). 1^^ Before j9 the b is dropped; e.g., am-plector: before c-sounds amb is changed into an ; e. g., an-ceps, an-quiro. 2. Dis (di) z=asunder; eg-., dis-jung6re, to disjoin (dis+jung6re). I^p" Di is used before d, g,l,m ; e. ^., digerere, &c. Before/ the s is assimilated; e.g., differre (dis+ferre). 3. II e = back, again, away, un- ; e. ^., r 6 p e 11 e r e, drive-back {re-\- pellere) ; r e f i c e r e, refit (r6+facere). 1!^^ Before vowels, d is inserted ; e. g-., re d-ir e (re+ire). [Re long occurs only in r e f e r t.] 4. S e = aside ; e. g., s e d u c 6 r e, lead astray, seduce (se+dticere) ; sepon6re, lay aside (se-f-ponere). (ill.) WORD-BUILDING BT COMPOSITION. I. Prepositions in Composition with other Words. (799.) 1^^ Most prepositions are used to form compound words, and generally modify their meaning in a way easily understood ; e. g., stare, to stand; praestare, to stand before, to excel. We notice here only those which present some peculiarities. 1. a, ab, abs — away, from, [a) a is used before m and v; e. g., a-mittere, to send away, lose; a-vertere, turn away, [b) au is used before f err e andfug6re: auferre, aufug6re. [c) as,\>e- fore p or sp : asperto, aspernor. 2. ad = to. {a) Assimilated before consonants, except d, j, v, m ; e. g., arripSre, assurgfire, adduc6re, &c. [b) d dropped before gn; e.g., agnoscgre, agnatus. 3. con (a variation of cum) = with, [a) co before h and vowels ; e. g., co-ortus, co-hibere. [b) com before b, p :* com-burSre, com-pellSre. (c) Assimilated before ^ w, r ; col-ligSre, com- movere, cor-ripSre. A. e or e:s. = out of. {a) Assimilated before /; e.g., effero (ex+ fero). (b) e before liquids and b, d, g, v. 5. in, with yerhs = inio, on, in, against ; with, adjectives has privative force ; e. g-., doctus, learned; indoctus, unlearned. (a) Assimilated before I, r, e. g., illatum (in-|-latum) ; irrum p6re (in+rumpere). 1. — ■ ' J * And sometimes before vowels : comedere. WORD-BUILDING. 339 (b) Changed into im before b, p ; e.g., imbibfire (in+bibere); imponere (iu+ponere). 6. ob = against; e. g., obtrude re (ob -|- trudere), thrust against. |c^ Assimilated before c^ ft p ; e. g.^ oc-cidere (ob+cadere) ; of-ferre, op-ponere. 7. ^r o== forth, fcmoard ; e.g., projic6re (pro+jacere), cast forth. [f^^ Before vowels, d is inserted ; e. g., prod-ess e (pro+esse). 8. p r ae = before ; e. g., p r ae c e d e r e (prae+cedere), to go before, to surpass. 9. 8 Tih =^ under, from under ; e. g., subducSre, to draw from under. [a] Generally assimilated ; e.g., sum-mov6re, sup-ponere, &c. [b) Sometimes sus-; e. g., sus-cipere, sus-tinere, &c. 10. trans = across, over; e. g., trans due ere, to lead across. ^^ Tra, instead of trans, occurs in tradere, traducere, tra- jic6re. (800.) n. Adverbs in Composition with other Words. 1. ne, ve, have a privative force; e. g., nefas, wicked (ne+fas) ; vesanus, insane (ve+sanus). 2. beng, well; male, ill; satis, enmigh; e. g., beneficium, a good deed; maleficium, an evil deed; satisfacSre, to satisfy (= to do enough). 3. bis (and other numerals), twice {thrice), &c: bicorpor, two-bod' zed (bis+corp-us). (801.) III. Nouns and Adjectives in Composition with other Words. ^^ When a noun or adjective is compounded with another word, the connecting vowel is always short i. agri-cola (agr-+col-) , a husbandman, a r t i - f e X (art-+fac-), a7i artificer, (802.) rv. Verbs in Cotnposition with other Words. None occur, except in composition with facere ; «. g'., calefacere (calere+facere), to make hot; patefacere (patere+facere), to [ ^^ Observe that the vowel a in facere remains unchanged.] (803.) V. Common Vowel-changes in Composition. 1. aintoi; e.g., arripere (ad + rapere), conficere (con-f-fa- cere), constituere (con+statuere), &c. 2. a into e (more rarely); e. g., ascendere (ad+scandere). 3. € into i (not always); e. g., collig6re (con+legere), absti- nere (abs + tenere), &c. 4. €B into i; e. g., occidSre (ob+ctedere), rgquirere (rfi-f- quoerere). READING LESSONS. Gallia est omnis divisa^ in partes tres. — Belgae unam inco- lunt ;2 Aquitani alteram ; Celtae tertiam. — Hi, ipsorum* lingua^ Celtae'* appellantur ;5 nostra* lingua, Galli.'* Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres ; quarum unam inco- lunt Belgae, alteram Aquitani, tertiam qui^ ipsorum lingua Celtae, nostra Galli appellantur. Hi omnes inter se difFeruntJ — Lingua, institutis,^ legibus dif- ferunt. — Garumna^ flumen Gallos ab Aquitanis dividit. — Ma- trona flumen Gallos a Belgis dividit. — Horum omnium^o fortis- simi sunt Belgae. — Ab humanitate^^ Provinciae longe absunt.^^ — - A cultu^^ Provinciae longissime absunt. — Minime ad eos merca- tores^^ commeant. — Quaedam^^ animos effeminant.^^ — Quaedara ad efFeminandos animos pertinent.^^ Hi omnes lingua, institutis, legibus, inter se diiFerunt. — Gallos ab Aquitanis Garumna flumen, a Belgis Matrona e t Sequana dividit. — Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, propterea quod a cultu at que humanitate Provinciae longissime ab- sunt, minime q u e ad eos mercatores saepe commeant, a t q u e ea, q u ae ad effeminandos animos pertinent,^* i m p o r t a n t.^® Proximi sunt Germanis.^o — Germani trans Rhenum incolunt. — Belgae cum Germanis continenter^i bellum gerunt. 1 435, c— 2 in+colere.— 3 716.— * 694, 2, R.—^ ad-j-pellai-e (obsolete), 799, 2, a.— 6 167, d, 4.-7 798, l^*.— » 786, 2, institaere = in-f-statuere, 803, 1.— 9 225, a.— 10 697, a.— ^i 788, 1 (humanus), hum.BmtdiS = refinement, — 12 ab-j-sum, 799, 1. — ^3 cultas (civilization), from colere (cult-), 789. — i^mercator, from mercari (merest-), 788, 2, h, — ^^ Somethings. — ig eifeminare (to make effeminate), ex-j-feminare, 799, 4, a : feminare, from femina (wom- an), 794, 1.. — 17 tend to make minds effeminate, 739. — ^^ per-|-tenere, 803 » 3. — 19 in-f-portare, 799, 5, ^>.— 20 704, 4.-21 from continens (con-f tenere), 215, 2, b. * Ipsorum and nostra precede lingua, instead of following it, because op. posed to each other, and therefore emphatic. READING LESSONS. 341 Proximi sunt Germanis, qui trans Rhenum incolunt, qui ) u s c u m 22 continenter bellum genint. II. Helve tii quoque^ reliquos^ Gallos virtute^ praecedunt.'* — Fere quotidianis praeliis cum Germanis contendunt. — Aut^ suis finibus Germanos prohibent,^ aut ipsi in eorum finibus bellum gerunt. Qua^ de causa^ Helvetii quoque reliquos Gallos virtute prgecedunt, q u o d ^ fere quotidianis praeliis cum Germanis con- tendunt, quum aut suis finibus eos prohibent, aut ipsi in eorum finibus beUum gerunt. GaUi unam partem obtinent.^o — Unam partem Gallos^^ obti- nere dictum est.^^ — Ea pars initium capit a flumine Rhodano. — Continetur Garumna flumine/^ Oceano,^^ finibus^^ Belgarum. — Attingit^^ ab Sequanis flumen Rhenum. — Vergit ad Septen- triones. — Belgse ab extremis^^ Galliae finibus oriuntur. — Perti- nent^6 ad inferiorem partem fluminis Rheni. — Spectant* in Septentriones et orientem^^ solem. Eorum una pars, q u a m ^^ Gallos obtinere dictum est, ini- tium capit a flumine Rhodano ; continetur^^ Garumna flumine, Oceano, finibus Belgarum; attingit etiam ab^^ Sequanis et Helvetiis flumen Rhenum; vergit ad Septentriones. — Belgae ab extremis Galliae finibus oriuntur ; pertinent ad inferiorem partem fluminis Rheni; spectant in Septentriones et orientem solem. Aquitania a Garumna flumine ad Pyrenaeos montes pertinet. — Una pars Oceani est ad^o Hispaniam. — Aquitania ad earn 22 125, IL, h. 1 duo que never begins a sentence. — 2 from relinquere (reliqu-), 791, 1. —3 718, in 'odLmir.—A 799, 8.-5 519, R. 4.-6 721.— 7 89, II.— 8 dua de cau- sa =/<3r wMck reason. — 9 because. — ^o ob-j-tenere, 803, 3. — 11 751. — 12 751^ R, 2.-13 716.— H ad-j-tangere, 799, 2, a, 803, 1.— is 78, IL, b.—^^ Pertinent == they extend, per-|-tenere.— 17 438, a.— 1« 759.— 19 is bounded.— '^^ on the side of, or near. * Spectant in Septentriones, &e. : they look into the north and the rising sunf i. e^ they lie in a N.E. direction. F F 2 342 REAPING LESSONS. partem Oeeani, quae est ad Hispaniam, pertinet.— Spectat inter occasum^i solis et Septenti'iones, Aquitania a Garumna flumine ad Pyrenaeos montes, e t e a m partem Oeeani, q u ae est ad Hispaniam, pertinet ; spectat* in- ter occasmn solis et Septentriones. III. Orgetorix nobilis fuit, — Apud Helvetios nobilissimus fuit Orgetorix. — Apud Helvetios longe ditissimus^ fuit Orgetorix. — Is regni cupiditate^ inductus conjurationem^ nobilitatis* fecit. — Is civitati^ persuadet, ut de finibus suis exeant.^ — De finibus suis exeunt. — Perfacile erattotius Galliae imperio'' potiri. — Perfacile esse^ (dixit), quum virtute omnibus praestarent,^ totius Galliae imperio potiri. Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus e t ditissimus fuit Orget- orix. — Is, Marco Messala et Marco Pisone consul- ibus,^° regni cupiditate inductus, conjurationem nobilitatis fecit; et civitati persuasit, ut de finibus suis cum omnibus copiis exirent:" perfacile esse (dixit), quum virtute omnibus praes- tarent, totius Galliae imperio potiri. Id facile eis persuadet.^^ — Id hoc facilius eis persuasit Un- dique natura loci^^ Helvetii continentur. — Una ex parte conti- nentur flumine Rheno latissimo atque altissimo. — Altera ex parte continentur monte Jura altissimo; tertia ex parte lacu Lemanno et flumine Rhodano. — Flumen Rhenus agrum Hel- vetium a Gerraanis dividit. — ^Mons Jura est inter Sequanos et Helvetios.^-Flumen Rhodanus provinciam nostram ab Helve- tiis dividit. 21 789, from occidere, ob-hcadere. 1 371, R. 1.— 2 jfrom cupid-us, by 788, 1.-^ 788, 3, con4-jurare.— 4 788, 1. — ^ 704, 2 : he persuades the state ; i. e., the citizens, — 6 ut exeant = to go out of : subj. pres., 754 (ex-fire). — "^ abl., 718. — ^ The sente^ce perfacile esse, Sec, is in orat. obliqua; 769, a, applies.— ^ 799, 8. — lo 458, b. — ^i Why Is exirent in subj. imperf. ? 748. — 12 suadere, to recommend ; persuadere, recommend thoroughly, i. e., persuade. — ^^ ly fJiQ nature of the country. * It looks between the setting' of the sun and the north ; {.^yina, N. W. direction. READING LESSONS. 343 Id hoc fecilius eis persuadet, quod undique loci natura Hel- vetii continentur ; una ex parte, flumine Rheno latissimo atque altissimo, q u i agi'um Helvetium a Germanis dividit ; altera ex parte, monte Jura altissimo, qui est inter Sequanos et Helve- tios; tertia, lacu Lemanno et flunaine Rhodano, qui provin- ciam nosti-am ab Helvetiis dividit. Minus late vagantur. — His rebus fit,^'* ut minus late vagen- tur.i^ — ^Bellum inferunt.^^ — Bellum inferre^'' possunt. — Minus facile bellum finitimis^^ inferre possunti — His rebus fit, ut minus facile bellum finitimis inferre possent. — Magno dolore afficie- bantur.^^ — Bellandi^o erant cupidi.^i His rebus fiebat, ut et minus late vagarentur, et minus facile finitimis bellum inferre possint. — Qua de causa, homines bellandi cupidi magno dolore afficiebantur. IV, Pro^ multitudine' hominum, angustoa habebant fines. — Pro gloria^ belli atque fortitudinis,^ an gustos habebant fines. — An- gustos se* fines habere arbitrabantur.^ — Hi (i. g., fines) millia passuum ducenta (CC.) patebant.^ — Hi in longitudinem^ millia^ passuum ducenta et quadraginta (XL.) patebant. Pro multitudine autem^ hominum, et pro gloria belli atque fortitudinis, angustos se fines habere arbitrabantur, qui in longitudinem millia passuum CCXL ., in latitudinem centum et octoginta (CLXXX.) patebant. Ducti sunt. — Adducti^ sunt. — Moti sunt. — Permoti^o' sunt. — Auctoritate^^ Orgetorigis adducti et permoti sunt. — Quaedam ad proficiscendum^^ pertinent. — Constituerunt^^ ^a comparare.^^* — Constituerunt jumenta et carros emere.^^ — Constituerunt se- 1* By these circumstances it is brought about. — -^^ 754, 2. — ^^ in+ferre. — 17 731.— 18 704, 3.— 19 ad+facere, 799, 2; 803, 1.— 20 736.— 21 cupere, 791, 2. 1 For, or, in view of. — "^ mult-us, 788, 4. — 3 reputation for war and cour- cf,ge.—^ 471.— « from arbit-er, by 794, 3.-6 extended.—'' 712.— 8 522, b.— 9 Ducti swat = they were led: adducti sunt=^^y were led to, i. e., they were induced. — ^o Moti sunt = they were moved : permoti sunt = they were thoroughly moved, 1. e., prevailed upon.—^^ 788, 1.— ^^ 487 .~18 con+statu- ere, 803, 1.— ^^ con+parare, 799, 3, b.—^^ 731. 344 READING LESSONS. mentes magnas facere,^^ ut in itinere copia frumenti suppet- eret.^'' — Cum proximis civitatibus pacem et amicitiam^® con- firmant. His rebus adducti, et auctoritate Orgetorigis permoti, constituerunt, ea, q u se ^^ ad proficiscendum pertinerent, com- parare ; j umentonim et carrdrum quam maximum nu- merum^o coemere ;2i sementes quam maximas^^ facere, ut in itinere copia frumenti suppeteret ; cum proximis civitatibus pacem et amicitiam confirmare. Biennium Helvetiis^^ satis erat. — Biennium sibi^ Helvetii satis esse duxerunt.^'^ — Ad eas res conficiendas^^ biennium satis erat. — Profectionem^e lege confirmant.^^ — ^In tertium annum profec- tionem lege confirmant. — Ad eas res conficiendas^ Orgetorix deligjtur.28 — Is sibi legationem^^ suscepit.^^ — In eo itinere per- suadet Castico. — Casticus C ataman taledis erat filius, Sequanus. — Pater Castici regnum in Sequanis multos annos^o obtinuerat. — Pater Castici a senatu populi Romani amicus appellatus erat. — Orgetorix Castico persuadet, ut regnum in civitate sua occu- paret.^^ Ad eas res conficiendas biennium sibi satis esse duxerunt; in tertium annum profectionem lege confirmant. Ad eas res conficiendas Orgetorix deligitur. Is sibi legationem ad civi- tate s suscepit. In eo itinere persuadet Castico, Catamentale- dis filio, Sequano, cujus pater regnum in Sequanis multos annos obtinuerat, eta senatu populi Komani amicus appellatus erat, ut regnum in civitate sua occuparet, q u o d ^^ pater ant© habuerat* V. Item Dumnorigi persuadet. — Dumnorix erat iEduus. — Dumnorix erat frater Divitiaci. — Dumnorix principatum^ in IS to make great sowings, i. e., to sow much land. — ^^ Sub+petere, 799, 9, a, neuter; suppeteret =m§^^^ be in store : subjunc. by 754, 1. — is 735^ 2. — 19 759, Rem. — 20 ^g great a number as possible. — 21 con+emere, to buy together, to buy up, 799, 3. — 22 ^5 great sovnngs as possible. — ^^3 704.— 24 reckoned.— ^^ 498, ^Z.—^e 738, 3.--27 They fix the departure by a law.- J» de+legere, 803, 3.— 2f9 799, 9, b.—^ 712.— 3i 754.-32 759. 1 chief power, from priuceps. READING LESSONS. 345 civitate obtinebat. — Dumnorix plebi^ acceptus^ erat. — Dum- norigi, ut idem conaretur persuadet,* eique filiam suam in matrimonium dat. Itemque Dumnorigi ^duo, fratri Divitiaci, qui eo tem- pore'^ principatum in civitate obtinebat, ac maxime^ plebi ac- ceptus erat, ut idem conaretur persuadet, eique filiam suam in matiimonium dat. Perfacile factu^ erat conata perficereJ — Ipse suae civitatis imperium obtenturus erat. — Totius^ Galliae plurimum Helvetii possunt. — Non est dubium quin plurimum Helvetii possint.^ — Ipse illis regnum conciliaturus'o erat. — Ipse, suis copiis suoque exercitu, illis regnum conciUaturus erat. (Oblique Narration^ 769.) "Perfacile factu esse," illis pro bat, '* conata perficere, propterea quod ipse suae civitatis imperium obtenturus esset ; non esse dubium, quin totius Galliae plurimum Helvetii possent ;" " Se, suis copiis suoque exercitu, illis regna conciliaturum," confirmat. Helvetii jam^^ se^^ ^d eam rem paratos esse arbitrantur. — Oppida sua omnia, numero ad duodecim,^^ incendunt. — Vices suos ad quadringentos incendunt. — Reliqua^'* privata aedificia^^ incendunt. — Frumentum secum portaturi erant. — Frumentum omne comburunt. — Domum^^ reditionis^^ spes sublata^^ est. — Paratiores ad omnia pericula subeunda^^ erant. U b i^o jam se ad eam rem paratos esse arbitrati sunt, oppida sua omnia, numero ad duodecim, vices ad quadringentos, reliqua privata sedificia incendunt; frumentum omne, praeter quod secum portaturi erant, comburunt, ut, domum reditionis spe^^ sublata,2i paratiores ad omnia pericula subeunda e s s e n t.^^ 'r-t^ 2 702, was acceptable to the common people (a favourite). — 3 ad+capere, 803, 1. — -t 725. — 5 376. — ^6 330. It was a very easy thing to do. — 7 to ac- complish, per + facere, 803, 1. — ^ Of the whole of Gaul, the Helvetians are the m^st powerful. — 9 754, 4. — 10 446. — ^ jam = a^ last. — 12 751. — 13 in number (amounting) to twelve. — ^^ relinquere. — ^^ 801, cedes + facere.— 16 713, Rem. 2.— i7 788, 3. — is sub+fero.— 19 sub+ire, gerundive, 739.— 20 when.—^^ 750.-22 754. * Caesar often uses the historical present, as in this instance, instead of the per- fect aorist If persuadet were used really as the present, then conaretur would have to be c onetur, by 748; but, as the historical present, it requires a past tense in the subordinate sentence. 346 EEAoiNa LsasQNg. VI. Omnes res ad profectionem comparant Diem dicunt^ qua die omnes conveniant.^ — Is dies ei*at ante diem quintum Kalen- das'^ Aprilis, Lucio Pisone, Aulo Gabinio consulibus. — Is dies erat a. d. V. Kal. Apr., L. Pisone, A. Gabinio Coss. Omnibus rebus* ad profectionem comparatis, diem dicunt, qua die ad ripam Rhodani omnes conveniant : is dies erat ante diem quintum Kalendas Aprilis, Lucio Pisone, Aulo Gabi- nio Consulibus. Helvetii per provinciam nostram iter^ facere conantur. — Id Caesari nuntiatum erat. — Csesari nuntiatum erat, eos per pro- vinciam nostram iter facere^ conari.'' — Maturat ab urbe profi- cisci,^ et magnis itineribus in Galliam contendit, et ad Genevam pervenit. — De ejus adventu^ Helvetii certiores facti sunt. — Legatos ad eum mittunt. — Helvetiis est in animo^ sine uUo maleficio^o iter per provinciam facere ; aliud iter habent nullum ; rogant, ut, Csesaris voluntate, id facere liceat.^^ Caesari quum id nuntiatum esset,^^ eos per provinciam nostram iter facere conari,'' maturat ab urbe proficisci, et q u a m maximis potest itineribus, in Galliam u 1 1 e r i o r e m con- tendit, et ad Genevam pervenit. Ubi de ejus adventu Hel- vetii certiores facti sunt, legatos ad eum mittunt,^^ q ^ j d i c e - rent,^'* ^^sih9^ esse in animo sine ullo malejicio iter per provin- ciam facere^ propterea quod aliud iter haheant nullum ; rogare, ut ejus voluntate id sibi facere liceat.^^ Lucius Cassius, consul, ab Helvetiis occisus erat. — Exer- citus^^ Cassii-ab Helvetiis pulsus^'' erat, et sub jugum missus.-^ ES, Caesar memorial® tenebat.— Concedendum^^ non putabat. — Facultas^ per provinciam itineris faciendi^i non d^ta est. — ^ Thei/ appoint. — 2 con+venire ; subj. pres., 766. — 3 732, 5. — * 750. — » iter {ajceYe= to make journeT/ = to march. — ^ 731. — "^ 751. — ^ advenire (advent-), 789.-^ 468, 5.— 10 800, 2.—" 754.— 12 757^ a.. 2.-^3 historical present. — '"* 761, 1. — ^^ oblique narration. — ^6 exercere, 789. — ^"^ pellere. — ^^ me- moria tenebat, held in memory, i. e., remembered. — '^ 737 (©sse understood, 504, a). — ^20 power of marching through, or permission to march throiigh facultas, 788, 1, from facil-is, facio.— 21 496. or THE BEADING L£ IVEESi;^; Homines inimico^^ animo ab mjunsfe5& maleiicio non tem- perant. —^ — Caesar, quod memoria tenebat, L. Cassium consulem occi- sum, exercitum q u e ejus ab Helvetiis pulsum et sub jugum missum, concedendum non putabat ; n e q u e,^ homines inim- ico animo, data facultate per provinciam itineris faciendi, tem- peratures ab injuria"'^ et maleficio, existimabat. VII. Hujus legationis Divico princeps fuit. — Divico, bello Cassi- ano,^ dux Helvetiorum fuerat. — Is ita cum Caesare egit.^ — Hel- vetii in eam partem ibunt, atque ibi erunt, ubi Caesar constitu- ent.^ — Caesar veteris incommodi'* reminiscitur.^ — Caesar pristinae virtutis^ Helvetiorum reminiscitur. (Oblique Narration^ present time J) Is ita cum Caesare a g i t : '* iSi pacem populus Romanus cum Helvetiis fa ciat^^ in eam partem ituros^ atque ibi futuros^ Helvetios, ubi eos Ccesar constituerit atque esse voluerit ; sin bello per- sequi persevere t,^^ r eminiscatur^^ et veteris incommodi papuli Romani et pristince virtutis Helvetiorum. Hujus legationis Divico princeps fuit, qui bello Cassiano dux Helvetiorum fuerat. Is ita cum Ccesare egit (obi. narr., past time) : ''•Si pacem populus Romanus cum Helvetiis fa ceret, in eam partem ituros^ atque ibifuturos Helvetios, ubi Ccesar eos constituisset atque esse voluiss e t ; sin bello persequi per s ever ar et^ r eminiscer etur et veteris incommodi populi Romani et pristince virtutis Helvetiorum,'''' 22 722. — ^23 neque existimabat = nor did he think. — 24 outrage. 1 hi the Cassian war, i. e., in which Cassius had been the Homan gen- eral.--'2 He treated with Ccesar as follows.—^ 803, 1 ; subj. by 766.-4 in, commodum, disaster, in-f-commodus, 799, 5 ; con-f-modus, 799, 3, c ; geni- tive by 698, a, 2. — 5 rg+miniscor, stem of memini, meno. — ^ vir, gen., 698, a, 2.-7 Observe carefully the tenses in this and the following paragraph. ^8 If the Roman people will makepeace.—^ 484, a.— lo 542, *.— ^ 528, b. 348 READING LESSONS. His Caesar ita^^ respondet. — Caesari nihil dubitationis^^ datur.^^ — Legati Helvetii quasdam res commemoraverunt.^^ — Eas res Caesar in memoria tenet.^^ — Eo^'' Caesari minus dubitationis datur, quod eas res, quas legati Helvetii commemoraverunt, in memoria tenet. — Eas res graviter^^ fert.^^ — Eoe res non merito^o popiili Romani acciderunt.^^ — Eas res gi*aviter fert, quod non merito populi Romani acciderunt. — Eo^^ gravius fert, quo^ minus merito Populi Romani acciderunt. His Caesar ita respond et ^^ (oblique narration, present time) : '''' Eo sibi minus dubitationis dari, quod eas res, quas legati Helvetii commemoraverint, memoria ten eat : atque eo gravius ferre, quo minus merito populi Romani acciderint.^^ His Caesar ita respondit {oblique narration, past time) : "JEJo sibi minus ^bitationis dari, quod eas res, quas legati Helvetii commemorassent, memoria teniret : atque eo gravius ferre, quo minus merito populi Romani acci- dissent.''^ vm. Helvetii postSro die^ castra ex eo loco movent. — Idem^ Caesar facit. — Quas in partes^ hostes iter faciunt 1"^ — Equitatum^ omnem praemittit.6 — Hi videbunt, quas in partes hostes iter faciant.''' — Equitatus ex omni Provincia et iEduis atque eorum sociis coac- tus^ erat. — Hunc equitatum praemittit, qui videant,^ quas in partes hostes iter faciant.'' — Hi cupidius^o novissimum" agmen inseqUuntur.12 — Cum equitatu Helvetiorum prcelium commit- 13 as follows.— ^^ 788, 3, dubitare (dubitat-).— ^4 2^0 Ceesar nothing of doubt is given ■= Cessar has no doubt. — ^^ con + memorare (memor). — 16 holds in memory, 1. e., remembers. — '7 Qn this account Cessar has less doubt, because. — ^^ 215, 2, a. — 19 ferre graviter=^o bear heavily, to be in- dignant at. — 20 716. — ii accidere = ad+cadere, 803, 1, to happen. — 22 ^y so much. — ^23 ly how much. — 24 Observe the moods and tenses carefully in this and the following paragraph oi oblique narration. 1 725.-2 150.--3 Into what parts (of the country) ?— •* 765.-5 Equitare (equitat-), 789. — 6 795^ s. — '' 766. — ^ had been collected; cogere = con+ag- ere. — ^ who tnay see, i. e., to see, 761, 1. — JO iqq eagerly, adv., 376. — ^^ novis- simum agmen = the newest rank, i. e., the rear rank. — 12 in-f-sequi. READING LESSONS. 349 tunt. — Alieno^3 Jqco proelium committunt. — Pauci de nostris cadunt. Postero die casti'a ex eo loco movent: idem Caesar facit; equitatumque omnem ad numerum quattuor millium, q u e m ex omni provincia et ^duis atque eorum sociis coactum h a b e b a t, praemittit, qui videant quas in partes hostes iter faci- ant. — Qui, cupidius novissimum agmen insecuti/^ alieno loco cum equitatu Helvetiorum proelium committunt, et pauci de nostris cadunt. Hoc proelio sublati^^ sunt Helvetii. — Quingentis equitibus tantam multitudinem equitum propulerant.^^ — Audacius^^ sub- sistere^^ coeperunt. — Nonnunquam^^ et^o proelio^i nostros laces- sere coeperunt. — Caesar sues a proelio continebat.^^ — Hostera rapinis,23 pabulationibusque prohibere^^ volebat. — Hoc satis habebat in praesentia.^^ Quo proelio sublati Helvetii, quod quingentis equitibus tantam multitudinem equitum propulerant, audacius subsistere, nonnunquam et novissimo agmine proelio nosti'os lacessere coep- erunt. — Caesar sues a proelio continebat, ac satis habebat in praesentia hostem rapinis pabulationibusque^^ prohibere. IX. Multa^ ant^hac tacuei-at^ Liscus. — Haec oratione^ Caesaris adductus proponit^. — Sunt nonnulli,^ quorum auctoritas apud plebem plurimum^ valet. — Hi privatim^ plus possunt^ quam ipsi 13 In a place not their own, i. e., on disadvantageous ground. — i* 451, c. — 16 sub+latus, irreg. perf. of tollere : tlie Helvetians were elated. — 16 tJi^y Jiad driven off, pro+pellere. — '^'^ 376. — is to halt, sub-f-sistere ; inf., 731. — 19 non -f-nunquam, not never, i. e., sometimes. — ^20 also. — 21 },y an assault. — 22 to hold together, i. e., to restrain. — 23 721, from plunder and from foraging parties. — ^24 pro+habere. — 25 ace pi. of praesens ; in prsesentia (tempora), for the present. — ^26 517^ a. 1 Many things, before this, Liscus had kept secret. — 2 tacere, intrant = to be silent ; trans = to keep secret.—^ 788, 3, orare (orat). — ^^ pro+ponere, to set before, to relate. — ^ non+nullus, not none, i. e., some. — 6 plurimum valet = avails very much (has very great weight). — "^ 215, 3. — ^ pj^g pos- sunt = can more, i. e., have more power. ^ Gg 350 READING LESSONS,: magistratus.9 — Hi seditiosa^° atque improba^^ oratione multitu- dinem deterrent.^^ — Frumentum non conferunt.^^ — Hi multitu- dinem deteiTent, ne frumentum conferant.^* — Ipsi quidem prin- cipatum Galliae obtinere non possunt. — Satius^^ est Gallorum quam Romanorum imperia perferre.^^ Si Helvetios superaverint^^ Romani, una^^ cum reliqua Gallia jEduis libertatem eripient.^^ — Dubitare non debent, quin Roma- ni iEduis libertatem sint erepturi.^^ — Satius est si jam principa- tum Galliae obtinere non possint, Gallorum quam Romanorum imperia perferre. Tum demum Liscus,^^ oratione CsBsaris adductus, quod antea tacuerat proponit. — {Oratio obliqua) : *' Esse nonnullos, quorum auctoritas apud plebem plurimum valeat; qui privatim plus possint quam ipsi magistratus ; h o s seditiosa atque improba oratione multitudinem deterrere, ne frumentum conferant, quod prgestare debeant. Si jam principatum Galliae obtinere non possint, Gallorum quam Romanorum imperia perferre satius esse, n e q u e dubitare debere, quin si Helvetios super- averint Romani, una cum reliqua Gallia -^duis libertatem sint erepturi." X. Hac oratione Lisci, Dumnorix, Divitiaci frater, designabatur.^ — Id Caesar sentiebat.^ — Pluribus praesentibus^ eas res jactari'* nolebat. — Celeriter^ concilium dimittit ; Liscum retinet. — Quaerit,^ ex solo,'' ea quae in conventu^ dixerat. — Dicit liberius^ atque audacius.^ — Eadem secreto^*^ ab aliis quaerit. — Reperit" esse vera. fl The magistrates themselves. — 1° 791, 9 (seditio). — ^^ in+probus, 799, 5. — 12 de+terr6re. — ^^ con+ferre, contribute. — ^* ne conferant, that they may not cotUribute, i. e., deter them, from contributing, 548, b. — ^^ Satius, com- 'par. of satis, 376: it is better. — 16 per + ferre, to endure. — ^"^ 542, b, 2.-^- 18 they will wrest liberty from the ^duans, together with the rest of Gaul. — 19 e+raper6, 803, 1.— 20 754, 4.— 21 Then, finally (then, and not till then). 1 was alluded to, de+signare. — ^ ^as aware of. — ^ 750, many being present, i. e., in the presence of many. — ^ 794, 2, a; from j acio (jact-) : jactare = to toss to and fro ; hence, to discuss. — ^ 215, 2. — ^ He inquires into. — 7 ex solo = of him alont.-"^ 789.—^ 376.^-i9 priviftely."^^ He finds (the statements J are true. BEADING LESSONS. 351 Ipse est Dumnorix/^ summa audacia,^^ magna apud plebem propter liberalitatem gratia/'' cupidus rerum^^ novarura. — Com- plures annos^^ portoria^^ reliquaque omnia iEduorum vectigalia habet. — Haec vectigalia parvo pretio^^ redemta sunt.^^ — Vecti- galia^o parvo pretio redemta habet, propterea quod, illo^^ licente,^"^ contra liceri^^ audet nemo. — His rebus suam rem familiSrem auxit. — His rebus facultates^^ ad largiendum^^ magnas compar- avit. — Magnum numerum equitatus suo sumptu^ semper alit.— Magnum numerum equitatus semper circum se habet.— Nod solum domi,27 sed etiam apud finitimas civitates largiter^^ potest. Caesar hac oratione Lisci Dumnorigem, Divitiaci fratrem, designari sentiebat : sed, quod pluribus praesentibus eas res jactari nolebat, celeriter concilium dimittit, Liscum retinet: quaerit, ex solo, ea quae in conventu dixerat. Dicit liberius atque audacius. Eadem secrete ab aliis quaerit ; reperit esse vera : " Ipsum esse Dumnorigem, summa audacia, magna apud plebem propter liberalitatem gratia, cupidum rerum novarum : complures annos portoria reliquaque omnia ^duorum vectigalia parvo pretio redemta habere, propterea quod illo licente contra liceri audeat nemo. His rebus e t suam rem familiarem aux- isse, et facultates ad largiendum magnas comparasse : magnum numerum equitatus suo sumtu semper alere et circum se habere : n e q u e solum domi, sed etiam apud finitimas civitates kurgiter posse." XL Ad has suspiciones certissimae res^ accedebant. — Dumnorix per fines Sequanorum Helvetios ti-ansduxerat.^ — Obsides inter eos dandos^ curaverat. — Ea omnia jussu^ Caesaris fecerat. — Ea 12 Dumnorix is ihe very person, (a man) of the highest audacity, &c. — 13 722. — 1* influence. — ^^ 698, b. — ^^ 712. — f'' transit duties, custom duties. — ^18 719. — 19 Iff ere contracted for. — 20 vectigalia . . . habet, he holds the taxes contracted for at a low price ; i. e., holds them under a very favour- able contract. — 21 456, a, when he bids. — ^22 Hceor, liceri, to bid. — 23 731. — ^24 Means for making- largesses. — ^25 489.— ize gao sumptu, at his own expense. Sumptus, 789, from samere. — 27 726, R., at home. — 28 largiter potest, he can largely, i. e., he has extensive power. 1 certissimae res = most certain (or undoubted) facts. — accedebant = were added ; ad+cedere, intransitive. — 2 trans+ducere. — 3 504, a. — * 789 ; from jubere (juss-) : by the command, 716. 352 READING LESSONS. omnia injussu^ Caesaris et^ civitatis fecerat. — Ea omnia inscien- tibus ipsis^ fecerat. — Ea omnia n o n m o d o injussu Caesaris et civitatis, sed etiam inscientibus ipsis fecerat. — A magistratu^ ^duorum accusabatur. — Satis est caussse,^ quare in eum ani- madvertat.^o — Satis est caussae, quare in eum civitatem animad- vertSre jubeat. — Satis erat caussae, quare in eum aut ipse ani- madverteret, aut civitatem animadvertere juberet. — Satis esse^^ caussae arbiti'abatur. Quibus rebus cogniti s,^^ q u u m ^^ ad has suspiciones certissimae res accederent — quod per fines Sequanorum Hel- vetios transduxisset^* — q u o d obsides inter eos dandos curasset — quod ea omnia non modo injussu suo et civitatis, sed etiam inscientibus ipsis, fecisset — q u o d a magisti-atu JEduorum accu- saretur; satis esse caussae arbitrabatur, quare in eum aut ipse animadvertere t, aut civitatem animadvertere juberet. His omnibus rebus^^ unum repugnabat.^^ — Divitiaci fratris^^ summum in populum Romanum studium^^ cognoverat Caesar. — Divitiaci summam in se voluntatem cognoverat. — Divitiaci egregiam fidem, justitiam,^^ temperantiam,^^ cognoverat. — Dum- norigis supplicio^o Divitiaci animum offendet. — Ne^^ Divitiaci animum oflfendat, veretur.^ — Ne^^ Divitiaci animum offenderet, verebatur. His omnibus rebus unum repugnabat, quod Divitiaci fratris summum in populum Romanum studium, summam in se vol- untatem, egregiam fidem, justitiam, temperantiam cognoverat : nam ne ejus supplicio Divitiaci animum offenderet, verebatur. 5 vnthout the command ; in+jussu. — ^ The English idiom demands or instead of and : without the command of Ccesar or the state. — ' themselves not knoioing it, i. e., without the knowledge of Coesar and the jEduan government. — » By a magistrate, 93, II., b. — ^ 697, h. — ^o in eum animad- vertere, to animadvert upon him, i. e., to punish him. — ^^ 751, R. 2.— 12 Ctuibus rebus cognitis = Which things being known by inquiry, i. e., after he had inquired into these things. — ^3 Since (seeing that), 757, A, b. — 14 transduxisset, curasset, &c., are subjunctives, because they express, not Caesar's own sentiments or knowledge, but what he had heard from others : certissimce res accederent. — ^^ 704, To all these considerations one (thing) opposed itself. — ^^ re+pugnare. — ^'' Of his brother Divitiacus, i. e., the brother of Dumnorix. — ^^ zeal. — 19 785, 2. — 20 ;gy ^Jiq punishment of Dumnorix he will hurt the feelings of Divitiacus. — 21 veretur ne . . .lie. fears that he shall. — 22 verebatur ne . . . he feared that he should. BEADING LESSONS. 353 XII. Caesar graviter^ in^ Dtimnorigem statuet. — Divitiacus Csesa- rem complectitur. — Divitiacus multis^ cum lacrymis Caesar em complectitur. — Obsecrare incipit ne^ quid gravius^ in^ fratrem statuat. — Scit Divitiacus ilia esse vera. — Nemo ex eo^ plus quam Divitiacus doloris"^ capit. — Divitiacus gratia^ plurimum domi atque in reliqua Gallia poterat. — Dumnorix minimum^ propter adolescentiam poterat. — Dumnorix per Divitiacum crevit.^° — His opibus^^ ac neiTis^^ ad minuendam'^ gratiam Divit- iaci utitur. — His opibus ad perniciem^* Divitiaci utitm\ — Qui- bus opibus ac nei*vis non solum ad minuendam gratiam, sed pene ad perniciem Divitiaci utitur. — Divitiacus tamen et^^ amore fraterno et existimatione^^ vulgi commovetur.^^ — Divit- iacus summum locum amicitiae apud Caesarem tenet. — Nemo existimabit non ejus voluntate factum.^^ — Ex hac re totius Gal- liae animi a Divitiaco avertentur.^^ {Direct Narration^ Present Time.^^) Scit Divitiacus ilia esse vera, nee quisquam ex eo plus quam ipse doloris capit, propter ea quod, quum ipse gratia plurimum domi atque in reliqua Gallia, ille minimum propter adolescentiam posset, per se crevit ; quibus opibus ac nervis non solum ad minuendam gratiam, sed pene ad perniciem ipsius utitur. Divitiacus tamen et amore fraterno et existimatione vulgi commovetur, quod, si 21 quid fratri a Csesare acciderit, quum 22 ipse t a 1 e m locum amicitiae apud eum teneat, nemo existimabit non 1 graviter statuet = will decide severtly. — ^ against. — ^ 89, II. — ^ 548, a. s quid gravius = anything more severe (than usual) : anything at all se- vere. — ^ from him, i. e., Dumnorix. — ^ plus doloris, more pain, 697. — » by his influence (popularity). — ^ minimum ipoterat = had very little power. — 10 crescere: grew (in power). — ^^ resources. — ^^ sineios, abl. by 716. — ^ 739, for diminishing the influence of Divitiacus. — ^^ 790, 1. — ^^ 517, c. — 16 existimare, 788, 3 : existimatione vulgi = &y the opinion of the public. — 17 con+movere ; commovetur = is strongly mxyved. — 1^ No one will think it was not done with his (Divitiacus's) consent. — 19 a+vertere : the affec- tions of all Gaul will be turned away from him.—^^ Observe carefully the moods and tenses in the following paragraphs of direct and oblique narration.— 21 if anything happen to his brother from Cassar.—^^ quum ipse teneat, seeing thai he himself holds. Gg2 354 READING LESSONS. ejus voluntate factum; qua ex re fiet^ uti totius Gallise animi ab eo avertantur.^* {Direct Narration^ Past Time,) Sciebat Divitiacus ilia esse vera, nee quisquam ex eo plus quam ipse doloris capiebat, prop- terea quod, quum ipse gratia plurimum domi atque in reliqua Gallia, ille minimum propter adolescentiam posset, per se crev- ^rat; quibus opibus ac nervis non solum ad minuendam grati- am, sed pssne ad perniciem ipsius utebatur. Divitiacus tamen et amore fraterno et existimatione vulgi commovebatur, quod si quid fratri a Caesare gi'avius accidisset, quum ipse talem locum amicitiae apud eum teneret, nemo erat existimaturus non ejus voluntate factum, qua ex re futurum erat uti totius Galliae animi ab eo averterentur. Divitiacus, multis cum lacrymis Caesarem complexus obse- crare incipit {oblique narration^ present time), **Ne quid gravius in fratrem statuat ; scire se, ilia esse vera, nee quemquam ex eo plus quam se doloris capere, propterea quod, quum ipse gratia plurimum domi atque in reliqua Gallia, ille minimum propter adolescentiam posset, per se crev^rit ; quibus opibus ac nervis non solum ad minuendam gratiam, sed pgene ad perniciem suam utatur : sese tamen et amore fraterno et existimatione vulgi commoveri, quod, si quid ei gravius a Caesare accident, quum ipse eum locum amicitiae apud eum teneat, neminem existima- turum non sua voluntate factum ; qua ex re futurum uti totius Galliae animi a se avertantur." Divitiacus multis cum lacrymis, Caesarem complexus, obse- crare coepit {oblique narration, past time), *' Ne quid gravius in fratrem statueret; scire se, ilia esse vera, nee quemquam ex 60 plus quam se doloris capere, propterea quod, quum ipse gratia plurimum domi atque in reliqua Gallia, ille minimum propter adolescentiam posset, per se crevisset; quibus opibus ac nervis non solum ad minuendam gratiam, sed paene ad per- niciem suam uteretur : sese tamen et amore fraterno et exist- imatione vulgi commoveri, quod si quid ei a Caesare gravius accidisset, quum ipse eum locum amicitiae apud eum teneret, neminem existimaturum non sua voluntate factum ; qua ex re futurum, uti totius Galliae animi a se averterentur." 23 from which thing it wiU result. — s4 754, 2. LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. t^^ The nmnbers refer to paragraphs. In verbs, the perfect and su- pine-stems are placed in brackets, immediately after the infinitive end- ings. The declensions of nouns may be known by the genitive endings ; the conjugations of verbs by the infinitive endings. A, ab, abs, prep, with abl., hy,from. Abesse (abfu-, ab+esse), to be away from, to be distant, to be absent. Abrog-are (av-, at-), to abrogate. Abstin-ere (abstinu-, abstent-, abs4- tenere), to abstain from (with abl.). Abund-are fav-, at-), to abound (with abl.). Ac, conj., and, as well as. Acced-ere (acced-, access-, ad-f-ced- ere, 401, 3), to approach. Accid-Sre (accid-, ad + cadere), to Accidit, impers., 583, it happens. Accip-ere (io, accep-, accept-, 666, v., b), to receive: accep tus erat, he was popular, or acceptable. Accurr-ere (accurr-, and accucurr-, accurs-, ad+currere), to run to, to run up to. Accus-are (av-, at-), to accuse. Acer, acris, acre, 105, R. 1, sharp, Acerrime (superl. of acriter), very spiritedly. Acies, ei, line of battle. Acriter, adv., 217, sharply, spirit- edly. Acut-us, a, um, sharp, acvie. Ad, prep, with accus., to, near. Add-ere (addid-, addit-, ad + dare, 411, c), to add. Adduc-ere (addux-, adduct-), to lead to, induce. Adeo, adv., to this point, to such a Adesse (adfu-, ad+esse), to be pres- ent (with dat). Adhib-ere (adhibu-, adhibit-, ad-f-ha- bere), to apply, employ, admit. Adhort-ari (at-), dep., to exhort. Adjung-ere (adjunx-, adjunct-), to join to. Adjuv-are (adjuv-, adjut-), to assist, Admddum, adv., very. Admon-ere (admonu-, admonit-), to advise, admmiish. Adolescens, (adolescent) is, young man. Adolescenti-a, se, youth. Ador-are (av-, at-), to adore, worship. Advent-us, us, approach. Adversus, or adversum, prep, with accus., against, towards. ^dific-are (av-, at-), to build. jEdifici-um, i, building. jEda-us, i, jEduan (people of Gaul). ^gens, (aegentj is, 107, poor. M^er, gra, grum, sick. -^gritudo, (oegritudin) is, 339, sor^ ro^u, affliction, sickness. ^grot-are (av-, at-), to be sick. jE gyp tus, i, f, 25, a, ^gypt. iEquor, (aequ6r) is, 327, sea. .fistas, (eestftt) is, 293, summer. 358 LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. -ffitas, (aetat) is, 293, age, time of life. ^temitas, (aetemitat) is, 293, eter- nity. iEtem-us, a, um, eternal; in OBter- ivaxQ., forever. AiFectio, (affection) is, 293, affection. Afferre (attul-, allat-, ad+ferre), to hririg, bring to, adduce. Affic-ere (affec-, affect-, ad+facere), to affect, move, infiuence. Afric-a, ae, Africa. Africau-us, i, Africanus. Ager, gri, 64, field. Ag-ere (eg-, act-), to do, act, drive ; to treat (as an ambassador). Agmen, (agmin) is, 344, a, army on march, or in marching order ; no- vis simum agmen, the rear. Agn-us, i, lamh. Agricol-a, se, m., husbandman. Agricultur-a, ee, agriculture. Agripp-a, ae, Agrippa. Aio, 609, I say, say yes, affirm. Al-a, ae, wing. Al-ere (alu-, alt-), to nourish, sup- port, maintain. Alexander, -dri, Alexander. Alien-us, a, um, foreign, belonging to another. Aliquando, at some time, some day, at last. Aliquant-us, a, um, 184, somewhat great ; aliquantum agri, a pretty large piece of ground. Aliquis, quae, quid (quod), 178, 5, some one, something ; aliquid novi, something new, 180. Aliter, otherwise. Ali-us, a, ud, gen. alius, &c., 194, R. 1, other, another, [of Gaul. Allobroges, um, AUobroges, people Allu-ere (allu-), to wash. Alpes, ium, Alps, mountains between Gaul and Italy. Alter, a, um, gen. ius, 194, R. 1, an- other, the second (in a sferiei). Alt-US, a, um, high, lofty, de^; at tum, i, the deep, the sea. Amabilis, is, e, 104, amiable. Am-are (av-, at-), to love. Ambo, ae, o, both. Ambul-are (av-, at-), to walk, Amiciti-a, ae, friendship. Amic-us, i, friend. Amitt-ere (amis-, amiss-), to lose. Ample, adv., largely. Amplius, comp. of ample, morCj lar* j ger, greater than. Ancill-a, ae, maid-servant. Angli-a, ae, England. Angusti-ae, arum, defiles, 57, R. Angust-us, a, um, narrow. Animadvert-Sre (veft-, vers-), ani- mum+ad+vertere), to turn the mind to, to observe ; with in, t-o punish ; Caesar in Dumnorigem animadvertit, Ccesar punishes Dumnorix. Animal, (animal) is, 325, animal. Animans, (animant) is, living ; as noun, a living being. Anim-us, i, soul, mind. Ann-us, i, year. Anser, (anser) is, 319, goose. Ante, prep, with accus., before. Antehac, adv., before, before this. Antepon-6re (posu-, posit-), to place before, to prefer. Antonin-us, i, Antonine. Antoni-us, i, Antony. Aper-ire (aperu-, apert-, 427, II.), to open. Apert-us, a, um, open. Apis, (Ap-) is. Apis, Egyptian deity. Appell-are (av-, at-), to call, name. Aprilis, is (sc. mensis), m., 25, a, April. [proach. Appropinqu-are (av-, at-), to ap- Apud, prep, with accus., among; apud te, with you (at your house) ; apud Ciceronem, in Cicero {i. e., his writings). LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULAKY. 359 Aqa-a, 8e, water. Aquil-a, ae, eagle. Aquitan-us, i, AquUanian (people oS. Gaul). Arar, (ArSr) is^ the SaoTie (river of Gaul). Ar-are (av-, at-), to plough. Arbitr-ari (at-), dep., to judge, think. Arbor, (arbor) is, f., tree. Arcess-ere (arcessiv-, arcessit-), to send for. Arethus-a, ae, Arethusa. Argent-um, i, silver. Arid-um, i, the sand (neuter of ari- dus, a, um, dry). Ariovist-us, i, Ariovistus, a German chieftain. Aristides, (Aristid-) is, Aristides. Anna, orum, arms. Arm-are (av-, at-), to arm. Arrip-ere (axripu-, arrept-, ad-f-rap- ere), to snatch up, to seize. Arroganti-a, ae, haughtiness, obsti- nacy, arrogance. Ars, (art) is, 293, art. Asper, a, um, rough. At, conj., but. Athenae, arum, Athene. Atheniensis, is, an Athenian. Atque, conj., and. Atrox, (atrdc) is, 107, Jierce, Attent-e, adv., attentively. Attent-us, a, um, attentive. Attic-a, ae, Attica. Atting-ere (attig-, attact-), to touch on, border upon. Auctoritas, (auctoritat) is, 293, au- tlwrity, influence. Audacius, comp. of audacter, 376, vnore boldly. Audacter, adv., boldly. Aud-ere (ausus sum), to dare. Aud-Ire (audiv-, audit-), to hear. Aug-ere (aux-, auct-), to increase. August-US, i, Augustus. Aur-um, i, gold. Aut, conj., or. Autem, conj., 315, but, moreover, also. Auxili-um, i, assistance ; auxilia, pL, auxiliary troops. Avar-US, i, avaricious. Avert-ere (avert-, avers-), to turn Avien-us, i, Avienus. Avis, (av) is, 300, bird. B. Barbar-us, a, um, barbarian, for* eign ; used as a noun, a barba- rian. Beat-us, a, um, happy. Beat-e, 215, 1, happily. Belg-a, as, a Belgian, people of GanL Bell-are (av-, at-), to wage war, Bellicos-us, a, um, warlike, Bell-um, i, war. Bene, adv., well, 215, 1, R. Benefici-um, i, good deed, act of kindness. Benign-US, a, um, kind, with dat. Besti-a, ae, beast, brute. Bib-6re (bib-, bibit-), to drink. Bienni-um, i, s'pace of two years. Bini, ae, a, dist., 189, two apiece, two at a time. Bis, 189, twice. Bonitas, (bonitat) is, 293, goodness, Bon-US, a, um, good ; bona, neut. pi., blessings, advantages. Bos, bovis, 351, 2, ox or cow, Brevis, is, e, 104, short, Britanni-a, 88, Britain. Britann-us, i, a Briton. Brut-US, i, Brutus. C. Cad-ere (cecid-, cas-, 411, b), to fall, Cadm-us, i, Cadmus. Caduc-us, a, uoa, frail. Caed-gre (cecid-, cees-, 411, b), tofeU, kill, cut dow7i. Coesar, (Caesar) is, Ccssar. S60 LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. Cains, i, Caius. Calamitas, (calamitat) is, calamity. Calcar, (calcar) is, 325, spur. Camp-US, i, field, plain. Can-is, (can) is, c, dog. Cant-are (av-, at-), to sing. Cant-US, ijs, singing. Cap-ere (cep-, capt-), to take. Captiv-us, i, captive, prisoner. Car-ere (caru-, 398), to want, with abl. Carmen, (carmin) is, 344, a, song. Caro, (cam) is, 340, K.,Jlesh. Carthaginiensis, is, a Carthagin- ian. Carthago, (Carthagin) is, Carthage. Carr-us, i, wagon. Car-US, a, um, dear. Cassi-us, i, Cassius. Castell-um, i, fortress, tower. Castic-us, i, Casticus. Casti'a, orum, camp. Cas-us, us, accident, chance. Catamentales, edis, Catamentales, proper name. Catilin-a, se, Catiline, proper name. Cato, (Caton) is, Cato. Caus-a, ae, cause, reason; abl., causa, for the sake of, 135, II., h ; salutis causa, /or the sake of safety. Caut-us, a, um, cautious. Celebr-are (av-, at-), to celebrate. Celer, (celer) is, 107, swift. Celeriter, adv., 215, 2, b, swiftly. Celta, ae, a Celt, people of Gaul. Centum, indecl., a hundred. Cens-ere. (censu-, cens-), to think, judge, believe. Centurio, (centurion) is, centurion. Cem-6re (crev-, cret-), to separate, decide, judge. Cert-us, a, um, certain; certiorem facere, to make more certain, i. e., to inform. Cerv-us, i, stag. Ceteri, orum, the rest. Christ-us, i, Christ. Cicero, (Ciceron) is, Cicero. Cing-ere (cinx-, cinct-), to gird, sur- round. Circa, prep, with ace, about, around. Circiter, prep, with ace, about, near; circiter viginti, about twenty. Circum, prep, with accus., about, around. Circumst-are [or circumsistere), cir- cumstet-, 391, 1, to surround, to stand about. Cito, adv., quickly. Cit-us, a, um, quick, swift. Civis, (civ) is, c, citizen. Civitas, (civitat) is, 293, stffie. Clamor, (clamor) is, 319, noise, clam- our. Clar-us, a, um, illustrious. Classis, (class-) is, 300, fleet. Claud-ere (claus-, claus-), to shut. Cliens, (client) is, m., a dependant. Coel-um, \,firmamenti heaven. Coem-6re (coem-, coempt-), to buy up (con+emere). CcBn-are (av-, at-), to sup. CcEpi, used only in perf. tenses, / begin, 611. Cog-ere (coeg-, coact-), to bring to- gether, collect, compel. Cogit-are (av-, at-), to think. Cognosc-ere (cognov-, cognit-), to learn, find out, know. Cohors, (cohort) is, 293, cohort, the tenth part of a legion. Cohort-ari (at-), dep., to encourage. Col-6re (colu-, cult-), to cultivate, serve, hon^our. Collig-6re (colleg-, collect-, con+le- gere), to collect. Collis, (coll) is, m., 302, R., Ull. CoUoc-are (av-, at-), to place. CoUoqui-um, i, conference. Color, (color) is, 319, colour. Columb-a, ae, dove. [bum up. Combur-6re (combusiJ-, combust-), to LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 361 Comes, (comit) is, c, companion, Comme-are (av-, at-), to go to, to go and return. Commemor-are (av-, at-), to mention, to call to mind, Committ-Sre (commis-, commiss-), to intrust to, with dative; praelium committere, to join battle. Commov-ere (commOv-, commot-), to move greatly, to excite. Commun-ire (£v-. It-), to fortify, Commiinis, is, e, 104, common. Commut-are (av-, at-), to change. Commutatio, ( comnratation ) is, Compar-are (av-, at-), to get together, procure, Compell-6re (compul-, compuls-, con +pellere), to §0nipel, drive on. Comper-ire (comper-, compert-, 427, v.), to find out, discover. Complect-i (complex-), dep., to em- brace. Compl-ere (complev-, complet-, 395, n.), to^ll up. Complures, ium, 327, very many. Con-ari (at-), to attempt, try. Conat-um, i, attempt. Conced-ere (concess-, concess-), to yield to, to grant, give way. Concess-us, us, grant. Concili-are (av-, at-), to gain (for an- other). Concili-um, i, assembly, council. Concit-are fav-, at-), to stir up, to excite. Concupisc-ere (concupiv-), to desire. ConcTirr-ere (concurr-, concurs-), to Condemn-fire (av-, at-), to condemn, 348. Conditio, (condition) is, 333, R., con- dition. Conditor, (conditor) is, builder,found- ef. [lead or bring together. Conduc-€re (condux-, conduct), to H Conferre (contul-, coUat-), to bring together, contribute, Confic-ere (confec-, confect-), to jin>' ish. Confid-Sre (confid-, confis-), to trust to, to confide in. Confirm-are (av-, at-), to confirm, es- tablish, affirm, fix. Conflu-Sre (conflux-, conflux-), tojlo'ds together. Congreg-are (av-, at-), to gdther into flocks. Congress-US, us, meeting. Conjic-ere (conjee-, conject-, con-f-ja- cere, 416), to hurl. Conjung-ere (conjunx-, conjunct-), to join together, unite. Conjur-are (av-, at-), to conspire, plot. Conjuratio, (conjuration) is, 333, R., conspiracy. Conjux, (conjug) is, c, husband or wife. Conscend-ere (conscend-, conscens-, con+scandere, 309), to climb up. Conscisc-ere (consciv-, conscit-), to decree, determine ; mortem sibi consciscere, to commit suicide, 555. Consci-us, a, um, conscious, privy to. Conscrib-ere (conscrips-, conscript-), to enrol, levy. Consent-ire (consens-, consens-), to agree. Consid-gre (consed-, consess-), to sit doion, to encamp. Consili-um, i, plan, judgment, coun- sel, deliberation. Consist-6re (constit-, constit-), to stand, halt. Conspect-us, us, sight, beholding. Conspic-ere (conspex-, conspect-), to see, get sight of Const-are (stit-, stit- or stat-), to stand together, to halt. Constitu-6re ( constitu-, constittHr; H 362 LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. con+statuere), to place, Jix, ap- point. Consaesc-6re (consuev-, cousaet-), to be accustomed. Consuetude, (consuetudin) is, 339, cttstom, usa§^e. Consul, (consul) is, consul^ chief ma- gistrate of Rome. Consul-€re (consulu-, consult-), to coiisuU. Consult-um, i, decree. Consum-6re (consumps-, consumpt-, con-f-sumere), to consume. Contemn-6re (contemps-, contempt-), to despise. Contempl-ari (at-), dep., to contem- plate, Contend-€re (contend-, content-), to contend, strive after, hasten. Content-US, a, um, content, with abl. Contin-ere (continu-, content-, con+ tenere), to contain, restrain, hold together. Continens, (continent) is, 107, suc- cessive, continued. Continenter, 215, 2, b, continually. Contingit, impers., 580, it happens. Continuatio, (continuation) is, 333, R., continuance. Contra, prep, with accus., against ; adv., in opposition to. Contrah-6re (contrax-, contract-, con +trahere), to draw together, col- lect. Conv6n-ire (convfin-, convent-, con+ venire), to come together, meet, agree. Convent-u8, As, meeting, assembly. Convert-6re (convert-, convers-), to turn completely round. Convoc-ftre (av-, at-, con+vocare), to call together. Coor-iri (coort-), dep., to rise, ai a storm. Copi-a, 89, abundance ; pi., coj^ias, anim, troops, forces. Cor, (cord) is, n., heart. Coriutli-us, i, f., Corinth. Coruiger, a, um, homed. Com-u, 111, horn, wing of an army* Corona, bb, crown. Corpus, (corp6r) is, 344, J, body. Corrig-€re (correx-, correct-, con-f- regere), to correct, make straight, Corv-us, i, crow. Cras, adv., to-morrow. Crass-US, i, Crassus. Cre-are (av-, at-), to create. Creber, bra, hmm, frequ,ent. Cred-€re (credid-, credit-), to believe, intrust, with dat. Crep-are (crepu-, crepit-, 387, II.), to chide, creak (as a door). Cresc-6re (crev-, cr6t-), to groiv. Crimen, (crkniii) is, 344, a, crime, Crus, (crur) is, n., leg. Cubicul-um, i, bed-cliamber. Cubile, (cubil) is, 314, bed, ptacf. to lie down. Culmen, (culmin) is, 344, a, top, sum- mit. Culpa, m, fault. Cultus, us (from colere), cultivation, civilization, refinement. Cum, prep, with abl., with; cum, conj., same as quum, when. Cunct-ari (at-), dep., to delay. Cunct-us, a, um, all, the whole. Cup-€re (io, 199, cupiv-, cupit-), to desire. Cupids, adv., with desire, 215, 1 (cu« j pidus). Cupiditas, (cupiditat) is, 293, desire. Cupid-US, a, um (with geo.), desk- rous, eager. Cflr, adv., why. Cor-a, SB, care. \ Cur-ftre (av-, at-), to take care, to see that. Cnri-a, 8B, senate-Xouse, Curr-€re (caoQns oari-, 411, a), to run. LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 863 Cars-US, us, course, running. Gustos, (custod) is, 25, a, guard, guardian. Cyrus, i, Cyrus. D. Danubi-us, i, Danube (river). D-ire (ded-, dat-), to give. Dari-us, i, Darius, Persian king. De, prep, with abl., of, from, con- cerning. De tertia vigilia, in {about, or after) the third watch. Deb-ere (debu-, debit-), to owe — ought. Deced-6re (decess-, decess-, de+ce- dere), to go away, depart, retire. Decern, indecl., ten. Decem-6re (decrev-, decret-, 407), decree, determine.. Decert-ftre (av-, at-), to contend, fight. Decet, impers., 583, decuit, it is be- coming. Decim-us, a, um, tenth. Ded-6re (dedid-, dedit-), to surren- der. Deditio, (dedition) is, 333, R., sur- render. Deduc-6re (dedux-, deduct-), to lead away. De-esse (defu-, de+esse), to be want- ing (with dat.), to be away. Defend-6re (defend-, defens-), to de- fend. Defess-us, a, um (part, of defetisci, obsol.), wearied, worn out. Defic-6re (defec-, defect-, 'de + fa- cere), to fail, to be wanting, with dat. Belect-are (av-, at-), to delight. ' Del-ere (delev-, del6t-), to destroy. Deliber-ftre (av-, at-), to deliberate. Delig-6re (delSg-, delect-, de + le- gere), to choose. Demetri-us, i, Demetrius (proper name). Demum, s.dv., finally, at last. Denique, adv., at last, in short. Dens, (dent) is, m., 295, R. 1, tooth, • Dens-us, a, um, thick, dense. Depon-6re (deposu-, deposit-, de+ ponere), to lay aside, put down. Deser-6re (deseru-, desert-), to leave, desert. Desert-um, i, a desert. Desil-ire (desilu-, desult-, de+salire, 428), to leap down. Design-are (av-, at-), to point out, allude to. Desper-are (av-, at-, de+sperare), to Desperatio, (desperation) is, despair, Deterr-6re (deterru-, deterrit-), to de- ter, frighten from. Deus, i, God, 62, R. Dic-6re (dix-, diet-), to say, teU. Dictio, (diction) is, 333, R., speah* irig, pleading. Dies, ei, day. Differre (distul-, dilat-, dis+ferre), to differ, to put off. DiflScilis, is, e (dis+facilis), difficult, Dignitas, (dignitat) is, 293, dignity, rank. Dign-us, a, um, worthy, with abl. Diligens, (diligent) is, careful, dilu gent. Diiigenter, 215, 2, b, carefully, dili- Dilig-6re (dilex-, dilect-, di+legere), to love (with esteem). Dimitt-ere (dimis-, dimiss-, di+mit- tere), to send away, dismiss. Dirip-6re (diripu-, dirept-, di + ra- pere), to plunder. Disced-Sre (discess-, discess-, dis+ cedere, 401, 3, h), to go away, de* part. Disc-6re (didic-, 411, a), to learn, Discess-us, us, departure. Disciplin-a, ae, instruction, discipline* Discipul-us, i, scholar, pupil. 364- LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. Disert-us, a, um, jluent, eloquent. Displic-ere (displicu-, displicit-, dis +placere), to displease, with dat. Dispon-ere (disposu-, disposit-, dis+ ponere), to place in different di- rections, arrange, dispose. Disput-are (av-, at-), to dispute, dis- cuss. Dissent-ire (dissens-, dissens-, dis+ sentire, 427, III.)» to differ in opinion, dissent. Disser-6re (disseru-, dissert-, 407), to treat of, discuss. dissolv-ere (dissolv-, dissolat-, dis+ solvere), to dissolve. Dist-are, to be distant, or apart (di+ stare). Distribu-ere (distribu-, distribut-), to .divide or distribute among, 422. Ditissimus, superl. of dives. Diu, adv., long; compar., diutius, Divers-us, a, um, Dives, (divit) is, 371, R. 1, rich. Divico, (Divicon) is, Divico, proper name. Divid-ere (divis-, divis-), to divide. Divin-us, a, nm, divine. Divitiac-us, i, Divitiacus, proper name. Divitiae, arum, 57, R., riches, wealth. Doc-ere (docu-, doct-), to teach. Docilis, is, e, 104, docile, teachable. Dol-ere (dolu-, dolit-), to grieve. Dolor, (dolor) is, 319, grief , pain. Dol-us, \, fraud, deceit. Dom-are (domu-, domit-, 387, II.), to subdue. Domicili-um, i, dwelling. Domin-us, i, master ^ of house or slaves. Dom-us, i and us, 112, 3, house, home; domi, at hom£; domum, to one's house. Dorm -Ire (dormiv-, dormit-), to sleep. Draco, (dracdn) is, 331, dragon. Druides, um, Druids, priests of ttli* cient Britain. Dubit-are (av-, at-), to doubt, hesi- tate. Dubitatio, (dubitation) is, 333, R., doubt. Dubi-us, a, um, doubtful. Duc-ere (dux-, duct-), to lead. Duleis, is, e, 104, sweet. Dum, conj., while, so long as, until. Dumnorix, (Dumnorig) is, Dumjio* rix, proper name. Duo, two, 194. Duodecim, indecl., twelve. Duplic-are (av-, at-), to double. Dur-are (-av-, at-), ifitrans., to endure, last ; trans., to harden. Dur-us, a, um, hard. Dux, (due) is, leader, guide, com- mander. E. E or ex, prep. v?^ith abl., out of, from. Ecquis, interrog. pron., 178, 7, any onel Ed-6re, or eSse (ed-, es-, 601), to eat. E due-are (av-, at-), to train, educate. E duc-ere (edux-, educt-), to lead out. Effect-US, us, effect. Effemin-are (av-, at-, ei+feniina), fd effeminate, make womanish. Ego, /, 120. Egregi-us, a, um, excellent, remark able. Elegans, (elegant) is, 107, elegant. Eloquens, (eloquent) is, 107, do quent. Em-§re (em-, empt-), to buy. Emic-are (emicu-), 387, IL, to shine or flash forth. Enim, conj.,/ ter+facere), to slay, kill. Interim, adv^ in the mean while. Interitus, us, perishing, destruction, death. Interregn-um, i, interreign. Interrog-are (av-, at-), to ask, inter- rogate. Intu-eri (intuit-), dep., to look upon, Inven-ire (inven-, invent-), to find, discover. Invoc-are (av-, at-), to call upon, in- voke. Ipse, a, um, 159, self. Ir-a, 88, anger. Iracundi-a, ae, wrathfulness, wrath, ire (iv-, it-), 605, to go. Irrump-6re (irrup-, irrupt-, in+rum pere), to break into. Is, ea, id, this, that, he, she, it, 153. LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 369 Iste, a, nd, that, 157. Ita, adv., so, thus. Italia, ae, Italy. Iter, (itiner) is, n., journey, way, march. Jac-ere ( jec-, jact-), to cast, hurl. Jact-are (av-, at-), to discuss. Jacul-um, i, dart. Jam, adv., tiow, already. Jan-US, i, Janus. Jnb-ere ( juss-, juss-), to order. Jucund-us, a, um, pleasant. Judex, (judic) ia, 306, judge. Judic-are (av-, at-), to judge. Judici-um, i, trial, judgment. Jugurth-a, se, Jugurtha. Jug-um, i, yoke. Jument-um, i, beast of burden, Jung-ere ( junx-, junct-), to join. Juno, (Junon) is, f., Jvmo (goddess). Jupiter, Jovis, 351, Jupiter. Jura, ae, Jura (mountain east of Gaul). Jur-are (av-, at-), to swear. Jus, (jur) is, 344, law, right. Juss-us, us, command. Justiti-a, vB,jtLstice. Just-us, a, um, just. Juv-are ( juv-, jut), to help. Juvenis, is, a youth. Juventus, (juventut) is, 293, ymtth. Juxta, prep, with ace, n^ar. K. Kalend-ae, arum. Kalends. L. Labienus, i, Labienus, one of Cae- sar's lieutenant-generals. Labor, (labor) is, 319, labour, toil. Labor-are (av-, at-), to labour. Lac, (lact) is, 346, 2, milk. Lacess-6re (iv-, it-, 406, III., b), to provoke, harass. Lacrym-a, bb, tear. Lac-US, us, lake. Lapis, (lapid) is, 295, 3, stone. Larg-iri (it-), dep., to give largess, to bribe, 515. Larg-iter, adv., 215, 2, b, largely; largiter potest, h^ can largely, i. e., he is quite powerful. Lat-e, adv., 215, 1, widely (lat-us, wide). Latin-US, a, um, Latin. Latitudo, (latitudin) is, 340, breadth (from latus, broad). Latins, adv., more widely (compar of late, 376). Latro, (latron) is, 331, a, robber. Lat-us, a, um, broad, wide. Laud-are (av-, at), to praise. Laus, (laud) is, 293, praise. Legatio, (legation) is, 333, R., em- Legat-us, i, lieutenant, ambassador. Leg-6re (leg-, lect-, 416, a), to read. Legio, (legion) is, 333, R., legion. Lemann-us, i, Lake Leman, or Ge nexia. Leo, (leon) is, 333, lion. Lepus, (lepor) is, m., 345, 4, hare. Lev-are (av-, at-), to light&a,, all& mate. Lex, (leg-) is, 293, law. Libenter, adv., willingly, gladly. Liber, libri, 64, book. Liberalitas, (liberalitat) is, 293, lib Liber-e, 215, 1, freely (from liber, free). Liber-i, orum, 65, H., children. Liber-tas, (libertat) is, 293, freedom, liberty. Libet, 583, libebat, libuit, or libitum est, impers., it is agreeable, it pleases, it suits. Lic-eri (licit), dep., to bid money, to offer a price. Licet, licuit, licitum est, it is allow- ed, it is lawful, one must, 583. 370 LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. Lili-Tim, i, lily. Lingu-a, sb, language. Litter-a, se, a letter (as of the alpha- bet) ; litter-ae, arum (pi.), a letter, i. e., an epistle. Littus, (littor) is, 344, b, shore. Livi-us, i, Livy, a Roman historian. Loc-us, i and a, 309, place. Long-e, adv., 215, l,far, long : (long- us.) Longitude, (longitudin) is, 339, length: (longus.) Long-us, a, um, long. Loqu-i (locut-), dep., to speak. Lubet. See libet. Luct-us, us, grief. Lud-ere (lus-, Itis-, 401, 3, b), to play. Lnd-us, i, sport, gatne, pluy. Lnn-a, ae, moon. Lup-us, i, wolf. Lux, (luc) is, 293, light. M. Macul-are (av-, at-), to stadn. Magis, adv., more. Magister, tri (64), master, teacher. Magistrat-us, us, a magistrate. MagnanimHS, a, um (magn-us+ani- mus ), high-spirited, magnani- mous. Magnitude, (magnitudin) is (340), extent, greatness. Magnus, a, um, great ; comp., ma- jor, greater. Male, adv. (215, 1, R.), badly. Maleficium, i (800, 2), evil deed, crime. Malle (592), to be tnore willing, to prefer ; perf., malui. Malum, i, evil, misfortune. Man-ere (mans-, mans-), 665, III., to remain. Manus, us (f., 112, 2), hand, band of soldiers. Mare, (mar) is (314), sea. Massilia, se, Marseilles. Mater, (matr) is (f., 25, 2), mother, Matrimonium, i, matrimony. Matrona, se, the Mame, a river of Gaul. Matur-are (av-, at-), to hasten. Maxim-e (adv., 376), most, most greatly, i7i the highest degree. Maxim-us, a, um (sup. of magnus, 370), greatest. Me {ace. and abl. of ego, /), we; mecum, with me (125, II., b). Medicin-a, ae, medicine. Mediterrane-us, a, um, Mediterra- nean (medi-us+terr-a). Medi-us, a, um, middle. Meli-us, adv. (376), better. Memini (defect, 611), / remember; meminisse, to remember. Memori-a, as, memory ; memoria te- nere, to hold in memory, to re- member. Mens, (ment) is, f., mind. Mercator, (mercator) is (319), wcr- chant, Meridi-es, ei (m., 115), mid-day, noon. Merit-um, i, m,erit, desert. Metall-um, i, metal. Met-ere (messu-, mess-, 666, II., b), to reap. Met-iri (mens-), dep., to measure. Metu-ere (metu-, 666, VI., a), to fear. Me-us, a, um (122), my, mine. Mic-are (micu-, 664, II.), to glitter, shine. Migr-are (av-, at-), to migrate. Miles, (milit) is, soldier. Mille (sing. indecL, pi. miUia, ium), thousand. Minerv-a, ae, Minerva. Minim-us, a, um, least [superl. of parvus, 370). Minor (minus), 358, less (compar. of parvus, 370). Minu-gre (minu-, mindt-), to diminish. LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 371 Mirabil-is, is, e, wonderfuL I Miriiic-us, a, um, causing wonder, \ astonishing (mir-us+facere) . Miser, a, um (77, h), miserable, wretched. Miseret (impers., 579, a), one pities ; me miseret, I pity. Mitig"-are (av-, at-), to mitigate. Mitt-ere (mis-, miss-, 401, 3, b), to send. Mod-US, i, measure, manner. McBuia, ium (used only in pi.), walls. Moeror, (moeror) is (319), sadness. Mon-ere (monu-, monit-), to advise, warn, remind. Monstr-are (av-, at-), to shoio. Mord-ere (momord-, mors-, 395, IV.), to bite, champ. Mor-i, and mor-Iri (mort-), dep., to die. Mortal -is, is, e, mortal. Mors, (mort) is, 293, death. Mos, (mor) is, 331, 1, b, custom, man- ner. Mot-US, us, motion, moving. Mov-ere (mov-, mot-, 395, V.), to move. Miilier, (mulier) is, (f.), woman. Multitudo, (multitudin) is, 340, mul- titude. Mult-US, a, um, much, many. Mund-us, i, world. Mun-ire (iv-, it), to fortify. Muuitio, (munition) is, 333, "R^., forti- fication. Munus, (muner) is, 344, 3, b, office, gift. ^ Murus, i, wall. Mut-are (av-, at-), to change. N. Nam, con}., for. Nasc-i (nat), dep., to be born, spring from. Nat-are (av-, at-), to swim. Naut-a, ce (m.), sailor. Natio, (nation) is, 333, R., nation. Natur-a, a3, nature. Naval-e, (naval) is, 314, a dock-yard'. Navigatio, (navigatidn) 13, 333, B;., navigation, voyage. Nav-is, (nav) is, 300, ship. Ne, interrogative particle, 135, II., a. Ne, adv., not, used imperatively, 534, a ; conj., that not, 548, b. Nee, conj., nor. -^ Neg-are (av-, at-), to deny, refuse. Neglig-ere (neglex-, neglect-, 666, v., a), to neglect. Negligens, (negligent) is, 107, neg- Negoti-um, i, m,atterf business. Nemo, (nemin) is, c, no one. Neque, conj., neither, nor, 515. Nequidem, adv., not even, 217; al- vs^ays separated by the words which have the emphasis ; e. g., ne Socrates quidem, not even Soc- rates. Nervi-us, i, a Nervian (people of Gaul). Nerv-us, i, a sinew. Nesc-ire (iv-, it-), to be ignorant, not to knoiu (ne+scire). Neuter, tra, trum, 194, 1, neither of the two. Nidific-are (av-, at-), to build a nest (nidus-f-facere). Niger, nigra, nignim, 77, a, black. Nihil, n., indecl., nothing. Nimi-us, a, um, too much. Nit-i (nis- and nix-), dep., to strive. Nisi, conj., unless, if not. Nobilis, is, e, noble, illustrious. Nobilitas, (nobilitat) is, 293, nubil- ity. Noc-ere (nocu-, nocit-), to hurt, with dat. Noctu, adv., by night. Nolle, nolui, to be unwilling, 592. Nomen, (nomin) is, 344, a, name. Non, adv., not. 372 LATtN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. Nonne, interrogative particle (ex- pects answer yes). NonnuUus, a, um, some ; nonnulli, soTne [persons). Nonnunquam, adv., soTnetimes. Non-US, a, um, ninth. Nos, we, 120. Nosc-ere (nov-, not-), to learn, know. Noster, tra, trum, 122, our. Nov-i (gen. of novus), n^ews, 174 (vo- cab.). NOv-i, defective, / know, 611 ; no- visse, to know. Novissimus, a, um (superl. of no- vus), newest, latest ; novissimum agmen, the rear-rank. Novitas, (novitat) is, 293, (novus). Nov-us, a, um, Tiew. Nox, (noct) is, 293, night. Nub-es, (nub) is, 300, cloud. Nud-us, a, um, naked. Nullus, a, um, gen. nuUius, nuUi, 194, 1, no one, none. Num ( interrog. particle (expects the answer no, 174). Numa, ae (m.), Numa. Numer-us, i, number. Nunti-are (av-, at-), to announce. Nunti-us, i, a messenger. Nunquam, adv., never. NaptiaB, arum, 57, B,., a marriage. Nutrix, (nutric) is, 293, nurse. O. Ob (prep, with ace), on account of. Obaeratus, a, um, a debtor. Obscur-are (av-, at-), to obscure. Obsecr-are (av-, at-), to beseech. Obses, (obsid) is (c), hostage. Obstring-6re (obstrinx-, obstrict-), to bind: ob+stringere. Obtin-ere (obtinu-, obtent-), to hold^ mmntain:^ ob+ten6re. Occas-us, us, setting, e. g., of the sun ; occasu solis, sunset, 118, II., c. dat. whether Oi 74). Cjh r Occidens, (Occident) is, m. (sol un- derstood), ^vest. Occid-6re ( occid-, occas-, ob + ca- dere), to fall, set, die. Occid-ere (occid-, occis-, ob + cae- dere), to slay, kill. Occup-are (av-, at-), to seize, take possession of. Oceanus, i, ocean. Octavus, a, um, eighth. Octoginta (indecl.), eighty. Octoni, ae, a, eight each, eight at a time, 197. Ocul-us, i, eye. Odi (defect., 611), I hate; odisse, to hate. Odi-um, i, liaired. OjBPend-ere (offend-, offens-, ob+fen- dere), to offend. Olim, adv., once upon a time, for- merly. Omnino, adv., altogether, in all. Omnis, is, e, all, every, ths whole; omnis res, the whole affair. Onus, (oner) is, 344, b, burden, load. ^^per-a, ae, toil, labour. portet (impers., 583), oportebat, oportuit, it behooves, one might. Oppidan-US, a, um, of or belonging to a town, a toionsman. Oppid-um, i, a town. Opprim-ere (oppress-, oppress-, ob +premere), to repress, crush. Oppugn-are (av-, at-), to atta/ik, be- siege (ob+pugnare). Ops, opis, 293, power ; opes, resour- ces, means. Optim-us, a, um, best [superl. of bonus). Opulens, (opulent) is, 107, rich, opu- lent. Opus, (oper) is, 344, b, work. Oracul-um, i, oracle. Or-are (av-, at-), to pray, beg, beseech. O ratio, (oration) is, 333, R,., oration, speech. LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 373 Orator, (orator) is, 319, orator. Orb-is, (orb) is (m., 302, R.), orb, cir- cle ; orbis terrarum, the world. Ordo, (ordin) is (m., 340, exc), order. Orgetorix, (Orgetorig) is, Orgetorix, a Helvetian chieftain. Origo, (origin) is, 339, origin. Or-iri (ort-), dep., to rise. Om-are (av-, at-), to adorn. Omatus, a, um, adorned, part, of or- nare. . Ostend-dre. ..(ostend-, ostens-, ob+ tendere)> Yo show, Ostent-are (av-, at-), to vaunt. V ^ p. Pabulatio, (pabulation) is, 333, B,., foddering, foraging. Paene, adv., almost. Pag-us, i, village, canton. Palus, (palud) is, 293, marsh. Par-are (av-, at-), to prepare. Parat-us, a, um, prepared, ready (part. pass, of parare). Parc-ere (peperc-, pars- and parcit-, 666, IV., b), to spare, with dot. Par-6re (paru-), with dat., to obey. Pars, (part) is, 293, part. Parsimoni-a, ae, parsimony, frugal- ity. Parv-us, a, um, small, Httle. Pastor, (pastor) is, 319, shepherd. Pater, (patr) is, father ; patres, um, patricians of Rome. Pat-ere (patu), to be open, extend. Pat-i, (pass-), dep., to svffer. Patienter, adv., 215, 2, b, patiently. Patienti-a, se, patience, endurance. Paucitas, (paucitat) is, 2^^, fewness. Pauci, SB, a., few. Paullisper, adv., for a little while. PauUo, adv., a little ; pauUo longius, a little too far. Pauper, (pauper) is, 107, poor. Paupertas, (paupertat) is, 293, pov- erty. Pax, (pac) is, 293, peace. Pecc-are (av-, at-), to sin. Peccat-um, i, sin. Pecuni-a, ae, money. Pedes, (pedit) is, 306, foot-soldier. Pell-6re (pepul-, puis-, 411, b), tQ drive, rout, expel, defeat. Pellis, (pell) is, 300, hide, skin. Pend-6re (pepend-, pens-, 666, IV., a), to weigh, pay. Pene, adv., alrnost. Peninsul-a, ae, peninsula (pene-f in- sula). Per {prep, with accus.), through. Perdives, (perdivit-) is, 107, v&ry rich. Perduc-6re (perdux-, perduct-, per+ ducere), to lead through, bring along. Perfacilis, is, e, very easy. Perferre (pertul-, perlat-, pep+-ferre), to convey, bear through. Perfic-ere (perfec-, perfect-, per-ffa- cere), to accomplish, finish, bring to pass. Perfring-ere (perfreg-, perfract-, per +frangere), to break through. Perfug-a, ae, deserter. Perg-ere (perrex-, perrect-), to go on, go straight, Pericul-um, i, danger. Per-ire (peri-, perit-, per+ire), to ii Peritus, a, um, skilful, skilled in (with gen.). Perm6v-ere (permov-, permot-), to move thoroughly, to induce. Pemici-es, ei, destruction. Perpauci, ae, a, very few, Perpetu-us, a, um, perpetual. Perrump-6re (perrup-, perrupt-, per +rumpere), to break through. Pers-a, ae, a Persian. Persequ-i (persecut-, per+seqm), dep., to follow after, jmrsue. 374 LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. Persever-are (av-, at), to persevere. Persolv-ere (persolv-, persolut-, per +solvere), to pay up, pay in full ; pcenas persolvere, to suffer full Perspic-ere (perspex-, perspect-), to observe, get sight of, see plainly. Persuad-ere (persuas-, persuas-), to persuade, convince. Perterr-ere (pertemi-, perterrit-), to frighten thoroughly. Pertin-ere (pertina-, per+tenere), to reach, belong to, extend to. Pertarb-are (av-, at-), to disturb, con- found. Perven-ire (ven-, vent-), to arrive at, come to. Pes, (ped) is (m., 295, 3), foot ; pe- dem referre, to draw back the foot, to retreat. Pet-ere (petiv-, petit-), to seek, aim at, strive after. Petr-a, as, rock. Phalanx, (phalang) is, 293, phalanx. Pharsalus, i, Pharsalus, a town in Thessaly. Philosoph-ari (at-), dep., to philoso- phize. Piget (impers., 579, a), piguit, it grieves, pains, disgusts ; I am Pil-um, i, javelin. [grieved at. Pisc-is, (pise) is (m., 302, R.),/sA. Pius, a, um, pious. Plac-ere (placii-, placit-), to please (with dat.). Placet (impers., 584, a), placuit, it pleases ; Caesari placuit, Ccesar determined. Placid-US, a, um, calm, placid. Plant-a, ae, plant. Plan-US, a, um, level, plain. Plato, (Platon) is, Plato. Plebs, (pleb) is, 293, common people. Plen-us, a, \m\, full. Plerique, pleroeque, pleraque, most, the greater part. Plerumque, hdy., for the most part, Plum-a, as, featJie?'. Plurim-us, a, um (superl. of multus), most, very many. Plurimum, adv., very much, in the highest degree. Pocul-um, i, cup. Pcen-a, ae, punishment; pcenas per- solvere, pay tJiefull penalty. Poenitet (impers., 579), poenituit, it repents ; me poenitet, / repent. Poet-a, ae (m.), poet, Pompeius, i, Pompey, Pon-ere (posu-, posit-), to placet castra ponere, to pitch the camp: Pons, (pont) is (m., 295, 1), bridge. Popul-ari (at-), dep., to plunder, lay icaste. Popul-us, i, people. Port- a, ae, gate. Port-are (av-, at-), to carry. Port-US, lis, harbour. Portori-um, i, tax, customs duty. Posc-6re (poposc-, 411, a), to demand (admits two accusatives). Posse, potui, to be able, can, 587. Possessio, (possession) is, 333, R., Possid-ere (possed-, possess-), to possess. Post, prep, with ace, after, behind. Postea, adv., afterward. Poster-us$ a, um, after; postero die, on the day after, on the next day. Postquam, adv., after that. Postul-are (avr, at-), to demand. Potens, (potent) is, 107, poioeiful. Potestas, (potestat) is, 293, power. Pot-iri (it-), dep., with gen. or abl., to acquire, get possession of Prae (prep, with abl.), before. Praeb-ere (praebu-, praebit-), to af- ford. Praeced-ere (cess-, cess-), to go be- fore, excel. Preeceps, (prsecipit) is, 107, headlong. LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 375 ProBceptor, (proeceptor) is, a teacher, •preceptor. Praecept-um, i, pi-ecepjt. PraBcip-ere (cep-, cept-, pr3B + ca- pere), to command, enjoin. Praeclar-us, a, una, illustrious. Praeco, (praecon) is, herald. Praed-a, ae, booty, prey. Praed-ari (at-), dep., to plunder, get booty. Praedic-are (av-, at-), to declare. Praedo, (praedon) is, pirate. Praeesse, prrefui, to be over, com- mand (prae.+esse), with dat. Praeferre (tnl-, lat-), to prefer. Praefic-ere (fee-, feet-, prae+facere), to place over. PraBmitt-ere (juis-, miss-), to send be- fore. Prosmi-um, i, reicard. Praemmti-a, or praenuncia, ae, har- binger. Praesertim, adv., especially. Proesidi-um, i, garrison, defence. Praestans, (praestant) is, 107, excel- lent. Praest-are (stit-, stit-), to stand be- fore, excel. Praeter, prep, with ace, besides, ex- cept. Praeter-ire (iv- and i-, it-, praateH- ire, 605, 2), to pass by. Praetor, (praetor) is, apr^ ES6LISH-LATIN J. Javelin, telum, i ; tragnla, ae. Joi7i, jungere (junx-, junct-) ; join together, conjungere. Journey, iter, (itiner) is (n.). Junior, junior, 370. Jupiter, 351. Justy Justus, a, um ; just so many, totidem. Justice, justitia, se. K. Keep, tenere, servare. Kind, benignus, a, um, with dat. : suavis, e, 335. Kindle, excitare. King, rex, (reg) is. Kingdom, regnum, i. Kill, occidere, interficfire, 390. Know, scire, noscfire, 525 ; cognos- c6re : n/)t to know, nescire. Knowledge, scientia, a. Labour (noun), labor, 319 ; (verb), laborare. Lamb, agnus, i. Land, terra ; b^/ land and sea, terra marique. Language, lingua, bs: sermo, 331. Large, m agnus, a, um. Last (to), durare. Latin, Latlnus, a, um. Laugh, ridere ; laughter, risus, us. Law, jus, ( jur) is (n.). Lawful (it is), licet. La7/ aside, deponSre, 406, b. Lay waste, populari (at-), dep. Lead, ducere ( dux-, duct- ) ; lead back, reduc^re ; lead out, edu- cSre ; lead together, conducSre ; lead over or across, transducSre, 113, n. Leader, dxiK, (due) is. Leaf, folium, i. League, foedus, (feeder) is, 344. o:Er Lea^^^tf7¥f^d^i^ Learn, discere,, 4l4 Leave, relinquereT Legion, legio, (legion) is, 333, B. iMter, epistola, sb ; litterae, arum, 58, ]sr. Level, planus, a, um ; aequus, a, um. Levy, conscribere. Lieutenant, legatus, i. Lightning, fulgur, (fulgur) is, 325. Life, vita, as. Like, similis, e, 104 (with dat). Lin^ of battle, acies, ei. Lion, leo, (leon) is. Literature, litterae, arum, 57, IL Little, parvus, a, um. A Live, vivSre. Living -being, animans, (animant) is. Lofty, altus, a, um. Long, longus, a, um ; adv., longe ; a long time, diu. Look at, intueri, dep. Lose, amitt6re, perdfire. Lot, sors, (sort) is, 293. Love (verb), amare, diligfire ; (noxm), amor, 319. Low, humilis, e, 104. Lycurgus, Lycurgus. M. Magnanimous, magnanimus, a, um. Maid-servant, ancilla, ae. Maintain, alere. Make, fac6re, 199; make war, bel- lare ; make war upon, bellum in- ferre, with dat. ; make an attack, impetum facere. Maker, faber, bri. Maltreat, violare. Man, homo, vir. Many, multus, a, um. Marble, marmor, 325. Master (of school), magister, tri ; (of slaves), herus, dominus. Matters (it), interest, refert, 583. 394 ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. Measure, metiri, 206. Medicinej medicina, se. Mediterranean, Mediterraneus, a, um. Meet, ccmvenire. Memory, memoria, ae. Merchant, mercator, 319. Messenger, nuntius, i. /' - Metal, metallum, i. Mid-day, meridies, ei. Middle, medias, a, uin. Migrate, migrare. Mile, millia (passuum), 191, b. Military command, imperium, i. Milk, lac, (lact) is (n.). Mind, mens, (m©nt) i« (f.) ; ani- mus, i. Mine, mens, a, um. Minerva, Minerva, 8B. Miserable, miser, a, um, 77, b. Mitigate, mitigare. Moderation, modus, i. Money, pecunia, cb. Moon, luna, ae. More, plus, pluris ; adv., magifl. Mortalf mortalis, e, 104. Most, plorimus, a, um; most men, plerique, 195. Mountain, mons, (rrwnt) is (m.). Move, movere. Muck, multus, a, um ; muck money, magna pecunia. Multitude, multitude, 339, My, mens, a, um. N. Naked, nudus, a, um. Name, nomen, (nomin) is, 344, a; to name, nominare. Narrow, angustus, a, um. Natio7i, natio, 333, R. ; gens, 293. Nature, natura, 8e. Navigation, navigatio, 333, R. Near, prope, juxta ; nearest to, proac- imus, a, um. Neglect, negligSre. Neighbouring, finitimus, a, um: proximus, a, um. Neitker, conj. — wbl. sing., 6 or i ? (108, R. 1, b.) What nouns belong to 4th decl. ? (110.) — Give the case-endings, masc. (Ill) : neut. (Ill) : quantity of final syllables, 4th decl. (621, R. 1) : fern, nouns of 4th decl. (621, R. 2.) — What nouns take iibus in abl. plur. ? (621, R. 3.)— Decline dSmus, (112, 3.)— What does ddmi mean? (112, 4.)— Rule of syntax for verbs compounded with trans, (113, II., a.) — Is trans ever repeated ? What nouns belong to 5th decl. ? (1 14.)— Case-endings, 5th decl. ? (116.) —When is the e in ei long ? wheo short 7 (116, R.) — What nouns of 5th EXAMINATION aUESTIONS. 403 decl. have plur. complete ? (117, R.) — Time when is put in what case 1 (118, IL, c.) Decline ego, (120.) — What is the adj. personal pron. of 1st pers. sing. ? of 1st pers. plur. 7 (122.) — Give 1st pers. endings, 1st conj., act. indie, pres- ent : imperfect : fut'ure. — Also, pass, present : imperfect : future. (123.)— What case is used with esse to denote the possessor ? (125, IL, a.) — Is cum prefixed or suflBxed to the personal pronouns T (125, IL, b.) What are the 1st person endings, act. and pass., for 2d conj., indie, present 1 imperfect ? future ? (126.)— The same for 3d conj. (127.)— Fourth, (128.) Decline tu, (130.) — ^What are the 2d pers. endings, 1st conj., act. and pass., indie, present ? imperfect 1 future 1 (131.) — The same for 2d conj. (133.) — ^What are the possessive pronouns of 2d pers. ? (134.) — How is n6 used ? (135, IL, a.) — ^Where is causa placed in a sentence ? (135, IL, b.) What are the 2d pers. endings of verbs, 3d conj., act. and pass., indie, pres. 1 imperfect 1 future ? (136.)— The same for 4th conj. (137.) DecUne the reflexive pronoun sui, (142.) — What is the adjective-personal pronoun of 3d pers. ? (143.) — What case does imperare govern ? (147.) Why are demonstrative pronouns sa called? (149.) — Decline is, e a, id, (150.) — Inflect esse, pres., imperf., and fat. indie. (151.) — Distinguish suus and ejus, (153.) — ^What is the demonstrative of the 1st person? (156) : of 2d ? (157) : of 3d ? (158.) Decline qui, (164.)— Syntax of the relative, (167, b.) Decline quis, (170.) — How is the answer yes given? (173.) — What an- swer does num expect ? (175, b.) Name the seven indefinite pronouns, (178.) — How are indef. pronouns used with a genitive ? (180, a.) Name the correlative pronouns, (184.) — Give the Latin for much gold (186, a) : for much money {186, a). — ^Distinguish tan turn and tantus, (186, obs.) Repeat the first twelve numerals in all four classes, (189.) — Give tllQ rule for accus. oitime or space, (191.) Decline nnas, duo, and tres, (194.) — ^WTiat words are declined like anus ? (194, R. 1.) — ^Is the penult of unius long or short? 404 EXAMINATION aUESTlONS. Inflect cap ere in pros., imperf., and fat indie. (199.) "What are deponent verbs ? (206.") — How are they conjugated ? (Ans., like passives.) How do you form derivative adverbs from adjectives of Class I. ? (215, 1) : of Class II. ? (215, 2.) — What is the general position of the adverb in a sentence ? (218, a.) — Where is fere placed ? (218, b.) — How is ne gui- de mused? (218, c.) What prepositions govern the accus. or ablat. ? (223.) — Give the rule of apposition, (225, a.) Give the person-endings, pres. indie, act. : tense-stem : connecting- vowel : Istconj.: 2d: 3d: 4th, (234.) Imperfect tense, person-endings : tense-stem, four conj's. : connecting- vowel, (237.) — Future tense, 1st and 2d conj., person-endings : tense- stems : connecting-vowels (238) : 3d and 4th conj., fut, person-ending : tense-stem: connecting-vowel, (240.) Passive-endings, (243.) — Apparent irregularities, viz., 1st pers. pres. indie. : 3d conj., 2d pers. sing. pres. : 1st and 2d conj., fut., 2d pers. sing. (244.) Rules of Quantity. — Monosyllables ending in a vowel (247, a.) : excep- tions. — Monosyllables ending in a consonant: exceptions, (247, b.) — auantity of a final (248) : e final (249) : of i final (250) : of o final (251) : of u final, (252.) — Final syllables ending in a consonant, (253.) — Final as, es, OS : exceptions, (254.) — Final is and us : exceptions, (255.) — Increase of nouns (257) : of verbs, (258.) — Penults of perf. tense, (259.) — Adjectives in idus, icus : in inus : in ilis, bills, (260.) What are the tenses for action completed ? (262) : their endings ? (263.) — Give the perf., pluperf, and fut. perf. of esse, (264.) — Distinguish perf. pres. from perf. aorist, (265.) — ^What case do the compounds of esse with prepositions govern ? (267, b.) How is perf stem formed in most verbs of 1st conj. ? of 2d ? of 4th 1 (270.) — Give perf. of amare, monfire, audire, (271.) How is perf. stem formed of most verbs of 3d conj. ? (276.) — Euphonic rules : (1) k-sound before s : (2) b before s : (3) t-sound before s, (277.) — What answer does nonne expect? (280.) — How is the pluperf formed? the fut. perf. ? (283.) EXAMINATION aUESTIONS. 405 Name the six classes of nouns of 3d decl. (291.) — Euphonic rules, (292.) — How do you express "on the top of the mountain^' in Latin ? (297.) Decline Jupiter : Bos: Respublica: Jusjurandum, (351.) Repeat the rules of gender, 3d decl., from nominative formation, with the exceptions xmder each, (355.) Comparison of Adjectives. — ^What is the compar. ending ? (357.) — If the stem ends in a vowel, how is the compar. formed ? (357, R.) — Syntax of compar., when quam is omitted, (360, c.) Superl. ending, (363.) — Stems in er add what ending? (364.) — Stems in 1, what ending ? (365.) — What case is used with superlatives ? (367, b.) Compare bonus, malus, magnus, multus, parvus, senex, juve- iiis, exterus, inferus, superus, posterus, (370.) — Comp. dives, benevolus. Are adverbs compared ? — How ? (376.) What is the supine ? (377.) — ^Form supine-stem, 1st conj. : 2d : 3d : 4th, (378.) — How is supine in um used ? (379.) — How is supine in u used ? (380.) — Name the supines in u which are in common use, (381.) — ^What case answers the question whither 1 (383.) What are the _/(>Mr ways of forming perf. stem, 1st conj.? (387.) — How many verbs does each class contain ? (387.) — How do you form perf., pluperf.; or fut. perf. of these verbs ? (388.) What are the jive ways of forming the perf. stem, 2d conj. ? (394.) — How many verbs does each class contain ? (395.) — ^What rules of euphony are to be applied here ? (395, III., a, h, c.) Name the six ways of forming the perf. stem, 3d conj. (400.) — ^What rules of euphony are to be applied in forming perf. stems of verbs of 1st class ? (401, 1, &c.) How do verbs of 2d class form perf. stem ? (406) : verbs of 3d class ? — In what sense is ad often used by CaBsar? (408, c.) How do verbs of 4th class form perf. stem ? (411.) — What vowel chan- ges must be observed here ? (411, a, h, c.) — Give the rule for verbs of de- manding (413, 1): for verbs of sparing (413, 4.) — ^What is the perf. of cdd6r6? ofcaedgrg? (413,1^'.) Mm 406 EXAMINATION aUESTIONS. How do verbs of 5th class form perf stem ? (416.) — Form the perf. Items of the io verbs in (416, c). — What is said of the prcKnomen 1 (418, c.) How do verbs of 6th class form perf. stem ? (421.)— What cases are nsed after distribuere ? (423, c.) What are the Jive ways of forming- the perf. stem in 4th conj.? (426.) — How many verbs does each class contain ? (427.) — How is the mamier of an action expressed in Latin ? (428, a.) How are the passive tenses for completed action formed ? (431.) — How is the perf. part, formed ? (432, ^.)— How is it inflected ? (432, «.)— Inflect the perf, pluperf., and fut. perf. pass, of a mar 6, (433.) — How is the perf. pass. part, sometimes used with est? (435, c.) How many participles are there in Latin, act. and pass. ? (438.) — Give the endings of the present part. act. in the four conjugations, (439, a.) — How is it declined? (440i^Has the Latin any active part, to express complete action? (None, excepting in deponent verbs, 440, a, b.) — What is the use of the part, in discourse ? (442, c.) — Give the words in which cannot stand first in a clause or sentence, (442, c.) How is the fut. part. act. formed ? (445.) — Inflect the periphrastic pres., past, and fut. of am a r 6, (446.) — Give the rule for the use of die fut. part, with verbs of motion, (448.) How is the perf. pass. part, formed ? (451, a.) — How is it inflected ? (451, b.) — How do deponent verbs use the perf. part, form ? (451, c.) — What is the case of the place where ? (453, a) : of the place whence ? (453, b) : of the place whither ? (453, c.) When is the part, used in the ablative with a noun ? (456.) — How is the want of a perf. act. part, suppHed in Latin? (457.) — Can a noun bo used in the ablative absolute with another noun ? (Yes : 458.) How does the infin. express action ? (465.) — Give the iufin. forms, act. and pass., in all the conjugations, (466.) — Give the rule for the comple- mentary infin. (468, a.) Name the classes of verbs which take after them the accus. and infin. (471.) — Give the method of changing English sentences commencing with that into the Latin accus. and infin. (472, 1, 2, 3.) Give the formation of the perf infin. pass. (478.) — When the accus. is used with this infin., with what does its part, agree ? (478.) How is the infin. fut. act. formed ? (482) : the infin. fat. pass. ? (483.) EXAMINATION aUESTIONS. 407 Under what form does the gerund express the action of the verb ? (487, a.) — How is the gerund-stem formed ? (487, b.) — How the cases of the ge- rund ? (487, c.) — What rules apply to the cases of the infin. and gerund ? (489.) — Is the infin. or the accus. ger. used with a preposition ? (489, R.) — What case does the ger. govern ? (490.) How does the gerundive express the action of a verb ? (495, a.) — How are its cases formed ? (495, b.) — How is it used ? (496.) — When must the gerundive be used instead of the gerund ? — When may it be so used ? (496, R.) — After what verbs does the gerundive express a pm-pose or ob- ject ? (498, 11^=.) What does the gerandive in the nom. neut. with esse express ? (501, a.) — What does it express when used with esse as a verbal adjective ? (502.) — What is the case of the person in both these constructions ? (The dative.) How does imper. mood express tiie action of the verb ? (507.) — What is not with the imper. ? (510, Rule.) When is a sentence compound? (513, a.) — Give an example of a prin- cipal sentence : of a subordinate sentence, (513, c.) — ^Give some of the clajsses of subordinate sentences, (514, a, &c.) Repeat the copulative conjunctions, (515.)— How are et and que used? (517, a): ac ? (517, b.) — What does et followed by another et mean? (517, c.) — What is the Latin for again and again ? for not only — but also ? (517, d.) Name the disjunctive conjunctions, (519.) — WTiat does aut indicate ? vel? (519, R. 1 and 2.)— How is ve used? (519, R. 3.)— What do these conj. mean when repeated ? (519, R. 4.) — Give the adversatives, (520.)— What does sed express ? (522, a): aut em? (522, b.) How does the subjunc. mood express affirmation ? (524.) — Inflect subjunc. pres. of esse, (525.) — Inflect subjunc. pres. act. and pass, of amarS, m6ner6, r6ggre, audire, (526, b.) — How may a wish be expressed in Latin ? (528, a.) — How may a softened command be expressed ? (528, b.) — How do you express a direct question when doubt is implied ? (528, c.) Inflect subjunc. perf. of e s s e, (531.) — How do regular verbs form subjunc. perf act. ? (532, 1) : subjunc. perf pass. ? (532, 2.) — Inflect the subjunc. perf. act. and pass, of amarg, monere, r6g6r6, audire, (532, 3.) — How is the subjunc. perf used imperatively ? (534, a.) — How may a supposed case be expressed ? (534, b.) — How may a softened assertion be express- ed ? (534, c.) — What interrogative sentences take the subjtmc. ? (534, e.) 408 EXAMINATION aUESTIONS. How is the subjunc. imperf. formed ? (537.) — Repeat the paradigm (538.) — How is the subjunc. pluperf. act. and pass, formed ? (539, a and ^.) — Give the paradigm, (539, c.) — Repeat the conditional conjunctions, (540, tf.) — What is a conditional sentence ? (540, h) — In conditional sentences how do you express a real condition ? a possible condition ? an unreal or impossible in present time ? an unreal or impossible condition in past time ? (542, b, Rule.) — Can the perf. or pluperf. indie, ever be used with si? (No.) Inflect posse in subjunc. pres. : imperf. : perf. : pluperf (545.) — State the composition of posse. — Repeat the final conjunctions, (546.) — How is purpose or aim expressed in English ? how in Latin ? (548, a.) — How is an object to be provided against introduced in English? how in Latin ? (548, 0.) — Can a purpose or aim be expressed in Latin by an infin. ? (No.) Give the primary tenses of the Latin verb : the historical, (551, 2, a, h.) — "What is the rule for the succession of tenses ? (551, 3.) — How is a result expressed in English? how in Latin? (553, a.) — ^What is the rule for ut signifying that 1 (553, b) How is the want of a fut. subjunc. supplied in Latin ? (556.) — Give the paradigm, periph. conj. subjunc. (556.) — When does quo express a pur- pose instead of ut ? (558, «.) — In what sense is quin used ? (l) after neg- ative sentences? (2) after non dubito, &c. ? (558,^.) — When is quo- minus used in preference to ne ? (558, c.) W^hat are the two uses of quum ? (561.) — W^hat is the first use called ? the second? (561.) — ^When is quum followed by the indie? (563, a) — When is quum temporal followed by the imperf. or pluperf subjunc? (563, &.)— What is the rule for quum causal ? (563, c.) When is the rel. pronoun followed by the subjunc. ? (566.) — Give the rule for the use of subjunc. in a rel. sentence, (568, d) — Is the rel. to ex- press a purpose very common in Caesar? (Yes.) In what two ways may we relate the words of another ? (571.) — What is each method called ? (571.) — What kinds of sentences are introduced in oratio obliqua? (Either principal or subordinate.) — What mood is used in principal sentences in oratio obliqua? (574, a) : in subordinate sentences ? (574, i.) What are impersonal verbs ? (577.) — Give the classes of impersonals, (578.) — What impersonals are followed by the accus. of the person and the gen. of the cause ? (579, a) EXAMINATION aUESTIONS. 409 Give the rule for oportet and decet (584, a) : for placet (584, b) 4 for licet and libet (584, c) : for interest and refert (584, d). State the composition of possum, and repeat the paradigm, (587.) Give the composition of nolo and malo, and repeat the paradigms (592.) — Give the three rules for velle, nolle, and malle, in (594). Repeat the paradigm of irregular forms of ferre, (596.) — How are the remaining tenses formed? (596, b.) — What is the meaning of fgrunt? (598, b.) Of what verb does fieri form the pass.? (600.) — How are the tenses formed ? (600.) — Give the paradigm. — What is the quantity of i in fieri ? (600, R.) — ^What forms of edere are similar to those of esse ? (601.) — Give the paradigm. — ^What is the quantity of e s, from esse? of e s, from edere? (601, R.) What conjugation does ire follow ? (605.) — Give the paradigm. — ^What is said of the compounds ? (605, 1, 2.) — How are queo and nequeo con- jugated ? (606.) Inflect aio (609) : inquam (610) : novi (611). — How do you distinguish between the use of aio and of inquam ? (613, b, ^T-) — What form of c 03 pi is used with a pass, iniin. ? (613, c, i^^.) Mm2 THE END PROF. M'CLmrOCK AND OROOES'S SERIES OP ELEMENTARY GREEK AND LATIN BOOKS, IN COURSE OF PUBLICATION BY HARPER & BROTHERS, NEW YORK. DESIGNED FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. I. A FIRST BOOK IN LATIN. Containing Grammar, Exercises, and Vocabularies, on the Method of constant Imitation and Repetition. 12mo, Sheep extra. 75 cents. {Now ready.) This work contains a series of lessons on the method of Ollendorff, through which the student is gradually introduced to a knowledge of Inflection, as well as to readi- ness in reading and writing Latin. It also contains a clear outline of Etymology and Syntax, with Reading Lessons from Caesar ; thus furnishing every thing that a pupil will need before commencing the regular reading of the classic authors. II. ASECOND BOOK IN LATIN. Containing a complete Latin Syntax, with copious Exercises for Im- itation and Repetition, and Loci Memoriales selected from Cicero. III. PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO LATIN STYLE. Principally Translated from the German of Grysar, with Exer- cises in writing Latin on Ciceronian Models. (Nearly ready.) ' This work will supply a want which has long been felt in our high-schools and IV. ELEMENTARY GREEK GRAMMAR. Containing full Vocabularies, Lessons on the Forms of Words, and Exercises for Imitation and Repetition, with a Summary of Ety- mology and Syntax. V. SECOND BOOK IN GREEK. Containing a complete Greek Syntax, on the Basis of Kiihner, with Exercises for Imitation on Models drawn from Xenophon's Anaba- sis. Testimonials to the First Book in Latin, Although this work has been but a few weeks before the public, a second edition is already demanded. In this edition a number of errors in quantity, &c., which had crept into the first, are corrected, and a series of Examination Questions appended. The publishers offer it to the public, in its improved form, as one of the very best, and certainly the cheapest elementary Latin book published in the country. The following are selected from a number of notices and testimonials already received : I am satisfied that it is the best book for beginners in Latin that is published in this country. — Dr. J. P. Durhin^ Philadelphia. I have carefully examined the " First Book in Latin" of Prof. M'Clintock and Crooks : from my knowledge of the thorough scholarship of the authors, I was pre_par- ed to expect a good book ; but the result of their labor has far surpassed my expecta- tion. While the system upon which the work is framed is that which nature sug^- gests and common sense approves, the arrangement appears to be perfect, and the views of the authors at once philosophical and practical. I am confident that no teacher who studies the success of his pupils will adopt any other text-book than this in the beginning of a course in Latjii,~Rev. W. H. Gilder, Belltvue, N. J. Testimonials to the First Book in Latin, -ry I cheerfully bear testimony to the excellence of the " First Booh in Latin ;" it is a work of prodigious labor and wonderful skill. As the first of a series, it gives prom- ise of valuable aid to the teacher of ancient languages. — Rev. J. H. Dashiell, Balti- more Institute. The book is not likely to please lazy teachers, for it will make them work as hard as their pupils : but we doubt not that it will be extensively used by that class of teachers who prize the progress of the youth committed to their charge more than their own ease. — Tribune. This " First Book in Latin" combines all the advantages of recently-improved methods, and contains many features, somewhat out of the ordinary course, it is true, but decided improvements, as we think every teacher will find who will give the work a careful examination. A more philosophical, thorough, and practical system of teaching Latin we have never seen. — Professor Salkeld, Naugatuck, Connecticut. The authors have evidently studied the genius of the language, and have called to their aid the best preparatory works used in England and on the Continent, and the result of their labors is a work that will bear a favorable comparison with any elementary book that we have examined, while it possesses many decided advantages,' among which are the more systematic arrangement of the matter, the early introduc- tion of the simple rules of quantity, and the great care in marking the quantity of all syllables that do not come under these rules ; the more frequent repetition in the exercises of the same words and principles by which they are firmly fixed in the mind of the pupil, and the avoidance of "all exercises to be rendered from English into Latin that are not within- the capacity of any student of ordinary industry who studies the book in order." If it receives the patronage that it deserves, we think the wishes of both authors and publishers will be met. — Christian Adv. and Journal. Great advances have been made of late years in the methods of teaching modern languages, and the books of Manesca, Ollendorff, Girault, and others, in which the natural method of combining practice with theory is employed, are fast superseding all others. In the book before us this method is applied to Latin with great skill and success. The grammatical part of the work is very complete, although condensed into a wonderfully short compass. As reading lessons and vocabularies are furnished, the pupil will need no other book than this until he begins to read Caesar or Virgil. — ■ Philadelphia Inquirer. Among many other advantages, it contains precisely such remarks and explanations as a student wishes to have in the early part of his course, but which, in common grammars, are strangely omitted. — James A. Devinny, High School, Carlisle, Penn. The execution of the work is scholar-like in a high degree. Boys who commence Latin with this book will not only be saved many painful hours, but will have a re- ally scientific induction to the Latin tongue. We anticipate its extensive introduc- tion into classical schools. — Philadelphia Saturday Courier. An elementary book constructed on Ollendorfi^s principle, with great ingenuity and success. It abounds in admirable exercises for writing and speaking the language, and in this most useful particular surpasses any work we are acquainted with.— iVcw York Evangelist. Of its execution we could speak in the highest terms. We venture little in pre- dicting that most teachers who examine this volume will pronounce it the best of primary text-books in Latin with which our schools are overwhelmed. We commend it to the immediate attention of teachers. — Zion^s Herald, Boston. We have examined this work with great satisfaction. As an aid to the teacher and a help to the pupil, it seems to supply the inadequacy of all former books in our language on the subject. It is perfectly inductive, and by constant repetition and combination of sentences, the learner progresses almost without knowing it. It re- lieves the study of Latin from that irksomeness which too often makes it distasteful to the young pupil, and gives a good foundation as he progresses. The work, we think, will find ready access to all our elementary schools. — Philadelphia North American. From what we know of the efficiency of this method, we are led to believe that the pupil who will make the " First Book in Latin" his guide, instead of spending years, as is commonly the case, before he is able to give a tolerable translation of sim- ple sentences, will be able, in much less time, to read almost any classical author with ease, and even to express his own thoughts in good Latin. We shall be glad to see the series completed, as we are sure it must do much to hasten that brighter era of classical literature which is already dawning.— iVa/ionaZ Intelligencer. VALUABLE SCHOOL CLASSICS RECENTLY PUBLISHED BY HARPER AND BROTHERS. NEW YORK. tCLECTIC MORAL PHILOSOPHY. By Rev. J. R. Boyd, A.M. 12mo, $1 00. ELEMENTS OF RHETORIC AND LITERARY CRITICISM. On the Basis of the recent Works of Reid and Conaell : with, other i^dditionj By J. R. Boyd, A.M. 18mo, half bound, 50 cents. LETTERS ON ASTRONOMY. By Denison Olmsted, LL.D. 12nio, 75 cents. THE USEFUL ARTS, Considered in connection with the Application of Science. Bj J. BlGELOW,M D 2 vols. 12mo, $1 50. LOOMIS'S TREATISE ON ALGEBRA. 8vo, Sheep, $1 25. CLARK'S ELEMENTS OF ALGEBRA. 8vo, Sheep extra, $1 00. HACKLEYS TREATISE ON ALGEBRA. Containing the latest improvements. 8vo, Sheep extra, $1 5CL PROF. SALKELD'S FIRST BOOK IN SPANISH. (In press.y ^ PROF. SALKELD'S CLASSICAL ANTIQUITIES. 1 vol. 12mo, 37i cents. M'CLINTOCK AND CROOKS'S FIRST BOOK IN LATIN. 12nio, Sheep extra, 75 cents. TREATISE ON ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. By John William Draper, M.D. Engravings. 4to, Muslin gilt, $2 50 TEXT-BOOK ON CHEMISTRY. By John W. Draper, M.D. Nearly 300 Engravings. 12mo, Sheep, 75 cent* KANE'S ELEMENTS OF CHEMISTRY. Edited by John W. Draper, M.D. 250 Plates. Bvo, Muslin, $2 00. FIRST PRINCIPLES OF NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. By James Renwigk, LL.D. Engravings. 18mo, 75 cents. FIRST PRINCIPLES OF CHEMISTRY. By James Renwigk, LL.D Engravings. 18mo, 75 cents. PRACTICAL MECHANICS. By James Renwigk, LL.D. Engravings. 18rao, half Sheep, 90 cents. LOGIC, RATIOCINATIVE AND INDUCTIVE. By J. Stuart Mill. 8vo, Muslin gilt, $2 00. AIDS TO ENGLISH COMPOSITION. By Richard Green Parker, A.M. 18mo, Muslin, 80 cents ; Sheep extra, 90 cm NEW PICTORIAL SCHOOL GEOGRAPHY. By Sidney E. Morse, A.M. Embellished by nearly One Hundred and Fifty Ei^ gravings, and about Fifty Cerographic Maps, in Colors. Price 50 cents. PLATO AGAINST THE ATHEISTS. By Tayler Lewis, LL.D. 12mo, Muslin gilt, $1 50. THE PRACTICAL ASTRONOMER. By Thomas Digk, LL.D. Illustrated with One Hundred Engravings. 12mo Muslin gilt, 50 cents. ELEMENTS OF MORALITY, including Polity. By William Whewell, D.D. 2 vols. 12mo, Muslin gilt, $1 00. THE CAPTIVES, A COMEDY OF PLAUTUS. With English Notes, for the Use of Students. By John Proudfit, D.D ISja, 37^ cents. A CLASSICAL DICTIONARY. By Charles Anthon, LL.D. Royal 8vo, Sheep, $4 75. A DICTIONARY OF GREEK AND ROMAN ANTIQUITIES ■ Edited by W. Smith, Ph.D. First American edition, corrected and emargea err Charles Anthon, LL D. Svo, Sheep, $4 75. Classical Works published hy Harper ^ Brothers, DICTIONARY OF ANTIQUITIES, ABRIDGED. With Corrections and Improvements, by Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, hall Sheep, %\ 25. NEW GREEK AND ENGLISH LEXICON. By Henry Drisler, A.M., under the Supervision of Prof. Anthon. 8vo, $5 00. A GRAMMAR OF THE LATIN LANGUAGE. By C. G. ZuMPT, Ph.D. Corrected and enlarged by Charles Anthon, LL.D. I2mo, Sheep extra, 90 cents. THE ECLOGUES AND GEORGICS OF VIRGIL. With English Notes, critical and explanatory. By Charles Anthon, LL D 12rao, Sheep extra, $1 50. THE ANABASIS OF XENOPHON. With English Notes, critical and explanatory. By Charles Anthon, LL.D 12mo, Sheep extra. (In press.) GREEK READER. Principally from Jacobs. Edited by Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra, $1 75. C/ESAR'S COMMENTARIES ON THE GALLIC WAR. Edited by CHARLES Anthon, LL.D. Map, Portrait, &c. 12mo, Siieep extra, $1 40. SYSTEM OF LATIN VERSIFICATION. By Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra, 90 cents. THE /ENEID OF VIRGIL. Edited by Charles Anthon, LL.D. Portrait and many Dlustratiotts. i2iius Sheep extra, $2 00, THE WORKS OF HORACE. Edited by Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra, $1 75. LATIN GRAMMAR, PART I. By Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra, 90 cents. LATIN GRAMMAR, PART II. By Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra, 90 cents. SYSTEM OF LATIN PROSODY AND METRE. By Charles Anthon, LL.D 12mo, Sheep extra, 90 cents. SELECT ORATIONS OF CICERO. Edited by Charles Anthon, LL.D. Portrait, 12mo, Sheep extra, $1 20 SALLUST'S JUGURTHINE WAR AND CONSPIRACY OF CATI- LINE. Edited by Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra, 87^ cent* GREEK LESSONS, PART I. By Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12roo, Sheep extra, 90 cents. GREEK LESSONS, PART II. By Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra, 90 cents. SYSTEM OF GREEK PROSODY AND METRE. By Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra, 90 cents. HOMER'S ILIAD. Edited by Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra, $1 50 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. By Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra, 90 cents. <^EW GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, From the German of Kiihner, Matthias, Buttmann, Rost, and Thiersch. Bj Chas Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra, 90 cents. FAMILY CLASSICAL LIBRARY, Comprising Translations of the best Classics. 36 vols. ISmo, Maslin gilt, 45 cent* each. ELEMENTS OF MENTAL PHILOSOPHY. By Professor Thomas C. Upham. 2 vols. 12mo, Sheep extra, $2 50. The same Work abridged. 13mo, Sheep extra, $1 25. A PHILOSOPHICAL AND PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE WILL. By Professor Thomas C. Upham 12ii»^ Sheep extra, $1 25. ^axptx's NetD Catalogue. A NEW Descriptive Catalogue of Harper & Brothers' Pub- lications is now ready for distribution, and may be obtained gra- tuitously on application to the Publishers personally, or by letter, post-paid. The attention of gentlemen, in town or country, designing to form Libraries or enrich their literary collections, is respectfully invited to this Catalogue, which will be found to comprise a large proportion of the standard and most esteemed works in English Literature — comprehending about two thousand volumes — which are offered in most instances at less than one half the cost of sim- ilar productions in England. To Librarians and others connected with Colleges, Schools, etc., who may not have access to a reliable guide in forming the true estimate of literary productions, it is believed the present Catalogue will prove especially valuable as a manual of reference. To prevent disappointment, it is suggested that, whenever books can not be obtained through any bookseller or local agent, applica- tions with remittance should be addressed direct to the Publishers, vhich will be promptly attended to. 83 Cliff Street, New Yorh Nao., 1847. M YB 00417